Code of Practice On The Design and Construction of Lifts and Escalators

Code of Practice on the Design and Construction
EMSD @
CODE OF PRACTICE
ON THE
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
LIFTS AND ESCALATORS
Electrical and Mechanical Services Department

The Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region
2012 Edition
Foreword
The Lifts and Escalators Ordinance (Cap. 618) (the Ordinance) was introduced with an aim
to enhance the regulatory control over the safety of lifts and escalators. This new code of
practice sets out technical details, methods and procedures and safety rules for
compliance with the requirements of the Ordinance on the design and construction of a
lift and an escalator, or any associated equipment or machinery of a lift or an escalator.
This new code of practice, namely the Code of Practice on the Design and Construction
of Lifts and Escalators (the Design Code), is mainly for the reference of trade practitioners.
The Design Code is issued by the Director of the Electrical and Mechanical Services (the
Director) under the provisions of the Ordinance. In drafting the provisions under the
Design Code, the Director has consulted the trade on the proposed contents of the
Design Code.
Throughout this Design Code, we have made reference to the relevant safety standards of
the European Standards Institution. However, if there are some other national,
international standards or provisions which are equivalent, they would be acceptable as
alternatives. This Design Code is based on EN 81-1, EN81-2 and EN 115-1. Relevant parts
of these standards are adopted in the Design Code with the permission of European
Committee for Standardization (CEN). Copies of the standards can be obtained from the
CEN.
The Design Code is originated from the 1993 edition of the Code of Practice on the
Design and Construction of Lifts and Escalators issued under the provisions of the Lifts and
Escalators (Safety) Ordinance (Cap. 327). To cope with technological advancements and
prevalent trade practices, various amendments were made and revised editions were
issued in2000 and 2010. The amendment history identifying the revised sections and
their effective dates is tabulated in Appendix I of the Design Code to provide reference
for the trade.
The Design Code will be effective upon the day on which section 157 of the Ordinance
comes into operation. The Director will by notice published in the Gazette specify the
date on which the Design Code is to take effect.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGES
Foreword i
Section A.General Introduction to the Code of Practice 1
Section B. References 5
Section C. Definitions 7
Section D. Symbols and Abbreviations 16
Section E. Specifications 20
Part 1: Specification for Electric Lifts 20
Part 2: Specification for Hydraulic Lifts 109
Part 3: Specification for Service Lifts 164
Part 4: Specification for Escalators 199
Part 5: Specification for Stairlifts 260
Part 6: Specification for Powered Vertical Lifting Platforms 291
Section F. Special Requirements for Fireman's Lifts 347
Appendix IAmendment History
Section A
Section A. General Introduction to the Code of Practice

The Code of Practice defines technical details, methods and procedures related t o lifts
and escalators with a view to safeguarding persons and objects against the risk of
accidents associated with the operation, installation, and alterations of lifts and escalators.
1. Scope and Field of Application

The Code, unless the Director of Electrical & Mechanical Services (the Director)
provides otherwise, is applicable t o all lifts and escalators subject t o the Lifts and
Escalators Ordinance (the Ordinance).
The Code is divided into six sections: Section A on General Introduction, Section B
on References listing the referencing material available to better understand the
Code, Section C on Definitions giving the interpretation of certain terms used in the
Code, Section D on Symbols and Abbreviations, Section E on Specifications, and
Section F on Fireman's Lifts.
Section E on Specifications is further divided into five parts where:
Part 1 deals with the technical details of electric lifts, where the car is suspended by
ropes or chains.
Part 2 deals with the hydraulic lifts, defined in Section C, driven hydraulically, where
the car is directly or indirectly driven by the action of one or more hydraulic single
acting jacks and whereby the down movement, even with the empty car, takes
place by the influence of gravity. This Part covers the safety requirements for
hydraulic lifts, with rated speed Vs up t o 1.0 mls. For lifts with higher rated speed
Vs additional requirements shall be applied as appropriate in order t o maintain the
same level of safety.
For lifts with double acting jacks or for traction drive or positive drive lifts driven by
a hydraulic motor, Part 1 andlor 2 of this Code shall be used by analogy according
to the technical characteristics of the installation.
Part 3 deals with electrically driven service lifts defined in the Ordinance.
Part 4 deals with escalator defined in the Ordinance, which include pallet type and
belt type passenger conveyors.
Part 5 deals with stairlifts
New lifts and escalators and any major alteration works tendered on or after the
effective date of the Code shall comply with Parts 1 to 4 of Section E of the Code.
Existing lifts and escalators installed before that date shall preferably be upgraded
t o comply with this Code or at least continue to comply with BS5655, BS5656 or
BS2655 where appropriate.
Compliance with the Code is deemed t o have satisfied the relevant requirements of
-1-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights resewed.
Section A
the Lifts and Escalators Ordinance.
General Technical Rules

The Code does not repeat all the general technical rules applicable to every
electrical or mechanical construction. It is assumed that all components shall :
(a) be promptly dimensioned and correctly designed, be of sound mechanical

and electrical construction, be made of materials with adequate strength and
of suitable quality and be free of defects;
(b) be kept in good repair and working order. It will in particular be ensured that
the dimensional requirements remain fulfilled despite wear.
Guidance on Fire Protection, Environment and Building Requirements

The Code does not give rules relating to the protection against fire of building
elements. Fire resistance requirements are made under the Code of Practice for Fire
Resisting Construction issued by the Building Authority. However, as far as possible,
lifts and escalators shall be made of materials that are not easy t o ignite. If lifts and
escalators have t o be operated under special conditions, such as directly exposed to
the weather or explosive atmosphere, appropriate design criteria, components,
materials and instructions for use shall be employed to satisfy the particular
conditions. In the case where lifts and escalators would be exposed to weather
conditions, a suitable roof and enclosure shall be provided.
The Code does not give rules relating to building works for lifts and escalators.
Such requirements are made under the Code of Practice on Building Works for Lifts
and Escalators issued by the Building Authority.
Requirements of Good Construction

Certain requirements of good construction are established, either because they are
peculiar to lift or escalator manufacture or because in the case of lift or escalator
utilization, the requirements may be more stringent than elsewhere.
Requirements on Life of Equipment

As far as possible the Code sets out only the requirements on materials and
equipment in the interests of safety. Requirements related t o the life of the lifts and
escalators are not included in the Code as it depends on the place of installation, its
usage and customers' special specifications.
New Developments of Lifts and Escalators

When mention is made of a design or of a procedure for the sake of clarity, this
should not be considered t o be the only possible design or procedure; any other
solution leading to the same result can be applied if it is in the opinion of the
-2-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights resewed.
Section A
Director, equivalent in operation and at least equally safe. It is therefore not the
purpose of the Code to preclude new developments of lifts and escalators from
becoming incorporated, provided they satisfy the safety requirements of this Code.
In this connection, the manufacturer shall demonstrate how the new developments
can satisfy the requirements of the Code. Early consultation with the Director is
preferable.
7. Safeguarding of Persons and Objects from Various Possible Accidents

The Code intends to safeguard persons (passengers, workers, other persons outside
the lift well and machine room), and objects (loads in car or on escalator,
components of the lift or escalator and the building in which the lift or escalator is
installed) from various possible types of accidents due to shearing, crushing, falling,
impact, trapping, fire, electric shock, material damage, wear and corrosion.
Passengers have to be specially protected and have been taken into account.
(a) The passengers have to be safeguarded against their own negligence and
unwitting carelessness;
(b) The passengers can have imprudent act, which have t o be considered, with
limitations, and that the possibility of t w o simultaneous acts of this nature or
the abuse of instructions for use has not been considered.
8. Special Applications of Lifts and Escalators

There are special applications of lifts and escalators.
(a) There are service lifts, the car of which is, by definition, not accessible t o
persons, for which certain rules may be less severe or even waived, and this is
set out in Part 3 of Section E;
(b) There are observation lifts, vehicle lifts and freight lifts loaded by industrial
trucks. In these cases some additional requirements have t o be fulfilled. These
requirements are specifically raised in Parts 1 and 2 of Section E.
(c) There are certain escalators which are subject to special operational
conditions. In these cases some additional requirements have to be fulfilled,
marked in Part 4 of Section E with the note 'for public service escalators'.
Such operational conditions generally exist on escalators when all the
following conditions apply :
(i) they are part of a public traffic system including entrance and exit points
(for example escalators connecting a traffic station and a premise); and
(ii) they are suitable for regularly operating for approximately 140
hourslweek with a load reaching 100% of the brake load (see Part 4 of
Section E) during periods lasting for at least 0.5 hour during any time
interval of 3 hours.
During the planning stage it should be specified if it will be a public
0 -3-
Section A
service escalator.
(d) Deleted,
(e) The design and construction of any lift for persons with a disability (whether
provided in accordance with regulation 72 of the Building (Planning)
Regulations (Chapter 123) or not) shall also comply with the requirements
provided for in item 14 in Part I of the Third Schedule to the Building
(Planning) Regulations, in addition to those specified in Parts 1 and 2 of
Section E of the Code.
-4-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights reserved
Section B
Section B. References
References may be made t o the following publications for better applying and
understanding of the requirements of the Code.
a) Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations issued under the Electricity
Ordinance
b) Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction issued by the Building Authority
c) Code of Practice on Building Works for Lifts and Escalators issued by the Building
Authority
d) BS228 Specification for short pitch transmission precision roller chains and
chainwheels (IS0 606)
e) BS302 Stranded steel wire ropes
f) BS1363 Specification for 13 A fused plugs and switched and unswitched socket-
outlets
g) 854687 Specification for extended pitch precision roller chains and chain wheels
(IS0 1275)
h) BS4794 Specification for control switches (IEC 337)
i) BS5420 Specification for degrees of protection of enclosures of switchgear and

controlgear for voltages up to and including 1000 V a.c. and 1200 V d.c.
(IEC 144)
j) BS5424 Specification for control gear for voltages up to and including 1000 V a.c.
and 1200 V d.c. (IEC 158)
k) BS5486 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies (IEC 439)
I) BS5490 Specification for classification of degrees of protection provided by

enclosures (IEC 529)
m)BS5594 Specification for leaf chains, clevises and sheaves (IS0 4347)
n) BS5655 Lifts and service lifts (EN 81, IS0 41 90, IS0 7465)
o) BS5656 Safety rules for the construction and installation of escalators and
passenger conveyors (EN 1 15)
oA) BS5776 Specification for powered stairlifts
p) BS5900 Specification for powered homelifts
q) BS6004 Specification for PVC-insulated Cables (non-armoured) for electric power
-5- Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights resewed.

Section B
and lighting (IEC 227)
r) 856007 Specification for rubber-insulated cables for electric power and lighting
(IEC 245)
s) BS6440 Code of Practice for powered lifting platforms for use by disabled
persons
t) BS6500 Specification for insulated flexible cords and cables (IEC 227 & 245)
u) BS6977 Specification for insulated flexible cables for lifts and for other flexible
connections (IEC 227 & 245)
V) BS7255 Safe working on lifts
W) Design Manual - Barrier Free Access 1997
and other relevant British Standard Specifications or international standards in relation to

the design of the components used in a lift or an escalator.
-6-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights resewed
Section C
Section C. Definitions
The definitions of a lift, a service lift and an escalator shall follow that stipulated in the
Ordinance.
The following definitions are intended to indicate precisely the technical sense in which
the terms are used in the Code.
Attendant-operated Stairlift
A stairlift which is designed for use by the passenger with the assistance of an attendant.
Available Car Area

Area of the car measured at a height of 1.0 m above floor level, disregarding handrails,
which is available for passengers or goods during operation of the lift.
Average Closing Speed

The average closing speed of a sliding door is calculated over its whole travel,
less :-
25 mm at each side of the travel in case of centrally closing doors;
50 mm at each side of the travel in case of side closing doors.
Back-up Nut
An internally threaded annular component, used in conjunction with a screw and nut
drive, so arranged that it does not normally carry the load but is capable of doing so in
the event of failure of the threads in the main driving nut.
Buffer
A resilient stop at the end of travel, and comprising a means of braking using fluids or
springs (or other similar means).
Car
A part of the lift which carries the passengers and/or other loads,
Carriage
That whole moving part of a stairlift designed t o carry a passenger or a passenger in a
wheelchair.
-7-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights reserved.
Section C
Clamping Device
A mechanical device which when activated stops the car in downward motion and
maintains it stationary at any point of the travel to limit the extent of creep.
Combs
Parts of an escalator which at both landings mesh with the steps, pallets or the belt in
order t o facilitate the transition of passengers.
Counterweighi
A weight or series of weights provided t o counter balance the weight of the lift car and
part of the rated load of a lift.
Direct Acting Lift

Hydraulic lift where the ram or cylinder is directly attached to the car or its sling.
Down Direction Valve

Electrically controlled valve in a hydraulic circuit for controlling the descent of the car.
Driving Nut
An internally threaded annular component that acts in conjunction with a driving screw
to produce linear motion of the carriage of a stairlift, i.e. a rotating screw engaging with
a fixed nut, or vice versa.
Driving Screw
An externally threaded driving component that acts in conjunction with a driving nut.
Electrical Anti-creep System

A combination of precautions against the danger of creeping.
Footrest
A platform or bracket designed for a stairlift so that the passenger is able to stand or to
rest hislher feet upon it in complete safety either during movement of the stairlift or
when it comes to rest. It is sometimes referred to as foot-supporting platform.
Freight Lifi
A lift mainly intended for the transport of goods, which are generally accompanied by
persons handling the goods. A general freight lift is one which :-
(a) the loading in the lift will normally be evenly distributed over the floor of the car;
-8-
Section C
(b) the weight of any single piece of freight, or the weight of any single truck, which
may be used in the loading of the lift, and the load therein, will be not more than a
quarter of the rated load of the lift;
(c) the lift will be loaded only manually or by means of trucks which are not driven by
any form of power.
An industrial truck loaded freight lift is one which will be loaded and unloaded by
industrial truck, and the loading is not necessarily evenly distributed over the floor; and
the weight of any single piece of freight and its truck can exceed a quarter of the rated
load of the lift.
Full Load Pressure
Static pressure exerted on the piping directly connected to the jack, the car with the
rated load being at rest at the highest landing level.
Guides
The components which provide guiding for the car sling or the counterweight, if there is
one.
Handrail
Moving part of an escalator intended to serve as a handhold for the passengers
Hydraulic Lift
Lift as defined in the Ordinance in which the lifting power is derived from an electrically
driven pump transmitting hydraulic fluid to a jack, acting directly or indirectly on the car
(multiple motors, pumps and/or jacks may be used).
Indirect Acting Lift
A hydraulic lift where the ram or cylinder is connected t o the car or the car sling by
suspension means (ropes, chains).
Instantaneous Safety Gear
A safety gear in which the full gripping action on the guides is almost immediate.
Instantaneous Safety Gear with Buffered Effect
A safety gear in which the full gripping action on the guides is almost immediate, but the
reaction on the car or counterweight is limited by presence of an intermediate buffering
system.
-9-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights resewed
Section C
Journey
Movement of a stairlift between any t w o levels which incorporates one start and one
stop.
Landing
The space required at the entrance t o a lift at any defined level t o permit the
manoeuvring, boarding and alighting of users and/or goods.
Levelling
An operation which improves the accuracy of stopping at landings.
Lift Machine
The unit including the motor which drives and stops the lift.
Lift Platform
The load carrying unit complete with its frame attachments.
Machine
Unit which drives and stops the lift, comprising the pump, the pump motor and the
control valves.
Machine Room
A room in which machine or machines and/or the associated equipment are placed.
Main Switch
A switch which breaks the electrical supply t o the lift on all 'live' conductors, but that
does not break off the electrical supply t o any of the following :-
(a) car lighting or ventilation (if any);
(b) socket outlet on the car roof;
(c) lighting in the machine room and any pulley room;
(d) socket outlet($ in the machine room and any pulley room;
(e) lighting in the well;
(f) socket outlet in pit;
-10-
Section C
(g) alarm device.
Minimum Breaking Load of a Lifting Rope
This load is the product of the square of the nominal diameter of the rope (in square
millimetres) and the nominal tensile strength of the wires (in newtons per square
millimetre) and a coefficient appropriate to the type of rope construction.
The effective breaking load obtained in a rupture test on a sample of rope following a
defined method, shall be at least equal to the minimum breaking load.
Multiple Installation
A number of lifts installed in separate or common wells andlor sharing a common

machine room.
Non-return Valve
A valve which allows flow in one direction only.
One-way Restrictor
A valve which allows free flow in one direction and restricted flow in the other direction.
Overspeed Governor
A device, also called governor, which, when the lift attains a predetermined speed,
causes the lift or escalator to stop, and if necessary causes the safety gear or the auxiliary
brake to be applied.
Passenger
Any person transported by a lift or an escalator.
Pawl Device
A mechanical device for stopping involuntary descent of the car, and maintaining it
stationary on fixed supports.
Pit
The part of the well situated below the lowest landing level served by the car.
Positive Drive Lift (Includes Drum Drive)
A lift suspended by chains or lifting ropes driven by means other than friction.
Pressure Relief Valve
-11-
Section C
A valve which limits the pressure t o a pre-determined value by exhausting fluid.
Progressive Safety Gear
A safety gear in which deceleration is effected by a braking action on the guides and for
which special provisions are made so as to limit the forces on the car or counterweight to
a permissible value.
Pulley Room
A room not containing the machine, and in which only diverter pulleys, overspeed
governors, lighting and ventilation equipment for the pulley room are permitted t o be
located.
Rail
Metal formed into a section, or arranged t o guide and retain the carriage of a stairlift
during its motion in the course of its travel over the stairway.
Ramp
A structure or structural member providing an inclined surface connecting one level with
another.
Rated Load
The load for which the lift or the escalator has been built and for which normal operation
is guaranteed by the manufacturer.
Rated Speed
The speed of the car or platform for which the lift has been built and for which normal
operation is guaranteed by the manufacturer; or the speed of a no-load escalator in the
direction of the moving steps, pallets or the belt at which the steps, pallets or the belt
move and for which the escalator has been built and normal operation is guaranteed by
the manufacturer.
Restrictor
A valve in which the inlet and outlet are connected through a restricted passage way.
An operation, after the lift has stopped, to permit the stopping position to be corrected
during loading or unloading, if necessary by successive movements (automatic or inching).
Rupture Valve
-12-
Section C
A valve designed t o close automatically when the pressure drop across the valve, caused
by the increased flow in a predetermined flow direction, exceeds a pre-set amount.
Safety Gear
A mechanical device for stopping, and maintaining stationary on the guides, the lift car
or counterweight in case of overspeeding in the downward direction or breaking of the
suspension.
Safety Rope
An auxiliary rope attached to the car andlor counterweight for the purpose of tripping a
safety gear in case of suspension failure.
Self-operation
The mode of operation that a stairlift is designed for the passenger to use independently
without the help of an attendant.
Sensitive Edge
A safety device attached to any edge to obviate a hazard.
Sensitive Surface
A safety device similar in effect t o a sensitive edge but so arranged to protect a whole
surface such as the underside of a platform or other large area.
Shut-off Valve
A manually operated two way valve which can permit or prevent flow in either direction,
Single Acting Jack

Jack in which displacement in one direction is by fluid action and in the other by another
force.
Sling
The metal framework carrying the car or counterweight, connected t o the means of
suspension. This sling may be integral with the car enclosure.
Stairlift
A kind of lift for transporting an ambulant disabled person or person in a wheelchair
between t w o or more levels by means of a guided carriagelplatform moving substantially
in the direction of a flight of stairs and travelling in the same path in both upward and
downward directions.
- 13-
Section C
Stairway
Any part of a building that provides a route to travel and is formed either by a single
flight of stairs or by a combination of two or more flights of stairs and one or more
intervening landings.
Theoretical Capacity
Number of persons that can be carried theoretically by the escalator in 1 hour.
;\
For the determination of the theoretical capacity it is assumed that on one step with an
average depth of 0.4 m and per 0.4 m visible length of a pallet or belt, there are
carried :- -1
I
1 person at a nominal width zl = 0.6 m
1.5 persons at a nominal width zl = 0.8 m
2 persons at a nominal width zl = 1.0 m
The theoretical capacity calculation is then :
Ct = theoretical capacity (perslh)
V = rated speed (mls)

I
For the most common widths there will be
k = 1 for zl = 0.6 m
I
factor k = 1.5 for zl = 0.8 m
k = 2 forzl=I.Om
With this formula the theoretical capacity will be :-
Nominal Width Rated Speed

m mls
Toe Guard
-14-
Section C
An apron having a smooth vertical part extending downwards from the sill of the landing
or car entrance.
Traction Drive Lift
A lift whose lifting ropes are driven by friction in the grooves of the driving sheave of the
machine.
Unlocking Zone
A zone, extending above and below the stopping level, in which the car floor must be to
enable the corresponding landing door to be unlocked.
User
Person making use of the services of a lift installation.
Vehicle Lift
A lift whose car is suitably dimensioned and suitably designed for carrying vehicles
Well
The space in which the car and the counterweight, if there is one, travels. This space is
bounded by the bottom of the pit, the walls and the roof of the well.
Section D
Section D. Symbols and Abbreviations
1. Units
The units used are chosen from the International (51) System of units.
2. Symbols
Measurements
(in the order they appear
in the document) Svmbol Unit
Rated Speed
Ratio between the greater and the smaller

static force in the parts of the rope located
on either side of the traction sheave
Coefficient taking account of the

acceleration, deceleration and specific
conditions of the installation
Standard acceleration of free fall
Braking deceleration of the car
Coefficient taking account of the variation

in profile of the traction sheave groove
due t o wear
Base of natural logarithms
Coefficient of friction of ropes in traction

sheave grooves
Coefficient of friction between steel wire

ropes and sheaves
Angle of wrap of the ropes on the traction a rad

sheave
Angle of the undercut grooves or semi- B rad

circular grooves in the traction sheave
Angle of the vee grooves in the traction 7 rad

sheave
Diameter of traction ropes

Section D
Measurements
Diameter of traction sheave D mm
Number of ropes n -
Specific pressure of the ropes in the P ~lmm'
traction sheave grooves
Static force in the ropes t o the car at

the level of the traction sheave when the
car is stationary at the lowest level
with its rated load
Speed of the ropes corresponding t o the

rated speed of the car
The higher value of both rated speeds

v, and vd (hydraulic lift)
Rated speed upwards (hydraulic lift)
Rate speed downwards (hydraulic lift)
Proof stress
Amplitude of Vibration
Frequency
Theoretical capacity (escalator)
Rated speed (escalator)
Factor for different step width
Vertical distance between top edge of

skirting or bottom edge of cover joints
and the tread surface of the steps,
pallets or belt
Angle of inclination between the degree

interior profile and the balustrade
interior panelling
- 17- Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights resewed

Section D
Measurements
Horizontal part of the interior profile b4 mm
that directly joins the balustrade
interior panelling
Newel including the handrail in

longitudinal direction measured from
the combs
Root of the comb teeth
Free height above the steps, pallets or

belt and landing area
Height of vertical obstruction guard
Distance between the centreline of the

handrail and an obstacle
Nominal width for the load carrying area

(step pallet or belt)
Distance between supports
Horizontal portion of the handrail in

the direction of landing measured from
the root of the comb teeth
Distance between the handrail profile

and guide or cover profiles
Width of the handrail
Distance between the handrail and the

edge of the balustrade
Distance between the handrail centrelines
Distance between skirting
Distance between the entry of handrail

into the newel and the floor
Horizontal distance between the furthest

point reached by the handrail and the
point of entry into the newel
- 18-
Section D
Measurements
Vertical distance between the handrail h1 m
and step nose or pallet surface or belt
surface
Step height
Step depth
Width of the grooves
Depth of the grooves
Web width
Transverse distance between the supporting

rollers
Design angle of the teeth of the comb degree
angle of inclination of the escalator degree

or passenger conveyor
Mesh depth of the comb into the grooves

of the thread
Clearance between the upper edge of the

tread surface and the root of the comb
teeth
Comb intersection line
- 19- Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights resewed.

Section E Part 1
Section E. Specifications
Part 1: Specification for Electric Lifts
Contents Page
1. Lift Well 28
1.1 General Provisions 28
1.2 Lift Operation Subject to Closure of lnspection and Emergency Doors and
Inspection Traps 28
1.3 Construction of the Walls of Lift Wells and Landing Doors Facing a Car Entrance
29
Protection of Accessible Spaces Below the Car or the Counterweight
Headroom and Pit
1.5.1 Top Clearances for Traction Drive Lifts
1.5.1 .I Car Overhead Runby
1.5.1.2 Counterweight Overhead Runby
1.5.1.3 Reduct~onof Overhead Runby by Positively Monitoring the
Slowdown of a Lift
1.5.1.4 Reduction of Overhead Runby by Using Anti-rebound Device
1.5.2 Top Clearances for Positive Drive Lift
1.5.2.1 Car Overhead Runby
1.5.3 Bottom Clearances in the Pit
1.5.4 Stopping Devices and Socket Outlet in the Pit
Exclusive Use of the Lift Well
Ventilation and Lighting of the Lift Well
Machine and Pulley Rooms
General Provisions
2.1 . I Equipment Outside Machine or Pulley Room
2.1.2 Exclusive Use of Machine or Pulley Room
Construction and Equipment of Machine Rooms
2.2.1 Machine Room Suitably Dimensioned for Maintenance
2.2.2 Ventilation and Temperature
2.2.3 Lighting and Socket Outlets
2.2.4 Stopping Devices in Machine Room
Construction and Equipment of Pulley Rooms
2.3.1 Pulley Room Suitably Dimensioned for Maintenance
- 20 -
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights reselved.
Section E Part 1
2.3.4 Stopping Devices in Pulley Room 35
2.4 Machinery Inside the Lift Well 36
2.4.1 General Provisions 36
2.4.2 Dimensions of working areas inside the well 36
2.4.3 Devices for emergency and test operations 36
3. Landing Doors 37
3.2 Strength of Doors and Frames 37
3.2.1 Material 37
3.2.2 Mechanical Strength 38
3.3 Height and Width of Doors 38
3.3.1 Height 38
3.3.2 Width 38
3.4 Sills, Guides and Door Suspension 38
3.4.1 Sills 38
3.4.2 Guides 39
3.4.3 Suspension of Vertically Sliding Doors 39
3.5 Protection During Door Operations 39
3.5.2 Automatic Power Operated Horizontally Sliding Doors 39
3.5.2.1 Closing Force and Kinetic Energy 39
3.5.2.2 Door Re-opening Device 39
3.5.2.3 Door Re-opening Device for Lift for Persons with a Disability 40
I
3.5.3 Manually Controlled Power Operated Horizontally Sliding Doors 40
3.5.4 Power Operated Vertically Sliding Doors 40
3.5.5 Other Types of Doors 41
3.6 Lighting at Landings and 'Car Here' Indication 41
3.6.1 Lighting at Landings 41
3.6.2 Vision Panels and 'Car Here' lndication for Landing Doors with Manual
I Opening 41
I 3.7 Locking and Closed Landing Door Check 42
3.7.1 Protection against the Risk of Falling 42
3.7.2 Protection against Shearing 42
3.7.3 Effective Locking and Electrical Devices for Proving the Landing Door
Locked 42
3,7,4 Emergency Unlocking ~ -
~~p~ ~ - - ~~ -~ ~~~ -~
~ ~ ~ - ~
43
3.7.5 Electrical Device for Proving the Landing Door Closed 44
3.7.6 Requirements Common t o Devices for Proving the Locked Condition and
the Closed Condition of the Door 44
3.7.7 Sliding Doors with Multiple Panels Mechanically Linked 44
-21 - Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights resewed.

Section E Part 1
3.7.7.1 Directly Mechanically Linked Panels 44

3.7.7.2 Indirectly Mechanically Linked Panels
4. Car and Counterweight
4.1 Height of Car
4.2 Available Car Area, Rated Load, Number of Passengers
4.2.1 General Provisions
4.2.2 Freight Lifts and Vehicle Lifts
4.2.3 Number of Passengers
4.2.4 Overload Device
4.3 Car Enclosure
4.3.1 Permissible Openings
4.3.2 Mechanical Strength
4.3.3 Material
4.4 Toe Guards
4.5 Car Doors
4.5.1 Imperforate Doors and Special Case
4.5.2 Complete Enclosure
4.5.3 Clearances
4.5.4 Hinged Doors
4.5.5 Vision Panels
4.5.6 Sills, Guides and Door Suspension
4.6 Protection During Door Operations
4.6.2 Automatic Power Operated Horizontally Sliding Doors
4.6.2.1 Closing Force and Kinetic Energy
4.6.2.2 Door Re-opening Device
4.6.2.3 Door Re-opening Device for Lift for Persons with a Disability
4.6.3 Manually Controlled Power Operated Horizontally Sliding Doors
4.6.4 Power Operated Vertically Sliding Doors
4.6.5 Other Type of Doors
4.7 Electrical Device for Proving the Car Doors Closed
4.8 Sliding Doors with Multiple Panels Mechanically Linked
4.8.1 Directly Mechanically Linked Panels
4.8.2 Indirectly Mechanically Linked Panels
4.9 Locking of the Car Door
4.10 Opening the Car Door
4.1 1 Trap Doors and Emergency Doors
4.1 1.1 Emergency Trap Doors
- 22 -
Section E Part 1
4.1 1.2 Emergency Doors 54
4.1 1.3 Locking of the Emergency Trap Doors and Emergency Doors 54
4.12 Car Roof 54
4.12.1 Car Roof as a Working Platform 54
4.12.2 Pulleys on Car Roof 55
4.13 Car Header 55
4.14 Equipment on Top of the Car 55
4.1 5 Ventilation 55
4.1 6 Lighting and Emergency Lighting 56
4.1 7 Counterweight 56
5. Suspension, Compensation, Safety Gear and Overspeed Governor 57
5.1 Types of Suspension 57
5.2 Number of Ropes or Chains 57
5.3 Ratio between Diameters of Sheaves and Ropes 57
5.4 Safety Factor of Ropes and Chains 57
5.5 Rope and Chain Terminations 58
5.6 Rope Traction 58
5.7 Winding Up of Ropes for Positive Drive Lifts 59
5.8 Distribution of Load between Ropes or Chains 59
5.9 Compensation 59
5.10 Protection for Traction Sheaves, Pulleys and Sprockets 60
5.1 1 Safety Gear 60
5.1 1 . I General Provisions 60
5.1 1.2 Use of Different Types of Safety Gear 61
5.1 1.3 Tripping Method 61
5.1 1.4 Retardation 61
5.1 1.5 Release 61
5.1 1.6 Constructional Conditions 62
5.1 1.7 Inclination of the Car Floor on Operation of Safety Gear 62
5.1 1.8 Electrical Checking on Operation of Safety Gear 62
5.1 2 Overspeed Governor 62
5.12.2 Tripping Speed for the Car Overspeed Governor 62
5.12.3 Tripping Speed for the Counterweight Overspeed Governor 63
5.12.4 Tensile Force 63
5.12.5 Direction of Rotation 63
5.12.6 Overspeed Governor Rope 64
5.12.7 Response Time 64
5.12.8 Accessibility 64
-23-
Section E Part 1
5.12.9 Test Tr~ppingof the Overspeed Governor 65
5.12.10 Sealing 65
5.12.1 1 Electrical Checking on Operation of Overspeed Governor 65
5.12.12 Release 65
5.1 3 Ascending Car Overspeed Protection Means 65
5.14 Protection Against Unintended Car Movement 66
6. Guides, Buffers, Final Limit Switches and Obstruction Switch 68
6.1 Guides 68
6.1.I General Provisions 68
6.1.2 Strength of Guides and Brackets 68
6.2 Car and Counterweight Buffers 69
6.2.2 Energy Accumulation Type Buffers 69
6.2.3 Energy Accumulation Type Buffers with Buffered Return Movement 70
6.2.4 Energy Dissipation Type Buffers 70
6.2.4.1 Normal Buffer Stroke 70
6.2.4.2 Reduced Buffer Stroke 70
6.2.4.3 Retardation 70
6.2.4.4 Electrical Checking on Buffer Operations 70
6.2.4.5 Checking of Fluid Level 70
6.3 Final Limit Switches 71
6.3.2 Control 71
6.3.3 Method of Operation 71
6.4 Obstruction Switch 72
6.4.2 Method of Operation : Positive Drive L~fts 72
6.4.3 Method of Operation : Traction Drive Lifts 72
7. Clearances Between Car and Lift Well Wall, and Between Car and Counterweight 73
7.1 Between Car and Wall Facing the Car Entrance 73
7.2 Between Car and Counterweight 73
8. Lift Machine 73
8.2 Drive of the Car and the Counterweight 73
8.3 Use of Overhung Pulleys or Sprockets 74
8.4 Braking System 74
8.4.2 Electro-mechanical Brake 74
- 24 - Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights reserved

Section E Part 1
8.4.2.1 Braking load 74
8.4.2.2 Construction
8.4.2.3 Control and Methods of Operation
8.4.2.4 Manual Release
8.5 Emergency Operation
8.5.1 Manual Operation
8.5.2 Checking of Car Position in Machine Room
8.5.3 Emergency Electrical Operation
8.6 Speed
I 8.7 Stopping the Lift Machine
8.7.1 Motors Supplied Directly From A.C. Mains
8.7.2 'Ward-Leonard' Drive System
8.7.2.1 Generator Excited by Classical Elements
8.7.2.2 Generator Excited and Controlled by Static Elements
8.7.3 Static Elements Drive System
8.8 Slowdown of the Lift in the Case of Reduced Stroke Buffers
8.8.1 Control
8.8.2 Methods of Operation
8.9 Rating of the Motor and Drive System
8.1 0 Guarding
9. Electrical Installations
9.1 General Provisions
9.1.I Limits of Application
9.1.2 Protection against Direct Contact
9.1.3 Insulation Resistance
9.1.4 Voltage for Control and Safety Circuits
9.1.5 Separate Neutral and Earth Conductors
9.1.6 Bonding of Metallic Parts to Main Earthing Terminal
9.2 Contactors, Relay Contactors, Components of Safety Circuits
9.2.1 Contactors and Relay Contactors
9.2.2 Components of Safety Circuits
I
9.3 Protection of Motors
9.4 Main Switches
9.4.2 Accessibility and Identification
9.4.3 Group of Lifts
9.4.4 Power Factor Correction Capacitor
9.5 Electrical Wiring
- 25 -
Section E Part 1
9.5.1 Flexible and Rigid Cables
9.5.2 Cross-sectional Area of Conductors
9.5.3 Method of Installation
9.5.4 Connectors
9.6 Lighting and Socket Outlets
9.6.1 Lighting
9.6.2 Socket Outlets
9.6.3 Control of Lighting Circuits and Socket Outlets Circuits
9.7 Telecommunication Cabling and Signal Transmission Devices
10. Electrical Protection and Controls
10.1 Protection Against Electrical Faults
10.1.2 Electrical Faults
10.1.3 Earthing Protection
10.1.4 Post-Voltage-Dip-Operation
10.2 Electrical Safety Devices
10.2.2 Safety Contacts
10.2.2.1 Positive Separation of Contacts
10.2.2.2 Type of Safety Contacts and Protective Enclosure 89
10.2.3 Safety Circuits 90
10.2.4 Operation of Electrical Safety Devices 90
10.2.5 Control of Electrical Safety Devices 91
10.3 Electrical Controls 91
10.3.1 Control of Lift Operations 91
10.3.1. I Normal Operation 91
10.3.1.2 Levelling and Re-levelling Operation 91
10.3.1.3 Inspection Operation 92
10.3.1.4 Emergency Electrical Operation 93
10.3.1.5 Home Landing Operation 94
10.3.1.6 Lift Operations with SecurityIFire Gates Installed in Front of Lift
Entrances 95
10.3.1.7 Deleted 95
10.3.1.8 Landing Door Lock Bypassed Operation 95
10.3.2 Stopping Devices 96
10.3.2.1 Stopping Device Inside the Car 96
10.3.2.2 Other Stopping Devices 96
10.3.3 Emergency Alarm Device 96
-26-
Section E Part 1
10.3.3.1 General Provisions 96
10.3.3.2 For Lift provided for Persons with a Disability 97
10.3.4 Priorities and Signals 98
10.4 Conditions for Use of Electrical Safety Devices 98
11. Notices and Operating instructions 100
1 1.1 General Provisions 100
1 1.2 Inside the Lift Car 101
11.2.1 Rated Load and Number of Passengers 101
1 1.2.2 Manufacturer 101
1 1.2.3 Control Devices on Car Operating Panels 101
1 1.2.4 Other Necessary Instructions 102
1 1.3 On the Car Roof 102
1 1.4 Machine and Pulley Rooms 103
1 1.4.1 Notices for Power Switches 103
1 1.4.2 Instructions for Emergency Operations 103
1 1.4.3 Stopping Devices 103
1 1.4.4 Lifting Beam or Hook 103
11.5 On the Landings 103
1 1.6 On the Overspeed Governor 104
1 1.7 In the Pit 104
1 1.8 On the Buffers 104
1 1.9 Landing ldentification 104
1 1 .I0 Electrical ldentification 104
1 1 . I 1 Alarm Device 105
11.I 2 Locking Devices 105
1 1.13 Safety Gear 105
Appendix I : Acceptable Spot Welding Methods for Emergency Trap Door

Appendix II : Emergency Unlocking Triangle
Appendix Ill : Diagram for assessing safety circuits
-27-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights reserved.
Section E Part 1
1. Lift Well
1. I .I The car and counterweight of a lift shall be enclosed in a lift well.
When the lift well is required t o contribute t o the protection of the building
against the spread of fire (e.g. observation lift passing through different
compartments), it shall be totally enclosed and comply with the relevant
provisions of Building (Planning) Regulations (Chapter 123), Building
(Construction) Regulations (Chapter 123), the Code of Practice on Building
Works for Lifts and Escalators and the Code of Practice for Fire Resisting
Construction issued by the Building Authority.
When the lift well is not required to contribute to the protection of the building
against the spread of fire, it does not need to be totally enclosed, provided:-
(a) the enclosure at the landing door side of every floor shall either cover the
full height of the floor or be of minimum height of 3.5 m;
(b) the height of enclosure shall be of minimum 2.5 m above any points
normally accessible t o persons at other sides and with a minimum
horizontal distance of 0.5 m t o moving parts of the lift; and
(c) the enclosure shall be imperforate.
The height of enclosure mentioned above in (b) may be reduced to 1.1 m

provided:
(i) the horizontal distance t o moving parts exceeds 2 m;
(ii) it can prevent persons from being endangered by moving parts of the lift
and from interfering with the safe operation of the lift by reaching lift
equipment; and
(iii) access to the lift pit by simply climbing over the enclosure is not possible.
1. I .2 The counterweight of a lift shall be in the same well as the car, and no more
than four lifts shall be accommodated in one liftway.
1.2 Lift Operation Subject to Closure of inspection and Emergency Doors and
Inspection Traps
Operation of the lift shall automatically depend on the maintenance in the

closed position of the inspection and emergency doors and inspection traps to
the well and access door to the pit. For this purpose electrical safety devices in
conformity with Clause 10.2 shall be employed t o check on the closed position
of each of this door or trap.
-28-
Section E Port 1
The assembly comprising the landing doors and any wall or part of a wall facing
the car entrance, shall form an imperforate surface over the full entrance width
of the car, excluding the operational clearances of doors.
1.4 Protection of Accessible Spaces Below the Car or the Counterweight
If the lift well is situated above accessible spaces which are underneath the car
or counterweight buffer, unless there is below the counterweight buffer a solid
pier extending down t o solid ground, the counterweight shall be equipped with
safety gear.
1.5 Headroom and Pit
1.5.1 Top Clearances for Traction Drive Lifts
1.5.1.I Car Overhead Runby
When the counterweight rests on its fully compressed buffer(s), all the
following four conditions shall be satisfied at the same time :
(a) The car uide lengths shall provide a further guided travel of at least 0.1 +
9
0.035 V metres (0.035 v2 represents half the gravity stopping distance
corresponding t o 115% of the rated speed).
(b) The free vertical distance between the level of the highest area on the car
roof whose dimensions comply with Clause 4.12.l(b) (areas on parts
according to Clause 1.5.1.l(c) excluded) and the level of the lowest part
of the roof of the well (including beams and components located under
the roof) situated in the projection of the roof of the car shall be at least
1.0 + 0.035 v2metres.
(c) The free vertical distance between the lowest parts of the roof of the well
and:
(1) The highest pieces of equipment fixed on the roof of the car
enclosure, except for those covered in (2) below, shall be at least 0.3
+ 0.035 v2metres.
(2) The highest part of the guide shoes or rollers, of the rope
attachments and of the header or parts of vertically sliding doors,
shall be at least 0.1 + 0.035 v2metres.
(d) There shall be above the car sufficient space to accommodate a

rectangular block not less than 0.5 m x 0.6 m x 0.8 m resting on one of its
faces. For lifts with direct roping, the suspension ropes and their
attachments may be included in this space, provided that no rope centre-
line shall be at a distance exceeding 0.15 m from at least one vertical
- 29 -
Section E Part 1
surface of the block.
When the car rests on its totally compressed buffers, the counterweight guide
lengths shall provide a further guided travel of at least 0.1 + 0.035 v2metres.
1.5.1.3 Reduction of Overhead Runby by Positively Monitoring the Slowdown of a Lift
When the slowdown of the lift is positively monitored in the manner specified
in Clause 8.8, the value of 0.035 v2 in Clauses 1.5.1.1 and 1.5.1.2 for
calculation of clearances may be reduced:
(a) to (112)(0.035~~) for lifts whose rated speed does not exceed 4 mls;
however this value shall not be less than 0.25 m;
(b) to (113)(0.035~~) for lifts whose rated speed exceeds 4 mls; however this
value shall not be less than 0.28 m.
1.5.1.4 Reduction of Overhead Runby by Using Anti-rebound Device
For lifts which are fitted with compensating ropes having a tensioning pulley
equipped with an anti-rebound device (braking or lock-down device), the value
of 0.035 v2 may be replaced in the calculation of the clearances by a figure
related to the possible travel of that pulley, plus 11500 of the full travel of the
car (with a minimum of 0.2 m), to take account of the elasticity of the ropes.
See also Clause 5.9.
1.5.2 Top Clearances for Positive Drive Lift
1.5.2.1 Car Overhead Runby
The travel of the car upwards from the top floor until it strikes the upper
buffers shall be at least 0.5 m. The car shall be guided at least until the upper
buffers are fully compressed.
When the upper buffers are fully compressed by the car the following
conditions shall be satisfied at the same time :
(a) The free vertical distance between the level of the highest area on the car
roof whose dimensions comply with Clause 4.12.l(b) (area on parts
according to Clause 1.5.2.l(b) excluded) and the level of the lowest part
of the roof of the well (including beams and components located under
the roof) situated in the projection of the roof of the car, shall be at least
1.0 m.
(b) The free distance between the lowest part of the roof of the well and
(1) The highest pieces of equipment fixed on the car roof, except for
those covered by (2) below, shall be at least 0.3 m.
-30- 4
Section E Part 1
(2) The highest part of the guide shoes or rollers, o f the rope
attachments, or of the header, or the parts of vertically sliding doors,
if any, shall be at least 0.1 m.
(c) There shall be above the car sufficient space t o accommodate a

faces. For lifts with direct roping, the suspension ropes or chains and their
attachments may be included in this space, provided that no rope, or
chain, centre-line shall be at a distance exceeding 0.15 m from at least
one vertical surface of the block.
When the car rests on the fully compressed buffers the guide lengths of the
counterweight, if there is one, provide a further guided travel of at least 0.3 m.
When the car rests on its fully compressed buffers, the following conditions
shall be simultaneously fulfilled :
(a) There shall be in the pit sufficient space to accommodate a rectangular

block not less than 0.5 m x 0.6 m x 1.0 m resting on one of its faces.
(b) The clear distance between the bottom of the pit and
(1) the lowest portions of the car, except for items detailed in (2) below,
shall be at least 0.5 m;
(2) the lowest parts of the guide shoes or rollers of safety gear blocks,
toe guards or parts of vertical sliding doors, shall be at least 0.1 m.
There shall be in the pit:
(a) a stopping device accessible on opening the lowest landing door or the
access door to the pit to stop the lift and keep it stopped. For this purpose,
the device should be positioned in the well, approximately 1.3 m above
the lowest landing threshold and no more than 1.0 m from the landing
entrance opening. This device shall be of the "push-to-stop, pull-to-run"
type (see also Clauses 10.3.2.2 and 11.7); and
(b) an electric socket outlet (see Clause 9.6.2).
1.6 Exclusive Use of the Lift Well
The well shall be exclusively for the lift. It shall not contain cables or devices,
-31 -
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights reserved
Section E Part 1
etc., other than for the lift and for telecommunication at the lift car, nor shall it
be fitted with any fire sprinklers.
1.7 Ventilation and Lighting of the Lift Well
(a) Lift well shall be ventilated. It shall be such that the car top, car and pit
equipment, as well as electrical cables, etc., are protected as far as
possible from dust, harmful fumes and humidity. Stale air from other parts
of the building shall not be extracted into the lift well.
(b) The well shall be provided with permanent electric lighting, allowing it to
be lit during repairs or servicing, even when all doors are closed.
The lighting shall comprise one lamp positioned at most 0.5 m from the
highest and lowest points of the guided travel of the lift car with
intermediate lamps at 7 m maximum spacing. These lamps shall be 100 W
incandescent lamps or equivalent fluorescent lamps of at least 18 W. The
position of each lamp shall be such that a servicing personnel can
conveniently replace the lamp while standing on the top of car.
2. Machine and Pulley Rooms

Lift machines, their associated equipment and pulleys, shall be accessible only
to authorized persons (for maintenance, inspection, testing and rescue) and
therefore they shall be in a room, comprising solid walls, ceiling and door
and/or trap.
2.1.1 Equipment Outside Machine or Pulley Room

Certain equipment are allowed t o be installed outside machine or pulley room
and are set out below :
(a) Diverter pulleys may be installed in the headroom of the well provided
that they are located outside the projection of the car roof and that
examinations and tests and maintenance operations can be carried out in
complete safety from the car roof or from outside the well.
However, a diverter pulley, with single or double wrap, may be installed

above the car roof for diverting towards the counterweight, provided that
its shaft can be reached in complete safety from the car roof.
(b) The traction sheave may be installed in the well, provided that
(1) the examinations and tests and the maintenance operations may be
carried out from the machine room; and
(2) the openings between the machine room and the well are as small
- 32 -
Section E Part 1
as possible.
(c) The overspeed governor may be installed in the well, provided that the
examinations and tests and the maintenance operations may be carried
out from outside the well.
(d) The diverter pulleys and the traction sheaves in the well shall be provided
with devices t o avoid
(1) bodily injury;
(2) the suspension ropes or chains leaving their grooves if slack; and
(3) the introduction of foreign objects between ropes and grooves.
The devices used shall be such that they do not hinder examinations and
tests or maintenance operations. The dismantling of these devices shall be
necessary only during
(1) the replacement of a rope;
(2) the replacement of a pulley; and
(3) the re-cutting of the grooves.
The machine or pulley room shall be used only for accommodating equipment
for the operation of the lift, but the following are also permitted in the space:
(a) machine for service lifts or escalators;
(b) cabling and devices mentioned in Clause 9.7 for enabling

telecommunication at the lift cars;
(c) equipment for air-conditioning or ventilating these rooms; and
(d) fire services installations and equipment as may be required by the

Director of Fire Services for these rooms.
Fire sprinklers, however, shall not normally be fitted in these rooms.
(e) a power factor correction device, a harmonic correction device, metering

devices or the provision for measurement.
2.2 Construction and Equipment of Machine Rooms
2.2.1 Machine Room Suitably Dimensioned for Maintenance
- 33 -
Section E Part 1
The dimensions of machine rooms shall be sufficient to permit easy and safe
access for maintenance workers to all the components, especially the electrical
equipment.
In particular there shall be provided :
(a) a clear horizontal area in front of the panels and the cabinets. This area is
defined as follows:-
Depth: measured from the external surface of the enclosures, including

protruding controls, handles, etc., at least 0.7 m.
Width: the greater of the following values: 0.5 m or the full width of the
cabinet or panel.
(b) a clear horizontal area of at least 0.5 m x 0.6 m for servicing and
inspection of moving parts at points where this is necessary and, if need
be, manual emergency operation (see Clause 8.5.1); and
(c) access ways t o these clear spaces which shall have a width of at least 0.5
m. This value may be reduced to 0.4 m in areas of the access way where
there are no moving parts.
There shall also be a clear vertical distance of at least 0.3 m above pulleys and
rotating parts of the machine.
(a) The machine rooms shall be suitably ventilated. Should the well be
ventilated through the machine room, the ventilation requirements for the
well have to be taken into account. Stale air from other parts of the
building shall not be extracted directly into the machine room. It shall be
such that the motors and equipment, as well as electric cables, etc., are
protected as far as it is reasonably practicable from dust, harmful fumes
and humidity.
(b) The ambient temperature in the machine room shall be maintained

between +5 OC and +40 OC.
(a) The machine room shall be provided with permanent electric lighting on
the basis of at least 200 lux at floor level. The supply for this lighting shall
be in conformity with Clause 9.6.1. A switch, placed inside the room,
close t o the access point or points, at an appropriate height, shall control
lighting of the room on entry.
There shall be an automatic rechargeable emergency supply which is

capable of feeding at least a 5 W lamp per lift for 2 hours in case of an
interruption of the normal lighting supply. This lighting shall be located
- 34 - Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights resewed

Section E Part 1
sufficiently close to the control panel and machine and shall come on
automatically upon failure of the normal lighting supply. The charger shall
be capable of re-charging the batteries fully in not more than 12 hours.
(b) One or more socket outlets (see Clause 9.6.2) shall be provided.
2.2.4 Stopping Devices in Machine Room

Where a lift machine and its controller are installed at different levels exceeding
600 mm, there shall be installed a stopping device near the machine, allowing
the lift to be stopped and kept stopped. This device shall be of the "push-to-
stop, pull-to-run" type (see Clauses 10.3.2.2 and 11.4.3).
2.3 Construction and Equipment of Pulley Rooms
2.3.1 Pulley Room Suitably Dimensioned for Maintenance

The dimensions of pulley rooms shall be sufficient to permit easy and safe
access for maintenance workers t o all the components.
A clear horizontal area of at least 0.5 m x 0.6 m for servicing and inspection of
moving parts shall be provided.
The access ways to the clear spaces mentioned above shall have a width of at
least 0.5 m. This value may be reduced to 0.4 m in areas of the access way
where there are no moving parts.
There shall also be a clear vertical distance of at least 0.3 m above pulleys.

The pulley rooms shall be suitably ventilated and the ambient temperature in
the pulley room shall be maintained in the way conforming to Clause 2.2.2.

The pulley room shall be provided with permanent electric lighting on the basis
of at least 200 lux at floor level. The supply for this lighting shall be in
conformity with Clause 9.6.1. A switch, placed inside the room, close t o the
access point, at an appropriate height, shall control the lighting of the room on
entry. One or more socket outlets (see Clause 9.6.2) shall be provided.
2.3.4 Stopping Devices in Pulley Room

There shall be installed in the pulley room, close to the point of access, a
stopping device, allowing the lift t o be stopped and kept stopped. The device
shall be of the "push-to-stop, pull-to-run" type (see Clauses 10.3.2.2 and
11.4.3).

Section E Part 1
2.4 Machinery Inside the Lift Well

Machinery supports and working areas inside the well shall be so constructed t o
withstand the loads and forces to which they are intended to be subjected.
In the case of wells partially enclosed at the exterior of buildings the machinery
shall be suitably protected against the environmental influences.
The clear height for moving inside the well from one working area t o another
shall not be less than 1.80 m.
The car mechanical blocking devices installed at the car roof shall1 prevent any
unintentional movement of the car and maintenance and inspection can be
carried out safely from the car roof.
The ambient temperature within the lift well shall be maintained between +5OC
and +40°C.
2.4.2 Dimensions of working areas inside the well

The dimensions of working areas at the machinery inside the well shall be
sufficient to permit easy and safe working on equipment. In particular there
shall be provided at least a clear height of 2 m at working areas, and:
(a) a clear horizontal working area of at least 0.50 m x 0.60 m for

maintenance and inspection of parts at points where this is necessary;
(b) a clear horizontal space in front of the control panels and cabinets,
defined as follows:
(1) depth, measured from the external surface of the enclosures, at

least 0.70 m;
(2) width, the greater of the following values: 0.50 m or the full
width of the cabinet or panel.
There shall be a clear vertical distance of at least 0.30 m above unprotected

rotating parts of the machine. If the distance is less than 0.30 m guarding
shall be provided to avoid bodily injury.
2.4.3 Devices for emergency and test operations
In the case of working areas on the car top of the machine room-less lift is
concerned, the necessary devices for emergency and test operations shall be
provided on a maintenance access panel suitable for carrying out from outside
of the lift well all emergency operations and any necessary dynamic tests of
the lift. The maintenance access panel shall be accessible t o authorised
persons only. This applies also to means for maintenance where maintenance
- 36 -
Settion E Part 1
procedure(s) require(s) moving the car and the work cannot be carried out
safely from the intended work areas provided inside the well.
If the emergency and test devices are not protected inside a machinery cabinet,
they shall be enclosed with a suitable cover, which:
(a) does not open towards the inside of the well;
(b) is provided with a key-operated lock, capable of being reclosed and
relocked without a key.
The maintenance access panel located at the top floor landing shall be
vandalism proof, with a key lock, and enable to perform tests and emergency
operations from outside of the lift well. The devices on the maintenance
access panel shall be lit by a permanently installed electric lighting with an
intensity of at least 50 lux measured at the device. A switch placed on or
close t o the panel shall control lighting of the maintenance access panel. The
maintenance access panel shall provide the following:
(a) emergency operation devices together with an intercom system;

(b) control equipment which enables dynamic tests (such as brake tests,
traction tests, safety gear tests, buffer tests or tests of ascending car
overspeed protection means) t o be carried out;
(c) direct observation of the lift machine together with display device giving,
indication of :
(i) direction of movements of the car; and
(ii) speed of the lift car.
(d) direct observation of the lift machine or by display device($ giving
indication of reaching of an unlocking zone.
3. Landing Doors

The openings in the well giving access to the lift car shall be provided with
imperforate landing doors.
The clearance between panels (when closed), or between panels and uprights,
lintels or sills, shall not exceed 6mm. This value shall be as small as possible and,
due to wear, may increase but shall not exceed 10 mm in any case. These
clearances are measured at the back of any recesses if present.
To avoid the risk of shearing during operation of the doors, the exterior face
(facing the lift lobby) of automatically operated sliding doors shall not have
recesses or projections exceeding 3 mm. Edges of these shall be chamfered in
both directions of movement. Exception to these requirements is made for the
access t o the emergency unlocking triangle defined in Appendix II.
3.2 Strength of Doors and Frames
3.2.1 Material
-37-
Section E Part 1
1
Doors and their frames shall be constructed in such a way that they will not
become deformed in the course of time. To this end, it is recommended that
they are made of metal.

Doors, with their locks, shall possess mechanical strength such that in the
locked position and when a force of 300 N, being evenly distributed over an
area of 5 cm2 in round or square section, is applied at right angles t o the panel
at any point on either face, they shall:
(a) resist without permanent deformation;
(b) resist without elastic deformation greater than 15 mm; and
(c) operate satisfactorily after such a test,
Under the application at the most unfavourable point of a manual force

(without a tool) of 150 N in the direction of opening of horizontal sliding doors,
the clearances defined in Clause 3.1 may exceed 6mm, but they shall not
exceed 30mm.
Door panels made of glass shall comply with Clause 7.2.3.3 of EN 81-1.
I'
The fixing of the glass in doors shall ensure that the glass cannot slip out of the
fixings, even when sinking. The glass panels shall have markings giving the
name of the supplierltrade mark, type of glass and thickness/configuration.
Where automatic power operated horizontally sliding doors are made up of

glass panels having dimensions greater than stated in Clause 3.6.2, means for
minimizing the risk of dragging children's hands into the gaps between the
glass panels and uprights shall be provided.
3.3 Height and Width of Doors
3.3.1 Height
Landing doors shall have a minimum clear height of 2 m.
3.3.2 Width
The clear entrance of the landing doors shall not extend more than 50 mm in
width beyond the clear car entrance on either side.
3.4 Sills, Guides and Door Suspension
3.4.1 Sills
- 38 -
~
I
I
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights reserved. ~
Section E Part 1
Landing door sills shall be provided in accordance with the Code of Practice on
Building Works for Lifts and Escalators issued by the Building Authority.
3.4.2 Guides
Landing doors shall be designed to avoid, during normal operation, derailment,
jamming, or displacement at the extremities of their travel.
Horizontally sliding landing doors shall be guided at the top and bottom while
vertically sliding landing doors shall be guided at both sides.
3.4.3 Suspension of Vertically Sliding Doors

Panels of vertically sliding landing doors shall be fixed to t w o independent
suspension elements with a safety factor of at least 8.
If ropes are used as suspension elements, the diameter of suspension rope

pulleys shall be at least 25 times the rope diameter.
Suspension ropes and chains shall be guarded against leaving the pulley
grooves or sprockets.

The doors and their surrounds shall be designed in such a way as to minimize
risk of damage or injury due to jamming of a part of the person, clothing or
other object.
Power operated doors shall be designed t o reduce to a minimum the harmful

consequences of a person being struck by a door panel.

The effort needed to prevent the door closing shall not exceed 150 N,
measured after the first third of the travel of the door.
The kinetic energy of the landing door and the mechanical elements to which it
is rigidly connected, calculated or measured at the average closing speed, shall
not exceed 10 J.
A sensitive protective device shall automatically initiate re-opening of the door

in the event of a person being struck (or about to be struck) by the door in
crossing the entrance during the closing movement.
- 39 -
Section E Part 1
(a) This protective device may be that of the car door (see Clause 4.6.2.2).
(b) The effect of the device may be neutralized during the last 50 mm of
travel of each door panel.
(c) In the case of a system which makes the sensitive protective device
inoperative after a fixed period of time, to counteract persistent
obstructions when closing the door, the kinetic energy defined above shall
not exceed 4 J, and an audible alarm in the lift car shall sound during
closing of the door with the protective device inoperative.
(d) A single beam light ray (or similar device) alone is considered insufficient
For a lift for persons with a disability, a sensitivity protective device shall be
provided t o automatically initiate re-opening of the door in the event of a
person being struck or about to be struck by the door in crossing the entrance
during the closing movement.
(a) A detection equipment of the protective device shall be positioned at a

height of not less than 500 mm and not more than 600 mm above the
landing sill, to initiate re-opening of the door in the event of a person
who is about to be struck.
(b) This protective device may be that of the car door (see Clause 4.6.2.3 -
Door Re-opening Device for Lift for Persons with a Disability).
(c) The effect of the device may be neutralized during the last 50 mm of
(d) Door forced-closing system as described in Clause 3.5.2.2(c) shall not be

provided.
(e) A single beam light ray (or similar device) alone is considered insufficient.

If the closing of the door is carried out under the continuous control of the
users (e.g. by continuous pressure on a button) and the kinetic energy
calculated or measured as laid down in Clause 3.5.2.1 exceeds 10 J, the
average closing speed of the fastest panel shall be limited t o 0.3 mls.

This type of sliding door shall only be permitted if all the following conditions
are fulfilled simultaneously:
(a) it is used in a freight lift or vehicle lift;
- 40 -
Section E Part 1
(b) the closing is carried out under the continuous control of the users;
(c) the average closing speed of the panels is limited t o 0.3 mls;
(d) the car door is of perforated or mesh panel construction as provided for in
the specific case of Clause 4.5.1; and
(e) the car door is at least two-thirds closed before the landing door begins to
close.
3.5.5 Other Types of Doors

When using other types of doors (e.g. hinged) with power operation, where
there is a risk when opening or closing, of striking persons, precautions similar
to those laid down for other power operated sliding doors shall be taken. No
collapsible door shall be opened by mechanical power.
3.6 Lighting at Landings and 'Car Here' Indication
3.6.1 Lighting at Landings

Natural or artificial lighting of the landings in the vicinity of landing doors shall
be at least 50 lux at floor level, such that a user can see what is ahead of him
when he is opening the landing door t o enter the lift, even if the car light has
failed.
3.6.2 Vision Panels and 'Car Here1 Indication for Landing Doors with Manual Opening
In case of landing doors with manual opening, the user must be able to know,
before opening the door, whether the car is there or not. To this affect, there
shall be installed :
(a) either one or more transparent vision panels conforming t o the following
conditions:-
(1) mechanical strength as specified in Clause 3.2.2;
(2) the size and shape of the vision panel shall be such that it will not
permit the passage of a sphere having a diameter of 100 mm, have
a minimum glazed area per landing door of 0.015 m2 with a
minimum of 0.01 m2 per vision panel of a width of at least 60 mm
and at most 150 mm;
(3) minimum thickness of 6 mm;
(4) no part of the vision panel shall be at a height of less than 1 m

above floor level of the landing;
-41 -
Section E Part 1
(5) the vision panel shall be made of an approved material or safety

glass of a tempered or laminated type; and
(6) if such door is a sliding door, the vision panel shall be flush with the
surface of the door closest it to the landing.
(b) or, an illuminated 'car here' signal which can only light up when the car is
about to stop or has stopped at the particular landing. The signal shall
remain illuminated all the time the car remains at the landing.
3.7 Locking and Closed Landing Door Check
3.7.1 Protection against the Risk of Falling

It shall not be possible in normal operation t o unlock a landing door (or any of
the panels in the case of a multi-panel door) unless the car has stopped, or is on
the point of stopping, in the unlocking zone of that door.
The unlocking zone shall not extend more than 0.2 m above and below the
landing level.
In the case, however, of powered operated car and landing doors operating
simultaneously, the unlocking zone may extend t o a maximum of 0.35 m above
and below the landing level.
3.7.2 Protection against Shearing

It shall not be possible in normal operation t o start the lift nor keep it in motion
if a landing door (or any of the panels in the case of a multi-panel door) is open
or unlocked. If it can be demonstrated that the driving system of the lift can
keep the car in the unlocking zone to remain stationary even when the brake is
released, then the brake may be released when the doors are closing the last 30
mm gap of the entrance. However the car shall not start t o move until the
doors are closed and locked.
Operation with doors open is permitted in the unlocking zone to permit

levelling or relevelling at the corresponding floor level, provided the
requirements of Clause 10.3.1.2 are met.
3.7.3 Effective Locking and Electrical Devices for Proving the Landing Door Locked
3.7.3.1 Each landing door shall be provided with a locking device satisfying the
requirement of Clause 3.7.1. This device shall be protected against deliberate
misuse, and shall be type tested to the requirements of Clause F.l of 855655 :
Part 1 or EN 81 : Part 1 or other relevant international standards. The effective
locking of the landing door in the closed position shall precede the movement
of the car. The locking must be proved by an electrical safety device in
conformity with Clause 10.2.
- 42 -
Section E Part 1
The car shall not be able to start until the locking elements are engaged by at
least 7 mm.
3.7.3.2 The physical connection between one of the safety contact elements which
breaks and makes the doors interlock circuit, and the device which locks
mechanically, shall be direct and foolproof, but adjustable if necessary.
3.7.3.3 For hinged doors, locking shall be effected as near as possible to the vertical
closing edge($ of the doors. Locking shall be maintained properly even in t h e
case of panels sagging.
3.7.3.4 The locking elements and their fixings shall be resistant to shock, and be made
or reinforced with metal.
3.7.3.5 The engagement of the locking elements shall be achieved in such a way that a
force in the opening direction of the door does not diminish the effectiveness
of locking.
3.7.3.6 The lock shall resist a minimum force at the level of the lock and in the direction
of opening of the door of:
(a) 1000 N in the case of sliding doors;
(b) 3000 N on the locking pin, in the case of hinged doors.
3.7.3.7 The locking action shall be effected and maintained by the action of gravity, o r
springs. The springs shall act by compression, be guided and of such
dimensions that, at the moment of unlocking, the coils are not compressed
solid.
In the event of the spring no longer fulfilling its function, gravity shall not cause
unlocking.
3.7.3.8 The locking device shall be protected against the risk of an accumulation o f
dust which could hinder its proper functioning.
3.7.3.9 Inspection of the working parts of the locking device shall be easy, as, for
example, by use of a vision panel.
3.7.3.10 In the case where the door lock safety contacts are in a box, the fixing screws
for the cover shall be of the captive type, so that they remain in the holes in the
cover or box when opening the cover.
3.7.4 Emergency Unlocking

Each of the landing doors shall be capable of being unlocked from the outside
with the aid of a key which will fit the unlocking triangle as defined in Clause
3.1.
Keys of this type shall only be available to a competent lift worker.
- 43 -
Section E Part 1 1
After an emergency unlocking, the locking device shall not be able t o remain in
the unlocked position with the landing door closed, when there is no action to i
unlock. i
In the case of landing doors driven by the car door, a device (either weight or 1
I
springs) shall ensure the automatic closing of the landing door if this door
becomes open, for whatever reason, when the car is outside the unlocking
zone.
3.7.5 Electrical Device for Proving the Landing Door Closed I

1
Each landing door shall be provided with an electrical safety device in

conformity with Clause 10.2 for proving the closed position so that the
conditions imposed by Clause 3.7.2 are satisfied.
In the case of horizontally sliding landing doors coupled with car doors, this I
device may be in common with the device for proving the locked condition,
provided that it is dependent upon the effective closing of the landing door.
i
In the case of hinged landing doors, this device shall be placed adjacent to the
closing edge of the door or on the mechanical device proving the closed
condition of the door.
3.7.6 Requirements Common to Devices for Proving the Locked Condition and the
Closed Condition of the Door
It shall not be possible, from positions normally accessible t o persons, to

operate the lift with a landing door open or unlocked, during or after one
single action (which is not a part of the normal operating sequence).
The means used to prove the position of a locking element shall have positive
operation. The term 'positive operation' which requires that the means of
proving locking shall not depend upon the use of springs, etc., as required for
safety contacts in Clause 10.2.2.
3.7.7 Sliding Doors with Multiple Panels Mechanically Linked
3.7.7.1 Directly Mechanically Linked Panels
When sliding door comprises several panels which are directly mechanically
linked, it is permitted:
(a) t o lock only one panel, on condition that this single docking will prevent
the opening of the other panels;
(b) to place the door closed proving device laid down in Clause 3.7.5 on a
single panel (the rapid panel in the case of telescopic doors). A labyrinth
formed by folding back the sheet metal of each panel of a telescopic door
- 44 - Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights resewed.

I
11
Section E Port 1
and latching the rapid panel t o the slow panel when in the closed position
is considered a direct mechanical linkage.
3.7.7.2 Indirectly Mechanically Linked Panels
When the panels are indirectly mechanically linked (e.g. by rope, belt or chain)
such linkage shall be designed to resist any normally anticipated forces, be
constructed with special care, and checked periodically.
It is permitted t o lock only one panel on condition that this single locking will
prevent the opening of the other panels, and that these panels are not fitted
with a handle. The closed position of the other panel(s), not locked by the
locking device, shall each be proved by an electrical safety device in conformity
with Clause 10.2.
4.1 Height of Car

The interior clear height of the car shall be at least 2 m.
The clear height of the car entrance($ for the normal access of users shall be at
least 2 m.

To prevent an overloading of the car by persons, the available area of the car
shall be limited. To this end the relationship between rated load and maximum
available car area is given in table 1. Recesses and extensions, even of height
less than 1 m, whether protected or not by separating doors, are only permitted
if their area is taken into account in the calculation of maximum available car
area.

An industrial truck loaded freight lift shall be capable t o sustain static load,
during loading and unloading, of 150% of the rated load.
A vehicle lift shall have a minimum rated load of 330 kg/m2 of the available car
area and shall be capable to sustain static load of 150% of the rated load.
- 45 -
Section E Part 1
Table 1
Relationship between Rated Load and
Maximum Available Car Area
Maximum Maximum
Rated Load Available Car Rated Load Available Car
(kg) Car Area (m2) (kg) Car Area (m2)
100 (a) 0.37 900 2.20
180 (b) 0.58 975 2.35
225 0.70 1000 2.40
300 0.90 1050 2.50
375 1.10 1125 2.65
400 1.17 1200 2.80
450 1.30 1250 2.90
525 1.45 1275 2.95
600 1.60 1350 3.10
630 1.66 1425 3.25
675 1.75 1500 3.40
750 1.90 1600 3.56
800 2.00 2000 4.20
825 2.05 2500 (c) . .-? 5.00
i:
(a) Minimum for 1 person lift I
(b) Minimum for 2 person lift ti
(c) Beyond 2500 kg add 0.1 6 m2 for each extra 100 kg
For intermediate loads the area is determined by linear

interpolation.

The number of passengers t o be displayed (see Clause 11.2.1) shall be obtained
either by dividing the rated load by 75 kg and round down the result to the
nearest whole number, or from table 2, whichever gives the smaller value.
- 46 -
Section E Part 1
Table 2
Relationship between Number of Passenger and
Minimum Available Car Area
Number of Minimum Available Number of Minimum Available

Passengers Car Area (m2) Passengers Car Area in (m2)
1 0.28 11 1.87
2 0.49 12 2.01
3 0.60 13 2.15
4 0.79 14 2.29
5 0.98 15 2.43
6 1.17 16 2.57
7 1.31 17 2.71
8 1.45 18 2.85
9 1.59 19 2.99
10 1.73 20 3.13
Beyond 20 passengers add 0.1 15 m2for each extra passenger.

Every lift shall be provided with an overload device which shall be of a fail safe
design, and be arranged in such a way that the functioning of the device will
not be hampered by excessive overloading of the lift car. The overload device
shall operate when the load in the car exceeds 110% of the rated load and,
upon operation, it shall prevent the power operated doors from closing and the
lift car from moving. In addition, it shall give audible and visual signals inside
the car.
4.3 Car Enclosure

The car shall be completely enclosed by walls, floor and roof. The only
permissible openings are :
(a) entrances provided with car doors for the normal access of users;
(b) emergency trap doors and doors;
(c) ventilation apertures.
-47-
Section E Part 1
The walls, floor and roof shall have sufficient mechanical strength. The
assembly comprising the sling, guide shoes, walls, floor and roof of the car shall
have sufficient mechanical strength to resist the forces which will be applied in
normal lift operation, in safety gear operation or impact of the car on its buffers.
Each wall of the car shall have a mechanical strength such that during the
application of a force of 300 N being evenly distributed over an area of 500
mm2 in round or square section, is applied at right angles to the wall, at any
point, from the inside of the car towards the outside, the wall shall :
(a) resists without any permanent deformation, and
(b) resists without elastic deformation greater than 15 mm.
The car roof shall satisfy the requirements of Clause 4.12.
Material
The walls, floor, roof and decorative panels etc. shall not be made of materials
likely to become dangerous through too great flammability or through the
nature and quantity of gas and fumes they may generate. The use of safety
glass for walls and decorative panels is permitted.
Toe Guards
Each car sill shall be fitted with a toe guard which extends to the full width of
the clear landing entrance which it faces. This vertical section shall be extended
downwards by a chamfer whose angle with the horizontal plane shall be
greater than 60'. The projection of this chamfer on the horizontal plane shall
be not less than 20 mm. The height of the vertical portion shall be at least 750
mm.
Car Doors
Imperforate Doors and Special Case
The car doors shall be imperforate. Doors and their frames shall be constructed
in such a way that they will not become deformed in the course of time.
Special Case: Power operated vertically sliding car doors shall only be permitted
in freight lifts and vehicle lifts. These doors may be of mesh or perforated panel
construction. The dimensions of the mesh or perforation shall not exceed 10
mm horizontally and 60 mm vertically.
Door panels made of glass shall comply with Clause 8.6.7.2 of EN 81-1.
name of the supplierltrade mark, type of glass and thicknesslconfiguration.
- 48 -
Section E Part 1
For all automatic power operated horizontally sliding car doors, means for
minimizing the risk of dragging children's hands into the gaps between the car
door panels and uprights shall be provided.
4.5.2 Complete Enclosure

The car doors when closed shall, apart from the necessary clearances,
completely close the car entrances.
4.5.3 Clearances
The clearance between panels (when closed), or between panels and uprights,
lintels or sills, shall not exceed 6 mm. This value shall be as small as possible and,
due t o wear, may increase but shall not exceed 10 m m in any case.
This clearances are measured at the back of any recesses, if present. To avoid
the risk of shearing during door operations the inner face (facing the lift car) of
automatically operated sliding doors shall not have recesses or projections
exceeding 3 mm. Edges of these shall be chamfered in both direction of
movement. Exception is made for vertically sliding doors, according t o Clause
4.5.1 special case.
4.5.4 Hinged Doors

Hinged doors shall strike stoppers to prevent them from swinging outside the
car.
4.5.5 Vision Panels

Where vision panels are provided in car doors of any lift, they shall conform to
the following conditions :
(a) mechanical strength as specified in Clause 3.2.2;
(b) the size and shape of the vision panel shall be such that it will not permit
the passage of a sphere having a diameter of 100 mm, have a minimum
glazed area per car door of 0.015 m2 with a minimum of 0.01 m2 per
vision panel of a width;
(c) minimum thickness of 6 m m of a width of at least 60 mm and at most

150 mm;
(d) no part of the panel shall be at a height of less than 1 m above the floor
of the car:
(e) the vision panel shall be made of an approved material or glass of a

tempered or laminated type; and
- 49 -
Section E Part 1
I
(f) if such door is a sliding door, the vision panel shall be flush with the
surface of the door closest to the car.
Ii
I/
4.5.6 Sills, Guides and Door Suspension I1

The provisions of Clause 3.4 relevant to car doors shall be observed.

Car doors, together with their locks, shall possess sufficient mechanical strength
such that in the locked condition and when a force of 300 N being evenly
distributed over an area of 500 mm2 in round or square section, is applied at
right angles to the door, at any point, from the inside of the car towards the
outside,
they shall :
(c) operate satisfactorily after such a test.

The doors and the surrounds shall be designed in such a way as to minimize the
risk of damage or injury due to jamming of a part of a person, clothing or other
object.
Power operated doors shall be designed to minimize the harmful consequences

of a person being struck by a door panel.

measured after the first third of the travel of the door.
The kinetic energy of the car door and of the mechanical elements which are
rigidly connected to it, calculated or measured at the average closing speed, as
in Clause 3.5.2.1, shall not exceed 10 J.

-50-
Section E Part 1
(a) The effect of the device may be neutralized during the last 50 m m of
(b) In the case of a system which makes the sensitive protective device
inoperative after a fixed period of time, to counteract persistent
obstructions when closing the door, the kinetic energy defined above shall
not exceed 4 J and an audible alarm shall sound during movement of the
door with the protective device inoperative.
(c) A single beam light ray alone is considered insufficient.
In addition, a door re-open button shall be provided on the car operating panel,
which, upon activation, shall initiate re-opening of the door.
For a lift for persons with a disability, a sensitivity protective device shall be
provided t o automatically initiate re-opening of the door in the event of a
person being struck or about to be struck by the door in crossing the entrance
during the closing movement.
(a) A detection equipment of the protective device shall be positioned at a

height of not less than 500 mm and not more than 600 mm above the
floor of the car, to initiate re-opening of the door in the event of a person
who is about to be struck.
(b) The effect of the device may be neutralized during the last 50 mm of
(c) Door forced-closing system as described in Clause 4.6.2.2(b) shall not be

provided.
(d) A single beam light ray (or similar device) alone is considered insufficient.
In addition, a door re-open button shall be provided on the car operating panel,
which, upon activation, shall initiate re-opening of the door.

If the closing of the doors is carried out under the continuous control of the
users (e.g. by constant pressure on a button) and the kinetic energy calculated
or measured as indicated in Clause 4.6.2.1 exceeds 10 J, the average closing
speed of the fastest panels shall be limited to 0.3 mls.

This type of sliding door shall only be permitted if all the following conditions
are fulfilled simultaneously:
-51 - Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights reserved

Section E Part 1
(a) it is used in a freight lift or vehicle lifts;
(b) the closing of the door is carried out under the continuous control of the
users: and
(c) the average closing speed of the door panels is limited t o 0.3 mls; 1
I
4.6.5 Other Type of Doors
.1
No collapsible door shall be opened by mechanical power for a distance of
more than a quarter of the total width of the door.
4.7 Electrical Device for Proving the Car Doors Closed I

1
1
A car door locking device shall be protected against deliberate misuse. The
design, operation and test of the car door locking device shall be equivalent t o /
that of the landing door locking device, and shall be type tested t o the
requirements of Clause F . l of EN 81: Part 1. The test can be carried out by a
notified body. To allow time for complying with new requirement, the test of
car door locking device completed by the respective manufacturer' or a third
1' I
party testing institution in accordance with the requirements of EN 81 may be

accepted as alternative t o the type test carried out by the notified body.
It shall not be possible in normal operation t o start the lift nor keep it in motion
~
if a car door (or any of the panels in the case of a multi-panel door) is open.
Operation of the lift with car door open is permitted under the conditions laid
down in Clause 3.7.2.
Each car door shall be provided with an electrical safety device in conformity
with Clause 10.2 for proving the closed position so that the conditions imposed
above are satisfied.
I
4.8 Sliding Doors with Multiple Panels Mechanically Linked
I
I
4.8.1 Directly Mechanically Linked Panels I
When a sliding door comprises several directly mechanically linked panels, it is
permitted:
(a) to place the door closed proving device laid down in Clause 4.7 on a
single panel (the rapid panel in the case of telescopic doors);
(b) to place the door closed proving device on the door driving element if the
mechanical connection between this element and the panels is direct;
(c) t o lock (see Clause 4.9) only one panel, on condition that this single
'The manufacturer of car door locking device has in place a quality assurance system certified by a notified
body.
- 52 -
Reproduced w~ththe perrniss~onof CEN - O all rights reserved.
Section E Part I
locking prevents the opening of the other panels (by hooking the panels
in the closed position in the case of telescopic doors).
4.8.2 Indirectly Mechanically Linked Panels

When the panels are indirectly mechanically linked (e.g. by rope, belt or chain)
such means of linkage shall be designed to resist any normally anticipated
forces, be constructed with special care and examined periodically.
It is permitted t o place the door closed proving device on a single panel,

provided that,
(a) this is not the driven panel, and
(b) the driven panel is directly mechanically linked to the door driving element.

Every car door shall be mechanically locked by at least 7 mm such that it can
only be opened in the unlocking zone of a landing.
The operation of the lift shall automatically depend on the locking of the car
door except in the case covered by Clause 3.7.2.
This locking shall be proved by an electrical safety device in conformity with

Clause 10.2, unless the horizontal distance between the wall of the well and
the sill or entrance frame of the car is within 150 mm.
4.1 0 Opening the Car Door

In order t o permit passengers to leave the lift car, if the lift stops for any reason
close to a landing, it shall be possible with the car stopped and the supply to
the door operator (if any) disconnected:-
(a) to open or partly open the car door by hand from the landing;
(b) to open or partly open the car door together with the landing door linked
to it if they are coupled, by hand from within the car if the car is stopped
within the unlocking zone.

Assistance to passengers in the car shall always come from outside, being
provided in particular by the emergency operation mentioned in Clause 8.5.
4.1 1.1 Emergency Trap Doors

The car of every lift shall be provided with an emergency trap door for use on
occasions of emergency. It shall be formed in the roof of the car; and
I
I - 53 -
Section E Part 1
(a) (i) conform t o the requirements of Clauses 4.3.2 and 4.3.3;
(ii) be designed and constructed such that it can be opened only from
outside the car without a key and shall not open towards the inside
of the car;
(iii) be provided with a means for manual locking after closing; and
(iv) measure at least 350 mm x 500 mm, or of a size able to pass

through a sphere of 400 mm in diameter vertically.
(b) Fixing of the emergency trap door in the closed position by means of
suitable spot welding of the door onto the car roof may be allowed
subject t o the method employed being in conformity with any of the four
types as stipulated in the drawing at Appendix I.
4.1 1.2 Emergency Doors

Car side emergency doors may be used in the case of adjacent cars provided
the horizontal distance between cars does not exceed 0.75 m. If emergency
doors exist, the provisions of Clause 4.1 1.l(a)(i), (ii), (iii) shall apply, except that
the doors shall open towards the inside of the car, and they shall measure at
least 1.8 m high and 0.35 m wide.
4.1 1.3 Locking of the Emergency Trap Doors and Emergency Doors
The locking called for shall be proved by means of an electrical safety device in
The device shall cause the lift to stop if the locking ceases to be effective and
shall, in the case of emergency trap door, actuate the buzzer (or alarm bell) as if
the emergency alarm push button in the lift car is pressed (see Clause 10.3.3.1)
and also cause the car top ventilation fan to stop.
Restoring the lift to service shall only be possible after deliberate relocking.
4.12 Car Roof
4.12.1 Car Roof as a Working Platform

The car roof shall conform to the requirements of Clauses 4.3.2 and 4.3.3, and
shall satisfy the following additional requirements :
(a) it shall be able to support two persons, i.e. able to resist a vertical force of
2000 N at any position without permanent deformation;
(b) it shall provide at one point a clear area for standing of at least 0.12 m2,
in which the lesser dimension is at least 0.25 m: and
- 54 -
Section E Part 1
(c) it shall be so designed with balustrade when required as not to allow

accidental falling of people from the roof. Balustrade shall be required
when the horizontal distance between the edge of the car roof and the
corresponding wall of the lift well exceeds 0.5 m.
4.1 2.2 Pulleys on Car Roof

If there are pulleys fixed to the car sling, they shall be provided with effective
devices to avoid :
(a) bodily injury;
(b) the suspension ropes, if slack, leaving their grooves;
(c) the introduction of objects between ropes and grooves.
These devices shall be so constructed as not t o hinder inspection or

maintenance of the pulleys.
In the case of chains, similar arrangements shall be made.
4.1 3 Car Header

If an empty space can exist between the car roof and the header of a landing
door when this door is opened, the upper part of the car entrance shall be
extended upwards, over the whole width of the landing door, by a rigid vertical
panel to fill the empty gap considered.
4.14 Equipment on Top of the Car

The following shall be installed on top of the car
(a) inspection operation control device in conformity with Clause 10.3.1.3;
(b) stopping device in conformity with Clause 10.3.2 and 11.3; and
(c) socket outlet in conformity with Clause 9.6.2.
4.1 5 Ventilation
4.15.1 Cars with imperforate doors shall be provided with ventilation apertures in the
upper and lower parts of the car. The car shall be provided with adequate
mechanical ventilation under normal operation with a capacity of 10 air
changes per hour with car doors closed.
4.1 5.2 The effective area of ventilation apertures situated in the upper part of the car
shall be at least 1% of the available car area, and the same also applies for the
apertures in the lower part of the car.
-55-
Section E Part 1
The gaps round the car doors may be taken into account in the calculation of 1
4.15.3
the area of ventilation apertures, up t o 50% of the required effective area.
Ventilation apertures shall be built or arranged in such a way that it is not

I
possible to pass a straight rigid rod 10 mm in diameter through the car walls
from the inside.
4.1 6
4.16.1
Lighting and Emergency Lighting
The car shall be provided with electrical lighting that is permanently illuminated
I
ensuring a light intensity of at least 50 lux at floor level and on the control
devices.
4.16.2 If lighting is of the incandescent type, there shall be at least two lamps
connected in parallel.
4.16.3 There shall be an emergency light of at least a 1W lamp fed by an automatically

rechargeable emergency supply which is capable of feeding it alone for at least
2 h in case of an interruption of the normal lighting supply. This emergency
lighting shall come on automatically upon failure of the normal lighting supply.
The charger shall be capable of fully re-charging the batteries in not more than
12 hours.
4.1 7 Counterweight
4.17.1 If the counterweight incorporates filler weights, necessary measures shall be
taken to prevent their displacement. To this effect the filler weights shall be
installed in a frame and shall be properly secured.
4.17.2 If pulleys are fixed to the counterweight they shall be provided with devices to
avoid:
(a) the suspension ropes, if slack, leaving the grooves;
(b) the introduction of objects between ropes and grooves.
The devices shall be so constructed as not t o hinder inspection or maintenance

of the pulleys.
In the case of chains, similar arrangements shall be made.
4.17.3 In case of a drum drive, there shall be no counterweight.
Every counterweight shall, from a height of 300 mm above the floor of the lift
pit to a height of not less than 2.1 m above such floor, be screened so that
worker in the pit would not accidentally come into contact with a moving
counterweight. It is permissible to raise the bottom of the counterweight
screen to clear the compensating chain 1 rope / means or other equipment. The
bottom of the counterweight screen shall be as low as possible and shall be at
- 56 -
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights reserved,
Section E Part 1
least 300 mm below the lowest parts of the counterweight resting on a fully
compressed counterweight buffer.
Suspension, Compensation, Safety Gear and Overspeed Governor
Types of Suspension
Cars and counterweights shall be suspended from steel wire ropes, or steel
chains with parallel links (Galle type) or roller chains.
The ropes shall correspond t o the following conditions:
(a) the nominal diameter of the ropes shall be at least 8 mm;
(b) the tensile grade of the wires shall be:
(1) 1570 N/mm2 or 1770 N/mm2 for ropes of single tensile;
(2) 1370 N/mm2 for the outer wires and 1770 N/mm2 for the inner
wires of ropes of dual tensile;
(c) the other characteristics (construction, extension, ovality, flexibility,

tests ....) shall correspond to those specified in BS302 : Part 1 and Part 4,
or IS0 4344, or other relevant international standards.
The chains shall be steel plate link chains such as leaf chains complying with
BS5594 or IS0 4347;
or steel roller chains complying with 85228 or IS0 606, or other relevant
international standards.
Number of Ropes or Chains

The minimum number of suspension ropes (or chains) shall be two and they
shall be independent.
Where reeving is used the number to take into account is that of the ropes or
chains and not the falls.
Ratio between Diameters of Sheaves and Ropes

The ratio between the pitch diameter of sheaves, or pulleys (or drums), and the
nominal diameter of the suspension ropes shall be at least 40, regardless of the
number of strands of the ropes.
Safety Factor of Ropes and Chains

The safety factor of the suspension ropes shall be calculated according t o
Annex N of EN 81-1. The safety factor of the suspension ropes shall be at least:
-57-
Section E Port 1
(a) 12 in the case of traction drive with three ropes or more;
(b) 16 in the case of traction drive with t w o ropes;
(c) 12 in the case of drum drive.
The safety factor is the ratio between the minimum breaking load (N) of one
rope and the maximum force (N) in this rope, when the car is stationary at the
lowest level, with its rated load.
The safety factor of the suspension chains shall be at least 10.
The safety factor is defined in a manner analogous to that indicated in Clause

5.4.1 for ropes.
Rope and Chain Terminations
The junction between the rope and the rope terminations, according to Clause
5.5.2, shall be able to resist at least 80% of the minimum breaking load of the
rope.
The ends of the ropes shall be fixed to the car, counterweight or suspension
points of the dead parts of reeved ropes by means of metal or resin filled
sockets, self tightening wedge type sockets, heart shaped thimbles with at least
three suitable rope grips, hand spliced eyes, ferrule secured eyes, or any other
system with equivalent safety.
The fixing of the ropes on the drums shall be carried out using a system of
blocking with wedges, or using at least two clamps or any other system with
equivalent safety.
The ends of each chain shall be fixed t o the car, counterweight or suspension
points of the dead parts of reeved ropes by suitable terminations. The junction
between the chain and the chain termination shall be able to resist at least
80% of the minimum breaking load of the chain.
Rope Traction
Rope traction shall be such that the following three conditions are fulfilled:
(a) the car shall be maintained at floor level without slip when loaded to
125% (150% in the case of industrial truck loaded freight lift or vehicle
lift) of the rated load;
(b) it shall be ensured that any emergency braking causes the car, whether
empty or with rated load, to decelerate with a value not exceeding the
setting of the buffer, including reduced stroke buffer;
(c) it shall not be possible to raise the empty car when the counterweight is
- 58 -
Section E Pa3 1
resting on the buffers and the lift machine is rotated in the "up" direction.
Rope traction design considerations shall comply with Annex M of EN81-1.
Winding Up of Ropes for Positive Drive Lifts
The drum which can be used in the conditions laid down in Clause 8.2(b) sha II
be helically grooved and the grooves shall be suited to the ropes used.
When the car rests on its fully compressed buffers, one and a half turns of rope
shall remain in the grooves of the drum.
There shall only be one layer of rope wound on the drum.
The angle of deflection (fleet angle) or the ropes in relation to the grooves sha II
not exceed 4'.
Distribution of Load between Ropes or Chains
An automatic device shall be provided for equalizing the tension of suspension

ropes or chains, at least at one of their ends. If springs are used to equalize the
tension they shall work in compression.
For chains engaging with sprockets, the ends fixed to the car as well as the end
fixed to the counterweight shall be provided with such equalization devices.
For chains in the case of multiple return sprockets on the same shaft, these
sprockets shall be able to rotate independently.
In case of two rope or t w o chain suspension of the car an electrical safety

device in conformity with Clause 10.2 shall cause the lift to stop in case o f
abnormal relative extension of one rope or chain.
The devices for adjusting the length of ropes or chains shall be made in such a
way that these devices cannot work themselves loose after adjustment.
Compensation
Compensating chains (bare metallic chains) may be used if the rated speed o f
the lift does not exceed 2.5 mls.
Whenever compensating ropes are used, the following shall apply:

(a) tensioning pulleys shall be used;
(b) protection for tensioning pulleys shall be provided according t o Clause
5.10;
(c) the ratio between the pitch diameter of the tensioning pulleys and t h e
nominal diameter of the compensating ropes shall be at least 30;
(d) the tension shall be provided by gravity; and
-59-
I
(e)
Section E Port 1
the minimum tension shall be checked by an electrical safety device in
I
5.9.3 For lifts whose rated speed does not exceed 3.5 mls, compensating means (in 1
the form of suspended lines made up of metallic chain embedded in a sheath
made of plastic or similar material, cables or belts) other than chains or ropes
may be used, and the following shall apply:
(a) devices shall be provided to retain the compensating means to their
travelling paths; 1
(b) the compensating means shall be connected to the bottom of the lift car
and the counterweight such that the pitch distance of the compensating
means shall be not less than the minimum pitch diameter of the return
loop formed by the same compensating means (with the ends of the
compensating means being suspended to form a "U" and with the plumb
lines joining the return loop tangentially); and
(c) the tension shall be provided by gravity.
\
1
5.9.4 For lifts whose rated speed exceeds 3.5 mls there shall be, in addition to the
requirements of Clause 5.9.2, an anti-rebound device (see Clause 1.5.1.4).
The operation of the anti-rebound device shall initiate the stopping of the lift
1
machine by means of an electrical safety device in conformity with Clause 10.2.
5.10 Protection for Traction Sheaves, Pulleys and Sprockets

5.10.1 For traction sheaves, pulleys and sprockets, provisions shall be made according
to Table 2 of EN 81-1 to avoid:
(a) bodily injury;
(b) the ropesfchains leaving the pulleyslsprockets, if slack; and
(c) the introduction of objects between ropeslchains and pulleyslsprockets.
5.10.2 The devices used shall be constructed so that the rotating parts are visible, and
inspection or maintenance operation will not be hindered. If they are
perforated the gaps shall comply with Table 4 of EN 294. The dismantling shall
be necessary only in the following cases:
(a) replacement of a ropelchain;
(b) replacement of a pulleyfsprocket;
(c) re-cutting of the grooves.
5.1 1 Safety Gear
5.1 1.1 General Provisions !

The car shall be provided with a safety gear capable of operating in the
downward direction and capable of stopping a car carrying the rated load, at 1
- 60 - Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights resewed.
Section E Part 1
the tripping speed of the overspeed governor, even if the suspension devices
break, by gripping the guide rails, and of holding the car there.
A safety gear operating in upward direction may be used in accordance with

Clause 5.13.
In the case where there is accessible void beneath lift pit, the counterweight
shall also be equipped with safety gear, operating only on a downward moving
counterweight, capable of stopping it, at the tripping speed of the overspeed
governor (see Clause 5.1 1.3), by gripping the guide rails, and of holding the
counterweight there.
The safety gear shall be type tested t o the requirements of Appendix F. 3 of

855655: Part 1, or EN81: Part 1, or other relevant international standards.
5.1 1.2 Use of Different Types of Safety Gear
Car safety gear shall be of the progressive type if the rated speed of the lift
exceeds 1 mls. It can be:
(a) of the instantaneous type with buffered effect if the rated speed does not
exceed 1 mls; or
(b) of the instantaneous type if the rated speed does not exceed 0.63 mls.
If the car carries several safety gears they shall all be of the progressive type.
The safety gear of the counterweight shall be of the progressive type if the
rated speed exceeds 1 mls, otherwise the safety gear may be of the
instantaneous type.
5.1 1.3 Tripping Method
The safety gear of the car and counterweight shall each be tripped by its own
overspeed governor. The safety gear of the counterweights may be tripped by the
failure of the suspension gear or by a safety rope if the rated speed does not
exceed 1 mls. In the latter case the requirements for safety ropes shall be those
specified for the overspeed governor rope (see Clause 5.12.6).
The tripping of safety gears by devices which operate electrically, hydraulically or

pneumatically is forbidden.
5.1 1.4 Retardation
For progressive safety gear the average retardation in the case of free fall with
rated load in the car shall lie between 0.2 g, and 1.0 g,.
5.1 1.5 Release
-61 - Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights resewed

Section E Part 1
I
5.1 1.5.1 When a safety gear has tripped its release shall require the intervention of a I
I
competent lift worker. 1
5.1 1.5.2 The release and automatic reset of a safety gear on the car or counterweight shall
I
only be possible by raising the car or counterweight.
5.1 1.6 Constructional Conditions

5.1 1.6.1 Jaws or blocks of safety gears shall not be used as guide shoes. 1:
5.1 1.6.2 For safety gear of the instantaneous type with buffered effect, the design of the
buffering systems shall be of the energy accumulation type with buffered return I
movement or the energy dissipation type, satisfying the requirements of Clause

6.2.3 or 6.2.4. I
5.1 1.6.3 If the safety gear is adjustable, the final setting shall be sealed
5.1 1.7 Inclination of the Car Floor on Operation of Safety Gear

When the car safety gear operates, the floor of the car without or with the load
uniformly distributed shall not incline more than 5 % from its normal position.
5.1 1.8 Electrical Checking on Operation of Safety Gear
When the car safety gear is engaged, an electrical safety device in conformity with
Clause 10.2, mounted on the car shall initiate the stopping of the machine before
or at the moment of safety gear operation.
5.1 2 Overspeed Governor
5.1 2.1 General Provisions

The overspeed governor shall be type tested to the requirements of Appendix F.4
of BS5655: Part 1 or EN81 : Part 1, or other relevant international standards.
5.12.2 Tripping Speed for the Car Overspeed Governor

Tripping of the overspeed governor for the car safety gear shall occur at a
speed at least equal to 115% of the rated speed and conform to Table 3:
- 62 - Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights reserved.

"
I,,
1
;
Section E Port 1
Table 3
Relationship between Governor Tripping Speed,
Tvoe
,, of Safetv Gear and Rated Soeed
Maximum Rated Type of Safety Gear Maximum Governor
Speed Tripping Speed
0.63 m/s Instantaneous type, except captive 0.8 m/s
roller type
0.63 m/s Captive roller Instantaneous type 1 m/s
1.0 m/s Instantaneous type with buffered 1.5 m/s
effect
1.0 m/s Progressive type 1.5 m/s
Exceeding 1.0 m/s Progressive type 1.25V + 0.25N m/s
For avoidance of doubt, Table 3 shall not be used to determine the maximum
tripping speed for ascending car overspeed protection means.
For lifts where the rated speed exceeds 1 m/s, it is recommended t o choose a
tripping speed as close as possible to the upper limit indicated in the table.
For lifts with very heavy rated loads and low rated speeds, the overspeed
governor shall be specially designed for this purpose. It is recommended t o
choose a tripping speed as close as possible t o the lower limit.
5.1 2.3 Tripping Speed for the Counterweight Overspeed Governor
The tripping speed of an overspeed governor for a counterweight safety gear

shall be higher than that for the car safety gear according t o Clause 5.12.2, but
not exceeding it by more than 10%.
5.1 2.4 Tensile Force

The tensile force in the overspeed governor rope produced by the governor,
when tripped, shall be at least the greater of the following two values:
(a) either 300 N, or
(b) twice that necessary to engage the safety gear,
Overspeed governors using only traction to produce the force shall have
grooves which:
(a) have been submitted to an additional hardening process; or
(b) have an undercut in accordance with Annex M of EN 81-1.
5.1 2.5 Direction of Rotation

The direction of rotation, corresponding t o the operation of the safety gear,
shall be marked on the overspeed governor.
- 63 -
Section E Part 1
5.1 2.6 Overspeed Governor Rope

The overspeed governor shall be driven by a very flexible wire rope with a
nominal rope diameter of at least 6 mm. The rope shall be tensioned by a
tensioning pulley. This pulley (or its tensioning weight) shall be guided.
The breaking load of the rope shall be related by a safety factor of at least 8 t o
the tensile force produced in the rope of the overspeed governor when tripped;
and the ratio between the pitch diameter of the overspeed governor pulley and
the nominal rope diameter shall be at least 30.
During the engagement of the safety gear, the governor rope and its
attachments shall remain intact, even in the case of a braking distance greater
than normal. The rope shall be easily detachable from the safety gear.
The breakage or slackening of the rope shall cause the motor to stop by means
of an electrical safety device in conformity with Clause 10.2. The device shall
be of the bi-stable type requiring manual reset.
5.1 2.7 Response Time

The response time of the overspeed governor before tripping shall be
sufficiently short not to permit a dangerous speed to be reached before the
moment of safety gear operation.
5.1 2.8 Accessibility

5.12.8.1 The overspeed governor shall be accessible and reachable for inspection and
maintenance.
5.12.8.2 If located in the well the overspeed governor shall be accessible and reachable
from outside the well.
5.12.8.3 The requirement of Clause 5.12.8.2 does not apply if the following three
conditions are fulfilled:
(a) the tripping of the overspeed governor according to Clause 5.12.9 is

effected by means of a remote control, except cableless (i.e. the use of
any wireless remote control is not acceptable), from outside the well
whereby an involuntary tripping is not effected and the actuation device is
not accessible to unauthorized persons; and
(b) the overspeed governor is accessible for inspection and maintenance from
the roof of the car or from the pit; and
(c) the overspeed governor returns, after tripping, automatically into the
normal position, as the car or counterweight is moved in the upward
direction.
- 64 -
Section E Part 1
However the electrical parts may return into the normal position by remote
control from the outside the well which shall not influence the normal function
of the overspeed governor.
5.12.9 Test Tripping of the Overspeed Governor

During checks or tests it shall be possible to operate the safety gear at a lower
speed than that indicated in Clauses 5.12.2 and 5.12.3 by tripping the
overspeed governor in a safe way.
5.1 2.1 0 Sealing

If the overspeed governor is adjustable, the final setting shall be sealed
5.12.1 1 Electrical Checking on Operation of Overspeed Governor

The overspeed governor, or another device if the safety gear is to be tripped by
the failure of the suspension gear or by a safety rope, shall by means of an
electrical safety device in conformity with Clause 10.2, initiate the stopping of
the lift machine before the car speed, either up or down, reaches the tripping
speed of the governor.
However, for rated speeds not exceeding 1 mls, this device may operate at
latest at the moment when the tripping speed of the governor is reached.
5.1 2.1 2 Release

If after release of the safety gear (Clause 5.1 1.5) the overspeed governor does
not automatically reset itself, an electrical safety device in conformity with
Clause 10.2 shall prevent the starting of the lift while the overspeed governor is
not in the reset position. This device shall, however, be made inoperative in the
case provided for in Clause 10.3.1.4(b).
Return to service of the lift shall be by a competent lift worker,
5.13 Ascending Car Overspeed Protection Means

A traction drive lift shall be provided with ascending car overspeed protection
means conforming to the following:
5.13.1 The means, comprising speed monitoring and speed reducing elements, shall
detect uncontrolled movement of the ascending car at a minimum of 115% of
the rated speed, and maximum as defined in Clause 5.12.3, and shall cause the
car to stop, or at least reduce its speed to that for which the counterweight
buffer is designed.
5.13.2 The means shall be capable of performing as required in Clause 5.13.1 without
assistance from any lift component that, during normal operation, controls the
-65-
Section E Part 1
speed or retardation, or stops the car, unless there is built-in redundancy.
A mechanical linkage t o the car, whether or not such linkage is used for any
other purpose, may be used t o assist in this performance.
5.13.3 The means shall not allow a retardation of the empty car in excess of 1 g,
during the stopping phase.
5.13.4 The means shall act:
(a) to the car, or
(b) to the counterweight, or
(c) on the rope system (suspension or compensating), or
(d) on the traction sheave (e.g. on the sheave directly or on the same shaft in
the immediate vicinity of the sheave).
5.13.5 The means shall operate an electrical safety device in conformity with Clause
10.2 if it is engaged.
5.13.6 When the means has been activated, its release shall require the intervention of
a competent worker.
5.13.7 The release of the means shall not require the access t o the car or the
counterweight.
5.1 3.8 After its release, the means shall be in a condition to operate.
5.13.9 If the means requires external energy to operate, the absence of energy shall
cause the lift to stop and keep it stopped. This does not apply for guided
compressed springs.
5.13.10 The speed monitoring element of the lift t o cause the ascending car overspeed
protection means to actuate shall be, either:
(a) a governor conforming t o the requirements of Clause 5.12; or
(b) a device conforming to Clauses 5.12.2, 5.12.3, 5.12.7, 5.12.8, 5.12.9,

5.12.12, and where equivalence to 5.12.4, 5.12.6 and 5.12.10 is assured.
5.13.11 The ascending car overspeed protection means is regarded as a safety

component and shall be type tested to the requirements of Annex F.7 of EN81-
1, or other relevant international standards.
5.1 4 Protection Against Unintended Car Movement

A traction drive lift shall be provided with a means to stop unintended car
movement away from the landing with the landing door not in the locked
- 66 -
Section E Part 1
position and the car door not in the closed position, as a result of failure in any
single component of the lift machine or drive control system upon which the
safe movement of the car depends, except failure of the suspension ropes or
chains and the traction sheave or drum or sprockets of the machine. (Note: A
failure of the traction sheave includes a loss of traction.) The means shall
conform to the following:
5.14.1 The means shall detect unintended movement of the car away from the landing
and cause the car t o come to a stop at the latest in a distance of 1200 mm as
measured from the landing sill.
5.14.2.1 Subsequent t o operation of the unintended car movement protection means

for an upward moving lift car, the clearance between the landing door sill and
the apron of the stopped lift car shall not exceed 200 mm and the free
distance from car sill to landing door lintel shall not be less than 1000 mm.(See
Figure 1)
5.14.2.2 Subsequent to operation of the unintended car movement protection means

for a downward moving lift car, the horizontal distance between the sill or
entrance frame of the stopped lift car and the wall of the well, from the
landing sill to 1200 mm downward, shall not exceed 150 m m and the free
distance from landing sill to car door lintel shall not be less than 1000 mm.
(See Figure 2).
5.14.3 The means shall be capable of performing as required in Clause 5.14.1 without
assistance from any lift component that, during normal operation, controls the
speed or retardation, or stops the car, unless there is built-in redundancy and
the correct operation is self-monitored.
-67-
Section E Port 1
Machine brake according to 8.4.2 is considered to have built-in redundancy.
5.14.4
A mechanical linkage to the car, whether or not such linkage is used for any
other purpose, may be used t o assist in this performance.
The means shall not allow a retardation of the car, with any load up to 100%
I1
of the rated load, in excess of 1 g, during the stopping phase.
1
The means shall conform to the requirements of Clauses 5.13.4 - 5.13.9.
The speed reducing element of the ascending car overspeed protection means
It
may be used t o stop the car as required in Clause 5.14.1.
5.14.5 The means shall detect unintended movement of the car, cause the car to stop,
;G
5.14.6
and keep it stopped.
The stopping element of the means, or the means keeping the car stopped may
i
be common with those used for preventing overspeed in down direction, or
preventing ascending car overspeed. The stopping elements of the means may
be different for the down direction and for the up direction.
5.14.7 In case of using the machine brake as the means, self-monitoring could include
verification of correct lifting or dropping of the brake mechanism or verification
of braking force. If a failure is detected, next normal start of the lift shall be
prevented.
The unintended car movement protection means is regarded as a safety

component and shall be type tested to the requirements of Annex F.8 of EN81-
1, or other relevant international standards.
6. Guides, Buffers, Final Limit Switches and Obstruction Switch
6.1 Guides

The guides shall comply with BS5655 Part 9 or I S 0 7465 or other relevant
The car and counterweight shall each be guided by at least two rigid steel
guides throughout the travel.
For rated speeds exceeding 0.4 mls, or when progressive safety gear is used,
the guides shall be made from drawn steel, or the rubbing surface shall be
machined.
6.1.2 Strength of Guides and Brackets -11

1
-68-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all r~ghtsresewed.
Section E Part 1
The strength of the guides, their attachments and joints shall be sufficient t o
withstand the forces imposed due to the operation of the safety gear and
deflections due t o uneven loading of the car. These deflections shall be limited
t o values that will not affect the normal operation of the lift.
The fixing of the guides to their brackets and to the building shall permit
compensation, either automatically or by simple adjustment, of effects due to
normal settling of the building or shrinkage of concrete. No resilient materials
such as isolation pad or neoprene pad is allowed to be added between the
guides and walls. A movement of the attachments by which the guide rails
could be released shall be prevented.
Guide brackets shall be provided at intervals of not more than 3.5 m unless
otherwise justified and shall be embedded into the walls enclosing the liftway,
or fixed to such walls by bolts embedded into such walls, or by anchor bolts.
A rotation of the attachments by which the guide could be released shall be

prevented.
6.2 Car and Counterweight Buffers

Energy accumulation type buffers with buffered return movement, and energy
dissipation type buffers shall be type tested to the requirements of Appendix
F.5 of BS5655: Part 1, or EN81 : Part 1, or other relevant international standards.
Buffers shall be placed at the bottom limit of travel for cars and counterweights.
If the buffers travel with the car or counterweight they shall strike against a
pedestal at least 0.5 m high at the end of the travel. Positive drive lifts shall, in
addition, be provided with buffers on the car top to function at the upper limit
of travel. If the positive drive lifts are provided with counterweights, these
upper buffers shall not function until the counterweight buffers are fully
compressed.
6.2.2 Energy Accumulation Type Buffers

Energy accumulation type buffers may only be used if the rated speed of the lift
does not exceed 1 mls.
The total possible stroke of the buffers shall be at least equal t o twice the
gravity stopping distance corresponding to 115% of the rated speed, (i.e. 2 x
0.0674 V* metres). In any case it shall not be less than 65mm.
Buffers shall be designed to cover the stroke defined above under a static load
of between 2.5 and 4 times the sum of the mass of the car and its rated load
(or the mass of the counterweight).
-69-
Section E Part 1
6.2.3 Energy Accumulation Type Buffers with Buffered Return Movement

Energy accumulation type buffers with buffered return movement may only be
used if the rated speed of the lift does not exceed 1.6 mls.
The other requirements of Clause 6.2.2 shall apply to this type of buffer.
6.2.4 Energy Dissipation Type Buffers

Energy dissipation type buffers may be used whatever the rated speed of the lift.
6.2.4.1 Normal Buffer Stroke
The total possible stroke of the buffers shall be at least equal to the gravity
stopping distance corresponding to 115% of the rated speed, i.e. 0.067 v2
metres.
6.2.4.2 Reduced Buffer Stroke
When the retardation of the lift at the ends of its travel is monitored according
to the requirements of Clause 8.8, the speed at which the car (or
counterweight) comes into contact with the buffers may be used instead of the
rated speed, when calculating the buffer stroke according to Clause 6.2.4.1.
However, the stroke shall not be less than :
(a) 50% of the stroke calculated according t o Clause 6.2.4.1 if the rated
speed does not exceed 4 mls;
The stroke shall not be less than 420 mm,
(b) 33 113 % of the stroke calculated according to Clause 6.2.4.1 if the rated
speed exceeds 4 mls;
The stroke shall not be less than 540 mm,
6.2.4.3 Retardation
With the rated load in the car, in the case of free fall, the average retardation
during action of the buffers shall not exceed g,. Retardation of more than 2.5
g, shall not be longer than 0.04 s. The speed of impact on the buffers to be
considered is equal t o that for which the stroke of the buffer is calculated (see
\. Clauses 6.2.4.1 and 6.2.4.2).
x
....-
6.2.4.4 Electrical Checking on Buffer Operations
The operation of the lift shall depend on the return of the buffers t o their
normal extended position after operation. The device for checking this shall be
an electrical safety device in conformity with Clause 10.2.
6.2.4.5 Checking of Fluid Level
- 70 -
Section E Part 1
Hydraulic buffers shall be so constructed that the fluid level may easily be
checked.
6.3 Final Limit Switches

Final limit switches shall be set to function as close as possible to the terminal
floors, without risk of accidental operation.
They shall operate before the car (or counterweight if there is one) comes into
contact with the buffers. The action of the final limit switches shall be
maintained whilst the buffers are compressed
6.3.2 Control
6.3.2.1 Separate control devices must be used for normal terminal stopping and final
limit switches.
6.3.2.2 In the case of positive drive lifts, control of the final limit switches shall be
effected:
(a) either by a device linked to the movement of the machine, or
(b) by the car and by the counterweight, if there is one, at the top of the well,
or
(c) if there is no counterweight, by the car at the top and the bottom of the
well.
6.3.2.3 In the case of traction drive lifts, control of the final limit switches shall be
effected:
(a) either directly by the car at the top and bottom of the well, or
(b) by a device which is indirectly linked t o the car, e.g. by a rope, belt or
chain. In this case, breakage of or slack in this linkage shall cause the
machine to stop by means of an electrical safety device in conformity with
Clause 10.2.
6.3.3 Method of Operation

6.3.3.1 The final limit switches shall :
(a) for positive drive lifts, open directly by mechanical separation of the
circuits feeding the motor and brake. Provisions shall be made so that the
motor cannot feed the brake solenoid.
-71 -
Section E Part 1
(b) for traction drive lifts, single or two speed, either
(1) break the circuits according t o (a) above, or
(2) open, by an electrical safety device in conformity with Clause 10.2,

the circuit directly supplying the coils of the t w o contactors, the
contacts of which are in series in the circuits supplying the motor
and brake. Each of these contactors shall be capable of breaking
the circuit under load.
(c) in the case of variable voltage or continuously variable speed lifts, cause
the rapid stopping of the machine.
After the operation of the final limit switches, the return t o service of the lift
shall only be effected by the intervention of a competent lift worker.
If there are several limit switches at the top and bottom of the well respectively,
at least one of them shall prevent movement in both directions, and this one,
after operation, shall require the intervention of a competent lift worker to
return the lift to service.
Obstruction Switch
General Provisions
A safety device shall be provided to protect human and the equipment when
the car or counterweight meets an obstruction when moving downwards.
Method of Operation :Positive Drive Lifts
Positive drive lifts shall have a slack rope or slack chain device which shall be an
electrical safety device in the conformity with Clause 10.2 t o open the control
circuit and cause the lift to stop if the car (or counterweight) meets an obstacle
when moving downwards.
Method of Operation :Traction Drive Lifts
Traction drive lifts shall incorporate a device t o cause the lift t o stop, and keep it
stopped, if:
(a) when a start is initiated, the lift machine does not rotate; or
(b) the car (or counterweight) is stopped in downward movement by an

obstacle which causes the ropes to slip on the traction sheave.
This device shall function in a time which does not exceed the smaller of the
following two values :-
(a) 45 seconds;
- 72 -
Section E Part 1
(b) time for travelling the full travel, plus 10 seconds, with a minimum of 20
seconds if the full travel time is less than 10 seconds.
This device shall not affect the movement of the car under either the inspection
operation or the emergency electrical operation.
Clearances Between Car and Lift Well Wall, and Between Car and Counterweight
Between Car and Wall Facing the Car Entrance

The horizontal distance between the sill of the car and sill of the landing doors
shall not exceed 35 mm.
The horizontal distance between the car door and the closed landing doors or
the access distance between the doors during the whole of their normal
operation shall not exceed 120 mm.
The horizontal distance between the wall of the well and the sill or entrance
frame of the car shall be within 150 mm, unless an electrical safety device in
conformity with Clause 10.2 is provided to prove the locking of the car door.
This safety device cannot be in common with the device for proving the closed
condition of the car door.
7.2 Between Car and Counterweight

The car and its associated components shall be at a distance of at least 50 mm
from the counterweight (if there is one) and its associated components.
8. Lift Machine

Each lift shall have at least one machine of its own. Every machine, pulley,
governor and other similar equipment connected with the lift shall be so
supported and fixed as to prevent it from becoming loose or being displaced.
8.2 Drive of the Car and the Counterweight

Two methods of drive are permissible:
(a) by traction (use of sheaves and ropes);
(b) by positive drive if the rated speed does not exceed 0.63 mls, i.e.:
(1) either use of a drum and ropes without counterweights, or
(2) use of sprockets and chains. The calculations of the driving elements
shall take into account the possibility of the counterweight, if there
- 73 -
Section E Part 1
is one, (or the car) resting on its buffers.
Use of Overhung Pulleys or Sprockets

In the case of the use of overhung traction sheaves or sprockets, effective
precautions shall be taken to avoid the following:
(a) the ropes leaving their grooves, or chains leaving their sprockets;
(b) objects lodging between the grooves and the ropes (or between sprockets
and chains) in the case where the machine is not above the well.
These precautions shall not prevent examination and servicing of traction

sheaves and sprockets.
Braking System
General Provisions
The lift shall be provided with a braking system which operates automatically:
(a) in the event of loss of the mains power supply;
(b) in the event of the loss of the supply to control circuits;
(c) in other events specified in the Code.
The braking system shall have a friction type electro-mechanical brake, but may,
in addition, have other braking means (e.g. electrical braking).
Electro-mechanical Brake
Braking load
This brake on its own shall be capable of stopping the machine when the car is
downward travelling at its rated speed and with a load equivalent to 125%
(1 50% in the case of industrial truck loaded freight lift and vehicle lift) of the
rated load. In these conditions the retardation of the car shall not exceed that
resulting from operation of the safety gear or stopping on the buffer. All the
mechanical components of the brake which take part in the application of the
braking action on the drum or disc shall be installed in two sets and be of
dimensions such that if one of the components was not working on the brake
drum or disc a sufficient braking effort to slow down the car when containing
the rated load would continue to be exercised. Any solenoid plunger is
considered to be a mechanical part, any solenoid coil is not.
Construction
The component (i.e. brake drum or disc) on which the brake operates shall be
- 74 -
Section E Part 1
coupled t o the traction sheave (or drum or sprocket). Braking shall be effected
by application on the brake drum or disc by at least t w o shoes, pads or callipers
The brake shoe pressure shall be exerted by guided compression springs or
weights and of asbestos free material. The brake linings used shall be
incombustible and of asbestos free material. In any case, band brakes are
forbidden.
8.4.2.3 Control and Methods of Operation
To hold off the brake, in normal operation, shall require a continuous flow of
current to the brake coil. The interruption of this current shall be effected by at
least two independent contactors, whether or not integral with those which
cause interruption of the current feeding the lift machine.
If, when the lift is stationary, one of the contactors has not opened the main
contacts, further movement shall be prevented, at the latest at the next change
in the direction of motion.
When the motor of the lift is likely to function as a generator, it shall not be
possible for the electrical device operating the brake t o be fed by the driving
motor.
Braking shall become effective without supplementary delay after opening of

the brake release circuit. (The use of a diode or capacitor connected directly to
the terminals of the brake coil is not considered as a means of delay). .
,
The operation of each set of the braking mechanism shall be positively
monitored t o prevent further operation of the lift machine, when any one set of
the braking mechanism is not functioning properly.
8.4.2.4 Manual Release
All machines shall be capable of having the brake released by hand and require
a constant effort to keep the brake open so that the emergency operation
specified in Clause 8.5.1 and other maintenance activities can be carried out.
Operating instructions shall be provided in the machine room.
The brake of a machine room-less lift can be released electrically with backup
batteries if no manual release is provided. This operation shall be carried out
safely by using maintenance access panel at the top landing. Operation
instructions shall be provided in the maintenance access panel.
8.5.1 Manual Operation

The machine shall be provided with a manual means of emergency operation
allowing the car to be moved to a landing with the aid of a smooth wheel,
which can be the sheave, flywheel or other smooth and round handwinding
device.
- 75 - Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights reserved,

Section E Part 1
If the wheel is removable, it shall be located in an easily accessible place in the

machine room,and shall be suitably marked if there is any risk of confusion as
to the machine for which it is intended. Operating instructions shall be
provided in the machine room.
For the machine room-less lift, the lift shall be provided with:-
(a) one set of car lifting tools for emergency operation such as chain block,
rope clamper, guide rail clamper, lever, shackle, etc.;
(b) portable weight for placing to car or compensation chain when balanced
load is occurred; and
(c) an emergency electrical operation device and emergency electrical brake

release switch (if no manual release is provided) according to 10.3.1.4,
1
1
which are placed in the maintenance access panel located outside the lift I
well.
i
8.5.2 Checking of Car Position in Machine Room
It shall be possible to check easily from the machine room whether the car is in
an unlocking zone. This check may be made, for example, by means of marks
on the suspension or governor ropes.
8.5.3 Emergency Electrical Operation

If the manual effort required in Clause 8.5.1 to move the car in the upward
direction with its rated load is greater than 400 N, a means of emergency
electrical operation from the machine room shall be provided in accordance
with Clause 10.3.1.4. ,i
8.6 Speed i
The speed of the lift car, half loaded, in downward motion, in mid-travel,
excluding all acceleration and deceleration periods, shall not exceed the rated
speed by more than 5%, when the supply is at its rated frequency, and the
motor voltage is equal t o the rated voltage of the equipment. In these
conditions, the speed shall not be lower than a value of 8% below the rated
speed.
8.7 Stopping the Lift Machine

I
The stopping of the machine by means of an electrical safety device, in
conformity with Clause 10.2, shall be controlled as detailed below.
8.7.1 Motors Supplied Directly From A.C. Mains

I\
The supply shall be interrupted by t w o independent contactors, the contacts of
- 76 -
Section E Part 1
which shall be in series in the supply circuit. If, whilst the lift is stationary, one
of the contactors has not opened the main contacts, further movement of the
car shall be prevented at the latest at the next change in the direction of
motion.
8.7.2 'Ward-Leonard' Drive System
8.7.2.1 Generator Excited by Classical Elements
Two independent contactors shall interrupt, either
(a) the motor generator loop, or
(b) the excitation of the generator, or
(c) one the loop and the other the excitation of the generator.
If, whilst the lift is stationary, one of the contactors has not opened the main
contacts, further movement of the car shall be prevented, at the latest at the
next change in direction of motion.
In cases (b) and (c) effective precautions shall be taken t o prevent the rotation
of the motor in the case of a residual field, if any, in the generator (e.g. suicide
circuit).
8.7.2.2 Generator Excited and Controlled by Static Elements
One of the following methods shall be used:
(a) the same methods as specified in Clause 8.7.2.1; or
(b) a system consisting of :
(1) a contactor interrupting the excitation of the generator or the motor

generator loop.
The coil of the contactor shall be released at least before each

change in direction of motion. If the contactor does not release,
any further movement of the lift shall be prevented;
(2) a control device blocking the flow of energy in the static elements;
and
(3) a monitoring device t o verify the blocking of the flow of energy

each time the lift is stationary.
If, during a normal stopping period, the blocking by the static elements is not
effective, the monitoring device shall cause the contactor to release and any
further movement of the lift shall be prevented.
-77-
Section E Part 1
Effective precautions shall be taken t o prevent the rotation of the motor in the
case of a residual field, if any, in the generator (e.9. suicide circuit).
8.7.3 Static Elements Drive System
One of the following methods shall be used :
(a) Two independent contactors interrupting the current to the motor.
If, while the lift is stationary, one of the contactors has not opened the
main contacts, any further movement shall be prevented, at the latest at
the next change in direction of motion; or
(b) a system consisting of :
(1) a contactor interrupting the current at all poles.

change in direction. If the contactor does not release, any further
movement of the lift shall be prevented;
(2) a control device blocking the flow of energy in the static elements;
and
(3) a monitoring device to verify the blocking of the flow of energy

each time the lift is stationary.
If, during a normal stopping period, the blocking by the static' elements is not
further movement of the lift shall be prevented.
8.8 Slowdown of the Lift in the Case of Reduced Stroke Buffers
8.8.1 Control
Devices shall check that the slowdown of the lift car is effective before arrival at
terminal landings, according to Clause 6.2.4.2.
If the slowdown is not effective these devices shall cause the car speed t o be
reduced in such a way that, if the car comes into contact with the buffers, the
striking speed shall not exceed that for which the buffers were designed.
If the device checking the slowdown is not independent of the direction of

travel, a device shall check that the movement of the car is in the intended
direction.
8.8.2 Methods of Operation
8.8.2.1 If these devices, or some of them, are placed in the machine room :
- 78 -
Section E Part 1
(a) they shall be operated by a device directly coupled to the car;
(b) the information relating t o the car position shall not depend on devices
driven by traction, friction, or by synchro-motors; and
(c) if a connection by tape, chain or rope is used to transmit the position of

the car to the machine room, breakage of or slack in such a connecting
device shall cause the machine to stop through the action of an electrical
safety device in conformity with Clause 10.2.
8.8.2.2 The control and functioning of these devices shall be so designed that together
with the normal speed regulation system there results a slowdown control
system complying with the requirements of Clause 10.2.
8.9 Rating of the Motor and Drive System

The motor and its drive system shall, in the case of industrial truck loaded
freight lift and vehicle lift, be rated sufficiently so that it can re-level a lift
carrying 150% of its rated load.
8.1 0 Guarding
Effective guarding shall be provided for accessible rotating parts which may be
dangerous, in particular:
(a) keys and screws in the shafts;
(b) tapes, chains, belts;
(c) gears, sprockets;
(d) projecting motor shafts; and
(e) fly-ball type overspeed governors.
Exception is made for handwinding wheels, brake drums and any similar
smooth, round parts. Such items shall be painted yellow, at least in part.
9.1.1 Limits of Application

9.1.1.1 The requirements specified in this Clause 9 relating to the installation and to
the constituent components of the electrical equipment apply :
(a) to the main switch of the power circuit of the lift and dependent circuits;
-79-
Section E Part 1
(b) to the switch for the car lighting circuit of the lift and dependent circuits.
The lift should be considered as a whole, in the same way as a machine with its
built in electrical equipment.
The Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations issued under the
Electricity Ordinance shall only apply as far as the input terminals of switches
referred t o in Clause 9.1.1.1 unless otherwise stated. They shall also apply to
the whole lighting circuit of the machine room, the pulley room and the lift well
and pit, as well as to the protective conductors in Clause 9.1.6.
Protection against Direct Contact
In the machine and pulley rooms, protection against direct contact is necessary,
by means of casings providing a degree of protection of at least IP 1X in
accordance with BS5490 or IEC 529; and BS5420 or IEC 144, or other relevant
Insulation Resistance
The resistance of the insulation between conductors and between conductors

and earth shall be greater than 1000 o h m N with a minimum of :
(a) 500,000 ohm for power circuits and electric safety device circuits;
(b) 250,000 ohm for other circuits (controls, lighting, signalling, etc.),
Voltage for Control and Safety Circuits
The mean value in direct current or the r.m.s. value in alternating current of the
voltage between conductors or between conductors and earth, shall not exceed
250 V for control and safety circuits.
Separate Neutral and Earth Conductors
The neutral conductor and the earth-continuity conductor (protective conductor)

shall always be separate.
Bonding of Metallic Parts to Main Earthing Terminal
The machine frames, controller frames, governor frames, face plates of landing
buttons and indicators, casing of electrical safety devices, and other similar
exposed metallic parts, including guide rails, of t h e l i f t which carry electrical
equipment, shall be bonded to the main earthing terminal of the main switches
laid down in Clause 9.4 by supplementary bonding through protective
conductors.
Contactors, Relay Contactors, Components of Safety Circuits
- 80 -
Section E Port 1
9.2.1 .I The main contactors (i.e. those necessary to stop the machine as per Clause 8.7)
shall belong to the following categories as defined in 855424 : Part 1, or IEC
158 or other relevant international standards.
(a) AC-3 for contactors for a.c. motors.
(b) DC-2 for contactors for d.c. motor.
These contactors shall in addition allow 10% of starting operations t o be made

as inching.
9.2.1.2 If, because of the power they carry, relay contactors must be used t o operate
the main contactors, those relay contactors shall belong t o the following
categories as defined in 854794: Part 1, or IEC 337 or other relevant
(a) AC-1 1 for controlling a.c. electromagnets.
(b) DC-11 for controlling d.c. electromagnets,
9.2.1.3 Both for the main contactors referred t o in Clause 9.2.1.1 and for the relay
contactors referred to in Clause 9.2.1.2, it may be assumed in the measures
taken to comply with Clause 10.1.2 that :
(a) if one of the break contacts (normally closed) is closed, all the make
contacts are open;
(b) if one of the make contacts (normally open) is closed, all the break
contacts are open.
9.2.2.1 When devices as per Clause 9.2.1.2 are used as relays in a safety circuit, the
assumption of Clause 9.2.1.3 shall also apply.
9.2.2.2 if relays are used which are such that the break and make contacts are never
closed simultaneously for any position of the armature, the possibility of partial
attraction of the armature (see Clause 10.1.2(f)) can be disregarded.
9.2.2.3 Devices (if any) connected after electrical safety devices shall meet the
requirements of Clause 10.2.2.2 as regards the creep distances and the air gaps
(not the separation distances).
This requirement does not apply to the devices mentioned in Clauses 9.2.1.1,
9.2.1.2 and 9.2.2.1 and which themselves fulfil the requirements of 855424:
Part 1 or IEC 158; and 854794: Part 1 or IEC 337; or other relevant
-81 - Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights reserved

Section E Port 1

9.3.1 Motors directly connected t o the mains shall be protected against short-
circuiting.
9.3.2 Motors directly connected to the mains or lift motors driven by 'Ward-Leonard'
system, shall have each of its winding be protected against overloads by means
of manual reset (except as provided for in Clause 9.3.3) automatic circuit-
breakers or fuses which shall cut off the supply to the motor in all live
conductors.
9.3.3 When the detection of overloads operates on the basis of temperature

increases in the windings of the motor, the circuit-breaker may be closed
automatically after sufficient cooling down has taken place.
9.4 Main Switches

Machine rooms shall contain, for each lift, a main switch capable of breaking
the supply t o the lift on all the live conductors. This switch shall be capable of
interrupting the highest current involved in normal conditions of use of the lift.
It shall have stable open and closed positions.
This switch shall not cut the circuits feeding :
(a) car lighting or ventilation;
(b) socket outlets on the car roof, in the machine room and pit;
(c) lighting or ventilation of machine and pulley room and lift well; and
(d) alarm device.
9.4.2 Accessibility and Identification
(a) The main switch, or its control mechanism (see Clause 9.4.2(b) below) shall
be easily and rapidly accessible from the entrance(s) t o the machine room.
If the machine room is common to several lifts, the main switches, or the
control mechanism of the main switches shall allow the lift concerned t o be
identified easily. Each of the switch shall be clearly marked the lift
identification number and its purpose.
(b) If the machine room has several points of access, or if the same lift has
several machine rooms each with its own point(s) of access, a circuit
breaker contactor may be used, release of which shall be controlled by
electrical safety devices in conformity with Clause 10.2, positioned at these
access points, inserted in the supply circuit to the coil of the circuit breaker
- 82 -
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights reserved,
Section E Part 1
contactor. The re-engagement of the circuit breaker contactor shall not be
carried out or made possible except by means of the device which caused
its release. The circuit breaker contactor shall be used in conjunction with a
manually controlled isolating switch.
9.4.3 Group of Lifts

In the case of a group of lifts, if, after the opening of the main switch for one lift,
parts of the operating circuits remain live, these circuits shall be capable of being
separately isolated in the machine room, if necessary by breaking the supply to
all the lifts in the group.
9.4.4 Power Factor Correction Capacitor

Any capacitors to correct the power factor shall be connected before the main
switch of the power circuit.
If there is a risk of over-voltage, when for example the motors are connected by
very long cables, the switch of the power circuit shall also interrupt the
connection t o the capacitors.

The conductors and cables in the machine room and lift wells, with the
exception of travelling cables, shall be selected from those specified in 856004.
856007 and 856500; or IEC 227 and IEC 245; or other relevant international
standards.
9.5.1.1 Cables such as those listed in table 1 and table 2 of BS6004 (or the equivalent
in IEC 227 or other relevant international standards) and table 19 of 856500 (or
the equivalent in IEC 245 or other relevant international standards) shall be
installed in conduits or trucking made of either metal or plastics or shall be
protected in a similar manner. They shall not be used for machine power
circuits.
9.5.1.2 Rigid cables shall only be used in visible mountings fixed to the wall of the well
or of the machine room or installed in ducting trucking or similar fittings.
9.5.1.3 Ordinary flexible cables such as those listed in table 6 (H05RR-F) and table 16
(H05W-F) of BS6500 (or the equivalent in IEC 245 or other relevant
international standards) shall be routed through ducting, trucking, or fittings
which provide equivalent protection.
Flexible cables with a thick sheath shall be considered to be rigid cables in the
conditions specified in Clause 9.5.1.2.
These flexible cables may also be used to connect to movable appliances except

Section E Port 1
i
as travelling cables for connection to the car or if they are subject to vibration.
6
?
Travelling cables shall comply with BS6977, or relevant IEC standards or
CENELEC Harmonisation Documents, or relevant international standards.
I
9.5.1.4 The requirements of Clauses 9.5.1 .I, 9.5.1.2 and 9.5.1.3 need not apply t o :
(a) conductors or cables not connected t o electric safety devices on landing

doors, provided that :
I
(1) they are not subject t o a rated output of more than 100 VA; and
(2) the voltage, between poles (or phases) or between a pole (or one of
the phases) and earth, to which they are normally subject does not
exceed 50 V;
(b) the wiring of operating or distribution devices in cabinets or on panels:
(1) either between different pieces of electrical equipment, or
(2) between these pieces of equipment and the connection terminals.

In these instances the requirements of BS5486 or IEC 439 or other relevant
international standards shall apply instead.
The cross-sectional area of the conductors of electrical safety circuits of doors

shall be not less than 0.75 mm2.
9.5.3.1 The electrical installation shall be provided with the indications necessary t o
make it easy to understand.
9.5.3.2 Connections, connection terminals and connectors, except those defined in

Clause 9.1.2, shall be located in cabinets, boxes or on panels provided for this
purpose.
9.5.3.3 If, after the opening of the main switch or switches of a lift, some connection
terminals remain live, they shall be clearly separated from terminals which are
not live, and if the voltage exceeds 50 V, they shall be suitably marked.
9.5.3.4 Connection terminals whose accidental interconnection could lead to a

dangerous malfunction of the lift shall be clearly separated unless their method
of construction obviates this risk.
9.5.3.5 In order to ensure continuity of mechanical protection, the protective sheathing

of conductors and cables shall fully enter the casings of switches and appliances,
or shall terminate in a suitably constructed gland.
- 84 -
Section E Pat 1
Enclosed frames of landing and car doors are regarded as appliance casings,
However, if there is a risk of mechanical damage due to movement of pa6 o r

sharp edges of the frame itself, the conductors connected to the electric safety
device shall be protected mechanically.
9.5.3.6 If the same ducting or cable contains conductors whose circuits have diffeient
voltages, all the conductors or cables shall have the insulation specified f o r t h e
highest voltage.
9.5.4 Connectors
Connectors and devices of the plug-in type placed in safety circuits shall be so
designed and arranged that, if their withdrawal does not require the use o f a
tool, it is impossible to re-insert the plug incorrectly.
9.6.1 Lighting
The supplies to the electric lighting of the car, the well, the machine roomand
the pulley rooms shall be independent of the supply t o the machine, either
through another circuit or through connection t o the machine supply circuit o n
the supply side of the main switch or the main switches laid down in Clause 9.4.
The supply to socket outlets required on the car roof, in the machine and pulley
rooms and in the pit, shall be independent of the supply to the machine and
can be taken from the circuits referred t o in Clause 9.6.1.
These socket outlets shall be either of type 2P + PE, 250 V in accordance with
BS1363 (or other relevant international standards), or supplied at a safety
extra-low voltage, in accordance with the Code of Practice for the Electricity
(Wiring) Regulations issued under the Electricity Ordinance.
The use of the above socket outlets t o BS1363 (or other relevant international
standards) does not imply that the supply cable has a cross-sectional area
corresponding to the rated current of the socket outlet. The cross-sectional
area of the conductors may be smaller, provided that the conductors are
correctly protected against excess currents.
9.6.3.1 A switch shall control the supply to the circuit of each lift car. (If the machine
room contains several lift machines it is necessary t o have one switch per car).
This switch shall be located inside the machine room close to the corresponding
main power switch. It shall be clearly marked with the lift identification and its
- 85 -
Section E Part 1
purpose.
9.6.3.2 A switch shall control the supply to the circuit of each machine room. This
switch shall be located inside and close to the access t o the machine room. It
shall be clearly marked with its purpose.
9.6.3.3 A switch shall control the supply t o the circuit of each well and pit. This switch
shall be located inside and close to the access to the machine room. It shall be
clearly marked with the lift identification and its purpose.
9.6.3.4 Each circuit controlled by the switches laid down in Clauses 9.6.3.1, 9.6.3.2 and
9.6.3.3 shall have its own protection.
9.7 Telecommunication Cabling and Signal Transmission Devices

9.7.1 Cabling and signal transmission devices enabling telecommunication at the lift
car may be installed in the machine room and lift well subject to the following,
(a) all the cabling and signal transmission devices comply with the "Code of
Practice for the Protection of Workers and Members of Public against
Non-Ionizing Radiation Hazard from Radio Transmitting Equipment"
issued by the Office of the Telecommunications Authority;
(b) the telecommunication cabling and signal transmission devices, and the
electromagnetic signals emanated from them shall not affect safety and
operation of the lift(s) within the vicinity; and
(c) all components of the signal transmission devices requiring frequent

inspections and checking are not installed inside the lift well. Where
antenna is to be attached t o the lift car, it should preferably be placed
inside the lift car and above the drop ceiling.
1.0.1 Protection Against Electrical Faults

Any one of the faults envisaged in Clause 10.1.2 in the electrical equipment of
the lift shall not, on its own, be the cause of a dangerous malfunction of the lift.

The following faults are envisaged in the electrical equipment of the lift
(a) absence of voltage;
(b) voltage drop;
- 86 -
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all r~ghtsresewed.
Section E Part 1
(c) loss of continuity of a conductor;
(d) insulation fault in relation to the metalwork or the earth;
(e) short circuit or open circuit, change of value or functions in an electrical

component such as resistor, capacitor, transistor, lamp;
(f) non-attraction or incomplete attraction of the moving armature of a

contactor or relay;
(g) non-separation of the moving armature of a contactor or relay;
(h) non-opening of a contact;
(i) non-closing of a contact; or
Q) phase reversal
The non-opening of a contact in case (h) need not be considered in the case of
safety contacts conforming t o the requirements of Clause 10.2.2.

When a circuit in which there is an electrical safety device in conformity with
Clause 10.2 is short-circuited to earth as in case (d) in Clause 10.1.2, it shall :
(a) either cause the immediate stopping of the machine, or
(b) prevent restarting of the machine after the first normal stop.
The return to service shall not be possible except by a competent lift worker.
10.1.4 Post-Voltage-Dip-Operation
The lift operation may stop, when a voltage dip occurs. A post-voltage-dip-
operation means shall be provided to:
(a) send the car to a landing and open the car and landing doors t o release
the passengers, or
(b) resume the normal operation of the lift,
after the restoration of the normal power supply. The lift shall not restart, if
further lift operation will lead t o a dangerous situation.
-87-
Section E Port 1
10.2.1.1 During operation of one of the electrical safety devices listed in Clause 10.4,
movement of the machine shall be prevented or it shall be caused t o stop
immediately as indicated in Clause 10.2.4. The electrical safety devices shall
consist of:
(a) either one or more safety contacts satisfying Clause 10.2.2 directly cutting
the supply to the contactors referred to in Clause 8.7 or their relay
contactors: or
(b) safety circuits satisfying Clause 10.2.3, consisting of either :
(1) one or more safety contacts satisfying Clause 10.2.2 not directly
cutting the supply to the contactors referred to in Clause 8.7 or
their relay contactors, or
(2) contacts not satisfying the requirements of Clause 10.2.2, or
(3) components in accordance with Annex H of EN81-1.
10.2.1.2 Apart from exceptions permitted in the Code (see Clauses 10.3.1.2, 10.3.1.4
and 10.3.1.8), no electrical equipment shall be connected in parallel with an
electrical safety device.
10.2.1.3 The effects of internal or external induction or capacity shall not cause failure of
electrical safety devices.
10.2.1.4 An output signal emanating from an electrical safety device shall not be altered
by an extraneous signal emanating from another electrical device placed further
down the same circuit or from telecommunication cabling and signal
transmission devices installed in the machine room or lift wells, which would
cause a dangerous condition to result.
10.2.1.5 In safety circuits comprising two or more parallel channels, all information other
than that required for parity checks shall be taken from one channel only.
10.2.1.6 Circuits which record or delay signals shall not, even in event of fault, prevent
or appreciably delay the stopping of the machine through the functioning of an
10.2.1.7 The construction and arrangement of the internal power supply units shall be
such as t o prevent the appearance of false signals at outputs of electrical safety
devices due to the effects of switching.
In particular, voltage peaks arising from normal operation of the lift or other
equipment on the network shall not create inadmissible disturbances in
electronic components (noise immunity).
- 88 -
Section E Pat 1
The operation of a safety contact shall be by positive separation of the circuit-

breaking devices. This separation shall occur even if the contacts have welded
together.
Positive separation is achieved when all the contact-breaking elements a r e

brought to their open position and when for a significant part of the travel
there are no resilient members (e.g. springs) between the moving contactsand
the part of the actuator to which the actuating force is applied.
The design shall be such as to minimize the risk of a short-circuit resulting from
component failure.
10.2.2.2 Type of Safety Contacts and Protective Enclosure
The safety contacts shall be provided for a rated insulation voltage of 250V if
the enclosure provides a degree of protection of at least IP 4X in accordance
with EN 60529, or 500 V if the degree of protection of the enclosure isless
than IP 4X.
The safety contacts shall belong to the following categories as defined in EN

60947-5-1 :
(a) AC-15, for safety contacts in ac circuits.
(b) DC-13, for safety contacts in dc circuits.
If the protective enclosure is equal or less than IP 4X, the clearances shall be a t
least 3 mm, the creepage distances shall be at least 4 mm and the distances for
breaking contacts at least 4 mm after separation. If the protection is better
than IP 4X, the creepage distance can be reduced to 3 mm.
Under extreme conditions of external influence, the live parts of safety contacts
shall be accommodated in an appropriate protective enclosure. However,
protective enclosure needs not be provided in the case of external influences
considered as normal in the Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring)
Regulations issued under the Electricity Ordinance or similar regulations issued
by internationally recognized professional institutions.
In the case of multiple breaks, the distance after separation between t h e

contacts shall be at least 2 mm.
Abrasion of conductive material shall not lead to short circuiting of contacts.
- 89 -
Section E Part 1
10.2.3 Safety Circuits

Safety circuits shall comply with the requirements of Clause 10.1 . I relating t o
the appearance of a fault. In addition, they shall be designed in line with the
logic shown in Appendix Ill such that :
(a) If one fault combined with a second fault can lead to a dangerous
situation, the lift shall be stopped at the latest at the next operating
sequence in which the first faulty element should participate. All further
operation of the lift shall be impossible as long as this fault persists. I
The possibility of the second fault occurring after the first, and before the 1
lift has been stopped by the sequence mentioned, is not considered.
(b) If two faults which by themselves do not lead to a dangerous situation,

when combined with a third fault can lead to a dangerous situation, the
lift shall be stopped at the latest at the next operating sequence in which
one of the faulty elements should participate.
The possibility of the third fault leading to a dangerous situation before
the lift has been stopped by the sequence mentioned above, is not
considered.
(c) If a combination of more than three faults is possible, then the safety
circuit shall be designed with multiple channels and a monitoring circuit
checking the equal status of the channels.
If a different status is detected the lift shall be stopped.
In case of two channels the function of the monitoring circuit shall be
checked prior t o a restart of the lift at the latest, and in case of failure, re-
starting shall not be possible.
(d) On restoration of the power supply after it has been disconnected,

maintenance of the lift in the stopped position is not necessary, provided
that during the next sequence stopping is reimposed in the cases covered
by Clauses 10.2.3(a), (b) and (c).
(e) In redundancy-type circuits measures shall be taken t o limit as far as

possible the risk of defects occurring simultaneously in more than one
circuit arising from a single cause.
Safety circuits containing electronic components are regarded as safety

components and shall be verified according to the requirements in Annex F. 6
of EN81-1.
10.2.4 Operation of Electrical Safety Devices
- 90 - Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights reserved.

Section E Part 1
When operating to ensure safety, an electrical safety device shall prevent the
setting in motion of the machine or initiate immediately its stopping. The
electrical supply to the brake shall likewise be broken.
The electrical safety devices shall act directly on the equipment controlling the
supply to the machine in accordance with the requirements of Clause 8.7.
If, because of the power to be transmitted, relay contactors are used to control
the machine, these shall be considered as equipment directly controlling the
supply to the machine for starting and stopping.
10.2.5 Control of Electrical Safety Devices

The components controlling the electrical safety devices shall be built so that
they are able to function properly under the mechanical stresses resulting from
continuous normal operation.
If the devices for controlling electrical safety devices are through the nature of
their installation accessible to persons, they must be so built that these electrical
safety devices cannot be rendered inoperative by simple means. A magnet or a
bridge piece is not considered a simple means.
In the case of redundancy-type safety circuits, it shall be ensured by mechanical

or geometric arrangements of the transmitter elements that a mechanical fault
shall not cause loss of redundancy.
For transmitter elements of safety circuits, the requirements of Annex F.6.3.1.I

of EN81-1 shall apply.
10.3 Electrical Controls
10.3.1 Control of Lift Operations

Control shall be effected electrically as stated in the following paragraphs.
10.3.1 . I Normal Operation
This control shall be by the aid of buttons or similar devices. These shall be
placed in boxes, such that no live parts are accessible.
The use of ropes, cords or rods as a means of control between the car and the
machine room is only permitted in very special cases (very humid, corrosive or
explosive atmosphere).
10.3.1.2 Levelling and Re-levelling Operation
In the specific case referred to in Clause 3.7.2 movement of the car with
landing and car doors open is permitted for levelling and re-levelling on
condition that:
-91 - Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights reserved

Section E Part 1
(a) The movement is limited to the unlocking zone. iI

(1) All movement of the car outside the unlocking zone shall be
prevented by at least one switching device mounted in the bridge or
shunt of the door and lock electrical safety devices.
(2) This switching device shall either:
be a safety contact satisfying the requirements of Clause 10.2.2, or

I1
1
be connected in such a way as to satisfy the requirements for safety
circuits in Clause 10.2.3.
II
(3) If the operation of the switches is dependent upon a device which is
indirectly mechanically linked t o the car, e.g. by rope, belt or chain,
the breaking of or slack in the connecting link shall cause the
machine to stop through the action of an electrical safety device in
(4) During levelling operations, the means for making the electrical
safety devices of doors inoperative shall only function after the
stopping signal for a landing has been given.
(b) The speed of levelling does not exceed 0.8 mls. On lifts with manually 1
controlled landing doors, there shall be a check that:
I
(1) for machines whose maximum speed of rotation is determined by
the fixed frequency of the supply, that the control circuit for the low
speed movement only has been energized;
(2) for other machines, the speed at the moment the unlocking zone is
reached does not exceed 0.8 mls.
I
1
(c) The speed of re-levelling does not exceed 0.3 mls. It shall be checked:
(1) for machines whose maximum speed of rotation is determined by

the fixed frequency of the supply, that the control circuit for the low
speed movement only has been energized;
for machines supplied from static convertors, that re-levelling speed I

(2)
does not exceed 0.3 mls. 1
10.3.1.3 Inspection Operation

I
To facilitate inspection and servicing, a readily accessible control station shall be 1
provided on the car roof. The device shall be brought into operation by a switch
(inspection operation switch) which shall satisfy the requirements for electrical
safety devices in conformity with Clause 10.2.
i
- 92 -
Section E Part 1
This switch, which shall be bi-stable, shall be protected against involuntary
operation.
The following conditions shall be satisfied simultaneously
(a) Engagement of the inspection operation shall neutralize the normal

controls, including the operation of any automatic doors and emergency
electrical operation.
The return to normal service of the lift shall only be effected by another
operation of the inspection switch.
If the switching devices used for this neutralization are not safety contacts
integral with the inspection switch mechanism, precautions shall be taken
to prevent all involuntary movement of the car in the event of one of the
faults listed in Clause 10.1.2 appearing in the circuit;
(b) The movement of the car shall be dependent on simultaneous constant

pressure on two push-buttons protected against accidental operation and
with the direction of movement clearly indicated on the station;
(c) The control device shall also incorporate a stopping device in conformity
with Clause 10.3.2;
(d) The car speed shall not exceed 0.63 mls;
(e) The limits of normal car travel shall not be overrun; and
(f) The operation of the lift shall remain dependent on the electrical safety
devices.
The control device may also incorporate special switches protected against
accidental operation for controlling the mechanism of doors from the car roof.
10.3.1.4 Emergency Electrical Operation
For machines where the manual effort t o raise the car with its rated load
exceeds 400 N an emergency electrical operation device in conformity with
Clause 10.2 shall be installed in the machine room. The machine shall be
supplied from the normal mains supply or from the standby supply if there is
one.
Operation of the emergency electrical operation device shall permit, from the
machine room, the control of car movement by simultaneous constant pressure
on two push-buttons protected against accidental operation. The direction of
movement shall be clearly indicated on the device.
After operation of the emergency electrical operation device, all movement of

the car except that controlled by this device shall be prevented. The effects of
the emergency electrical operation shall be overridden by switching on the
- 93 - Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights resewed

Section E Part 1
inspection operation,
The emergency electrical operation device shall render inoperative, by itself or

through another electrical safety device, the following electrical safety devices :-
(a) those mounted on the safety gear, according to Clause 5.1 I .8;
(b) those required for the overspeed governor, according t o Clauses 5.12.1 1
and 5.12.12;
(c) those mounted on the buffers, according to Clause 6.2.4.4;
(d) final limit switches, according to Clause 6.3; and
(e) those mounted on the ascending car overspeed protection means,

according t o Clause 5.13.5.
The emergency electrical operation device and its push-buttons shall be so

placed that the machine can readily be observed when using them.
The car speed shall not exceed 0.63 mls.
If the lift is also provided with an emergency electrical brake release switch,
which is placed in the maintenance access panel located outside the lift well,
the following conditions shall be satisfied simultanously:
(i) operation of the emergency electrical operation brake release switch

shall permit the brake release operation by switching the bi-stable
switch to brake release mode and applying a constant pressure on
one push-button, protected against accidental operation, when the
main power supply t o control cabinet is failed;
(ii) the emergency electrical brake release switch and its push-button
shall be so placed that the lift machine can be observed directly and
there should be a display device($ t o monitor the status of the lift car;
and
(iii) the emergency electrical brake release switch shall be supplied from
the essential supply or shall be backup by uninterruptible power
supply (UPS) Ibatteries.
10.3.1.5 Home Landing Operation
Every lift shall be provided with a facility to bring the lift t o the home landing in
case of fire by manually operated switch installed at the home landing floor or
Building Management Office. This switch shall only be operated when it is safe
for the lift to return to home landing. In the case the lift is a fireman's lift, the
home landing is the designated point of entry (see Section F of the Code).
When normal power fails, sufficient emergency power shall be available for the
sequential returning of the lifts to the home landing while the fireman's lift(s)
islare in operation. The operation of the fireman's lift(s) shall not be affected in
-94-
Reproduced with thepermission of CEN - O all rights reserved
Section E Part 1
any case. The emergency power for home landing operation need not be
provided, if no emergency generator is required for fire services installations at
the building.
10.3.1.6 Lift Operations with SecurityIFire Gates Installed in Front of Lift Entrances
No securitylfire gates shall be installed in front of any fireman's lift entrance.
If securitylfire gates of any types are installed in front of lift entrances at any
landings, their operation shall be interlocked with the lift control in such a way
that whenever any of these gates starts closing or is closed, any despatch
signals to send the lifts to the corresponding floors shall be cancelled and the
corresponding call buttons inside car shall be made inoperative. Call buttons at
the corresponding floors shall remain operative.
If securitylfire gates are installed in front of lift entrances at any landings, the
call buttons at the corresponding landings shall be so located t o render them
accessible t o one, if any, standing between the gate and the lift landing door.
10.3.1.7 Deleted
10.3.1.8 Landing Door Lock Bypassed Operation
A landing door bridging control station integrated with plug-and-socket switch

and bi-stable switch shall be provided in the machine room control panel for
each lift installed. The device shall be brought into operation by t w o switches
which shall be provided in the machine room and satisfy the requirements for
electrical safety devices in conformity with Clause 10.2. With regard t o
machine room-less lifts, the landing door bridging control station and the two
switches shall be provided in the maintenance access panel.
The specific switch neutralising the protections required in Clauses 3.7.3 and
3.7.5 shall be of plug-and-socket (positive mechanical separation) design whilst
the other switch bringing the lift t o inspection mode of operation shall be of bi-
stable type. The switches shall be protected against involuntary operation.
The following conditions shall be satisfied simultaneously :-
(a) Only when the plug-and-socket switch is engaged and the bi-stable
switch switched t o 'BYPASS' position shall the bypass of landing door
protections required in Clauses 3.7.3 and 3.7.5 be possible;
(b) When either of the switches is engaged, the lift shall be brought t o
inspection mode of operation in conformity with Clause 10.3.1.3.
Simultaneous bypass of both car door lock and landing door lock is forbidden.
The corresponding electrical terminals in the control panel landing door

interlocking circuit shall be appropriately covered to prevent the use of jumper
for short-circuiting.
- 95 -
Section E Part 1
The following information shall be displayed :-
(a) the word 'BYPASS SWITCH' (

switch;
@gg ) on or near the plug-and-socket
I
i
I
(b) the words 'NORMAL' (

stable switch.
IEg ) and 'BYPASS' ( @@ ) on or near the bi- 1
1
I
I
10.3.2 Stopping Devices
The stopping devices shall consist of electrical safety devices in conformity with
Clause 10.2. They shall be bi-stable and such that a return t o service cannot
result from an involuntary action. They shall stop, and maintain the lift out of
1
I
service.
II
ll
10.3.2.1 Stopping Device Inside the Car
Stopping devices in the car are prohibited if the car entrance is fitted with
imperforate door; and shall be provided if perforate or collapsible car door is
fitted.
I!
I
iI
8
~
1i~
10.3.2.2 Other Stopping Devices 11
,I
A device shall be provided for stopping, and maintaining the lift out of service,
including the automatically operated doors :
(a) on the car roof at 1 m maximum from the entry point for inspection by
servicing personnel (this device may be the one located next to the
inspection operation control if this is not placed more than 1 m from the
access point)(see Clause 4.14);
(b) on any high level platform in the machine room (see Clause 2.2.4);
(c) in the pulley room (see Clause 2.3.4); and
(d) in the pit (see Clause 1.5.4).
10.3.3 Emergency Alarm Device

10.3.3.1 General Provisions
An emergency alarm push button together with a buzzer (or an alarm bell), an
intercom and a closed circuit television (CCTV) camera shall be provided in the
lift car and be connected t o the building management office or the caretaker's
office, and the machine room (or the maintenance access panel locating at the
top floor for the machine room-less lift). The building management office or the
caretaker's office, and the machine room shall each be equipped with a buzzer
- 96 -
Section E Part 1
(or an alarm bell), indication light(s) (one for each lift), an intercom and a CCTV
monitor connected t o the lift car($. An alarm bell connected to the alarm push
button in the lift car shall also be provided at the main entrance lift lobby or lift
pit.
(a) If the intercom or the CCTV monitor in the building management office,
the caretaker's office or the machine room serves more than one lift or
other location, a selection switch (or similar device) shall be provided.
(b) Appropriate notices (in English and Chinese) shall be displayed next t o all
the equipment provided under this Clause 10.3.3, indicating the function
andlor operation of them.
(c) All the equipment, except CCTV, under this Clause 10.3.3 shall be backed
up by the emergency supply called for in Clause 4.16.3 or by an
equivalent supply.
(d) The buzzers (or alarm bells) shall ring and the indication lights shall be lit if
the alarm push button is pressed. The indication lights shall remain on
until they are manually reset by activation of a reset switch inside the
building management office or the caretaker's office upon releasing of
trapped passengers. The hook switch of an intercom handset shall not be
used as the indication lights reset switch.
(e) The sound generated by the buzzers (or alarm bells) shall be
distinguishable from that of fire alarms.
(f) If there is no building management office or caretaker's office in the

building, the indication light(s), reset switch, intercom and CCTV monitor
shall be placed at the main entrance lift lobby. A buzzer (or alarm bell, in
addition to the one provided at the main entrance lift lobby or lift pit) and
indication light(s) (one for each lift) shall also be provided at a remote
location with 24-hour attendance and backed up by an emergency supply
for at least 2 hours.
10.3.3.2 For Lift provided for Persons with a Disability
For a lift provided for persons with a disability, in addition t o the equipment
under Clause 10.3.3.1, an indication light for acknowledgement shall be
provided in the lift car. The indication light for acknowledgement shall be in the
form of a blinking light adjacent to the intercom speaker and a notice "When
light blinks, it indicates your emergency call has already been received. Please
be patient and wait for the rescue" (in English and Chinese) shall be provided
next to the blinking light.
The indication light for acknowledgement shall blink after the manual activation
of an acknowledgement switch located in the building management office or
the caretaker's office, or if there is no such office, at the main entrance lift
lobby. The blinking shall continue until the acknowledgement switch is reset.
-97-
Section E Part 1
10.3.4 Priorities and Signals
For lifts with manual doors, a device shall prevent a car from leaving a landing
for a period of at least 2 seconds after stopping.
A user who enters the car shall have at least 2 seconds after the doors have
closed, to enable him to press the button of his choice before any external call
buttons can become effective in determining the direction of travel.
Exception is made in the case of lifts operating on collective control where an

illuminated signal, which is clearly visible from the landing, is recommended t o
indicate to the users waiting on this landing the direction of the next movement
imposed on the car.
For groups of lifts, position indicators on the landings are not recommended.
However, it is recommended that the arrival of a car be preceded by an audible
signal.
10.4 Conditions for Use of Electrical Safety Devices

Types of electrical safety devices t o be used in a lift are as follows:
(a) safety contacts (see Clause 10.2.2);
(b) safety circuits (see Clause 10.2.3), whatever the type of the installation;
(c) safety circuits (see Clause 10.2.3), authorized by the Director in the case
of installations requiring special protection against risks of humidity or
explosion.
Conditions for their use are summarized in Table 4. The 'X' indicates the type of
electrical safety device permitted t o be used for each function. If there are
several 'X's, there is a choice of devices.
- 98 -
Section E Part 1
Table 4. Conditions for Use of Electrical Safety Devices
Type of Electrical
Clause Function Safety Device
a b c
Check on closed position of inspection and emergency X
doors and inspection traps
Check on locking of landing doors X X
Check on closed position of landing doors X X
Check on closed position of the panel or panels X X

without locks
Check on closed position of car door X X
Check on locking of car door X X
Check on locking of the emergency trap door and X

emergency door
Check on the abnormal relative extension of a rope or X

chain
Check on the tension in the compensating ropes X
Check on the anti-rebound device X
Check on the operation of safety gear X
Check on the tension in the overspeed governor rope X
Check on the operation of the overspeed governor X X X
Check on the release of the overspeed governor X
Check on the ascending car overspeed protection X X X

means
Check on the return to normal extended position of X

buffers
- 99 -
Section E Part 1
Type of
- 'I
Electrical
a b c
6.3.2.3 (b) Check on the tension in the device for X
transmission of the car position (final limit
switches)
6.3.3.1 (b)(2) Final limit switches for traction device lifts X
6.4.2 Check for slack rope or slack chain X
8.8.2.1(c) Check on the tension in the device for X

transmission of the car position (slowdown
checking device)
8.8.2.2 Check on retardation in the case of reduced X X X

stroke buffers
9.4.2 (b) Control of main switch X
10.3.1.2(a)(2) Check on levelling and re-levelling X X X
10.3.1.2(a)(3) Check on the tension in the device for X

transmission of the car position
(levelling and re-levelling)
10.3.1.3 Inspection operation switch X
10.3.1.4 Emergency electrical operation switch X
10.3.2 Stopping devices X
11. Notices and Operating Instructions
1 1.1 General Provisions
All labels, notices and operating instructions shall be legible and readily
understandable (if necessary aided by signs or symbols). They shall be
untearable, of durable material, placed in a conspicuous position, and written in
English and Chinese language.
-100-
Reproduced w ~ t hthe permission of CEN - O all rights resewed.
I
Section E Part 1
The minimum height of the characters used for the labels, notice and operating
instruction shall be :
(a) 10 mm for Chinese characters, capital letters and numbers;
(b) 7 m m for small letters.
However, for vehicle lift and freight lifts, the minimum height of the
characters shall be :
(c) 35 mm (except for general freight lifts, 25 mm)
11.2 Inside the Lift Car
11.2.1 Rated Load and Number of Passengers
The rated load of the lift in kilograms as well as the number of persons shall be
displayed for passenger lifts and freight lifts. For vehicle lifts, only the rated load
of the lift shall be displayed.
11.2.2 Manufacturer
The name of the lift manufacturer and his identification number of the lift shall
be displayed.
11.2.3 Control Devices on Car Operating Panels
11.2.3.1 The stop switch (where fitted) shall be red in colour and identified by the word
'STOP' ( {Fh ), so placed that there can be no risk of error as t o the stop
position.
The alarm button shall be yellow in colour and identified by the symbol:
The colours red and yellow shall not be used for other buttons. However, these
colours may be used for illuminated 'call registered' signals.
11.2.3.2 All the control devices shall be clearly identified by reference t o their function; for
this purpose it is recommended to use:
(a) for control buttons the markings -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, etc ....;
(b) for the door re-open button, the symbol
- 101 -
Section E Part 1
11.2.4 Other Necessary Instructions
Instructions to ensure safe usage of the lift shall be placed in the car whenever
the need for these is apparent.
These shall at least include:
(a) for lifts with telephones or intercom systems the instructions for use, if
not self-evident;
(b) the instructions that after using the lift, it is necessary to close manually
operated doors and power operated doors where closing is carried out
under the continuous control of the users;
(c) for vehicle lifts, the instructions that the lift is for such purpose, that it
shall not be used as a passenger lift, and that the car driver shall switch
off the engine when riding inside the lift car;
(d) for general freight lifts, the instructions that the lift is for such purpose,
that it shall not be used as a passenger lift and that industrial trucks, or
similar devices, are not allowed for loading and unloading goods;
(e) for industrial truck loaded freight lifts, the instructions that the lift is for
such purpose, that it shall not be used as a passenger lift, and the
maximum laden weight of the truck allowed;
(f) the fire precaution notice of not less than 15mm height as follows :-
IN CASE OF FIRE DO NOT USE THE LIFT

( koB%smmEHfib@# )
1 1.3 On the Car Roof
The following information shall be given:
(a) the word 'STOP' ( {9k) on or near the stopping device, so placed that
there can be no risk of error as t o the stop position;
(b) the words 'NORMAL' ( Eg ) and 'INSPECTION' ( 'fB$ ) on or near

the inspection operation switch specified in Clause 10.3.1.3;
(c) the words 'UP' ( -k ), 'DOWN' ( ) and 'COMMON' ( $kg ) or 'U,

'D' and 'C' indicating the intended direction of motion on or near the
inspection buttons specified in 10.3.1.3(b);
(d) warning notice of small headroom if the free distance of Clause 1.5.1.l(b)
-102-
Section E Part 1
is less than 2 m.
11.4 Machine and Pulley Rooms
11.4.1 Notices for Power Switches

Notices shall be provided to permit easy identification of the main switches and
the lighting switches.
If there are several machines in one machine room, the notices shall facilitate
the identification of the switches appropriate to each lift.
If, after release of a main switch, some parts remain live (interconnection
between lifts, lighting.....), a notice shall indicate this.
11.4.2 Instructions for Emergency Operations

In the machine room there shall be detailed instructions to be followed in the
event of lift breakdown, particularly concerning the use of the devices required
for manual or electrical emergency operation, and the unlocking key for landing
doors.
The direction of movement of the car shall be clearly indicated on the machine,
close t o the handwinding wheel. If the wheel is not removable, the indication
may be on the wheel itself.
On or near the emergency electrical operation buttons, there shall be

permanent markings to show the corresponding direction of movement, as in
Clause 11.3(b) and (c).
1 1.4.3 Stopping Devices

On or near any stopping devices in the machine or pulley room there shall be
the word 'STOP' ( iek ) so placed that there can be no risk of error as to the
stop position (see Clause 2.2.4).
1 1.4.4 Lifting Beam or Hook

The maximum permissible load shall be indicated on the lifting beam or hooks
1 1.5 On the Landings

Manually operated lift landing doors, if they can be confused with other
adjacent doors, shall bear the inscription 'LIFT' ( ),
For freight and vehicle lifts, each of the landing doors, or walls adjacent t o the
landing doors, shall display the rated load and the instructions required in
Clause 11.2.4(b), (c), (d), (e); and for all lifts, the instructions required in Clause
- 103 -
Reproduced with the permission of CEN O all rights resewed
Section E Part 1
For industrial truck loaded freight lifts and vehicle lifts, a notice positioned at a
height equivalent to the height of the car and a distance of 1 m in front of the
car entrance shall be provided across each main landing to restrict the height of
industrial trucks and vehicles entering the car.
Provisions shall be made at all landings for warning indication to be displayed to

inform others that the lift is out of service for maintenance. The display of such
indication or the illumination of such indicator shall be controlled by a manually
operated switch and additionally may be switched on automatically. The
indication shall bear the inscription "OUT OF SERVICE" (minimum height 8
mm) and "Q{Y(minimum height 12 mm).
1 1.6 On the Overspeed Governor
A data plate shall be fixed indicating:
(a) the name of the manufacturer of the overspeed governor;
(b) the type examination sign and its references; and
(c) the tripping speed for which it has been adjusted.
1 1.7 In the Pit
On or near the stopping device in the pit there shall be the word 'STOP' (
Ifi ) so placed that there can be no risk of error as to the stop position.
1 1.8 On the Buffers
On the buffers, other than energy accumulation type buffers, there shall be a
data plate showing:
(a) the name of the manufacturer of the buffer; and
(b) the type examination sign and its references.
1 1.9 Landing ldentification
Sufficiently visible notices or signals shall permit persons in the car to know at
which landing the lift has stopped before the lift doors open.
1 1.1 0 Electrical ldentification
Contactors, relays, fuses and connection strips for circuits coming into the
control panels shall be marked in accordance with the wiring diagram. Wires
shall be marked for identification purpose.

Section E Part 1
In the case of the use of multiple wire connectors, only the connector (and not
the wires) needs to be marked.
1 1.1 1 Alarm Device

The bell or device activated during a call for help from the car, shall be clearly
marked 'Lift Alarm' ( ).
In the case of multiple lifts it shall be possible to identify the car from which the
call is being made.
1 1.1 2 Locking Devices

A data plate shall be fixed indicating :
(a) the name of the manufacturer of the locking device; and
1 1.1 3 Safety Gear

A data plate shall be fixed indicating:
(a) the name of the manufacturer of the safety gear; and
-105-
OE
zo
a !$
YO LLT SECTION E PART 1
22 08 &
E wnzs" ** 5 , ~
E f "8
ul m 4 0 0 0
+S.a
"JLZ
mzn
Z 5 'C.0
APPENDIX I
2 UE= 5 , o
$
,
$&;:
,
QL2-m
x"iia
Yw,ggg
2:~ ng
4e
m.2
d O3 ~
"0 " E 0
~
Ez
U
3
n u
k5
2 E f E - l ~ , , s:
j ~ ~ 2 5 6 rn
d
50
e- 3 - w? ~ ~ :: gs
+
go oz ms $u % g y$ y
A E 0 6
$ dE rrz ce
E E gt
mini
g: A ri 4
P :a r!
B,o
2
2ze
@g
:
X
id& -
-1
a
532 +
W
a * *$
2-S
sgz
C3 W 0 SUE
Z 2zs
-
5 3- "2
W
0 0,
$
E
a
0
t
i
22
gr
zZ
?ZE
OOv fY",
n0 . kw oz $ d ~1
iG d r? $53 -I3
yo
r+
05% w W
:?%c 2 % 0
ZCKo 2~~
c uu
xo
0+
.Of,
,o.zz U 0
?&
%2E Z
D
-I
0
n
U
S 2
hl
W
SECTION E PART 1
APPENDIX I1
Dimensions i n ' millirnetres
- 107-
Appendix Ill : Diagram for assessing safety circuits

Section E Part 2
Part 2: Specification for Hydraulic Lifts
Contents Page
1. Lift Well 115
1.2 Lift Operation Subject t o Closure of Inspection and Emergency Doors and
Inspection Traps
1.3 Construction of the Walls of Lift Wells and Landing Doors Facing a Car
Entrance
1.5 Headroom and pit
1.5.1 Top Clearances
1.5.3 Bottom Runby in the Pit
1.7 Ventilation and Lighting of the Lift well
2.1 . I Equipment Outside Machine or Pulley Room
2.1.3 Location of Machine Room
2.2 Construction and Equipment of Machine Rooms
2.3 Construction and Equipment of Pulley Rooms
3. Landing Doors
3.2 Strength of Doors and their Frames
3.4 Sills, Guides, Door Suspension
3.5 Protection During Door Operation
3.6 Local Lighting and "Car Here" Signal Lights
4.1 Height of Car
Section E Part 2
4.3 Car Enclosure
4.3.3 Material
4.4 Toe Guards
4.5 Car Doors
4.8 Sliding Doors with Multiple Panels Mechanically Interlinked
4.10 Opening the Car Door
4.12 Car Roof
4.13 Car Header
4.15 Ventilation
4.16 Lighting and Emergency Lighting
4.1 7 Counterweight
5. Suspension, Precautions Against Free Fall, Descent With Excessive Speed and Creeping of
the Car 122
5.1 Types of Suspension
5.2 Number of Ropes or Chains
5.3 Ratio Between Diameter of Pulleys and Diameter of Ropes
5.4 Safety Factor of Ropes and Chains
5.5 Rope and Chain Termination
5.6 Distribution of Load between Ropes or Chains
5.7 Protection of Pulleys Used for Diversion and Reeving
5.8 Precautions against Free Fall of the Car, Descent with Excessive Speed and
Creeping
5.9 Precautions against Free Fall of the Counterweight
5.10 Safety Gear
5.1 0.1 General provisions
5.10.2 Use of Different Types of Safety Gear
5.10.3 Tripping Method
5.10.4 Retardation
5.1 0.5 Release
5.10.6 Constructional Conditions
5.10.7 Inclination of the Car Floor on Operation of Safety Gear
5.10.8 Electrical Checking on Operation of Safety Gear
- 110- Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights resewed

Section E Port 2
5.1 1 Clamping Device 130
5.1 1. I General provisions 130
5.1 1.2 Use of Different Types of Clamping Device 130
5.1 1.3 Method of Control 131
5.1 1.4 Retardation 131
5.1 1.5 Release 131
5.1 1.7 Inclination of the Car Floor on Operation of Clamping Device 131
5.1 1.8 Electrical Checking on Operation of Clamping Device 131
5.12 Tripping Means for Safety Gears and Clamping Devices 131
5.1 2.1 General Provisions 131
5.1 2.2 Tripping by Overspeed Governor 132
5.12.2.1 Tripping Speed for Car Overspeed Governor 132
5.12.2.2 Tripping Speed for Counterweight Overspeed Governor 132
5.12.2.3 Direction of Rotation 132
5.12.2.4 Driving of the Overspeed Governor 132
5.12.2.5 Response Time 132
5.12.2.6 Accessibility 133
5.12.2.7 Test Tripping of the Overspeed Governor 133
5.12.2.8 Sealing 133
5.12.2.9 Electrical Checking on Operation of Overspeed Governor 133
5.12.3 Tripping by Failure of Suspension Gear 133
5.12.4 Tripping by Safety Rope 133
5.12.5 Tripping by Downward Movement of the Car 134
5.12.5.1 Tripping by Rope 134
5.12.5.2 Tripping by Lever 134
5.12.6 Overspeed Governor Rope and Safety Rope 135
5.13 Pawl Device 135
5.13.2 Electrically Retractable 136
5.13.3 Supports at Landings 136
5.13.4 Control of the Pawl 136
5.13.5 Upward Movement of Car 136
5.13.6 Buffering System 136
5.13.7 Multiple Pawls 137
5.1 3.8 Electrical Checking 137
5.13.9 Inclination of the Car Floor on Operation of Pawl Device 137
5.14 Electrical Anti-creep System 137
- 111 -
Section E Port 2
6. Guides, Buffers, Final Limit Switches and Slack Rope Switch
6.1 Guides
6.1.2 Strength of Guides and Brackets
6.2.2 Types of Buffers
6.2.3 Stroke of Energy Accumulation Type Buffers
6.2.4 Stroke of Energy Accumulation Type Buffers with Buffered Return
Movement
6.2.5.1 Stroke
6.2.5.2 Retardation
6.3 Final Limit Switch
6.3.2 Control
6.4 Slack Rope (or Chain) Safety Device for Indirect Acting Lifts
7. Clearances between Car and Lift Well Wall, and between Car ond Counterweight
7.1 Clearances between Car and Wall Facing the Car Entrance
7.2 Clearance between Car and Counterweight
8. Machine, Jack and other Hydraulic Equipment
8.2 Jack
8.2.1 Design of Cylinder and Ram : Pressure, Buckling and Tensile Stress
Calculations
8.2.2 Connection between Car and Ram (Cylinder)
8.2.3 Limitation of the Ram Stroke
8.2.4 Protection of Jack
8.2.5 Telescopic Jacks
8.3 Piping
8.3.2 Rigid Pipes
8.3.3 Flexible Hoses
8.4 Stopping the Machine and Checking its Stopped Condition
8.4.1 For Upwards Motion
8.4.2 For Downwards Motion
- 112 -
Section E Part 2
8.5 Hydraulic Control and Safety Devices
8.5.1 Shut-off Valve
8.5.2 Non-return Valve
8.5.3 Pressure Relief Valve
8.5.4 Direction Valves
8.5.5 Rupture Valve
8.5.6 Restrictor (or One-way Restrictor)
8.5.7 Filters
8.6 Pressure Gauge
8.7 Checking Fluid Level
8.8 Speed
8.9 Manual Emergency Operation
8.9.1 Moving the Car Downwards
8.9.2 Moving the Car Upwards
8.9.3 Checking of the Car Position
8.1 0 Protection of the Pulley(s) on the Jack
8.1 1 Protection of Machinery
8.12 Motor Run Time Limiter
8.13 Protection Against Overheating of Hydraulic Fluid
9. Electrical Instollations
9.4 Main Switches
10.3.1.I Normal Operation
10.3.1.2 Levelling, Re-Levelling and Electrical Anti-creeping with Doors
O~en 155
-113-
Section E Part 2
10.3.1.3 Inspection Operation 156
10.3.1.4 Electrical Anti-creep System 156
10.3.1.5 Home Landing Operation 157
10.3.1.6 Lift Operation with SecurityIFire Gates Installed in front of Lift
Entrances
10.3.1.7 Deleted
11. Notices and Operating lnstructions
1 1.2.1 Rated Load and Number of Passengers
1 1.2.2 Manufacturer
1 1.2.3 Control Devices on Car Operating Panels
1 1.2.4 Other Necessary lnstructions
1 1.2.5 Notice t o Close Doors
1 1.3 On the Car Roof
1 1.4 Machine and Pulley Rooms
11.4.2 lnstructions for Emergency Operations
11.4.4 Lifting Beam or Hook
11.4.5 Electrical Anti-Creep System
11.5 On the Landings
11.6 On the Overspeed Governor
1 1.7 In the Pit
1 1.8 On the Buffers
1 1.10 Electrical ldentification
1 1 . I 1 Alarm Device
1 1 .I2 Locking Devices
11 .I3 Safety Gear
1 1 .I4 Emergency Lowering Valve
11.15 Hand Pump _
-114-
Section E Part 2
1. Lift Well
1. I .I The car and counterweight of a lift shall be enclosed in a lift well.
When the lift well is required to contribute t o the protection of the building
against the spread of fire (e.g. observation lift passing through different
compartments), it shall be totally enclosed and comply with the relevant
provisions of Building (Planning) Regulations (Chapter 123), Building
When the lift well is not required to contribute t o the protection of the building
against the spread of fire, it does not need to be totally enclosed, provided:-
(a) the enclosure at the landing door side of every floor shall either cover the
full height of the floor or be of minimum height of 3.5 m;
(b) the height of enclosure shall be of minimum 2.5 m above any points
normally accessible to persons at other sides and with a minimum
horizontal distance of 0.5 m to moving parts of the lift; and
(c) the enclosure shall be imperforate.
The height of enclosure mentioned above in (b) may be reduced to 1.1 m

provided:
(i) the horizontal distance to moving parts exceeds 2 m;
(ii) it can prevent persons from being endangered by moving parts of the lift
and from interfering with the safe operation of the lift by reaching lift
equipment; and
(iii) access t o the lift pit by simply climbing over the enclosure is not possible.
1.1.2 The counterweight of a lift shall be in the same well as the car, and no more
than four lifts shall be accommodated in one liftway.
1.1.3 Jacks of a lift shall be in the same well as the car. They may extend into the
ground or other spaces.
1.2 Lift Operation Subject to Closure of Inspection and Emergency Doors and
Inspection Traps
See Part 1 Clause 1.2
-115-
,I
J
Section E Part 2
1
See Part 1 Clause 1.3 +,
1.5 Headroom and pit
1.5.1 . I Car Overhead Runby
When the ram is in its ultimate position, achieved through the means of ram
stroke limitation according t o 8.2.3 the following six conditions shall be
satisfied at the same time.
(a) The car guide lengths shall be such as would accommodate a further
guided travel of at least 0.1 + 0.035 vm2
metres.
(b) The free vertical distance between the level of the highest area on the car
roof whose dimensions comply with Part 1 Clause 4.12.l(b) (areas on
parts according t o Clause 1.5.1.l(c) excluded) and the level of the lowest
part of the roof of the well (including beams and components located
under the roof) situated in the projection of the roof of the car shall be at
least 1.0 + 0.035 v', metres.
(c) The free vertical distance between the lowest parts of the roof of the well
and:
(1) the highest pieces of equipment fixed on the roof of the car
enclosure, except for those covered in (2) below, shall be at least 0.3
+ 0.035 vm2metres.
(2) the highest part of the guide shoe or rollers, of the rope
attachments and of the header or parts of vertically sliding doors, if
any, shall be at least 0.1 + 0.035 vm2
metres.
(d) There shall be above the car sufficient space to accommodate a

1,
I
faces. For lifts with direct roping, the suspension ropes and their I
attachments may be included in this space, provided that no rope

centre-line shall be at a distance exceeding 0.15 m from at least one
vertical surface of the block.
(e) The free vertical distance between the lowest parts of the roof of the well
and the highest parts of an upwards travelling ram-head assembly shall be
at least 0.1 m.
- 116- I /
1
Section E Part 2
(f) In the case of direct-acting lifts, the value of 0.035 v', mentioned in (a),
(b) and (c) shall not be taken into account.
When the car rests on its totally compressed buffers, the guide lengths of the
counterweight, if there is one, shall be such as would accommodate a further
guided travel of at least 0.1 + 0.035 vd2metres.
When the car rests on its fully compressed buffers, the following five conditions
shall be simultaneously fulfilled :-
(a) There shall be in the pit sufficient space t o accommodate a rectangular

block not less than 0.5 m x 0.6 m x 1.0 m resting on one of its faces.
(b) The free vertical distance between the bottom of the pit and
(1) the lowest portions of the car, except for items detailed in (2) below,
shall be at least 0.5 m;
(2) the lowest parts of the guide shoes or rollers, of safety gear blocks
or clamping device blocks, pawl devices, toe guards or parts of
vertically sliding doors, shall be at least 0.1 m.
(c) The free vertical distance between the highest parts fixed in the pit, such
as jack supports, pipes and other fittings, and the lowest parts of the car,
except for items detailed in (b)(2) above, shall be at least 0.3 m.
(d) The free vertical distance between the bottom of the pit or of equipment
installed there and the lowest parts of the downwards-travelling ram-head
assembly of an inverted jack shall be at least 0.5 m.
However, if it is impossible t o gain involuntary access under the ram head

assembly (for example by providing screens whose mesh or perforation
does not exceed 75 mm horizontally or vertically and which extend
vertically from 0.1 m to 2.5 m above the bottom of the pit), this vertical
distance may be reduced from 0.5 m to 0.1 m minimum.
(e) The free vertical distance between the bottom of the pit and the lowest
guiding yoke of a telescopic jack below the car of a direct acting lift shall
be at least 0.5 m.
1.5.3 Bottom Runby in the Pit
With the car at its highest position determined by the fully compressed
cushioned stop of the jack, the guide lengths of the counterweight, if there is
one, shall be such as would accommodate a further guided travel of at least 0.1
+ 0.035 vm2metres.
- 117-
Section E Part 2

See Part 1 Clause 1.5.4

1.7 Ventilation and Lighting of the Lift well


Machines, their associated equipment and pulleys, shall be accessible only to
authorized persons (maintenance, inspection, testing and rescue) and therefore
they shall be in a room, comprising solid walls, ceiling and door andlor trap.
2.1.1 Equipment Outside Machine or Pulley Room

Certain equipment are allowed to .be installed outside machine or pulley room
and are set out below :-
(a) Diverter pulleys may be installed in the headroom of the well provided
that they are located outside the projection of the car roof and that
examinations and tests and maintenance operations can be carried out in
complete safety from the car roof or from outside the well.
(b) The overspeed governor may be installed in the well, provided that the
examinations and tests and the maintenance operations may be carried
out from outside the well.
(c) The pulleys in the well shall be provided with protective devices according
to Clause 5.7.

Machine or pulley rooms shall be used only for accommodating the equipment
necessary for the operation of the lift. They shall not contain ducts, cables or
devices other than for the lift.
These rooms may, however, contain:
(a) machines for service lifts or escalators;
- 118-
Section E Part 2
(b) equipment for air-conditioning or ventilating these rooms; and
(c) fire services installations and equipment as may be required by the

Director of Fire Services for these rooms.
Fire sprinklers, however, shall not normally be fitted in these rooms.
~
I
2.1.3 Location of Machine Room
The machine room shall preferably be placed adjacent t o the well
I
If the machine room is not adjacent to the well, the hydraulic piping and the
electric wiring connecting the machine room with the lift well shall be installed
in a duct or trough or in a section of a duct or trough, specially reserved for this
purpose (see Clause 8.3.1.2).
II 2.2 Construction and Equipment of Machine Rooms
I
I
2.3
Construction and Equipment of Pulley Rooms

3. Landing Doors



3.4 Sills, Guides, Door Suspension

3.5 Protection During Door Operation

3.6 Local Lighting and "Car Here" Signal Lights
-119-
Section E Part 2

4.1 Height of Car



4.2.2.1 See Part 1 Clause 4.2.2
4.2.2.2 The available car area of a lift with counterweight shall be such that a load in
the car resulting from table 1 of Part 1 Clause 4.2.1 shall not cause a pressure
exceeding 1.4 times the pressure of which the jack and the piping are designed
for.
4.2.2.3 The design of the car, the car sling, the connection between the car and the
ram (cylinder), the suspension means (of indirect acting lifts), the car safety gear,
the rupture valve, the clamping device, the pawl device, the guide rails and the
buffers shall be based on a load resulting from table 1 of Part 1 Clause 4.2.1.

Every hydraulic lift shall be provided with an electric device preventing a start
for a normal journey when the pressure exceeds the full load pressure by more
than 10% or an overload device specified in Part 1 Clause 4.2.4. The operation
of the electric device shall prevent the power operated doors from closing and
also give audible and visual signals inside the car.
-120-
Section E Port 2
4.3 Car Enclosure


The walls, floor and roof shall have sufficient mechanical strength. The
assembly comprising the sling, guide shoes, walls, floor and roof of the car shall
have sufficient mechanical strength t o resist the forces which will be applied in
normal lift operation, or in the operation of the safety gear, the rupture valve,
the clamping device or the pawl device, or by the impact of the car on its
buffers.
Each wall of the car shall have a mechanical strength such that during the
application of a force of 300 N being evenly distributed over an area of 500
mm2 in round or square section, is applied at right angles to the wall, at any
point, from the inside of the car towards the outside, the wall shall :-
(a) resists without any permanent deformation; and
(b) resists without elastic deformation greater than 15 mm.
The car roof shall satisfy the requirements of Clause 4.12
4.3.3 Material
4.4 Toe Guards

4.5 Car Doors



4.8 Sliding Doors with Multiple Panels Mechanically Interlinked
- 121 -
Section E Part 2

4.1 0 Opening the Car Door

See Part 1 Clause 4.1 0

4.12 Car Roof

4.1 3 Car Header


4.1 5 Ventilation
4.16 Lighting and Emergency Lighting

4.1 7 Counterweight
5. Suspension, Precautions Against Free Fall, Descent With Excessive Speed and
Creeping of the Car
Suspension means for indirect acting lifts and/or for the connection between
the car and the counterweight shall comply with the requirements of Clauses
5.1 to 5.4.
-122-
Section E Part 2
5.1 . I Cars and counterweights shall be suspended from steel wire ropes, or steel
chains with parallel links (Galle type) or roller chains.
5.1.2 The ropes shall correspond to the following conditions:
(a) the nominal diameter of the ropes shall be at least 8 mm;
(b) the tensile grade of the wires shall be:
(1) 1570 ~ l m m or
' 1770 N/mm2 for ropes of single tensile;
(2) 1370 N/mm2 for the outer wires and 1770 ~ / m mfor~ the inner
wires of ropes of dual tensile;
(c) the other characteristics (construction, extension, ovality, flexibility, tests....)

shall at least correspond to those specified in 85302 : Part 1 and Part 4,
or I S 0 4344, or other relevant International Standards.
5.1.3 The chains shall be steel plate link chains such as leaf chains complying with
855594 or IS0 4347; or steel roller chains complying with 85228 or IS0 606, or
other relevant international standards.
5.2.1 The minimum number of suspension ropes (or chains) shall be:
(a) two per jack in the case of indirect acting lifts,
(b) two for the connection between the car and counterweight.
Ropes (or chains) shall be independent.
5.2.2 Where reeving is used the number to take into account is that of the ropes or
chains and not the falls.
The ratio between the pitch diameter of pulleys and the nominal diameter of
the suspension ropes shall be at least 40, regardless of the number of strands.
5.4.1 The safety factor of the suspension ropes shall be at least 12.
rope (or chain) and the maximum force (N) in this rope (or in this chain), when
the loaded car is stationary at the lowest level. For calculation of this maximum
force the following shall be taken into consideration:
- 123-
Section E Part 2
(a) the number of ropes (or chains),
(b) the reeving factor (in case of reeving),
(c) the mass of the car,
(d) the mass of the rope (or chain),
(e) the mass of the portion of the travelling cables suspended from the car,
and
(f) the rated load for the lifts,
The maximum force in a counterweight rope (or chain) shall be calculated by

analogy.
The safety factor of the suspension chains shall be at least 10.
The safety factor is defined in a manner analogous to that indicated in Clause

5.4.1 for ropes.
Rope and Chain Termination
The junction between the rope and the rope terminations, according t o Clause
rope.
The ends of the ropes shall be fixed to the car, counterweight or suspension
points by means of metal or resin filled sockets, self tightening wedge type
sockets, heart shaped thimbles with at least three suitable rope grips, hand
spliced eyes, ferrule secured eyes, or any other system with equivalent safety.
The ends of each chain shall be fixed to the car, counterweight or suspension
points by suitable terminations. The junction between the chain and the chain
termination shall be able to resist at least 80% of the minimum breaking load
of the chain.
Distribution of Load between Ropes or Chains
An automatic device shall be provided for equalizing the tension of suspension

ropes or chains, at least at one of their ends.
If springs are used t o equalize the tension they shall work in compression.
In the case of two rope or two chain suspension of the car an electrical safety
device in conformity with Clause 10.2 shall cause the lift to stop in case of
abnormal relative extension of one rope or chain.
For lifts with t w o or more jacks this requirement applies for each suspension set.
- 124-
Section E Part 2
The devices for adjusting the length of ropes or chains shall be made in such a
way that these devices cannot work loose after adjustment.
Protection of Pulleys Used for Diversion and Reeving
Devices shall be provided t o avoid:
(a) bodily injury;
(b) the ropes (or chains) leaving their grooves, if slack; and
(c) the introduction of objects between ropes (or chains) and grooves (or
pulleys).
The devices used shall be so constructed that they do not hinder examinations
and tests or maintenance operations. The dismantling of these devices shall be
necessary only in the following cases:
(a) replacement of a rope or chain;
(b) replacement of a pulley; or
Precautions against Free Fall of the Car, Descent with Excessive Speed and
Creeping
Devices or combinations of devices and their actuation, according to table 1,

shall be provided to prevent the car from:
(a) free fall, or
(b) descent with excessive speed,
(c) creeping from a landing level by more than 0.12 m; and likewise, creeping
below the lower end of the unlocking zone.
Other devices, or combinations of devices and their actuation, shall be

permitted provided they give at least the same safety level as achieved by those
of table 1.
Precautions against Free Fall of the Counterweight
In the case envisaged in Clause 1.4 the counterweight, if any, shall also be
equipped with safety gear.
The safety gear of a counterweight shall be tripped either :
(a) By an overspeed governor (Clause 5.12.2), or
- 125 -
Section E Part 2
(b) By failure of the suspension gear (Clause 5.12.3), or
(c) By a safety rope (Clause 5.12.4).
I
Section E Part 2
Table 1. Combinations of precautions against free fall of the car, descent with excessive speed and creeping (5.8)
Precautions Against Creeping

X Combinations t o be selected
----- X Specimen selection
Additional tripping of Clamping device (5.1 I), Pawl Electrical anti-
safety gear (5.10) by tripped by downward device creep system
downward movement of movement of the car (5.13) (10.3.1.4)
the car (5.12.5) (5.12.5)
Precautions against Direct Safety gear (5.10),tripped by
free fall or descent acting lifts overspeed governor (5.12.2) X X X
with excessive
speed
Rupture valve (8.5.5) X
------------.--........---------------------------........- X X
Restrictor (8.5.6) X X
Indirect Safety gear (5.10). tripped by
acting lifts overspeed governor (5.12.2) X X X
Rupture valve (8.5.5) plus
safety gear (5.10)tripped by
failure of suspension gear X X X
(5.12.3) or by safety rope
(5.12.4)
Restrictor (8.5.6) plus safety
gear (5.10)tripped by failure
of suspension gear (5.12.3) X X
or by safety rope (5.12.4)

5.1 0 Safety Gear
When required by Clause 5.8 or 5.9, safety gear shall be provided which
satisfies the following conditions.

5.10.1.1 The car safety gear of a direct acting lift shall be capable of operating only
during downward movement of the car and of stopping the car with the rated
load from the tripping speed of an overspeed governor, and of maintaining the
car stationary.
5.10.1.2 The car safety gear of an indirect acting lifts shall be capable of operating only
during downward movement of the car and of stopping the car with the rated
load even if the suspension devices break and of maintaining the car stationary :
(a) when tripped by an overspeed governor from the tripping speed of the
overspeed governor; or
(b) when tripped either by the failure of suspension gear, or by a safety rope,
from the speed defined in 5.10.1.4
5.10.1.3 The safety gear of a counterweight shall be capable of operating only during
downward movement of the counterweight and of stopping the counterweight,
even if the suspension devices break, and of maintaining the counterweight
stationary :
(a) when tripped by an overspeed governor from the tripping speed of the
overspeed governor; or
(b) when tripped either by the failure of the suspension gear, or by a safety
rope from the speed defined in 5.10.1.4
5.10.1.4 When a safety gear is tripped either by the failure of the suspension gear or by
a safety rope, it shall be assumed that the safety gear is tripped at a speed
corresponding to the tripping speed of an appropriate overspeed governor.
5.10.1.5 The safety gear shall be type tested t o the requirements of Appendix F.3 of
BS5655 : Part 1, or EN81 : Part 1, or other relevant international standards.
5.10.2 Use of Different Types of Safety Gear

5.10.2.1 Car safety gears shall be of the progressive type if the rated speed downwards
Vd of the lift exceeds 1 mls. It may be of the following types:
(a) instantaneous with buffered effect, if the rated speed downwards Vd does
not exceed 1 mls;

Section E Port 2
(b) instantaneous if the rated speed downwards Vd does not exceed 0.63 mls.
Instantaneous type safety gears other than of the captive roller type which are
not tripped by an overspeed governor are only permitted if the tripping speed
of the rupture valve or the maximum speed of the restrictor (or one-way
restrictor) does not exceed 0.8 mls.
5.10.2.2 If the car carries several safety gears they shall all be of the progressive type.
5.1 0.2.3 The safety gear of the counterweight may be of the following types :
(a) progressive;
(b) instantaneous with buffered effect; or
(c) instantaneous.

The tripping of safety gears shall be by the means according t o Clause 5.12
The tripping of safety gears by devices which operate electrically, hydraulically

or pneumatically is forbidden.
5.1 0.4 Retardation

For progressive safety gear in the case of free fall of the car with the rated load
the average retardation shall lie between 0.2 g, and 1.0 g,.
5.1 0.5 Release

When the safety gear on the car (or the counterweight) has been tripped
either :-
by the overspeed governor; or
by failure of the suspension; or
by the safety rope,
its release shall require the intervention of a competent lift worker, and shall
only be possible by raising the car (or the counterweight).
After its release, the safety gear shall be in a condition t o operate normally.

It is forbidden t o use the jaws or safety blocks as guide shoes,
- 129-
Section E Part 2 I
For safety gear of the instantaneous type with buffered effect, the design of the
buffering systems shall be of the energy accumulation type with buffered return j
movement or the energy dissipation type, satisfying the requirements of
Clauses 6.2.4 or 6.2.5.
The safety gear operating devices shall preferably be located at the lower part
of the car. It shall be possible to seal adjustable components.
5.10.7 Inclination of the Car Floor on Operation of Safety Gear

When the safety gear operates, the load (if any) being uniformly distributed, the 1
floor of the car shall not incline more than 5% from its normal position.
\

1
When the car safety gear is engaged, an electric device actuated by it shall
j
immediately initiate stopping of the machine, if the car is travelling downwards, I
and prevent starting of the machine in downward motion. The power supply !I
shall be interrupted according to Clause 8.4.2. The electric device shall comply
with the requirements of Clause 10.2.2 or 10.2.3.
j
5.1 1 Clamping Device
li
When required by Clause 5.8, a clamping device shall be provided, which
satisfies the following conditions.

The clamping device shall be capable of operating only during downward
movement of the car, and of stopping the car and maintaining the car
stationary with the rated load :-
(a) if the lift has a restrictor (or one-way restrictor): from a speed of Vd + 0.3
mls; or
(b) if the lift has a rupture valve: from a speed equal to 115% of Vd.
5.1 1.2 Use of Different Types of Clamping Device

5.1 1.2.1 Clamping devices shall be of the progressive type if the rated speed downwards
Vd of the lift exceeds 1 mls. It may be of the following types :-
(a) instantaneous with buffered effect, if the rated downwards Vd does not
exceed 1 mls; or
(b) instantaneous if the rated speed downwards Vd does not exceed 0.63 mls.
\
-130- i1
Section E Part 2
Instantaneous type clamping devices other than of the captive roller type are
only permitted if the tripping speed of the rupture valve does not exceed 0.8
mls.
5.1 1.2.2 If the car carries several clamping devices they shall be of the progressive type.
5.1 1.3 Method of Control

The tripping of clamping devices shall be by means according to Clause 5.12.
The tripping of clamping devices which operate electrically, hydraulically or

5.1 1.4 Retardation
For progressive clamping devices the average retardation in case of a descent

with the tripping speed defined in 5.1 1 . I and with the rated load shall lie
between 0.2 g, and 1 .O g,.
5.1 1.5 Release

The release of the clamping device shall require the intervention of a competent
lift worker and only be possible by raising the car.
After its release, the clamping device shall be in a condition t o operate normally.

The requirements of Clause 5.10.6 apply by analogy.
5.1 1.7 Inclination of the Car Floor on Operation of Clamping Device

The requirement of Clause 5.10.7 applies by analogy.
5.1 1.8 Electrical Checking on Operation of Clamping Device

The requirements of Clause 5.10.8 apply by analogy.
5.1 2 Tripping Means for Safety Gears and Clamping Devices

Tripping means for safety gears and clamping devices shall be provided
according to the requirement of Clauses 5.8 and 5.9.

The force exerted by the tripping means for the tripping of safety gear or
clamping device shall be at least the greater of the two following values :-
- 131 -
Section E Part 2
(a) either 300 N, or I
(b) twice that necessary to engage the safety gear or clamping device.
5.1 2.2 Tripping by Overspeed Governor

5.12.2.1 Tripping Speed for Car Overspeed Governor
Tripping of the overspeed governor for the car safety gear shall occur at a
speed at least equal to 115% of the rated speed downwards Vd and less than :-
(a) 0.8 mls for instantaneous safety gears except for the captive roller type;
(b) 1 rnls for safety gears of the captive roller type;
(c) 1.5 mls for instantaneous safety gears with buffered effect and for
progressive safety gear.
For lifts with very heavy rated loads and low rated speeds, the overspeed
governor shall be specially designed for this purpose. It is recommended t o
choose a tripping speed as close as possible t o the lower limit indicated above.
5.1 2.2.2 Tripping Speed for Counterweight Overspeed Governor
The tripping speed for an overspeed governor for a counterweight safety gear
shall be higher than the tripping speed of a car safety gear calculated for the
speed Vs, not however exceeding it by more than 10%.
5.1 2.2.3 Direction of Rotation
The direction of rotation, corresponding t o the operation of the safety gear,

5.12.2.4 Driving of the Overspeed Governor
(a) The overspeed governor shall be driven by a rope in conformity with

Clause 5.12.6. The overspeed governor rope shall be tensioned by a
(b) During the engagement of the safety gear, the governor rope and its
attachments shall remain intact, even in the case of a braking distance
greater than normal. The overspeed governor rope shall be easily
detachable from the safety gear.
\
(c) The breakage or slackening of the governor rope shall cause the machine 1
t o stop by means of an electrical safety device in conformity with Clause I
10.2. The device shall be of bi-stable type. I

5.12.2.5 Response Time \,
'1
11
i
- 132- 1
Section E Part 2
sufficiently short not t o permit a dangerous speed to be reached before the
5.12.2.6 Accessibility
5.12.2.7 Test Tripping of the Overspeed Governor
speed than that indicated in Clause 5.12.2.1 by tripping the overspeed
governor in some way.
5.12.2.8 Sealing
The means of adjusting the overspeed governor shall be sealed after setting the
tripping speed.
5.12.2.9 Electrical Checking on Operation of Overspeed Governor
(a) The overspeed governor(s) or another device shall, by means of an

electrical safety device in conformity with Clause 10.2, initiate the
stopping of the lift machine at latest at the moment when the car speed
reaches the tripping speed of the governor.
(b) An electrical safety device in conformity with Clause 10.2 shall prevent
starting of the lift while the overspeed governor is in the tripped condition.
This device may be in common with the device in Clause 5.12.2.9(a).
Return to service of the lift shall be by a competent lift worker.
5.12.3 Tripping by Failure of Suspension Gear

When springs are used for the tripping of the safety gear they shall be of the
guided compression type.
It shall be possible to make a test, triggered from outside the well, to show that
the failure of the suspension gear will trip the safety gear.
In the case of indirect acting lifts with several jacks the failure of the suspension
gear of any one of the jacks shall trip the safety gear.
5.1 2.4 Tripping by Safety Rope
(a) The safety rope shall be in conformity with Clause 5.12.6. The rope shall
be tensioned by gravity or by at least one guided compression spring.
(b) During the engagement of the safety gear, the safety rope and its
greater than normal.
- 133-
Section E Part 2
(c) The breakage or slackening of the safety rope shall cause the machine to
stop by means of an electrical safety device in conformity with Clause
10.2.
(d) Pulleys used for carrying the safety rope shall be mounted independently
of any shaft or pulley assembly that carries the suspension ropes or chains.
Protection devices shall be provided in accordance with Clause 5.7.1.
5.12.5 Tripping by Downward Movement of the Car

5.12.5.1 Tripping by Rope
Tripping by rope of the safety gear or clamping device shall be actuated under
the following conditions :-
(a) After a normal stop, a rope which satisfies Clause 5.12.6 attached to the
safety gear or clamping device shall be blocked with a force defined in
Clause 5.12.1 (for example, the overspeed governor rope).
(b) The rope blocking mechanism shall be released during normal movement
of the car.
(c) The rope blocking mechanism shall be actuated by guided compression

spring($ andlor by gravity.
(d) Emergency operation shall be possible in all circumstances.
(e) An electric device associated with the rope blocking mechanism shall
cause stopping of the machine at latest at the moment of blocking of the
rope, and shall prevent any further normal downward movement of the
car.
(f) Precautions shall be taken to avoid involuntary tripping of the safety gear,
or clamping device, by the rope in case of the disconnection of the electric
power supply during a downward movement of the car.
(g) The design of the system of rope and rope blocking mechanism shall be
such that no damage is possible during the engagement of the safety
gear, or clamping device, even in the case of longer braking distances.
(h) The design of the system of rope and rope blocking mechanism shall be
such that no damage is possible by an upward movement of the car.
5.12.5.2 Tripping by Lever
Tripping by lever of the safety gear or clamping device shall be actuated under
- 134-
Section E Part 2
(a) After the normal stopping of the car, a lever attached to the safety gear,
or clamping device, shall be extended into a position to engage with fixed
stops, which are located at each landing.
(b) The lever shall be retracted during the normal movement of the car,
(c) The movement of the lever to the extended position shall be effected by
guided compression spring(s) andlor by gravity.
(e) An electric device associated with the lever shall cause stopping of the
machine at latest at the moment of lever extension, and shall prevent any
further normal downward movement of the car.
(f) Precautions shall be taken to avoid involuntary tripping of the safety gear,
or clamping device, by the lever, in case of the disconnection of the
electric power supply during a downward movement of the car.
(g) The design of the lever and stops system shall be such that no damage is
possible during the engagement of the safety gear, or clamping device,
even in the case of longer braking distances.
(h) The design of the lever and stops system shall be such that no damage is
possible by an upward movement of the car.
5.12.6 Overspeed Governor Rope and Safety Rope

5.12.6.1 The rope shall be a very flexible wire rope
5.12.6.2 The breaking load of the rope shall be related by a safety factor of at least 8:
(a) for governor ropes, to the tensile force produced in the rope when
tripped by the overspeed governor;
(b) for safety ropes, to the force required to operate the safety gear or
clamping device.
5.12.6.3 The nominal rope diameter shall be at least 6 mm
5.12.6.4 The ratio of the pitch diameter of the overspeed governor pulley andlor other
pulleys to the nominal rope diameter'shall be at least 30.
5.1 3 Pawl Device

When required by Clause 5.8, a pawl device shall be provided which satisfies
- 135-
Section E Port 2
The pawl device shall be capable of operating only in the downward direction
and capable of stopping and maintaining stationary on fixed stops the car with
the rated load,
(a) for lifts provided with a restrictor or one-way restrictor: from a speed of Vd
+ 0.3 mls, or
(b) for all other lifts: from a speed equal to 115% of Vd.
5.13.2 Electrically Retractable

There shall be provided at least one electrically retractable pawl designed in its
extended position t o stop the downward moving car against fixed supports.
5.1 3.3 Supports at Landings

For each landing, supports shall be provided and arranged at t w o levels:
(a) to prevent the car sinking below the landing level by more than 0.12 m,
and
(b) to stop the car at the lower end of the unlocking zone.
5.1 3.4 Control of the Pawl

The movement of the pawl($ to the extended position shall be effected by
guided compression spring($ andlor by gravity.
The supply t o the electric retraction device shall be interrupted when the
machine is stopped.
5.1 3.5 Upward Movement of Car

The design of the pawl($ and supports shall be such that, whatever the position
of the pawl, during upward movement the car cannot be stopped nor any
damage caused.
5.13.6 Buffering System

A buffering system shall be incorporated in the pawl device (or in the fixed
supports).
5.13.6.1 Buffers shall be of the following types:
(a) energy accumulation;
(b) energy accumulation with buffered return movement; or
- 136- Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights resewed.

Section E Part 2
(c) energy dissipation.
5.13.6.2 The requirements of Clause 6.2.3, 6.2.4 and 6.2.5 regarding stroke of the
buffers apply by analogy.
In addition, the buffer shall maintain the car stationary at a distance not
exceeding 0.12 m below any loading level when carrying the rated load.
5.13.6.3 If energy dissipation buffers are used, an electric device which complies with
the requirements of Clauses 10.2.2 or 10.2.3 shall immediately initiate stopping
of the machine if the car is travelling downwards and prevent starting of the
machine in downward motion, when the buffer is not in its normal extended
position. The power supply shall be interrupted according to Clause 8.4.2.
5.1 3.7 Multiple Pawls

When several pawls are provided precautions shall be taken to ensure that all
pawls engage on their respective supports even in the case of the disconnection
of the electrical power supply during a downward movement of the car.
5.1 3.8 Electrical Checking

An electric device shall prevent any normal down movement of the car when a
pawl is not in the retracted position.
5.13.9 Inclination of the Car Floor on Operation of Pawl Device

The requirement of Clause 5.1 0.7 applies by analogy.
5.1 4 Electrical Anti-creep System

For electrical anti-creep system, see Clauses 10.3.1.2 and 10.3.1.4.
6. Guides, Buffers, Final Limit Switches and Slack Rope Switch
6.1 Guides

The guides shall comply with 855655 Part 9 or IS0 7465 or other relevant
The car and counterweight shall each be guided by at least two rigid steel guide
throughout the travel.
For speeds V, exceeding 0.4 mls, or when progressive safety gear is used, the
guides shall be made from drawn steel, or the rubbing surface shall be
machined.
- 137-
Section E Part 2
6.1.2 Strength of Guides and Brackets


Buffers shall be provided at the bottom limit of travel of the car and
counterweight.
If the buffers travel with the car or counterweight they shall strike against a
pedestal at least 0.5 m high at the end of the travel.
When the buffer(s) of a pawl device is (are) used t o limit the travel of the car at
the bottom, this pedestal is also required unless the fixed stops of the pawl
device are mounted on the car guide rails.
The buffers shall maintain the car stationary at a distance not exceeding 0.12 m
below the level of the lowest landing, when carrying the rated load.
When buffers are fully compressed the ram shall not hit the base of the cylinder.
6.2.2 Types of Buffers

Buffers shall be of the following types:
(a) energy accumulation;
(b) energy accumulation with buffered return movement; or
(c) energy dissipation
6.2.3 Stroke of Energy Accumulation Type Buffers

The total possible stroke of the buffers shall be:
(a) For lifts provided with a restrictor (or one-way restrictor):
At least equal to twice the gravity stopping distance corresponding t o a

value of speed given by the expression Vd + 0.3 m/s;
i.e. 0.051 x (Vd + 0.3)~
x2
= 0.102 x (Vd + 0.3)~metres.
(b) For all other lifts:
- 138-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 ail rights resewed.
Section E Part 2
at least equal t o twice the gravity stopping distance corresponding t o
115% of the rated speed downwards i.e. 0.0674 vd2 x 2 = 0.135 V :
metres.
(c) In no case shall the stroke be less than 65mm.
Buffers shall be designed t o cover the stroke defined above, under a static
load of between 2.5 and 4 times the sum of the mass of the car and its
rated load (or the mass of the counterweight).
6.2.4 Stroke of Energy Accumulation Type Buffers with Buffered Return Movement
The requirements of 6.2.3 apply t o this type of buffer.

6.2.5.1 Stroke
The total possible stroke of the buffers shall be:
(a) For lifts provided with a restrictor (or one-way restrictor):

at least equal t o the gravity stopping distance corresponding to a value of
speed given by the ex ression : (Vd + 0.3 mls)
P
i.e. 0.051 x (Vd + 0.3) metres.
(b) For all other lifts:

at least equal t o the gravity stopping distance corresponding t o 115 % of
the rated speed downwards, i.e. 0.0674 vd2metres.
6.2.5.2 Retardation
With rated load on the lift, in the case of free fall, the average retardation
during action of the buffers shall not exceed g,. Retardation of more than 2.5
gn shall not be longer than 0.04 s. The speed of impact on the buffers t o be
considered is equal t o that for which the stroke of the buffer is calculated (see
Clause 6.2.5.1 (a)).
The operation of the lift shall depend on the return of the buffers t o their
normal extended position after operation, except those referred t o in Clause
5.13.6.3. The device for checking this shall be an electric safety device in
Hydraulic buffers shall be so constructed that the fluid level may easily be
checked.
- 139-
Section E Part 2
Final Limit Switch
General Provisions
A final limit switch shall be provided for the position of the ram corresponding
t o the upper end of the travel of the car. This switch shall :-
(a) be set to function as close as possible t o the upper terminal floor, without
risk of accidental operation; and
(b) operate before the ram comes into contact with its cushioned stop
(Clause 8.2.3).
The action of the final limit switch shall be maintained while the ram is in the
zone of the cushioned stop.
Control
Separate control devices shall be used for the upper normal terminal stopping
device and the final limit switch.
In the case of direct acting lifts, control of the final limit switch shall be effected:
(a) either directly by the car or the ram; or
(b) by a device linked indirectly to the car e.g. by a rope, belt or chain. In this
case, breakage of, or slack in this linkage shall cause the machine to stop
by means of an electrical safety device in conformity with Clause 10.2.
In the case of indirect acting lifts, control of the final limit switch shall be
effected:
(a) either directly by the ram; or
(b) by a device linked indirectly to the ram e.g. by a rope, belt or chain. In
this case, breakage of, or slack in this linkage shall cause the machine to
10.2.
Method of Operation
The final limit switch shall be an electrical safety device in conformity with
Clause 10.2 and shall, when actuated, stop the machine and keep it stopped.
The final limit switch shall close automatically when the car leaves the actuation
zone.
After the operation of the final limit switch car movement in response to calls
shall no longer be possible, even in the case of the car leaving the actuation
- 140- iI,
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights reserved,
Section E Part 2
zone by creeping. The return to normal service of the lift shall only be effected
by the intervention of a competent lift worker.
6.4 Slack Rope (or Chain) Safety Device for Indirect Acting Lifts
If the risk of slack rope (or chain) exists, an electric safety device in conformity
with Clause 10.2 shall be provided. This device shall cause the machine to stop
and keep it stopped when slack occurs.
7. Clearances between Car and Lift Well Wall, and between Car and Counterweight
7.1 Clearances between Car and Wall Facing the Car Entrance
7.2 Clearance between Car and Counterweight

8. Machine, Jack and other Hydraulic Equipment

8.1.1 Each lift shall have at least one machine of its own. Every machine, jack, pulley
and other similar equipment connected with the lift shall be so supported and
fixed as t o prevent it from becoming loose or being displaced.
8.1.2 Two methods of drive are permissible:
(a) direct acting;
(b) indirect acting
8.1.3 If several jacks are used to raise the car they shall be hydraulically connected to
ensure pressure equilibrium.
8.1.4 The mass of the counterweight, if any, shall be calculated such that in case of a
rupture of the suspension gear (car-counterweight), the pressure in the
hydraulic system does not exceed two times full load pressure.
In the case of several counterweights, the rupture of only one suspension gear
shall be taken into consideration for the calculation.
8.2 Jack
8.2.1 Design of Cylinder and Ram :Pressure, Buckling and Tensile Stress Calculations
- 141 -
Section E Part 2
8.2.1 .I The cylinder and the ram shall be designed such that under the forces resulting I
from a pressure equal to 2.3 times the full load pressure a safety factor of at
least 1.7 referred to the proof stress R,O.~is assured.
!
8.2.1.2 For the design of the elements of telescopic jacks with hydraulic synchronizing
means the full load pressure shall be replaced by the highest pressure which
occurs in an element due to the hydraulic synchronizing means. It may be
possible that, due to incorrect adjustment of the hydraulic synchronizing means,
abnormally high pressure conditions arise during installation. Account of this
shall be taken.
8.2.1.3 Jacks under compressive loads shall be designed such that, in their fully
extended position, and under the forces resulting from a pressure equal t o 1.4
times full load pressure a safety factor of at least two against buckling is
I
assured (see also Clause 8.5.3.3).
8.2.1.4 Jacks under tensile loads shall be designed such that under the forces resulting
from a pressure equal to 1.4 times full load pressure a safety factor of at least 2
referred t o the proof stress R,o,z is assured.
8.2.2 Connection between Car and Ram (Cylinder)
8.2.2.1 For Direct Acting Lift
The connection between the car and the ram (cylinder) shall be flexible, and so
constructed t o support the weight of the ram (cylinder) and the additional
dynamic forces. The connection means shall be secured.
I
In case of a ram made with more than one section, the connections between
the sections shall be so constructed t o support the weight of the suspended
i
ram sections and the additional dynamic forces.
8.2.2.2 For Indirect Acting Lift
The head of the ram (cylinder) shall be guided. However, this requirement does
not apply for pulling jacks provided the pulling arrangement prevents bending
forces on the ram.
No parts of the ram head guiding system shall be incorporated within the
vertical projection of the car roof.
i
8.2.3 Limitation of the Ram Stroke I!
8.2.3.1 Means shall be provided to stop the ram with buffered effect in such a position
1
that the requirements of Clause 1.5.1 .Iare satisfied. I
1
8.2.3.2 This limitation of stroke shall either: I
(a) be by means of a cushioned stop (see Clause 8.2.3.3); or I
-142-
Section E Part 2
(b) be effected by shutting off the hydraulic supply t o the jack by means of a
mechanical linkage between the jack and a hydraulic valve; breakage or
stretch of such a linkage shall not result in the deceleration of the car
exceeding the value specified in Clause 8.2.3.3 (b).
8.2.3.3 Cushioned Stop
(a) This stop shall either:
(i) be an integral part of the jack; or
(ii) consist of one or more devices external to the jack situated outside
the car projection, the resultant force of which is exerted on the
centre line of the jack.
(b) The design of the cushioned stop shall be such that the average
deceleration of the car does not exceed 1.0 g, and that in the case of an
indirect acting lift the deceleration does not result in slack rope or chain.
8.2.3.4 In cases according to Clauses 8.2.3.2(b) and 8.2.3.3 (a)(ii), a stop shall be
provided inside the jack t o prevent the ram from leaving the cylinder.
In the case according to Clause 8.2.3.2(b), this stop shall be positioned such
that the requirements of Clause 1.5.1 .Iare also satisfied.
8.2.4 Protection of Jack

8.2.4.1 If a jack extends into the ground it shall be installed in a protective tube. If it
extends into other spaces it shall be suitably protected.
8.2.4.2 Leak and scrape fluid from the cylinder head shall be collected.
8.2.4.3 The jack shall be provided with an air venting device.

For telescopic jacks, the following requirements apply additionally :-
8.2.5.1 Stops shall be provided between successive sections to prevent the rams from
leaving their respective cylinders.
8.2.5.2 In the case of a jack below the car of a direct acting lift, the clear distance
between successive guiding yokes and between the highest guiding yoke and
the lowest parts of the car (parts mentioned in Clause 1.5.2(b)(2) excluded)
shall be at least 0.3 m when the car rests on its fully compressed buffers.
8.2.5.3 The length of the bearing of each section of a telescopic jack without external
guidance shall be at least 2 times the diameter of the respective ram.
- 143-
X
Section E Part 2
8.2.5.4 These jacks shall be provided with mechanical or hydraulic synchronizing means.
8.2.5.5 When jacks with hydraulic synchronizing means are used an electric device shall
be provided t o prevent a start for a normal journey when the pressure exceeds
the full load pressure by more than 20%.
8.2.5.6 When ropes or chains are used as synchronizing means the following f'
requirements apply:
(a) there shall be at least two independent ropes or chains;
(b) the requirements of Clause 5.7.1 apply;
(c) the safety factor shall be at least:

12 for ropes
10 for chains
The safety factor is the ratio between the minimum breaking load (N) of I
l
one rope (or chain) and the maximum force in this rope (or chain).
For the calculation of the maximum force the following shall be taken into
i
consideration:
(i) the force resulting from the full load pressure;
(d)
(ii) the number of ropes (or chains).
a device shall be provided which prevents the speed of the car in

I
downward movement exceeding the rated speed downwards (Vd) by
more than 0.3 mls in the event of failure of the synchronizing means.
8.3 Piping
I

8.3.1.I Piping and fittings which are subject to pressure (connections, valves etc.) as in
\
general all components of a lift hydraulic system shall :
I
(a) be appropriate to the hydraulic fluid used;
(b) be designed and installed in such a way t o avoid any abnormal stress due
t o fixing, torsion or vibration; and 1;
(c) be protected against damage, in particular of mechanical origin.

I
8.3.1.2 Pipes and fittings shall be appropriately fixed and accessible for inspection.
If pipes (either rigid or flexible) pass through walls or floor they shall be J
protected by means of ferrules, the dimensions of which allow the dismantling,
if necessary, of the pipes for inspection.
- 144- 3
Section E Part 2
No coupling shall be sited inside a ferrule.
8.3.2 Rigid Pipes

8.3.2.1 Rigid pipes and fittings between cylinder and non-return valve or down
direction valve($ shall be designed such that under the forces resulting from a
pressure equal t o 2.3 times the full load pressure a safety factor of at least 1.7
referred to the proof stress R,o.z is assured.
8.3.2.2 When telescopic jacks with more than 2 stages and hydraulic synchronizing
means are used an additional safety factor of 1.3 shall be taken into account
for the design of the pipes and fittings between the rupture valve and the
non-return valve or the down direction valve(s).
Pipes and fittings, if any, between the cylinder and the rupture valve shall be
designed on the same pressure basis as the cylinder.
8.3.3 Flexible Hoses

8.3.3.1 The flexible hose between cylinder and non-return valve or down direction valve
shall be selected with a safety factor of at least 8 relating full load pressure and
bursting pressure.
8.3.3.2 The flexible hose and its couplings between cylinder and non-return valve or
down direction valve shall withstand without damage a pressure of five times
full load pressure, this test to be carried out by the manufacturer of the hose
assembly.
8.3.3.3 The flexible hose shall be marked in an indelible manner with :-
(a) the name of the manufacturer or the trade mark;
(b) the test pressure; and
(c) the date of the test.
8.3.3.4 The flexible hose shall be fixed with a bending radius not less than that
indicated by the hose manufacturer.

A stop of the machine due to the operation of an electrical safety device, in
8.4.1 For Upwards Motion

Either:
- 145-
J
the supply to the electric motor shall be interrupted by at least two

Section E Part 2
I
(a)
independent contactors, the main contacts of which shall be in series in
the motor supply circuit; or
(b) the supply t o the electric motor shall be interrupted by one contactor, and I
the supply to the by-pass valves (in accordance with Clause 8.5.4.2) shall f
be interrupted by at least two independent electrical devices connected in
series in the supply circuit of these valves.
8.4.2 For Downwards Motion

The supply to the down direction valve(s) shall be interrupted either :-
(a) by at least t w o independent electrical devices connected in series; or

I
1
(b) directly by the electrical safety device, provided it is suitably rated
electrically.
8.4.3 If whilst the lift is stationary, one of the contactors has not opened the main
contacts or one of the electrical devices has not opened, a further start shall be
prevented, at the latest at the next change in the direction of motion.
8.5 Hydraulic Control and Safety Devices
8.5.1 Shut-off Valve

8.5.1.1 A shut-off valve shall be provided. It shall be installed in the circuit which
connects the cylinder(s) to the non-return valve and the down direction valve(s).
8.5.1.2 It shall be located in the machine room.
8.5.2 Non-return Valve I

I
8.5.2.1 A non-return valve shall be provided. It shall be installed in the circuit between
the pump(s) and the shut-off valve.
, I
8.5.2.2
8.5.2.3
The non-return valve shall be capable of holding the lift car with the rated load
at any point when the supply pressure drops below the minimum operating
pressure.
The closing of the non-return valve shall be effected by the hydraulic pressure
1
from the jack and by at least one guided compression spring andlor by gravity.
1,
8.5.3
8.5.3.1
Pressure Relief Valve
A pressure relief valve shall be provided. It shall be connected to the circuit
'i
between the pump(s) and the non-return valve. The hydraulic fluid shall be
returned to the tank. 1
- 146- Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all r~ghtsresewed. '
i
Section E Part 2
8.5.3.2 The pressure relief valve shall be adjusted t o limit the pressure to 140% of t h e
full load pressure.
8.5.3.3 If necessary due to high internal losses (head loss, friction), the pressure relief
valve may be set to a greater value but not exceeding 170% of full load
pressure. In this case, a fictitious full load pressure equal to
Selected Dressure setting

1.4
shall be used to design the hydraulic equipment (including the jack). The over
pressure factor of 1.4 in Clause 8.2.1.3 shall then be replaced by a factor
corresponding to the increased setting of the pressure relief valve for designing
the jacks under compressive loads.
8.5.4 Direction Valves

8.5.4.1 Down Direction Valves
Down direction valves shall be held open electrically. Their closing shall b e
effected by the hydraulic pressure from the jack and by at least one guided
compression spring per valve.
8.5.4.2 Up Direction Valves
If the stopping of the machine is effected in accordance with Clause 8.4.l(b),

only by-pass valves shall be used for this. They shall be closed electrically. Their
opening shall be effected by the hydraulic pressure from the jack and by at least
one guided compression spring per valve.
8.5.5 Rupture Valve

When required by Clause 5.8, a rupture valve shall be provided which satisfies
the following conditions.
(a) The rupture valve shall be capable of stopping the car in downward
movement, and maintaining it stationary, at the latest when the speed
reaches a value equal t o rated speed downwards (Vd) plus 0.3 mls. T h e
average deceleration shall not exceed g,;
(b) The rupture valve shall be accessible for adjustment and inspection;
(c) The rupture valve shall be either:
(1) integral with the cylinder;
(2) directly and rigidly flange-mounted;
(3) placed close to the cylinder and connected to it by means of short

rigid pipes, having welded, flanged or threaded connections; or
- 147-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - CJall rights resewed
Section E Part 2
I
(4) connected directly to the cylinder by threading. The rupture valve
shall be provided with a thread ending with a shoulder. The shoulder
shall butt up against the cylinder.
Other types of connections such as compression fittings or flared fittings /

are not permitted between the cylinder and the rupture valve; and
,
I
(d) On lifts with several jacks, operating in parallel, one common rupture
valve may be used. Otherwise the rupture valves shall be interconnected 'I
!
to cause simultaneous closing, in order to avoid the floor of the car from
inclining by more than 5% from its normal position. I
I,
I
8.5.6 Restrictor (or One-way Restrictor) I
When required by Clause 5.8, a restrictor (or one-way restrictor) shall be

provided which satisfies the following conditions :-
(a) In the case of a major leakage in the hydraulic system the restrictor shall
prevent the speed of the car with rated load in downward movement
exceeding the rated speed downwards (Vd) by more than 0.3 mls;
(b) The restrictor shall be accessible for inspection; and
(c) The restrictor shall be either:
(2) directly and rigidly flanged-mounted;
(3) placed close to the cylinder and connected t o it by means of short

(4) connected directly to the cylinder by threading. The restrictor shall

be provided with a thread ending with a shoulder. This shall butt up
against the cylinder.
Other types of connections such as compression fittings or flared fittings

are not permitted between the cylinder and the restrictor.
8.5.7 Filters
In the circuit between the tank and the pump($, and in the circuit between the
shut-off valve and the down direction valve(s), filters or similar devices shall be
installed. The filter or similar device between the shut-off valve and the down
direction valve shall be accessible for inspection and maintenance.
8.6 Pressure Gauge
- 148- .I
I
Section E Port 2
8.6.1 A pressure gauge shall be provided. It shall be connected t o the circuit
between the non-return valve or the down direction valve(s) and the shut-off
valve.
8.6.2 A gauge shut-off valve shall be provided between the main circuit and the
connection for the pressure gauge. The connection shall be provided with an
internal thread of M2O x 1.5.
8.7 Checking Fluid Level

It shall be easy t o check the level of the hydraulic fluid in the tank.
8.8 Speed
8.8.1 The speed V, shall not be greater than 1.0 mls, unless additional requirements
are fulfilled.
8.8.2 The speed of the empty car upwards shall not exceed the rated upward speed
(V), by more than 8%, and the speed of the car with rated load downwards
shall not exceed the rated downward speed (Vd) by more than 8%, in each case
this relates t o the normal operating temperature of the hydraulic fluid. For a
journey in the upward direction it is supposed that the supply is at its rated
frequency and that the motor voltage is equal t o the rated voltage of the
equipment.
8.9.1 Moving the Car Downwards

8.9.1 . I The lift shall be provided with a manually operated valve located in the machine
room allowing the car, even in the case of a power failure, to be lowered t o a
level where the passengers can leave the car.
8.9.1.2 The speed of the car shall not exceed 0.3 mls.
8.9.1.3 The operation of this valve shall require a continual manual force.
8.9.1.4 This valve shall be protected against involuntary action.
8.9.1.5 In the case of indirect acting lifts where slack rope or slack chain can occur,
manual operation shall not cause an opening of this valve when the pressure is
below the minimum operating pressure.
8.9.2 Moving the Car Upwards

8.9.2.1 A hand-pump which causes the car t o move in the upwards direction shall be
permanently installed for every indirect acting lift or lift whose car is fitted with
a safety gear or a clamping device.
- 149-
I
Section E Port 2 I
8.9.2.2 The hand-pump shall be connected to the circuit between the non-return valve i
or down direction valve($ and the shut-off valve.
8.9.2.3 The hand-pump shall be equipped with a pressure relief valve limiting the -
pressure to 2.3 times the full load pressure.
8.9.3 Checking of the Car Position
If the lift serves more than t w o levels, it shall be possible t o check from the
machine room whether the car is in an unlocking zone by a means which is
independent of the power supply.
This requirement is not applicable to lifts which are fitted with a mechanical
anti-creep device but are not fitted with a hand-pump to move the car in the
upwards direction.
8.10 Protection of the Pulley(s) on the Jack

I
Devices shall be provided in accordance with Clauses 5.7.1 and 5.7.2.
8.1 1 Protection of Machinery I

Effective protection shall be provided for accessible rotating parts which may be
(b) tapes, chains, belts; !
8.1 2 Motor Run Time Limiter
8.12.1 A motor run time limiter shall be provided. This device shall stop the motor and
keep it stopped when it remains energized longer than the time required for
the full travel upwards with rated load, plus a maximum of 60 s.
I
8.12.2 The return to normal service shall only be possible by manual resetting. On
restoration of the power after a supply disconnection, maintenance of the
machine in the stopped position is not necessary.
8.1 2.3 The motor run time limiter shall not affect the inspection operation.
8.13 Protection Against Overheating of Hydraulic Fluid
- 150-
Section E Part 2
A temperature detecting device shall be provided. This device shall stop the
machine and keep it stopped as long as the temperature of the hydraulic fluid
exceeds a pre-set value.
I
I
I
~ 9.2 Contactors, Relay Contactors, Components of Safety Circuits

I 9.3 Protection of Motors
I
I 9.4 Main Switches
i See Part 1 Clause 9.4

I
I 9.6 Lighting and Socket Outlets
I
I 10.
Electrical Protection and Controls

See Part 1 Clause 10.1. Table 2 specifies the type of electric safety device
which can be used in each case.

I
consist of:
- 151 -
-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN 0 all rights resewed.
Section E Part 2
the supply t o the contactors referred t o in Clause 8.7 or their relay
contactors; or
(b) safety circuits satisfying Clause 10.2.3, consisting of either :
cutting the supply t o the contactors referred to in Clause 8.7 or their
relay contactors, or
(2) contacts not satisfying the requirements of Clause 10.2.2.
10.2.1.2 Apart from exceptions permitted in this Code, no electrical equipment shall be
connected in parallel with an electrical safety device.
10.2.1.4 An output signal emanating from an electrical safety deviceshall not be altered
down the same circuit, which would cause a dangerous condition to result.
or appreciably delay the stopping of the machine through the functioning of an
such as to prevent the appearance of false signals at outputs of electrical safety
devices due t o the effects of switching.

together.
Positive separation is achieved when all the contact-breaking elements are

brought to their open position and when for a significant part of the travel
there are no resilient members (e.g. springs) between the moving contacts and
- 152-
Section E Port 2
component failure.
The safety contacts shall be provided for a rated insulation voltage of 250 V if
the enclosure provides a degree of protection of at least IP 4X, or 500 V if the
degree of protection of the enclosure is less than IP 4X, in accordance with
BS5490; or IEC 529 or other relevant international standards.
The safety contacts shall belong t o the following categories as defined in

854794: Part 1 or IEC 337-1, IA, 1B; or other relevant international standards :
(b) DC-I I,for safety contacts in dc circuits.
If the protective enclosure is not of at least type IP 4X, the air gaps and creep
distances shall be at least 6mm and the distances for breaking contacts at least
4mm after separation.
protective enclosure need not be provided in the case of external influences
Regulations issued under the Electricity Ordinance or the Regulations for
Electrical Installation by the Institution of Electrical Engineers.
In the case of multiple breaks, the distance after separation between the
Abrasion of conductive material shall not lead to short circuiting of contacts.

Safety circuits shall comply with the requirements of Clause 10.1 . I relating to
the appearance of a fault. In addition, it shall be designed such that :
(a) If one fault combined with a second fault can lead t o a dangerous
sequence in which the first faulty element should participate. All further
operation of the lift shall be impossible as long as this fault persists.
The possibility of the second fault occurring after the first, and before the
lift has been stopped by the sequence mentioned, is not considered.
(b) If a dangerous situation can only occur through the combination of

several faults, the stopping and maintaining in a stopped position of the
lift shall be brought about at the latest before the possible appearance of
- 153-
Section E Part 2
the fault which, in conjunction with the already existing faults, would lead
t o the dangerous situation.
(c) On restoration of the power supply after it has been disconnected,

that during the next sequence stopping is re-imposed in the cases covered
by Clause 10.2.3(a) and (b).
(d) In redundancy-type circuits measures shall be taken to limit as far as


electrical supply t o the direction valves shall likewise be broken.
supply to the machine in accordance with the requirements of Clause 8.7.
If, because of the power t o be transmitted, relay contactors are used to control
supply t o the machine for starting and stopping.

they are able to function properly under the mechanical stresses resulting from
their installation accessible to persons, they must be so built that these electrical
In the case of redundancy-type safety circuits, it shall be ensured by mechanical

shall not cause loss of redundancy.
Transmitter elements of safety circuits shall withstand, independently of the

direction, a vibration of sine-wave form, with a frequency f of between 1 Hz
and 50 Hz and an amplitude a (mm) which is given as a function of f by the
equations:
a = 250/f2 for 10 c f I 5 0 Hz,
- 154-
Section E Part 2
Transmitter elements of safety circuits mounted on cars or doors shall withstand,
independently of the direction, an acceleration of +30 m/s2.
Where shock absorbers for transmitter elements are fitted, they shall be
considered as part of the transmitter elements.

Control shall be effected electrically as stated in the following paragraphs.
10.3.1 . I Normal Operation
This control shall be by the aid of buttons. These shall be placed in boxes, such
that no live parts are accessible.
The use of ropes, cords or rods as a means of control between the car and the
machine room is only permitted in very special cases (very humid, corrosive or
explosive atmosphere).
10.3.1.2 Levelling, Re-Levelling and Electrical Anti-creeping with Doors Open
In the specific case referred to in Clause 3.7.2 of Part 1, movement of the car
with landing and car doors open is permitted for levelling, re-levelling and
electrical anti-creeping on condition that:
(a) The movement is limited to the unlocking zone.
(1) All movement of the car outside the unlocking zone shall be
prevented by at least one switching device mounted in the bridge or
shunt of the door and lock safety devices.
(2) This switching device shall either:
be a safety contact satisfying the requirements of 10.2.2; or
be connected in such a way as t o satisfy the requirements for safety

circuits in 10.2.3.
(3) If the operation of the switches is dependent upon a device which is

indirectly mechanically linked to the car, e.g. by rope, belt or chain,
the breaking of or slack in the connecting link shall cause the
machine to stop through the action of an electrical safety device in
(4) During levelling operations, the means for making the electrical
safety devices of doors inoperative shall only function after the
stopping signal for a landing has been given.
-155-
Section E Part 2
(b) The speeds of re-levelling and electrical anti-creeping do not exceed 0.3
mls.
10.3.1.3 Inspection Operation
To facilitate inspection and servicing, a readily accessible control station shall be

provided on the car roof. This device shall be brought into operation by a
switch (inspection operation switch) which shall satisfy the requirements for
electrical safety devices in conformity with Clause 10.2.
This switch, which shall be bi-stable, shall be protected against involuntary

operation.
The following conditions shall be satisfied simultaneously :-
(a) Engagement of the inspection operation shall neutralize the normal

controls, including the operation of any automatic doors;
The return to normal service of the lift shall only be effected by another
operation of the inspection switch. If the switching devices used for this
neutralization are not safety contacts integral with the inspection switch
mechanism, precautions shall be taken t o prevent all involuntary
movement of the car in the event of one of the faults listed in 10.1.2
appearing into the circuit;
(b) The movement of the car shall be dependent on a simultaneous constant

pressure on two push-buttons protected against accidental operation and
with the direction of movement clearly indicated on the station;
(c) The control device shall also incorporate a stopping device in conformity
with Clause 10.3.2;
(d) The car speed shall not exceed 0.63 mls;
(e) The limits of normal car travel shall not be overrun; and
(f) The operation of the lift shall remain dependent on the safety devices.
The control device may also incorporate special switches protected

against accidental operation for controlling the mechanism of doors from
the car roof.
10.3.1.4 Electrical Anti-creep System
When required by Clause 5.8, an electrical anti-creep system shall be provided,

which satisfies the following conditions :
(a) The machine shall be energized in the up direction independent of the

position of the doors, when the car is in a zone which extends from
- 156-
Section E Part 2
maximum 0.12 m below the landing level t o the lower end of the
unlocking zone;
(b) When the lift has been unused for a period not exceeding 15 min after
the last journey, the car shall be dispatched automatically t o the lowest
landing;
(c) Indications according t o Clauses 11.2.5 and 11.4.5 shall be provided.
10.3.1.5 Home Landing Operation
See Part 1 Clause 10.3.1.5
10.3.1.6 Lift Operation with SecurityIFire Gates Installed in front of Lift Entrances
1 See Part 1 Clause 10.3.1.6
10.3.1.7 Deleted



I

Types of electrical Safety devices t o be used in a hydraulic lift are as follows :-
(b) safety circuits (see Clause 10.2.3), whatever the type of installation;
(c) safety circuits (see Clause 10.2.3), authorized by the Director in the case
of installations requiring special protection against risks of humidity or
explosion.
- 157-
Section E Part 2
Conditions for their use are summarised in Table 2. The 'X' indicates the
type of electrical safety device permitted t o be used for each function. If
there are several 'X's, there is a choice of devices.
- 158- I
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights resewed. ,
Section E Part 2
Table 2
Conditions for Use of Electrical Safety Devices
Type of
Electrical
a b c
1.2 Check on closed position of inspection and emergency X
doors and inspection traps
3.7.3 Check on locking of landing doors X X
3.7.5 Check on closed position of landing doors X X
3.7.7.2 Check on closed position of the panel or panels X X

without locks
4.7 Check on closed position of car door X X
4.9 Check on locking of car door X X
4.1 1.3 Check on locking of the emergency trap door and X

emergency door
5.6.3 Check on the abnormal relative extension of a rope or X

chain
5.10.8 Check on the operation o f safety gear X
5.1 1.8 Check on the operation of clamping device X
5.12.2.4 Check on the tension in the overspeed governor rope X
5.12.2.9 (a) Check on the operation of the overspeed governor X X X
5.12.2.9 (b) Check on the release of the overspeed governor X
6.2.5.3 Check on the return t o normal extended position of X

buffers
- 159-
Section E Part 2
Type of
Electrical
a b c
transmission of the car position for direct acting
lifts (final limit switches)

transmission of the ram position of indirect acting
lifts (final limit switches)
6.3.3 Final limit switch X
6.4 Check for slack rope or slack chain X
9.4.2 (b) Control of main switch X
10.3.1.2(a)(2) Check on levelling, re-levelling and electrical X X X

anti-creeping
10.3.1.2(a)(3) Check on the tension in the device for X

transmission of the car position
(levelling, re-levelling and electrical anti-creeping)
10.3.1.3 Inspection operation switch X
10.3.2 Stopping devices X
-160- *.-?
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights respp - -
.
I
Section E Part 2

See Part 1 Clause 11.I
1 1.2.1 Rated Load and Number of Passengers

11.2.2 Manufacturer
See Part 1 Clause 11.2.2.
1 1.2.3 Control Devices on Car Operating Panels

See Part 1 Clause 1 1.2.3
11.2.4 Other Necessary lnstructions

11.2.5 Notice to Close Doors

In the case of a lift provided with an electrical anti-creep system and with
manually operated doors, or with power operated doors where closing is
carried out under the continuous control of the users, there shall be a notice in
the car as follows:
'CLOSE DOORS AFTER USE'

( H?&BUFT 1
The minimum height of the characters shall be 50mm.
. 1 1.3 On the Car Roof

1 1.4 Machine and Pulley Rooms

1 1.4.2 lnstructions for Emergency Operations
- 161 -
Section E Part 2
In the machine room or the interior of the machine enclosure, there shall be
detailed instructions t o be followed in the event of lift breakdown, particularly
concerning the use of the device($ for manual emergency movement, and the
unlocking key for landing doors.



In the case of a lift provided with an electrical anti-creep system there shall be
an inscription on or near the main switch:
'Switch off only when the car is at the lowest landing'

( f3%m2!l%%i&@EzqBit$ )
1 1.5 On the Landings I
See Part 1 Clause 1 1.5
11.6 On the Overspeed Governor

11.7 In the Pit

11.8 On the Buffers


11.10 Electrical ldentification

See Part 1 Clause 11 .I0
1 1.1 1 Alarm Device
- 162 -
9~
,d
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights reserve >--
i
Section E Part 2
See Part 1 Clause 1 1 . I 1
1 1.1 2 Locking Devices

1 1.1 3 Safety Gear

See Part 1 Clause 1 1 .I 3
1 1.1 4 Emergency Lowering Valve

Near the manually operated valve for emergency downward movement there
shall be a plate stating:
'Caution - Emergency Lowering'

( /J\JL\- %%TE)
1 1.1 5 Hand Pump

Near the hand pump for emergency upward movement there shall be a plate
stating:
'Caution - Emergency Lifting'

( d\lL\ - %%&#I-)
- 163- Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights resewed

Section E Part 3
Section E
Part 3: Specification for Service Lifts
Contents Page
1. Lift well 168
1.I General Provisions 168
1.2 Lift Operation Subject to Closure of lnspection and Emergency Doors and
Inspection Traps 168
1.3 Construction of the Walls of Lift Wells and Landing Doors Facing a Car
Entrance 168
1.4 Protection of Accessible Spaces Below the Car or the Counterweight 168
1.5 Headroom and PitIBase of Lift Well 169
1.5.1 Top Clearances for Traction Lifts 169
1.5.2 Top Clearances for Positive Drive Lifts 169
1.5.3 Pit or Base of Lift Well 169
2. Machine Rooms and Enclosures 169
2.2 Space for Maintenance 170
2.3 Lighting and Socket Outlet 170
2.4 Temperature 171
2.5 Stopping Devices 171
3. Landing Doors 171
3.2 Strength of Doors and Door Frames 171
3.3 Size of Openings 172
3.4 Sills, Guides, Door Suspension 172
3.4.1 Sills 172
3.4.2 Door guides 172
3.4.3 Suspension of Vertically Sliding Doors 172
3.5 Locking and Closed Landing Door Check 172
3.5.1 Interlock 172
3.5.2 Protection against Risk of Falling 172
3.5.4 Locking Device 173
3.5.5 Emergency Unlocking 173
4. Car and Counterweight 173
4.1 Car Construction 173
4.2 Car Dimensions and Rated Load 174

A
Section E Part 3
4.3 Car Entrances 175
4.4 Counterweight 175
5. Suspension, Safety Gear and Governors 175
5.1 Suspension 175
5.2 Ratio between Diameter of Sheaves or Pulleys or Drums and Diameter of
Ropes 175
5.3 Safety Factor of Ropes and Chains 176
5.4 Termination of Ropes or Chains 176
..
5.5 Rope Traction on Traction Drive Lifts 177
5.6 Winding of Ropes on Drum Drive Lifts 177
5.7 Load Distribution between Ropes or Chains 177
5.8 Protection of Sprockets and Pulleys Used for Diversion or Reeving 177
5.9 Safety Gear 178
5.9.1 Requirements for Car 178
5.9.2 Requirements for Counterweight 178
5.9.3 Operation 178
5.9.4 Release of Safety Gear 179
5.9.5 Construction 179
5.10 Overspeed Governor 179
5.10.1 Tripping Speed 179
5.10.2 Governor Ropes 179
5.10.3 Response Time 179
5.10.4 Accessibility 180
5.10.5 Test Tripping of the Overspeed Governor 180
5.10.6 Sealing 180
6. Guides, Buffers, Terminal Stopping Switches and Obstruction Switch 180
6.1 Guides 180
6.2 Car and Counterweight Buffers 180
6.3 Terminal Stopping Switches 181
6.4 Obstruction Switch 181
.- 7. Lift Machine 182
.t"
7.1 General 182
7.2 Drive of the Car and the Counterweight 182
7.3 Use of Overhung Pulleys or Sprockets 182
7.4.2 Electro-mechanical Brake 183
7.5 Emergency Operation 183
7.6 Stopping the Machine and Checking its Stopped Condition 184

Section E Part 3 'I
7.7 Protection of Machinery
8. Electrical installation
8.1 .I Limits of Applications
8.4 Main Switch
8.5.2 Travelling Cables
8.5.5 Connectors
8.6.1 Lighting
8.6.3 Control of Lighting Circuits and Supply Circuits for Socket Outlets
9. Electrical Protection
9.1 Protection against Electric Faults
9.3.1 Lift Operation
9.3.2 Normal Operation
- 166- Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights reserved.

i
Section E Part 3
9.4 Conditions for Use of Electric Safety Devices 195
10. Notices and Operating Instructions 196
10.2 In the car 196
10.3 On the Landings 197
10.3.1 Rated Load 197
10.3.2 Control Devices 197
10.4 Machine Rooms and Enclosures 197
10.4.1 Notices for Power Switches 197
10.4.2 Instructions for Emergency Operations 197
10.5 In the Pit or Base of Lift Well 198
10.6 Electrical Identification 198
- 167- Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights reserved.

I
Section E Port 3 1
1. Lift well
1.I General Provisions
The requirements of this Clause relate to wells containing one or more lift cars.
The counterweight of the lift shall be in the same well as the car of the lift.
1.2 Lift Operation Subject t o Closure of lnspection and Emergency Doors and
Inspection Traps
All emergency and inspection doors and inspection traps provided at the well
enclosure shall be fitted with electrical safety devices complying with Clause 9.2
t o ensure that the lift will only operate with all such doors and traps closed.
1.3.1 For landing doors and walls, or parts of walls, facing a car entrance, Clauses
1.3.2 to 1.3.4 shall apply over the full height of the well.
1.3.2 The assembly, comprising the landing doors and any wall or part of a wall
facing the car entrance, shall form an imperforate surface over the full entrance
width of the car, excluding the operational clearances of doors.
1.3.3 The horizontal clearance between the car and the landing sill shall not exceed
25 mm.
1.3.4 In places other than between the car and sill, the horizontal distance between
the wall of the well and the sill or entrance frame of the car or the car door
shall not exceed 0.1 5 m.
1.4 Protection of Accessible Spaces Below the Car or the Countenweight

I
It is recommended that an accessible space does not occur beneath a lift well.
4
Where accessible spaces exist beneath the well, safety gear shall be fitted t o the I
car and/or the counterweight (see Clause 5.9). The bottom of the well shall be
of sufficient strength to accommodate the vertical forces of safety gear
operation and buffer loads.
Safety gear need not be provided where the rated load does not exceed 50 kg
and the travel does not exceed 4 m provided the well is of sufficient strength t o
absorb the energy of the loaded car and counterweight falling through full
travel with gravity acceleration.
- 168-
Section E Part 3
1.5 Headroom and Pit/Base of Lift Well
1.5.1 Top Clearances for Traction Lifts
A clearance of not less than 100 m m shall be provided at the top and bottom
so that if the car or counterweight strikes the lower buffers and fully
compresses them, the counterweight or car respectively shall not strike any
portion of the top of the lift well structure.
1.5.2 Top Clearances for Positive Drive Lifts
A minimum of 100 mm clearances shall be provided at the top between the lift
car and any part of the well structure so that in normal operation the car does
not strike the top buffers.
1.5.3 Pit or Base of Lift Well
1.5.3.1 General Provisions
No lift pit is allowed except in the case where the lowest serving level is at or
near floor level in accordance with the Code of Practice on Building Works for
Lifts and Escalators issued by the Building Authority.
1.5.3.2 Stop Switch
A stop switch, which is accessible on opening the door t o the base of the lift
well, shall be provided in the pit to stop the lift and keep it stopped. The switch
shall comply with Clause 9.3.3. There shall be no risk of mistaking the stop
position of the switch (see Clause 10.5).
1.5.3.3 Mechanical Stopper
Mechanical stopper shall be provided at a height of 1.8 m above the pitlbase of

lift well t o prevent the carkounterweight from descending accidentally causing
danger t o the maintenance personnel when he is working in the pitlbase of lift
well. The stopper shall be retracted during normal operation.
2. Machine Rooms and Enclosures
- 169-
Section E Port 3
2.1.1 The machine with its ancillary equipment shall be accommodated in an
enclosure within the lift well, or in a separate machine room. The enclosure or
room shall be accessible only to authorized persons, i.e. for maintenance,
inspection, etc.
2.1.2 The machine room shall not be used for purposes other than for the lift. It shall
not contain ducts, cables or devices other than those for the lift.
2.2 Space for Maintenance
2.2.1 Adequate machine room space shall be provided for the controller(s) to be
arranged with the clearances specified in Clauses 2.2.2 and 2.2.3. The
controller, if suitably enclosed, locked and protected, may be mounted outside
the machine room or well in an adjacent position.
2.2.2 A clear space of 0.90 m shall be provided in front of the controller. This may be
achieved by the provision of a moveable mounting for the controller.
2.2.3 Where access to the back or sides of a controller is required only for purposes
that do not require the controller t o be energized, a minimum space of 0.50 m,
shall be provided at these points.
Where a controller is permanently enclosed with no possible access at the sides

or back, then no clear space is needed at the side or back.
2.3 Lighting and Socket Outlet
The machine room or enclosure shall be provided with permanent electric

lighting. The lighting supply shall comply with Clause 8.6.1. A switch placed
close to the access point, at convenient height, shall control the lighting.
There shall be an automatic rechargeable emergency supply which is capable of

feeding at least a 5 W lamp per lift per machine room for 1 h in case of an
interruption of the normal lighting supply. This lighting shall be located
sufficiently close t o the control panel and machine and shall be manually
operated by a switch located near the access of machine room.
A socket outlet (see Clause 8.6.2) shall be provided.

<?'. 1
- 170- Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights reservgcl-/1

Section E Part 3
2.4 Temperature
The ambient temperature in the machine room shall be maintained between

+5OC and +40°C.
2.5 Stopping Devices
A stop switch shall be installed in the machine room, close to the point of
access, to stop the lift and keep it stopped. There shall be no risk of mistaking
the stop position of the switch. The switch shall comply with Clause 9.3.3.
This switch may not be required if the switch referred to in Clause 8.4.1 is
suitably located.
3. Landing Doors
The openings in the well giving access to the lift car shall be provided with .
imperforate landing doors.
When closed, the clearance between panels, or between panels and uprights,
lintels or sill, shall be as small as possible and shall not exceed 6 mm.
Allowance may be made for progressive wear provided the clearance does not
eventually exceed 10 mm.
These clearances shall be measured at the back of recesses, if present,
3.2 Strength of Doors and Door Frames
3.2.1 . Doors and door frames shall be constructed such that they will not become
deformed during normal operation.
3.2.2 . Doors, with their locks, in the locked position shall resist a force of 300 N
applied at right angles to the panel at any point on either face, being evenly
distributed over an area of 5 cm2 in round or squares section, such that:
(a) there is no permanent deformation;
(b) there is no elastic deformation greater than 15mm; and
(c) they operate satisfactorily after such a test.
-171 -
I
Section E Part 3 I
Size of Openings I
I
The clear width and height of the landing entrances shall not extend more than
50 mm beyond the clear car entrance on either side or upwards.
Sills, Guides, Door Suspension
Sills
Every landing entrance shall incorporate a sill of sufficient strength to withstand

the passage of loads being introduced into the car, in accordance with the
Code of Practice on Building Works for Lifts and Escalators issued by the
Building Authority.
Door guides
Landing doors shall be designed t o avoid, during normal operation, derailment,

jamming, or displacement at the extremities of their travel.
Horizontally sliding landing doors shall be guided top and bottom and vertically
sliding landing doors shall be guided at each side.
Suspension of Vertically Sliding Doors
Panels of vertically sliding landing doors shall be fixed to t w o independent

suspension elements with a safety factor of at least eight.
The diameter of suspension rope pulleys shall be at least 25 times the rope
diameter, if ropes are used as suspension elements.
Suspension ropes and chains shall be guarded against leaving the pulley
grooves or sprockets.
Locking and Closed Landing Door Check
Interlock
It shall not be possible during normal operation to start the lift nor keep it in
motion if a landing door (or any of the panels in the case of a multi-panel door)
is open.
Protection against Risk of Falling
-172-
<
I
3-
I
~
Section E Part 3
It shall not be possible during normal operation t o open a landing door (or any
of the panels in the case of a multi-panel door) unless the car is in the
unlocking zone.
The unlocking zone shall not extend more than 75 mm above and below the
landing level.
3.5.3 Electrical Device for Proving the Landing Door Closed
Each landing door shall be provided with an electric safety device complying
with Clause 9.2 for proving the closed position, such that the conditions in
Clause 3.5.1 are satisfied.
3.5.4 Locking Device
3.5.4.1 Each landing door shall be provided with a locking device satisfying the
requirements of Clause 3.5.2. This device shall be protected against deliberate
misuse.
3.5.4.2 The landing door locking elements shall engage by at least 5 mm.
3.5.4.3 On lifts whose car loading level is less than 800 m m above floor level the lock
shall resist, without deformation, a minimum force of 750 N at the level of the
lock and in the direction of opening the door.
3.5.4.4 The locking action shall be effected and maintained by the action of gravity or
springs. The springs shall act by compression, be guided and of such
dimensions that, at the moment of unlocking, the coils are not compressed
solid. In the event of the spring no longer fulfilling its function, gravity shall not
cause unlocking.
At least the terminal landing doors shall be provided with the facility of being
unlocked from the outside with the aid of a special purpose key which will fit
the unlocking triangle as defined in Clause 3.1 of Part 1. Keys of this type shall
be provided for use only by a competent lift worker. After an emergency
unlocking, the locking device shall not be able to remain in the unlocked
position with the landing door closed, when there is no action to unlock.
4.1 Car Construction
- 173-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights reselved.
Section E Part 3
4.1 .I The lift car shall be of rigid construction and totally enclosed, except for service
openings.
4.1.2 Two pairs of renewable guide shoes shall be fitted.
4.1.3 If required, the lift car interior shall be fitted with permanent or removable
shelves. Removable shelves shall be so retained that they are not displaced by
movement of the car.
4.1.4 The walls, floor and roof of the car and the car structure shall have sufficient
mechanical strength t o resist the forces which will be applied in normal lift
operation, in impact of the car on its buffers, and in operation of safety gear (if
provided).
4.1.5 The car shall not be made of inflammable materials.
4.1.6 A car having a roof area equal t o or greater than 0.37 m2 shall be capable of
supporting the following loads :-
(a) 75 kg for a roof area equal to or greater than 0.37 m2to less than 0.58m2;
(b) 150 kg for a roof area equal t o or greater than 0.58 m2.
4.2 Car Dimensions and Rated Load
4.2.1 The car floor area shall not exceed a value determined from Table 1
Table 1
Car floor area related to rated load
Rated Load Maximum Floor Area

kg m2
10 0.15
50 0.50
100 0.75
200 1 .oo
250 1 .OO
Intermediate values to be obtained by linear interpolation.
4.2.2 Neither the internal width nor the internal depth of the car shall exceed 1.40 m.
4.2.3 The overall internal height of the car shall not exceed 1.2 m
4.2.4 The rated load shall not exceed 250 kg.
I/
1
1
Section E Part 3
4.3 Car Entrances
4.3.1 Each car opening shall be provided with an imperforate door t o prevent goods
projecting outside the car during travel.
4.3.2 Each car door shall be provided with an electric safety device complying with
Clause 9.2 for proving the closed position such that it shall not be possible
during normal operation to start the lift nor keep it in motion if a car door or
any of the panels in the case of multi-panel door is open.
4.4 Counterweight
4.4.1 If the counterweight incorporates filler weights, measures shall be taken t o

prevent their displacement, either by a metal frame or a minimum of t w o
tie-rods.
4.4.2 If pulleys are fixed to the counterweight, they shall be provided with a device t o
prevent the suspension ropes, if they slacken, from leaving the grooves.
The device shall be so constructed as not to hinder inspection or maintenance

of the pulleys.
4.4.3 In the case of drum drive, there shall be no counterweight.
5. Suspension, Safety Gear and Governors

I
I 5.1 Suspension
I
I 5.1.1 Cars and counterweights shall be suspended from steel wire ropes, or steel
plate link chains such as leaf chains complying with BS5594 or IS0 4347 or
steel roller chains complying with BS228 or IS0 606.
5.1.2 Ropes shall comply with BS302 : Part 1 and Part 4 or IS0 4344. They shall have
a minimum diameter of:
(a) 6mm for traction drive with rated load 25 kg and above; or
(b) 5mm for drum drive and for traction drive below 25 kg rated load.
5.1.3 The minimum number of ropes or chains shall be t w o and they shall be
independent.
5.1.4 Where reeving is used, the number of ropes to be taken into account shall be
all the ropes or chains and not the number of falls.
5.2 Ratio between Diameter of Sheaves or Pulleys or Drums and Diameter of Ropes
- 175-
Section E Part 3
The ratio between the pitch diameter of sheaves, pulleys or drums and the
nominal diameter of the suspension ropes shall be at least 30, regardless of the
number of strands.
Safety Factor of Ropes and Chains
The safety factor of the suspension ropes, i.e. the ratio between the minimum
breaking load of one rope or one chain and the maximum force in this rope (or
in this chain), when the car is stationary at the lowest level, with its rated load,
shall be at least 10.
In calculating the maximum force in the ropes the following shall be taken into
consideration:
(a) the number of ropes or chains;
(b) the reeving factor (if applicable);
(c) the rated load;
(d) the mass of the car; and
(e) the mass of the rope or chain.
Termination of Ropes or Chains
The ends of the ropes shall be attached t o the car, counterweight or suspension
points by means of metal or resin filled sockets, self tightening wedge type
sockets, heart shaped thimbles with at least three suitable rope grips, hand
spliced eyes, ferrule secured eyes, or any other system having equivalent safety.
The junction between the rope and the rope termination shall be capable of
resisting at least 80% of the minimum breaking load of the rope.
The attachment of ropes to winding drums shall be achieved using a system of

blocking with wedges inside the drum, by using at least two clamps or any
other system having equivalent safety.
The safety factor of the suspension chains shall be at least 10. The safety factor
is defined in a manner analogous to that given in Clause 5.3 for ropes.
The ends of each chain shall be fixed t o the car, counterweight or suspension
termination shall be capable of resisting at least 80% of the minimum breaking
load of the chain.
Chainwheels shall have a minimum of 15 teeth and each chain shall engage
-176-
Section E Port 3
with a minimum of six teeth.
5.5 Rope Traction on Traction Drive Lifts
Rope traction shall be such that the following conditions are fulfilled :
(a) it shall not be possible t o raise the empty car when the counterweight is
resting on the buffers, and the lift machine is driven in the 'up' direction;
and
(b) the formulae in Note 1 at the end of Clause 5 of Part 1 are satisfied.
5.6 Winding of Ropes on Drum Drive Lifts
5.6.1 The winding drum shall be helically grooved and the grooves shall be suited to
the ropes used.
5.6.2 When the car rests on its fully compressed buffers, one and a half turns of rope
shall remain in the grooves of the drum.
5.6.3 There shall only be one layer of rope wound on the drum,
5.6.4 The angle of deflection (fleet angle) of the ropes in relation t o the grooves shall
not exceed 4'.
5.7 Load Distribution between Ropes or Chains
5.7.1 An automatic device shall be provided for equalising the tension in suspension
ropes, at least at one of their ends. If springs are used t o equalize the tension,
they shall work in compression.
5.7.2 For chains engaging with sprockets, the ends attached to the car and the ends
attached t o the counterweight shall be provided with equalisation devices.
Where chains engage with multiple return sprockets mounted on the same
shaft, the sprockets shall be able t o rotate independently.
5.7.3 Devices for adjusting the length of ropes or chains shall be constructed in such
a manner that these devices cannot work loose after adjustment.
5.8 Protection of Sprockets and Pulleys Used for Diversion or Reeving
Devices shall be provided t o avoid the following:
(a) bodily injury;
- 177-
Section E Part 3
(b) the ropes leaving their grooves, or the chains leaving their sprockets, if
slack; and
(c) the introduction of objects between ropes or chains and their grooves or
sprockets.
These devices shall be so constructed that they do not hinder inspection or

maintenance of the pulleys or sprockets.
5.9 Safety Gear
5.9.1 Requirements for Car
Cars for which :
(a) the rated capacity equals 250 kg;
(b) accessible spaces exist beneath its well (see Clause 1.4); or
(c) gross car roof area equals to or greater than 0.37 m2
shall be provided with a safety gear which is tripped by an overspeed governor.

The safety gear may be of the instantaneous type.
The safety gear shall be capable of operating only in the downward direction.
It shall be capable of stopping the car carrying the rated load or 100 kg,
whichever is the greater, when tripped by the overspeed governor, or if the
suspension devices break, by gripping the guides, and of sustaining the car in
that position.
5.9.2 Requirements for Counterweight

Where there is an accessible space beneath the well (see Clause 1.4), the
counterweight shall be equipped with safety gear, operating only in the
downward direction, capable of stopping it when tripped by a safety rope or by
the failure of the suspension gear, by gripping the guides, and of sustaining the
counterweight in that position.
5.9.3 Operation
Operation of the car safety gear or the counterweight safety gear is proved by
the device specified in Clause 6.4.3.
Safety gears shall not be tripped by devices which operate electrically,

hydraulically or pneumatically.
- 178-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights
Section E Port 3
5.9.4 Release of Safety Gear
The release of the safety gear on the car or the counterweight shall require the
intervention of a competent lift worker and shall only be possible by raising the
car or the counterweight.
After its release, the safety gear shall be in a condition to operate normally.
5.9.5 Construction
The safety gear jaws or safety blocks shall not be used as guide shoes.
The safety gear of the car and the counterweight shall be tripped by their
respective actuating ropes.
5.1 0 Overspeed Governor
5.1 0.1 Tripping Speed
The car overspeed governor shall trip the safety gear at a speed of not less than
115% of the rated speed and not greater than 1.25 mls.
The tripping speed of a counterweight overspeed governor shall be at least

10% higher than that of the car safety gear and not greater than 1.40 mls.
5.1 0.2 Governor Ropes
5.10.2.1 The minimum tensile force produced in the overspeed governor rope by the
governor, when tripped, shall be the greater of the following:
(a) 200 N; or
(b) twice the force required t o engage the safety gear.
5.10.2.2 The overspeed governor shall be driven by a flexible wire rope with a nominal
diameter of at least 3 mm. The breaking load of the rope shall be related by a
safety factor of at least 8 t o the tensile force produced in the rope of the
overspeed governor when tripped. The ratio between the pitch diameter of the
overspeed governor pulley and the nominal rope diameter shall be at least 30.
5.1 0.3 Response Time

sufficiently short not to permit a dangerous speed to be reached before the
- 179-
Section E Part 3
5.1 0.4 Accessibility
The overspeed governor shall be completely accessible in all circumstances.
If located in the well, it shall be accessible from outside the well.
5.10.5 Test Tripping of the Overspeed Governor
speed than that indicated in Clause 5.10.1 by tripping the overspeed governor.
5.1 0.6 Sealing
tripping speed.
6. Guides, Buffers, Terminal Stopping Switches and Obstruction Switch
Guides
The car and counterweight shall each be guided by rigid guides.
The strength of the guides, their attachments and joints shall be sufficient to
withstand the forces imposed due to the operation of the safety gear (if fitted)
and deflection due to uneven loading of the car. These deflections shall be
limited t o values that will not affect the normal operation of the lift.
Rotation of the guide fixings, by which the guides could be released, shall be
prevented.
Car and Counterweight Buffers
Buffers shall be placed at the bottom limit of travel for cars and
counterweights.
A positive drive lift shall be provided with additional buffers on the car top t o
function at the upper limit of travel.
If a counterweight is provided, the upper buffers shall not function until the
counterweight buffers are fully compressed.
The buffers used shall be selected from the following types :
- 180-
Section E Port 3
(a) spring;
(b) rubber;
(c) resilient plastic; or
(d) timber (for rated speeds up to and including 0.3 mls only).
6.3 Terminal Stopping Switches
6.3.1 Terminal stopping switches shall be set to stop the car automatically at or near
the terminal floors. The action of these switches shall be maintained whilst the
buffers are compressed.
6.3.2 Tripping of the terminal stopping switches shall be effected by one of the
following:
(a) on positive drive lifts:
(1) by a device linked t o the movement of the machine;
(2) by the car and by the counterweight, if there is one, at the top of
the well; or
(3) if there is no counterweight, by the car at the top and bottom of the
well;
(b) on traction drive lifts:
(1) directly by the car at the top and bottom of the well; or
(2) by a device which is indirectly linked to the car, e.g. by a rope, belt
or chain; whereby breakage of or slack in this linkage causes the
machine t o stop by means of an electrical safety device complying
with Clause 9.2.
6.4 Obstruction Switch
6.4.1 A safety device shall be provided to protect human and equipment when the
car or counterweight meets an obstruction when moving downwards. The
devices, as specified in Clauses 6.4.2 and 6.4.3 shall require resetting by a
competent lift worker.
6.4.2 Positive drive lifts shall have a slack rope or slack chain device t o open the
control circuit and cause the lift to stop if the car meets an obstacle when
moving downwards. This device shall comply with Clause.9.2.
- 181 -
Section E Part 3
6.4.3 Traction drive lifts shall incorporate a device t o cause the machine to stop, and
keep it stopped, if, after a start is initiated, the time elapsed exceeds 10 s in
excess of the normal time for travelling the full travel.
7. Lift Machine
7.1 General
Each lift shall have its own machine.
7.2 Drive of the Car and the Counterweight
7.2.1 The method of drive shall be one of the following:
(a) by traction, i.e. sheaves and ropes; or
(b) by positive drive, i.e. either by:
(1) use of a drum and ropes without counterweights; or
(2) use of sprockets and chains, in which case the calculations of the
driving elements shall take into account the possibility of the
counterweight, if there is one, or the car resting on its buffers.
7.2.2 If use is made of belts for coupling the motor or motors t o the component on
which the electro-mechanical brake (see Clause 7.4.2) operates, a minimum of
t w o belts shall be used.
7.3 Use of Overhung Pulleys or Sprockets
In the case of the use of overhung traction sheaves or sprockets, effective

precautions shall be taken to prevent the following :-
(a) the ropes leaving their grooves, or chains leaving their sprockets; and
(b) where the machine is not above the well, objects lodging between the
grooves and the ropes or between sprockets and chains.
These precautions shall not prevent examination and servicing of the traction
sheaves and sprockets.
7.4 Braking System

I
I
'
I
Section E Part 3
The lift shall be provided with a braking system which operates automatically in
the following events:
(a) loss of the mains power supply; or
(b) loss of the supply to control circuits.
The braking system shall have a friction type electro-mechanical brake.
7.4.2 Electro-mechanical Brake
(a) The brake shall be capable of stopping the machine when the car is
travelling downwards at its rated speed whilst carrying the rated load plus
25%;
(b) The component on which the brake operates shall be directly coupled t o
the traction sheave, drum or sprocket;
(c) In normal operation, a continuous flow of electrical current shall be

required to maintain the brake in the "OFF" position;
(d) No earth fault, short circuit or residual magnetism shall prevent the brake
from being applied when the power supply t o the lift motor is interrupted;
(e) Any machine fitted with a manual emergency operating device (see
Clause 7.5) shall be capable of having the brake released by hand and
require a constant effort t o keep the brake open;
(f) The brake shoe pressure shall be exerted by guided compression springs
or weights;
(g) Braking shall be effected by application on the brake drum or disc by

shoe(s), pad(s) or calliper($;
(h) Band brakes shall not be employed; and
(i) Brake linings shall be incombustible and of asbestos free material.
7.5.1 The machine shall be provided with a manual means of emergency operation
allowing the car t o be moved t o a landing with the aid of a smooth sprockless
wheel.
7.5.2 If the wheel is removable, it shall be located in an easily accessible place in the
machine room or enclosure. The wheel shall be suitably marked if there is any
risk of confusion as t o the machine for which it is intended.
- 183-
Section E Port 3
7.6.1 The stopping of the machine by means of an electrical safety device complying
with Clause 9.2 shall be controlled as specified in Clause 7.6.2.
7.6.2 The supply t o motors shall be interrupted by t w o independent contactors, the

contacts of which shall be in series in the supply circuit. If, whilst the lift is
stationary and one of the contactors has not opened the main contacts, further
movement of the car shall be prevented, at the latest at the next change in the
direction of motion.
7.7 Protection of Machinery
(e) fly-ball type overspeed governors,
At least part of other rotating components, e.g. traction sheaves, hand winding
wheels, brake drums and similar smooth round parts, shall be painted yellow.
8. Electrical installation
8.1.1 Limits of Applications
The requirements specified in this Clause 8 relating to the installation and t o

the constituent components of the electrical equipment apply t o the main
switch of the power circuit and dependent circuits.
The lift should be considered as a whole, in the same way as a machine with its
built-in electrical equipment. The Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring)
Regulations issued under the Electricity Ordinance shall apply as far as the input
terminals of the switches referred to above. They shall also apply to the whole
lighting circuit of the machine room, the lift well and pit, as well as t o the
protective conductors in Clause 8.1.6.

1
I
Section E Part 3
In the machine rooms, protection against direct contact shall be provided by

means of casings having a degree of protection of at least IP 2X in accordance
with BS5490 or IEC 529 and BS5420 or IEC 144.
The resistance of the insulation between conductors and between conductors

and earth shall be greater than 1 000 o h m N with a minimum of:
(a) 500 000 ohm for power circuits and electric safety device circuits; and
(b) 250 000 ohm for other circuits, e.g. controls, lighting, signaling.
The mean value in direct current or the r.m.s. value in alternating current of the
voltage between conductors or between conductors and earth, shall not exceed
250 V for control and safety circuits.
The neutral conductor and the earth-continuity conductor shall always be

separate.
All exposed metallic parts of the lift, including machine frames, controller
frames, governor frames, face plates of landing buttons and indicators, casing
of electric safety devices, guide rails, etc, shall be bonded to the main earthing
terminal of the main switch laid down in Clause 8.4 by supplementary bonding
through protective conductors.
8.2.1 . I The main contactors, i.e. those necessary t o stop the machine (see Clause 7.6.2)
shall be of the following utilization categories of 855424: Part 1, or IEC 158 :
(a) AC-3, for contactors for a.c. motors;
- 185 -
Section E Part 3
(b) DC-2, for contactors for d.c. power.
These contactors shall in addition allow 10% of starting operations to be made

as inching.
8.2.1.2 If relay contactors are necessary because of the power the main contactors
carry, the relay contactors shall be of the following utilization categories of
854794 Part 1 or IEC 337:
(a) AC-I I,for controlling a.c. electromagnets;
I
(b) DC-11, for controlling d.c. electromagnets.
8.2.1.3 It shall be assumed in the measures taken to comply with Clause 9.1 . I that for
both the main contactors (see Clause 8.2.1.1) and the relay contactors (see
Clause 8.2.1.2):
(a) if any one of the break contacts (normally closed) is closed, all the make
contacts are open;
(b) if any one of the make contacts (normally open) is closed, all the break
contacts are open.
8.2.2
8.2.2.1
Components of Safety Circuits
When devices specified in Clause 8.2.1.2 are used as relays in a safety circuit,
i,
the assumptions of Clause 8.2.1.3 shall also apply.
8.2.2.2 If relays are used which are such that the break and make contacts are never
attraction of the armature (see Clause 9.1.2 (f)) shall be disregarded.
I
I
8.2.2.3 The creep distances and the air gaps (not the separation distances) of any
devices connected after electric safety devices shall meet the requirements of
Clause 9.2.2.2. This requirement does not apply t o the devices mentioned in
Clauses 8.2.1 .I, 8.2.1.2 and 8.2.2.1 which themselves fulfill the requirements
of 855424: Part 1 or IEC 158; and 854794: Part 1 or IEC 337.
8.3.1 Motors directly connected to the mains shall be protected against short-
circuiting. I
8.3.2 Motors shall be protected against overloads by means of manual re-set (except
as provided for in Clause 8.3.3) automatic circuit-breakers which shall cut off
the supply to the motor in all live conductors.
8.3.3 When the detection of overloads operate on the basis of temperature increases

1~
'
Section E Part 3
in the windings of the motor, the circuit-breaker may be closed automatically
after sufficient cooling has taken place.
8.3.4 The requirements of Clause 8.3.2 apply to each winding of a motor if the
motor has windings supplied by different circuits.
8.4 Main Switch
8.4.1 In the vicinity of each lift machine room or enclosure there shall be a main
switch for that lift which shall be capable of breaking the supply t o the lift on
all the live conductors. The switch shall be lockable in the "OFF" position. The
switch shall be capable of interrupting the highest current involved in normal
conditions of use of the lift.
The switch shall not isolate the circuits feeding the following:
(a) lighting of machine rooms;
(b) socket outlet in the machine rooms; and
(c) lighting of the lift well, if applicable.
8.4.2 The main switch in Clause 8.4.1 shall have stable open and closed positions.
The control mechanism for the main switch shall be adjacent, and readily
accessible, to the entrance(s) to the machine room. If the machine room is
common to several lifts, the control mechanism of the main switches shall allow
the lift concerned to be identified easily.
The conductors and cables in the machine room and lift wells with the
exception of travelling cables shall be selected from those specified in BS6004,
856007 and 856500; or IEC 227 and IEC 245 taking into account the following.
(a) Cables such as those listed in table 1 and table 2 of BS6004 (or the
equivalent in IEC 227) and table 19 of BS6500 (or the equivalent in IEC
245) shall be installed in conduits or trunking made of either metal or
plastics or shall be protected in a similar manner. They shall not be used
for machine power circuits.
(b) Rigid cables shall only be used in visible mountings fixed to the wall of the
well or of the machine room or installed in ducting, trunking or similar
fittings.
- 187-
Section E Part 3
(c) Ordinary flexible cables, such as those listed in table 6 (H05RR-F) and table
16 (H05W-F) of BS6500 (or the equivalent in IEC 245) shall be routed
through ducting, trunking, or fittings which provide equivalent protection.
(d) Flexible cables with a thick sheath shall be considered t o be rigid cables in
the conditions specified in Clause 8.5.1 .(b). The flexible cables may also
be used t o connect to moveable appliances except as travelling cables for
connection to the car or if they are subject to vibration.
(e) The requirements of Clauses 8.5.1(a) t o 8.5.l(d) do not apply to :
(1) conductors or cables which are not connected to electric safety

devices on landing doors, provided that:
(i) they are not subject to a rated output of more than 100 VA;
and
(ii) the voltage, between poles (or phases) or between a pole (or
one of the phases) and earth, to which they are normally
subject does not exceed 50 V ;
(2) the wiring of operating or distribution devices in cabinets or on

panels:
(i) either between different pieces of electrical equipment; or
(ii) between these pieces of equipment and the connection

terminals.
In these instances the requirements of BS5486 or IEC 439 apply.
8.5.2 Travelling Cables
Travelling cables shall comply with BS6977 or relevant IEC standard
The cross-sectional area of conductors of electric safety circuits of doors shall be

not less than 0.75 mm2.
(a) The electric installation shall be provided with all identifications, symbols,
etc. which are necessary for easy recognition.
(b) Connections, connection terminals and connectors shall be located in

cabinets, boxes or on panels provided for this purpose.
- 188-
Section E Part 3
(c) If, after the opening of the main switch or switches of a lift, some
connection terminals remain live, they shall be clearly separated from
terminals which are not live and shall be protected against direct contact.
If the voltage exceeds 50 V, the terminals shall be marked to this effect.
(d) Connection terminals whose accidental interconnection could lead to a

dangerous malfunction of the lift shall be clearly separated unless their
method of construction obviates this risk.
(e) In order t o ensure continuity of mechanical protection, the protective

sheathing of conductors and cables shall enter fully the casings of
switches and appliances, or shall terminate in a suitably constructed gland.
Enclosed frames of landing and car doors shall be regarded as appliance

casings. However, where there is a risk of mechanical damage due t o
movement of parts or sharp edges of the frame, the conductors
connected t o the electric safety device shall be protected mechanically.
(f) If a duct or cable contains conductors whose circuits have different

voltages, all the conductors or cables therein shall be insulated for the
highest voltage.
8.5.5 Connectors
Connectors and devices of the plug-in type placed in safety circuits shall be so
designed and arranged that, if their withdrawal does not require the use of a
tool, it is impossible t o re-insert the plug incorrectly.

8.6.1 Lighting
The electric lighting supplies to the well, if applicable, and the machine room,
shall be independent of the supply to the machine, either through another
circuit or through connection to the machine supply circuit on the supply side
of the main switch or the main switches laid down in Clause 8.4.
The supply t o socket outlets required in the machine rooms and in the pit, if
provided shall be taken from the circuits referred t o in Clause 8.6.1. These
socket outlets shall be either:
(a) of type 2P + PE, 250 V in accordance with BS1363 (or other relevant
international standards), fed directly; or
-189-
Section E Part 3
(b) supplied at a safe extra-low voltage.
The use of socket outlets t o BS1363 does not imply that the supply cable has a
cross-sectional area corresponding t o the rated current of the socket outlet.
The cross-sectional area of the conductors supplying the outlet may be smaller,
provided that the conductors are correctly protected against excess currents.
8.6.3 Control of Lighting Circuits and Supply Circuits for Socket Outlets
8.6.3.1 A switch shall control the supply t o the circuit of each of the machine room.
This switch shall be located inside and close t o the access t o the machine room.
8.6.3.2 A switch shall control the supply t o the circuit of each well and pit ( if
applicable ). This switch shall be located inside and close t o the access t o the
machine room.
8.6.3.3 The circuit controlled by the switches specified in Clauses 8.6.3.1 and 8.6.3.2
shall have its own protection.
9. Electrical Protection
9.1 Protection against Electric Faults
the lift shall not, on its own, be the cause of a dangerous malfunction of the lift
The following faults are envisaged in the electrical equipment of the lift :
(b) voltage drop;
(d) insulation fault in relation t o the metalwork or the earth;
(e) short circuit or open circuit in an electrical component, e.g. resistor,

capacitor, transistor, lamp;

contactor or relay;
- 190-
Section E Part 3
(i) non-closing of a contact;
(i) phase reversal.
safety contacts conforming to the requirements of Clause 9.2.2.

Clause 9.2 is short-circuited to earth as in case (d) in Clause 9.1.2, it shall :
(a) either cause the immediate stopping of the machine; or

'1
(b) prevent restarting of the machine after the first normal stop.
The return to service shall not be possible except by a competent lift worker,
9.2.1.1 During operation of one of the electrical safety devices given in Clause 9.4,
immediately, as specified in Clause 9.2.4. The electrical safety devices shall
consist of either :
(a) one or more safety contacts satisfying Clause 9.2.2 directly cutting the
supply to the contactors referred to in Clause 8.2.1.1 or on their relay
contactors; or
(b) safety circuits satisfying Clause 9.2.3, consisting of either:
cutting the supply to the contactors referred to in Clause 8.2.1 . I or
their relay contactors; or
(2) contacts not necessarily satisfying the requirements of Clause 9.2.2.
9.2.1.2 Apart from the specific exceptions given elsewhere in this Code, no electrical
equipment shall be connected in parallel with an electrical safety device.
- 191 -
Section E Part 3
by an extraneous signal emanating from another electric device placed further
down the same circuit which would cause a dangerous condition t o result.
9.2.1.5 In safety circuits comprising t w o or more parallel channels, all information other
9.2.1.6 Even in the event of a fault, circuits which record or delay signals shall not
prevent or appreciably delay the stopping of the machine through the
functioning of an electrical safety device.
such as to prevent the appearance of false signals at outputs of electric safety
devices due to the effects of switching.
9.2.1.8 The conditions for use of electric safety devices shall be as given in Table 2 ,

breaking devices. The separation shall occur even if the contacts have welded
together.

brought t o their open position and when, for a significant part of the travel,
there are no resilient members, e.g. springs, between the moving contacts and
the part of the actuator to which the actuating force is applied. !
,--1
The design of the contact assembly shall be such as to minimis; the risk of a
short-circuit resulting from component failure. -. - ~..
... ~.~
.--
9.2.2.2 Type of Safety Contacts 1
The safety contact shall be provided for a rated insulation voltage of 250 V if
I
degree of protection of the enclosure is less than IP 4X in accordance with
BS5490 or IEC 529.
1
i\ I
The safety contacts shall be of the following categories as defined in BS4794:
- 192 -
1~
'I
Reproduced with the perrniss~onof CEN - 0 all rights reserved. '
Section E Part 3
Part 1; or IEC 337-1, 1A 1B :
(a) AC-1 1, for safety contacts in a.c. circuits;
(b) DC-I I,for safety contacts in d.c. circuits
9.2.2.3 Protective Enclosure
If the protective enclosure is worse than class IP 4X, the air gaps and creep
distances shall be at least 6mm and the distances for breaking contacts at least
4 mm after separation.
shall be accommodated in an appropriate protective enclosure. Protective
enclosure need not be provided in the case of external influences considered as
normal in the Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations issued
under the Electricity Ordinance.
9.2.2.4 In the case of multiple breaks, the distance after separation between the
9.2.2.5 Abrasion of conductive material shall not lead to short circuiting of contacts.
Safety circuits shall comply with Clause 9.1 . I relating to appearance of a fault
and the following :
(a) If one fault combined with a second fault can lead t o a dangerous
sequence in which the first faulty element should participate. Further
operation of the lift shall be impossible as long as this fault persists.
The possibility of the second fault occurring after the first and before the
lift has been stopped by the sequence mentioned, is not considered in this
requirement.
(b) If a dangerous situation can only occur through the combination of

lift shall be brought about at the latest before the possible appearance of
the fault which, in conjunction with the already existing fault would lead
to the dangerous situation.
(c) On restoration of the power supply after it has been disconnected,

that, during the next sequence, stopping is re-imposed in the cases
covered by Clauses 9.2.3 (a) and (b) above.

Section E Port 3
(d) In redundancy-type circuits, measures shall be taken to limit as far as
electric supply to the brake shall likewise be broken.
supply t o the machine in accordance with Clause 7.6.
If because of the power t o be transmitted relay contactors are used t o control

supply t o the machine for starting and stopping.
The components controlling the electric safety devices shall be built so that they
are able t o function properly under the mechanical stresses resulting from
If the devices for controlling electric safety devices through the nature of their
installation are accessible to persons, they shall be so built that these electric
In the case of redundancy-type safety circuits, appropriate mechanical or

geometric arrangements of the transmitter element shall ensure that a
mechanical fault does not cause loss of redundancy.
Transmitter elements of safety circuits shall withstand, independently of the

direction a vibration of sine-wave form with a frequency, f, of between 1 Hz
and 50 Hz and an amplitude a (in mm) which is given as a function of f by the
equations:
a = 250/f2 for 10 c f I 50 Hz
Transmitter elements of safety circuits mounted on cars or doors shall withstand

an acceleration of + 30 m/s2, independent of direction.
11
Where shock absorbers for transmitter elements are fitted, they shall be I
considered as part of the transmitter elements.
i
-194-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all r~ghtsresewed.
i
Section E Port 3
9.3.1 Lift Operation
Control of the lift operation shall be effected electrically.
Control during normal operation shall be by the aid of buttons. These shall be
enclosed to a degree of protection of at least IP 2X.
Ropes, cords or rods shall not be used as a means of control between the
landings and the machine except in extreme environmental conditions, e.g. very
humid, corrosive or explosive atmospheres.
The stopping devices shall consist of electric safety devices complying with
Clause 9.2. They shall be bi-stable and such that a return to service cannot
result from an involuntary action. One such device is the pit switch specified in
Clause 1.5.3.2.
9.4 Conditions for Use of Electric Safety Devices
Types of electrical safety devices are :
(b) safety circuits (see Clause 9.2.3) used only in installations against risk of
humidity or explosion.
The 'X' in Table 2 indicates the type of device to be used. If there are
several 'X's, there is a choice of devices.
- 195-
Section E Part 3
Table 2
Conditions for Use of Electrical Safety Devices
Electrical
Safety Device
Clause Device Checked
Type a Type b
1.2 Check on closed position of inspection and X
emergency doors and inspection traps
3.5.3 Check on closed position of landing doors X X
3.5.1 Check on closed position of the panel or panels X X

without locks
4.3.2 Check on closed position of car door X X
6.3.2 (b) (2) Check on the tension in the device for X

transmission of the car position (terminal limit
switches)
6.4.2 X
Check for slack rope or slack chain
9.3.3 X
Stopped devices
10.1 General Provisions I

All labels, notices and operating instructions shall be legible and readily
understandable, aided by signs or symbols if necessary. They shall be
untearable, of durable material and placed in a visible position, and written in
English and Chinese language.
The minimum height of the characters used for the notice and operating
instructions shall be, unless otherwise specified :
(a) 10 m m for Chinese characters, capital letters and numbers; and
(b) 7 m m for small letters.
10.2 In the car
The manufacturer's name and identification serial number of the lift shall be
displayed in the car.
- 196-
Section E Part 3
10.3 On the Landings
10.3.1 Rated Load
The size of each character shall not be less than 25 mm high.
The rated load of the lift in kg shall be prominently displayed on a notice at

each landing entrance.
A warning notice bearing the legend
'Persons are forbidden to enter the lift car or enclosure'

( %k%AfiF@%rn%#B )
should be prominently displayed at each landing entrance.
I
10.3.2 Control Devices
The landing control devices shall be clearly identified by reference to their

function.
10.4 Machine Rooms and Enclosures

Notices shall be provided to permit easy identification of the main switch(es)

and the light switches.
If, after opening a main switch, some parts remain live, e.g. lighting, a notice
shall indicate this.
i
I 10.4.2 Instructions for Emergency Operations
In the machine room or the interior of the machine enclosure there shall be
detailed instructions to be followed in the event of lift breakdown, particularly
concerning the use of the device(s) provided for manual emergency movement,
and the unlocking key for landing doors.
I The direction of movement on the car shall be clearly indicated on the machine.
On or near any stopping devices in the machine room, there shall be the word
! - 197-
Section E Part 3
'STOP' ( F& ) so placed that there can be no risk of error as to the stop
position.
10.5 In the Pit or Base of Lift Well
On or near the stop switch in the pit or base of the lift well there shall be the word
'STOP' ( I@& ), so placed that there can be no risk of error as t o the stop
position.
10.6 Electrical Identification
Contactors, relays, fuses and connection strips for circuits entering the control
panels shall be marked and identified in accordance with the wiring diagram.
Wires shall be marked for identification purpose.
Where multiple wire connectors are used, only the connector, and not the wires,
shall be marked.
- 198-
I~
I
I
Section E Part 4
Part 4: Specification for Escalators
Contents Page
1. Enclosure, Surrounds, Supporting Structure and Lighting
1.I Enclosure of the Escalator
1 . 1 . I General Provisions
1 . I .2 Material and Mechanical Strength
1 . I .3 Inspection Doors and Trap Doors
1 . I .4 Apertures for Ventilation
1 . I .5 Balustrades
1.I .5.1 Components of Balustrades
1.I .5.2 Measures t o Prevent Imprudent Act 206
1. I .5.3 Material and Mechanical Strength of Balustrades 206
1. I .5.4 Parts of Balustrade Facing Steps, Pallets or Belt 206
1 . I .5.5 Skirting 207
1 . I .5.6 Interior Profile and Balustrade Interior Panelling 208
1 . I .5.7 Distance between Balustrade Interior Panelling 208
1 . I .5.8 Newel 209
1.2 Surrounds of the Escalator 209
1.2.1 Landing Area 209
1.2.2 Clear Height above Steps, Pallets or Belt and Landing Area, etc. 209
1.2.3 Adjacent Building Obstacles and Criss-cross Escalators 209
1.2.4 Clearances between Balustrade Exterior Panelling and Adjacent Guard
RailNVall 21 1
1.2.5 Distance between the Outer Edge of the Handrail and Adjacent
WallIBuilding ObstaclesIEscalators 21 1
1.2.6 Adjacent Gates 21 1
1.3 Supporting Structure of the Escalator 21 1
1.4 Lighting 212
2. Machinery spaces 21 2
2.2 Construction and Equipment of Machinery Spaces, Driving and Return
Stations 212
2.2.1 Maintenance Space 212
2.2.2 Lighting and Socket Outlets 213
2.2.3 Temperature and Ventilation 213
- 199-
Section E Part 4
3. Handrail 214
3.2 Continuation of the Handrail Beyond the Comb 21 5
3.3 Handrail Profile and Position 21 5
3.4 Distance between the Handrail Centrelines 21 5
3.5 Protection at the Point of Entry into the Balustrade 21 5
3.6 Vertical Distance between Handrail and Step Nose, Pallets or Belt Surface 21 6
3.7 Guiding 216
3.8 Breaking Strength 21 6
3.9 Earthing Protection of Handrail 216
4. Steps, Pallets, Belt and Combs 216
4.1 Dimensions 216
4.2 Construction of the Steps, Pallets and the Belt 21 6
4.2.2 Type Testing 217
4.2.3 Step Treads and Pallets 217
4.2.4 Belts 217
4.2.5 Step Risers 218
4.3 Combs 218
4.3.1 General Provisions 21 8
4.3.2 Construction of the Combs 218
4.4 Protection Against Trapping between Comb and Steps, Pallet or Belt 219
4.5 Protection Against Sagging of Any Part of the Steps, Pallet or Belt 219
5. Drive for Steps, Pallets or Belt 219
5.1 Chain Drive for Steps and Pallets 219
5.2 Drum Drive for the Belt 220
5.3 Other Methods of Driving Steps, Pallets or Belt 220
6. Angle of Inclination and Guiding of the Steps, Pallets and Belt 220
6.1 Angle of Inclination and Position of the Steps 220
6.1 .I Angle of Inclination 220
6.1.2 Horizontal Movement of Steps, Pallets or Belt 220
6.1.3 Radius of Curvature in Transition from Incline to Horizontal 22 1
6.2 Guiding of Steps, Pallets and Belt 22 1
7. Clearances between Steps, Pallets, Belt and Skirting 222
7.1 Clearance between Steps or Pallets 222
7.2 Clearance between Steps or Pallets or Belt and Skirting 222
7.3 Mesh Depth of the Combs into the Grooves of the Step or Pallet Tread 222
7.4 Mesh Depth of the Combs into the Grooves of the Belt 223
8. Machine 223
- 200 -
Section E Part 4
8.2 Speed 223
8.3 Link between Operational brake and Steps, Pallet or Belt Drive 223
8.4.2 Operation 225
8.4.3 Manual Release 225
8.4.4 Brake Load and Stopping Distances for Operational Brake 225
8.4.4.1 Brake Load for Escalators (excluding passenger conveyors) 225
I 8.4.4.2 Stopping Distances for Escalators (Excluding Passenger Conveyors) 225
8.4.4.3 Brake Load for Passenger Conveyors 226
8.4.4.4 Stopping Distances for Passenger Conveyors 226
8.5 Protection against Risks of Overspeed and Unintentional Reversal of the
Direction of Travel 227
8.6 Auxiliary Brake for the Driving System for Steps and Pallets or the Belt in the
Event of Breakage of Drive Chains 227
8.6.2 Operation 227
8.6.3 Simultaneous Operation of Auxiliary Brake and Operational Brake 228
8.6.4 Stopping Distances 228
8.7 Hand Winding Device 228
8.8 Protection in Driving Stations andlor Return Stations 228
8.9 Rated Load for Driving Machine and Power Transmission 229
9. Electrical Installations and Appliances 229
9.1 . I Limits of Application 229
9.1.2 Protection against Direct Contact 229
9.1.3 Insulation Resistance 230
1 9.1.4 Voltage for Control and Safety Circuits
230
230
9.1.6 Bonding of Metallic Parts to Main Earthing Terminals 230
9.2 Contactors, Relay Contactors, Components of Electrical Safety Circuits 230
9.2.1 Contactors and Relay Contactors 230
9.2.2 Components of Electrical Safety Circuits 23 1
9.3 Protection of Motors 23 1
9.4 Main Switches 23 1
9.5 Electrical Wiring 232
9.5.1 Cables 232
9.5.2 Cross-sectional Area of Conductors 233
- 201 -
Section E Part 4
9.5.3 Method of Installation 233
9.5.4 Connectors 233
9.6 Socket Outlets 233
10. Electrical Protection and Controls 234
10.1 Protection Against Electrical Faults 234
10.1. I General Provisions 234
10.1.2 Earthing Protection 234
10.2 Electrical Safety Devices 234
10.2.2 Safety Contacts 236
10.2.3 Safety Circuits 236
10.2.4 Operation of Electrical Safety Devices 238
10.2.5 Control of Electrical Safety Devices 238
10.3 Controls 238
10.3.1 Key Switch Starting and Making Available for Use 238
10.3.1. I Automatic Starting and Speed Increasing 238
10.3.1.2 Pre-determined Direction of Travel for Escalators Start
Automatically
10.3.2 Stopping
10.3.2.1 Normal Stopping, Manually Operated
10.3.2.2 Normal Stopping or Slowing Down, Automatically Operated
10.3.2.3 Emergency Stopping, Manually Operated
10.3.2.4 Emergency Stopping, Automatically Operated
10.3.3 Reversal of Direction of Travel
10.3.4 Restarting of the Escalator
10.3.5 Inspection Control
11. Signs, Notices for Use and Signals
11 . I Inscriptions and Notices for Use
11.I .2 Notices Near the Entrances of Escalators
11.I .3 Instructions for Handwinding Device and Brake Release Device
11 . I .4 Identification of Escalators
11.2 Special Notices for Escalators Starting Automatically
Figures
Fig. 1 Illustrative Elevation of an Escalator's Dimension Requirements

Fig. 2 Illustrative end View of an Escalator's Dimension Requirements
- 202 -
Reproduced w ~ t hthe perrniss~onof CEN - 0 all rights reserved.
I
Section E Part 4
I Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Dimension Requirements of a Step
Pallet Type Ppassenger Conveyor's Dimnension Requirements
Fig. 5 Transverse Distance between Supporting Rollers
Fig. 6 Vertical Obstruction Guard
Fig. 7 Skirt Panel Deflector Device (Skirt Guard)
Fig. 8 Notices for Use
Fig. 9 Diagram for Drafting and Assessing Safety Circuits
- 203 -
Section E Port 4
Enclosure, Surrounds, Supporting Structure and Lighting
Enclosure of the Escalator
General Provisions
All mechanically moved parts of the escalator shall be completely enclosed within
imperforate panels or walls. Exempt from this are the accessible steps, the
accessible pallets, the accessible belt and that part of the handrail available for the
user. Apertures for ventilation are permitted.
It should be possible t o clean the underside of the escalator in order t o prevent

accumulation of dirt. If such cleaning is not possible, other precautions shall be
taken to avoid the related fire hazard arising from accumulation of dirt or oil drops.
The exterior panels shall withstand a force of 250 N at any point at right angles on
an area of 25 cm2 without breakage or deflection resulting in any gap. The fixing
shall be designed in such way to carry at least twice the dead load of the enclosure.
Any exterior panels which are designed to be opened (e.g. for cleaning purposes)
shall be provided with an electrical safety device (see clause 10.4).
Material and Mechanical Strength
The enclosure shall be constructed in such a way that it will not become deformed
in the course of time.
The enclosure shall possess sufficient mechanical strength such that, when a force
of 300 N is applied at right angles t o the enclosure, at any point, from the outside,
this force being evenly distributed over an area of 500 mm2 in round or square
section, it shall :
a) resist without any permanent deformation; and
b) resist without elastic deformation greater than 15 mm.
In the situation where glass is being used to construct the enclosure, safety
glass of a minimum thickness of 6 m m shall be used.
If glass is used for the interior panel it shall be toughened glass. The minimum
thickness of 6 mm shall apply to single layer balustrades. When multi-layer glass
balustrades are used, they shall be laminated toughened glass, the thickness of at
least one layer shall also be not less than 6 mm.
Inspection Doors and Trap Doors
Inspection doors and trap doors on the enclosure shall be provided only where
necessary for the inspection and maintenance of the equipment.
- 204 -
Section E Part 4
1. I .3.2 It shall be possible to open inspection doors and trap doors only by means of a
key or a tool specially suited for that purpose, and available only t o competent
escalator workers.
1. I .3.3 if rooms behind inspection or trap doors can be entered, it shall be possible to
open the inspection or trap doors from the inside without a key even when
locked.
1.I.3.4 lnspection doors or trap doors which open on to adjacent escalator treadways
shall be provided with electrical safety devices in conformity with Clause 10.2
which prevent adjacent escalators from being operated when these doors are
opened (see Clause 10.3.2.4 (q)).
1 . I .3.5 lnspection doors and trap doors shall be imperforate and conform to the same
conditions as required for the enclosure material and mechanical strength (see
Clause 1.I.2).
1. I .3.6 lnspection covers and floor plates shall be provided with a safety device (see
clause 10.4).
1.I .4 Apertures for Ventilation
It shall not be possible to touch any moving part through a ventilation aperture.
1.1.5 Balustrades
1. I .5.1 Components of Balustrades
Balustrades (see Fig. 2) shall be installed on each side of the escalator. It shall
consist of the following components:
(a) Skirting
Portion of the enclosure adjacent t o the outer edges of the steps, pallets
or belt (see A of Fig. 2).
(b) Interior Profile
The profile which connects the skirting with the balustrade interior
panelling (see B of Fig. 2).
(c) Balustrade lnterior Panelling
lnterior panels between the skirting or the interior profile and the
balustrade decking underneath the handrail (see C of Fig. 2).
(d) Balustrade Decking
- 205 -
Section E Port 4
The decking which is situated underneath the handrail and forms the top
cover of the balustrade panelling (see E of Fig. 2).
(e) Balustrade Exterior Panelling
Exterior panelling which, from the balustrade deckings, encloses the

escalator (see D of Fig. 2).
(f) Newel
The end of the balustrade on the landings, where the handrails change
their direction of movement (see G of Fig. 1).
1. I .5.2 Measures t o Prevent Imprudent Act
Appropriate measures shall be taken to discourage people from climbing on the

outsides of the balustrade if there is a danger of people falling from them, for
this purpose the balustrades shall have no parts on which a person would
normally stand.
1.I .5.3 Material and Mechanical Strength of Balustrades
As part of the enclosure of the escalator, the requirements of Clause 1.I .2 shall
apply to the balustrades, with the following additional requirements :
a) With a vertical force of 900 N distributed over the surface of the handrail
for a length of 0.5 m there shall be no permanent deformation, no
breakage or displacement of any balustrade parts.
b) The balustrade interior panelling shall have adequate mechanical strength

and rigidity. When a force of 500 N is applied to the balustrade interior
panelling on any point of the panelling at right angles on area of 25 cm2,
there shall be no gap formed with clearance greater than 4mm and no
permanent deformation.
c) The skirting shall yield a clearance of not more than 4 mm under a single
force of 1,500 N acting at the most unfavourable point at right angles t o
the surface over an area of 25 cm2. No permanent deformation shall
result from this.
d) Balustrades shall be designed to resist the simultaneous application of a

static lateral force of 600 N and a vertical force of 730 N, both equally
distributed over a length of 1 m and acting on the top of the handrail
guiding system in the same place.
1. I .5.4 Parts of Balustrade Facing Steps, Pallets or Belt
a) The parts of the balustrade facing the steps, pallets or belt shall be
smooth. Covers or strips not in the direction of travel shall not project
more than 3 mm. They shall be sufficiently rigid and have rounded or
- 206 -
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights
Section E Part 4
bevelled edges. Covers or strips of such nature are not permitted at the
skirting.
b) Cover joints in the direction of travel (in particular between the skirting
and the balustrade interior panelling) shall be arranged and formed in
such a manner that the risk of trapping is reduced t o a minimum.
c) Gaps between the interior panels of the balustrade shall be not wider
than 4 mm. The edges shall be rounded off or bevelled.
d) Protrusions and indentations shall not present sharp edges.
1.I .5.5 Skirting
a) The skirting shall be vertical. The vertical distance hz (see Fig. 2) between
top edge of skirting or bottom edge of projecting cover joints and the
tread surface of the steps, pallets or belt shall be at least 50 mm.
b) The skirting shall be extremely rigid, plane, smooth and butt-jointed.

However, special arrangements instead of butt-jointing will possibly be
necessary for long passenger conveyors at the points where they pass over
building expansion joints.
c) The possibility of trapping between skirting and steps shall be reduced.

Deflector device in the form of brush bristles shall be suitably placed (see
Fig. 7) on the skirting to guard passengers' feet, loose clothing and
foreign objects from coming into contact with the possible trapping point.
The following conditions shall also be fulfilled:
(i) The deflector device shall consist of a rigid profile and a flexible part
of plastic brush bristles.
(ii) The projection of the deflector device as measured from the vertical
face of the skirt panels shall be uniform and between 50 mm and 75
mm.
(iii) The deflector device shall be able to withstand, without detachment

or permanent deformation, a force of 900 N applied vertically to the
line of attachment and on an area of 600 mm2 of its rigid part.
(iv) The rigid parts shall have a projection of between 18 mm and 25

mm and withstand the defined strength requirements.
(v) The clearance between the lowest part of the underside of the rigid
part of the deflector device and the line of travel of the step nose
- 207 -
Section E Part 4
throughout the inclined, the curved portion and the true horizontal
portions shall be uniform and within 15 t o 25 mm.
(vi) The rigid part of the deflector shall be free of sharp edges.
Fastening heads and joint connections shall not extend into the path
of travel.
(vii) The terminal end piece shall be tapered to give a flush interface with
the skirting. The terminal end piece of any deflector device shall end
not less than 50 mm and maximum 150 mm prior t o the comb
intersection line.
d) In the case of objects being trapped between skirting and steps, the
escalator shall be stopped automatically and maintained stationary (see
Clause 10.3.2.4(n)). For this purpose, electrical safety devices in
conformity with Clause 10.2 shall be installed at the points of upper and
lower transition from incline t o horizontal, and at inclined section
according to the following table. Such devices shall be evenly distributed
along the inclined section.
Rise Number of Device

(Clause 1 . I .5.5(d))
provided at each side of
the inclined Section
16m 1
6 m c Rise < 7.5 m 2
7.5 m < Rise I 9 m 3

The number of electrical safety device required for an escalator
of rise exceeding 9m shall be so calculated accordingly.
1. I .5.6 lnterior Profile and Balustrade lnterior Panelling
a) The interior profile and the balustrade interior panelling shall have an
angle of inclination y of at least 25' t o the horizontal (see Fig. 2).
b) The above provision in (a) does not apply to the horizontal part of the
interior profile that directly joins the balustrade interior panelling (see b4 in
Fig. 2). This horizontal part b4 up to the balustrade interior panelling shall
be less than 30 mm.
C) The width b3, measured horizontally, of each interior profile inclined at an

angle of less than 45Oto the horizontal shall be less than 0.12 m (see Fig.
-,\
LJ.
1. I .5.7 Distance between Balustrade lnterior Panelling
- 208 -
Reproduced with the perrn~ssionof CEN - 0 all r~ghtsreserved.
Section E Part 4
(a) The horizontal distance (measured at right angles t o the direction of travel)
between the balustrade interior panelling at lower points shall always be
equal to or less than the horizontal distance measured at points higher up.
(b) The maximum distance between the balustrade interior panelling at any
point shall be smaller than the distance between handrails. This
requirement can be disregarded for escalators with handrails centralized
with balustrade interior panelling.
1. I .5.8 Newel
The newel including the handrails shall project beyond the root of the comb
teeth by at least 0.6 m in longitudinal direction (see L1 and 12 in Fig. 1 and detail
X) .
1.2 Surrounds of the Escalator
1.2.1 Landing Area

1.2.1.1 At the landings of the escalator a sufficient unrestricted area shall be available
t o accommodate passengers. The width of the unrestricted area shall at least
correspond to the distance between the handrail centrelines (see b l in Fig. 2).
The depth shall be at least 2.50 m measured from the end of the balustrade. It
is permissible t o reduce it to 2.00 m if the width of the unrestricted area is
increased to at least double the distance between the handrail centrelines.
Attention is drawn t o the fact that this free area has t o be considered as part of
the whole traffic function and, thus, needs sometimes to be increased.
1.2.1.2 In the case of successive escalators without intermediate exits, they shall have
the same theoretical capacity. An escalator shall stop automatically upon the
stopping of such a succeeding escalator. For this purpose electrical safety
devices in conformity with Clause 10.2 shall be used to interlock these
escalators (see Clause 10.3.2.4(j)).
1.2.1.3 The landing area of escalators shall have a surface that provides a secure
foothold for a minimum distance of 0.85 m measured from the root of the
comb teeth (see L1 in Fig. 1 and detail X). Exempt from this are the combs
mentioned in Clause 4.3.
1.2.2 Clear Height above Steps, Pallets or Belt and Landing Area, etc.
The clear height above the steps or pallets or belt of the escalator and above
the landing area mentioned in Clause 1.2.1 at all points shall be not less than
2.30 m (see h4 in Fig. 1).
1.2.3 Adjacent Building Obstacles and Criss-cross Escalators
- 209 -
Section E Port 4
1.2.3.1 Where building obstacles and criss-cross escalators can cause injuries to
passengers riding on escalators, appropriate preventive measures shall be taken.
In particular, at floor intersections and on criss-cross escalators, a set of vertical

obstruction guard as shown in Fig. 6 (i) & (ii), shall be placed above the
balustrade decking and the following conditions shall be observed.
a) The exposed edge of the guard shall be rounded and have a minimum
width of 6 mm.
b) The vertical face (other than the deflecting part) of the guard facing the
handrail shall be flush with the face of the wellway or the external wall of
the adjacent criss-cross escalator.
c) The part of the wellway or external wall of the criss-cross escalator facing
the handrail shall form a smooth continuous vertical surface, if it is
measured less than 2.10 m above the step, pallet or belt of the escalator.
d) The lower edge of the guard shall be at least 100 mm below the top
surface of the handrail or join with the balustrade decking.
e) The upper edge of the fixed guard shall be securely joined with lower
edge of the floor intersection or the criss-cross escalator and shall not be
exposed.
f) The underside of the floor ceiling at floor intersections or the bottom deck
of the adjacent criss-cross escalator shall form a smooth continuous flat
surface extending t o a distance of at least 0.6 m from the centreline of
the handrail if it is measured less than 2.10 m above the step, pallet or
belt of the escalator.
For vertical building obstacles or columns, unless other approved preventive

measures (e.g. buffer protection surfaces) are taken, fixed guards shall be
installed as shown in Fig. 6 (iii) & (iv). The fixed guards would not be required if
the vertical building obstacle or column has a radius of curvature of not less
than 300 mm. The part of the vertical building obstacles or columns facing the
escalator shall form part or whole of a smooth continuous surface extending
from at least 100 m m below the top of the handrail t o a height of at least 2.10
m above the step, pallet or belt of the escalator.
The position of the obstruction guards shall be such that it can effectively
prevent injuries to the passengers. The guards shall be of light and durable
material such as plastic.
The upper edge of the suspended guard shall be at most 100 mm from lower
edge of the floor intersection or the criss-cross escalator.
1.2.3.2 It is not necessary t o comply with the above requirements when the distance bg
between the centreline of the handrail and any obstacle is equal t o or greater
than 0.60 m (see Fig. 2).
-210-
Section E Part 4
1.2.4 Clearances between Balustrade Exterior Panelling and Adjacent Guard Rail/Wall
The maximum clearance between the balustrade exterior panelling and any
guard raillwall erected adjacent t o the escalator shall not be more than 100 mm
t o prevent children from falling into void through this clearance.
1.2.5 Distance between the Outer Edge of the Handrail and Adjacent Wall/Building
Obstacles/Escalators
The horizontal distance blo (see Fig. 2) between the outer edge of the handrail
and walls, adjacent criss-cross escalators or other building obstacles shall not be
less than 200 mm and shall be maintained to a height of at least 2.10 m above
the steps, pallets or belt of the escalator. The distance may be reduced t o 80
mm:
(a) for any guard raillwall (of not more than 1. I 0 m high) erected adjacent t o
the escalator at the landing (see Clause 1.2.4), or
(b) in the situation where a smooth continuous wall of at least 2.10 m high
above the steps, pallets or belt is formed extending alongside the
escalator for at least the distance between its newels t o avoid injuries
caused by collision.
For escalators arranged in parallel to one another the distance between the
edges of the handrails may be reduced t o 120 mm.
Appropriate measures shall be taken to discourage people from climbing over

the outer edge of the balustrate if there is a danger of people falling from:-
a) the escalator and the rise of escalator is greater than 15 m; or

b) the escalator to the next lower floor level (i.e two or more floor levels).
Shelter walls at both sides of the escalator shall be installed with a height of at
least 1800 mm from newel t o newel, except the portions where there is no
danger of people falling from the escalator.
1.2.6 Adjacent Gates
Where shutter gate (or similar device) is installed sufficiently close to the
escalator, provisions shall be made to interlock electrically the gate and the
escalator such that whenever the gate is closed, or starts to close, the escalator
shall be stopped automatically (see Clause 10.3.2.4(m)).
1.3 Supporting Structure of the Escalator
-211 -
Section E Part 4
The supporting structure shall be designed in a way that it can support the
dead weight of the escalator plus a passenger weight of 5,000 ~ / (load m ~
carrying area = nominal width Z1 (Fig. 2) of the escalator x distance between
supports Il (Fig. 1)). An impact factor shall not be added t o the passenger load.
In addition, the factor of safety for all structural members shall be not less than
5 based on static load.
Based on passenger weight, the maximum calculated or measured deflection

shall not exceed 11750 of the distance between supports 1,. This deflection
value shall be reduced to 1/1000 of the distance between supports 11 for public
service escalators.
Lighting
The escalator and its surrounds shall be sufficiently and adequately illuminated,
especially in the vicinity of the combs.
It is permissible t o arrange the lighting in the surrounding space or at the

installation itself. The intensity of illumination at the landings including the
combs, shall be related t o the intensity of illumination of the general lighting in
the area.
The intensity of the light on the tread surface of the steps, pallets and belts
including the landings and combs shall be not less than 50 lux.
Machinery spaces
General Provisions
Driving and return stations, machinery spaces inside the truss, as well as
separate machinery spaces, shall be not accessible to unauthorized persons.
Separate machine rooms and separate driving and return stations shall be used
only for accommodating the equipment necessary for the operation of the
escalator, but the following are also permitted in the space :-
(a) machines for lifts or service lifts;
(b) equipment for air-conditioning or ventilating these rooms; and

~l
(c) fire service installations and equipment as may be required by the Director \~
of Fire Services for these rooms.
/i
Construction and Equipment of Machinery Spaces, Driving and Return Stations i
I
Maintenance Space
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights resewed. 1 ~

\
Section E Part 4
2.2.1.1 In machinery spaces and return stations, space with a sufficiently large standing
area shall be kept free from fixed parts of any kind. The size of the standing
area shall be at least 0.30 m2 and the smaller side shall be at least 0.50 m long.
2.2.1.2 Where the main drive or brake is arranged between the passenger side of the
step, pallet or belt and the return line, a suitable sensibly horizontal standing
area in the working zone of not less than 0.12 m2 shall be provided. The
minimum dimension shall be not less than 0.30 m.
This part is permitted to be fixed or removable. In the latter case, it shall always
be available in the vicinity. Necessary provisions shall be made for this purpose.
2.2.1.3 The size of separate machinery spaces, separate driving and return stations, and
the space in front of fixed control panels shall be sufficient to permit easy and
safe access for maintenance personnel to all the equipment, especially to the
electrical connections. In particular there shall be provided:
(a) a free space across the full width (but not less than 0.50 m) of the control
panels or cabinets and 0.70 m in depth to give access to the equipment
they support or contain;
(b) a free space of at least 0.50 m x 0.60 m for maintenance and inspection
of moving parts at points where this is necessary; and
(c) access routes, having a width of at least 0.50 m, t o these free spaces.
It is permitted to reduce the width of 0.50 m t o 0.40 m in areas where there

are no moving parts.
2.2.1.4 In separate machinery spaces, and separate driving and return stations, and in
front of fixed control panels, the clear height for movement or working shall
under no circumstances be less than 2.1 m.
2.2.2.1 Electrical lighting installation in separate machinery spaces, or separate driving

and return stations, shall be permanent and fixed and shall be provided on the
basis of at least 200 lux at floor level. The switch by which such lighting is
operated shall be situated adjacent to the door provided t o give access t o such
space. Electrical lighting installation in driving and return stations and
machinery spaces inside the truss shall be by means of a portable lamp
permanently available in one of these places. One or more socket outlets shall
be provided in each of these places.
2.2.2.2 The electrical lighting installation and the socket outlets shall be independent of
the power supply to the machine being fed either by a separate cable or a
branch cable which is connected before the main switch of the escalator (see
Clauses 9.4.1 and 9.6).
2.2.3 Temperature and Ventilation
-213-
Section E Port 4
(a) Separate machinery spaces, on separate driving and return stations shall
be ventilated. They shall be such that the motors, and equipment, as well
as electrical cables, etc., are protected as far as possible from dust,
harmful fumes and humidity. Stale air from other parts of the building
shall not be extracted into these spaces or stations.
(b) The ambient temperature in the machinery spaces or driving and return
stations shall be maintained between +5 OC and +40 OC.

2.2.4.1 It shall be possible to stop the escalator in the driving and return station by
means of operation of stopping devices.
2.2.4.2 Escalators with the driving unit arranged between the passenger side of the
step, pallet or belt and the return line, or outside the return stations, shall have
additional stopping devices in the area of the driving unit.
2.2.4.3 The operation of these stopping devices shall cause the disconnection of the
power supply from the driving machine and allow the operational brake to
become effective to stop the escalator and maintain it stationary (see Clause
10.3.2.4(r)).
2.2.4.4 The stopping devices shall:
(a) be of the "push-to-stop, pull-to-run" type;

I1
(b) have the switching positions marked unambiguously and permanently; and
\
(c) be safety contacts satisfying Clause 10.2.2. -I
I I
2.2.4.5 The stopping device need not be provided in a machinery space if a main switch
according to Clause 9.4 is located therein and is sufficiently close to the
machinery.
3. Handrail

On the top of each balustrade there shall be provided a handrail (see Fig. 1 and
2) moving in the same direction and at approximately the same speed as the
steps, pallets or belt.
The speed of the handrail is permitted to deviate from the speed of the steps,
pallets or belt within the limits of 0% to + 2%.
A handrail speed monitoring device shall be provided and shall stop the escalator
or passenger conveyor in the event of a hand rail speed deviation of more than

Section E Port 4
minus15 % of its normal speed continuously for more than 15 s while the
escalator or passenger conveyor is in motion (see clause 10.4).
Continuation of the Handrail Beyond the Comb
The horizontal portion of the handrail shall continue longitudinally at the

landings for a distance 13 (see Fig. 1) of at least 0.30 m past the root of the
comb teeth (see L1 in Fig. 1 and detail X).
In the case of inclined passenger conveyors without a horizontal section at the

landings, the continuation of the handrail parallel t o the angle of inclination is
permitted.
Handrail Profile and Position
The handrail profiles and their guides on the balustrades shall be formed or
enclosed in such a way that the possibility of pinching or trapping of fingers or
hands is reduced.
The distance between the handrail profile and guide or cover profiles on either
side shall under no circumstances be wider than 8 mm (see b'6 and brf6in Fig. 2,
detail W).
The width bz of the handrail shall be between 70 mm and 100 mm (see Fig. 2,
detail W).
The distance b5 between the handrail and the edge of the balustrade shall not
exceed 50 mm (see Fig. 2).
Distance between the Handrail Centrelines
The distance bl between the centreline of the handrails shall not exceed the
distance between the skirting by more than 0.45 m (see b l and zz in Fig. 2).
Protection at the Point of Entry into the Balustrade
The lowest point of entry of the handrail into the newel shall be at a distance h3
from the floor which shall be not less than 0.10 m and not exceed 0.25 m (see
Fig. 1 and 2).
The horizontal distance 14 between the furthest point reached by the handrail
and the point of entry into the newel shall be not less than 0.30 m and not
exceed 0.60 m (see Fig. 1).
At the point of entry of the handrail into the newel a handrail entry guard shall
be installed t o prevent the pinching of fingers, hands or other objects. An
electrical safety device in conformity with Clause 10.2 should be provided
which shall stop the escalator and maintain stationary upon operation of this
handrail entry guard (see Clause 10.3.2.4 (k)).
- 215 -
I
Section E Part 4
I
Vertical Distance between Handrail and Step Nose, Pallets or Belt Surface
The vertical distance hl between the handrail and step nose or pallet surface or
i
belt surface shall be not less than 0.90 m and not exceed 1.10 m (see Fig. 1 and
2).
Guiding
The handrail shall be guided and tensioned in such a way that it will not leave
its guides during normal use.
Breaking Strength
The handrail of public service escalators shall be certified by its manufacturer for
a breaking strength of at least 25 kN. In addition, an electrical safety device in
conformity with Clause 10.2 shall cause the escalator to stop if the handrail
breaks (see Clause 10.3.2.4(p)).
Earthing Protection of Handrail
Effective means shall be provided to earth the handrail of running escalators t o

reduce the risk of electrostatic shock topassengers.
Steps, Pallets, Belt and Combs

t
I
Dimensions
The step height (xl of Fig. 3) shall not exceed 0.24 m.
The step depth (y, of Fig. 3) shall not be less than 0.38 m.
For escalators (excluding passenger conveyors) the nominal width (see zl of Fig.
3) shall be not less than 0.58 m and not exceed 1. I 0 m.
For passenger conveyors with an angle of inclination up to and including 6',

nominal width of up t o 1.65 m is permitted.
Construction of the Steps, Pallets and the Belt

I
General Provisions 1 I
The steps, pallets and the belt shall match the operational conditions. They shall
be able t o support continuously an equally distributed load corresponding to
6000 ~ / m without
~ such deformation that would prejudice the proper
functioning of the escalator (see also Clause 8.4.4.1).
To establish the dimensions of the belt, an area of effective width x 1.0 m

II
-216-
Reproduced w ~ t hthe permlsslon of CEN - 0 all r~ghtsreserved.
I
Section E Port 4
length shall be taken as a basis for this specific load (in addition the
requirements of Clause 4.2.4.6 (a) shall be complied with).
4.2.2 Type Testing

The steps and pallets shall have been type-tested t o the requirements of
BS5656 Clause 8.2.2 or EN1 15 or other relevant international standards.
4.2.3 Step Treads and Pallets

4.2.3.1 The surface of the step treads and pallets shall have grooves in the direction of
movement with which the teeth of the combs mesh.
The step treads of the escalator shall be sensibly horizontal in the usable area of
the escalator.
4.2.3.2 The width (b7 of Fig. I,detail X) of the grooves shall be at least 5 mm and not
exceed 7 mm.
4.2.3.3 The depth (h7 of Fig. 1, detail X) of the grooves shall be not less than 10 mm.
4.2.3.4 The web width (b8 of Fig. 1, detail X) shall be at least 2.5 mm and not exceed 5
mm.
4.2.3.5 The step treads and step risers or pallets shall not finish with a groove at their
side edges.
4.2.3.6 The edge between the surface of the step tread and the riser shall have any
sharpness relieved.
4.2.4 Belts
4.2.4.1 The belts shall have grooves in the direction of movement with which the teeth
of the combs mesh.
4.2.4.2 The width (b7 of Fig. I,detail X) of the grooves shall be at least 4.5 mm and not
exceed 7 mm, and shall be measured at the tread surface of the belt.
4.2.4.3 The depth (h7 of Fig. 1, detail X) of the grooves shall be not less than 5 mm.
4.2.4.4 The web width (b8 of Fig. 1, detail X) shall be at least 4.5 mm and not exceed 8
mm and shall be measured at the tread surface of the belt.
4.2.4.5 The belt shall not finish with a groove at the side edge of the belt.
Splicing of the treadway belt shall be such as to provide a continuous unbroken

treadway surface.
4.2.4.6 For belt passenger conveyors with edge supported belt where the treadway belt
-217-
Section E Port 4
is transversely rigid and is supported by rollers along its edges only, the
following requirements shall apply:
(a) With the belt tensioned to suit operational conditions, a single force of
750 N (including weight of the plate) shall be applied on a steel plate 0.1 5
m x 0.25 m x 0.02 m in size.
The plate shall be placed centrally between the edge supporting rollers in
I
such a way that its longitudinal axis is parallel to the longitudinal axis of
the belt. The deflection at the center shall not exceed 0.01~3where z3 is
the transverse distance between the supporting rollers. (See z3 in Fig. 5).
(b) Additional treadway supports shall be provided at intervals not exceeding

2 m along the centreline of the treadway. These supports shall be located
at a level not more than 50 mm below the underside of the treadway
when it is loaded under the conditions required by (a) above.
4.2.5 Step Risers

The step risers shall be sufficiently rigid and breakage-resistant.
The step risers shall be appropriately cleated and the surface of the cleating
shall be smooth. The ends of the step tread shall mesh with the cleating of the
next step riser.
4.3 Combs

Combs shall be fitted at both landings to facilitate the transition of passengers
4.3.2 Construction of the Combs

4.3.2.1 The teeth of the combs shall mesh with the grooves of the steps, pallets or belts
(see Clauses 7.3 and 7.4). The width of the comb teeth shall be not less than
2.5 mm, measured at the tread surface.
4.3.2.2 The ends of the combs shall be rounded off and so shaped as to minimize the
risk of trapping between combs and steps, pallets or belt.
li1
The radius of the teeth end shall be not greater than 2 mm.
4.3.2.3 The teeth of the comb shall have a form and inclination so that the feet of
passengers, leaving the escalator will not stub against them. The design angle
p shown in Fig. 1, detail X shall not exceed 40'.
4.3.2.4 The combs or their supporting structure shall be readjustable, t o ensure correct
meshing. 1I
-218-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all r~ghtsresewed.
I
Section E Part 4
The combs shall be easily replaceable.
4.3.2.5 On escalators (excluding belt type passenger conveyor) the combs shall be rigid
and have such a design that upon trapping of foreign bodies either their teeth
deflect and remain in mesh with the grooves of the steps or pallets, or they
break.
On belt passenger conveyors the combs shall be rigid. Upon trapping of

foreign bodies the belt webs are permitted to deflect, however, the comb teeth
shall remain in mesh with the grooves.
4.4 Protection Against Trapping between Comb and Steps, Pallet or Belt
An electrical safety device in conformity with Clause 10.2 shall be provided

which shall stop the escalator and maintain stationary in the case of foreign
objects being trapped at the point where the steps, pallets or the belt enter the
comb (see Clause 10.3.2.4(i)).
4.5 Protection Against Sagging of Any Part of the Steps, Pallet or Belt

which shall stop the escalator and maintain stationary in the case of sagging of
any part of the step or pallet so that the meshing of the combs is no longer
ensured at the point at which the steps or pallets enter the landing. This device
shall be positioned such that it shall operate at a sufficient distance before the
comb intersection line. This distance shall be greater than the stopping distance
defined in Clauses 8.4.4.2 and 8.4.4.4. (see Clause 10.3.2.4(1))
5. Drive for Steps, Pallets or Belt
5.1 Chain Drive for Steps and Pallets
5.1.1 The steps of escalators shall be driven by at least two steel link chains of which
at least one shall be located on each side of the step.
The pallets of passenger conveyors are permitted to be driven by only one steel
link chain if the parallel movement of the pallets in the usable area is ensured
by other mechanical measures.
5.1.2 The factor of safety of each chain shall be at least 5. This factor is determined
as the ratio between the breaking strength of the chain and the static force to
which the chain is subjected when the escalator or passenger conveyor carries
the passenger weight according to Clause 1.3 together with the tension force
of the tensioning device.
When more than one chain is used it is necessary that the load is equally
distributed over the chains.
5.1.3 The chains shall be tensioned continuously. The escalator or passenger conveyor
-219-
Section E Part 4
shall be stopped automatically before the tensioning device moves in excess of +
20 mm (see clause 10.4). Tension springs as tensioning device are not permitted.
When weights are used for tensioning they shall be safely caught should their
suspension break.

which shall stop the escalator and maintain stationary in the case of breakage
or undue elongation of the chain (see Clause 10.3.2.4(0)).
Drum Drive for the Belt

I
The factor of safety of the belt including splicing shall be at least 5.
This factor is determined as the ratio between the breaking strength of the belt
and the static force to which the belt is subjected when the passenger conveyor
carries the passenger weight according t o Clause 1.3 together with the tension
force of the tensioning device.
The belt shall be driven by drums and be tensioned continuously and

automatically. Tension springs as tensioning device are not permitted. When
weights are used for tensioning they shall be safely caught should their
suspension break.

which shall stop the passenger conveyor and maintain stationary in the case of
breakage or undue elongation of the belt (see Clause 10.3.2.4(0)).
Other Methods of Driving Steps, Pallets or Belt
Other methods of driving are permitted if safety and operation are at least
equal to those required in Clauses 5.1 and 5.2.
Angle of Inclination and Guiding of the Steps, Pallets and Belt
Angle of Inclination and Position of the Steps
Angle of lnclination
The angle of inclination a of the escalator (excluding passenger conveyor) shall

not exceed 30°, but for rises not exceeding 6m and a rated speed not
exceeding 0.50 mls the angle of inclination is permitted to be increased t o a
I
maximum of 35O(see a in Fig. 1).
The angle of inclination of passenger conveyors shall not exceed 12'.

'I
I
The steps treads shall be sensibly horizontal in the usable area of the escalator.
II
Horizontal Movement of Steps, Pallets or Belt
iI
- 220 - Reproduced with the permlssion of CEN - 0 all rights resewed.
I
'
Section E Part 4
At the landings, the steps of the escalator (excluding passenger conveyors) shall
be guided in such a way that the front edges of the steps leaving the comb and
the rear edges of the steps entering the comb are moving horizontally for a
length of at least 0.80 m measured from point L1 (see Fig. 1 and detail X).
A vertical difference in level between two consecutive steps of 4 mm maximum

is permitted.
At rated speeds above 0.50 mls or rises above 6 m this length shall be at least
1.20 m, measured from point L1 (see Fig. 1 and detail X).
For public service escalators (excluding passenger conveyors) at rated speeds

above 0.65 mls, this length shall be at least 1.60 m, measured from point L1
(see Fig. 1 and detail X).
At the upper landings of passenger conveyors with an inclination of more than

6', the pallets or belt shall move horizontally for a length of at least 0.4 m
before entering the comb (see also Clause 8.2.2).
6.1.3 Radius of Curvature in Transition from Incline to Horizontal
For escalators (excluding passenger conveyors), the radius of curvature in the

upper transition from incline to horizontal shall be
at least 1.OO m for rated speeds v 5 0.5 mls

at least 1.50 m for rated speeds v > 0.5 mls
The radius of curvature in the lower transition from incline t o horizontal shall be
at least 1.OO m irrespective of the rated speed.
For public service escalators (excluding passenger conveyors) at rated speeds

above 0.65 mls, the minimum radius of curvature in the upper transition from
incline t o horizontal shall be 2.60 m and in the lower transition from incline t o
horizontal of the escalator shall be 2.00 m.
For belt passenger conveyors, the radius of curvature in the transition from
incline t o horizontal shall be at least 0.40 m.
For pallet passenger conveyors, it is not necessary to determine the radius of

curvature because on account of the maximum permissible distance between
two consecutive pallets (see Clause 7.1) it will always be sufficiently large.
6.2 Guiding of Steps, Pallets and Belt
6.2.1 Provisions shall be made t o limit the displacement of the steps or pallets out of
their guiding system should a driving device (according t o Clause 5) become
defective, and t o prevent the belt from leaving its guideway should the belt
break.
- 221 -
Section E Part 4
This requirement applies only t o the usable area of the escalator.
Provisions shall be made in the area of the combs to ensure the correct meshing
of the comb teeth with the grooves of the tread surface.
The belt shall be supported in this area in a suitable manner, e.g. by drums,
rollers, sliding plates.
Clearances between Steps, Pallets, Belt and Skirting
Clearance between Steps or Pallets
The clearance between t w o consecutive steps (see also Clause 4.2.5) or pallets
in any usable position measured at the tread surface shall not exceed 6 mm (see
Fig. 1, details Y, Z and Fig. 4 except detail V).
In the area of the transition curves of passenger conveyors with meshed front
edges and rear edges of the pallets, this clearance is permitted to be increased
to 8 mm (see Fig. 4, detail V).
Missing Step or Pallet Device
A missing steplpallet (see clause 10.4) shall be detected and the

escalatorlpassenger conveyor stopped before the gap (resulting from the
missing steplpallet) emerges from the comb. This shall be ensured by a device
I
provided at each driving and return station. 1
I
\
Clearance between Steps or Pallets or Belt and Skirting
1
Where the skirting of escalators is placed beside the steps and pallets or the
belt the horizontal clearance shall not exceed 4 mm at either side, and 7 mm r~
for the sum of clearances measured at both sides at two directly opposite
points.
I
~
Where the skirting of passenger conveyors finishes above the pallets or the belt,
the clearance shall not exceed 4 m m measured vertically from the tread surface.
Oscillating motion of the pallets or the belt in lateral direction shall not cause a
gap between the sides of the pallets or the belt and the vertical projection of
i
the skirting.
Mesh Depth of the Combs into the Grooves of the Step or Pallet Tread
I
The mesh depth hs of the combs into the grooves of the tread (see Fig. 1, detail
X) shall be at least 6 mm.
The clearance hs (see Fig. 1, detail X) shall not exceed 4 mm.

Section E Part 4
Mesh Depth of the Combs into the Grooves of the Belt
The mesh depth hs of the combs into the grooves of the belt (see Fig. 1, detail
X) shall be at least 4 mm.
The clearance hs (see Fig. 1, detail X) shall not exceed 4 mm.
Machine
General Provisions
Each escalator shall be driven by at least one machine of its own.
The factor of safety for every part of the driving machine shall
(a) if such part is constructed of steel or bronze, be not less than 8; and
(b) if such part is constructed of cast iron or any other material, be not less
than 10.
The factor of safety shall, in every case, be based on the static load.
Speed
The rated speed of the escalator (excluding passenger conveyor) shall not
exceed :
0.75 m/s for those having an angle of inclination up t o 30' inclusive;
0.50 m/s for an escalator with an angle of inclination greater than 30' but not
greater than 35'.
The rated speed of passenger conveyors shall not exceed 0.75 m/s.
However, passenger conveyors are permitted to have a rated speed of 0.90 mls
maximum provided :-
(a) the width of the pallets or the belt does not exceed 1 . I 0 m;
(b) at the landings, the pallets or the belt move horizontally for a length of at
least 1.60 m before entering the combs (contrary t o Clause 6.1.2).
At rated frequency and at rated voltage, the speed measured under no load in
the direction of movement of the steps and pallets or the belt is permitted t o
deviate from the rated speed by a maximum of +5%.
Link between Operational brake and Steps, Pallet or Belt Drive

Section E Port 4
8.3.1 For the link between the operational brake (machine brake) and the step, pallet
or belt drive, non-friction driving elements such as shafts, gear wheels,
multiplex chains, two or more single chains should be used.
8.3.2 All driving elements shall be sufficiently dimensioned. In accordance with

Clauses 5.1.2 and 5.2.1. the factor of safety for chains shall be at least 5. When
more than one chain is used, it is necessary that the load is equally distributed
over the chains.
8.3.3 If chain is used as the link, it shall be tensioned continuously. An electrical

safety device in conformity with Clause 10.2 shall be provided which shall stop
the escalator and maintain it stationary in the case of breakage or undue
elongation of the chain (see Clause 10.3.2.4(g)).
8.4 Braking System

8.4.1 . I Escalators shall have a braking system by means of which they can be brought
t o rest with a largely uniform deceleration and maintained stationary
(operational braking); see also Clauses 10.2.1.6 and 10.2.4. There shall be no
intentional delay in the application of the braking system, except under Clause
8.4.1.2(c).
A device shall be provided to monitor the lifting of the brake mechanism after
starting the escalator or passenger conveyor (see clause 10.4).
1
j
8.4.1.2 The braking system shall operate automatically: 1
iI
in the event of loss of the voltage supply;
(a)
(b) in the event of loss of the voltage supply to the control circuits; or
r'
(c) for an escalator installation equipped with protection devices to enable it
t o sustain operation (ride through) during power supply voltage dips,
(i) at the lapse of 0.2 s of a continuous supply voltage dip of more than
10% of the supply voltage; or
(ii) at a voltage dip exceeding 60% of the supply voltage, or

i
(iii) at the failure of the protection device
8.4.1.3 Operational braking is to be effected by an electro-mechanical brake or by

other means.
Where no electro-mechanical operational brake is used, an auxiliary brake in

accordance with Clause 8.6 shall be provided.
Section E Part 4
8.4.1.4 In no circumstances an escalator equipped with the protection devices
mentioned in Clause 8.4.1.2(c) shall render its operational jerk greater than that
arisen from normal application of brake for the same installation without the
devices.
8.4.2 Operation
The normal lifting of the electro-mechanical brake shall be by a continuous flow
of electric current. The braking operation shall be effective immediately after
the electric brake circuit is opened. The brake force shall be generated by
guided compression spring(s) or by weight(s). Self-excitation of the brake
releasing device shall be impossible. The lifting of the brake shall be monitored
electrically. Unless the brake is lifted completely, the escalator shall be stopped
and maintained stationary. [The return t o service shall not be possible except by
a competent escalator worker].
8.4.3 Manual Release

Brakes shall be designed such that they can be released by hand and shall
require continuous application of manual pressure t o keep them open. Brake
release device shall be kept in the machinery space.
8.4.4 Brake Load and Stopping Distances for Operational Brake
8.4.4.1 Brake Load for Escalators (excluding passenger conveyors)
Brakes shall be designed and field tested according to the brake load calculated
below:
(a) Number of steps t o be considered is determined by dividing the escalator

rise by the maximum visible height of the step riser (see xl in Fig. 3).
(b) Load per step is determined from the following table
(c) The brake load is determined by multiplying the number of steps t o be

considered in (a) by the load per step.
For the purpose of a test, the total brake load has t o be distributed over
213 of the number of steps obtained in (a) and for this purpose, the
construction and design of the steps shall cater for this requirement.
8.4.4.2 Stopping Distances for Escalators (Excluding Passenger Conveyors)
- 225 -
Section E Part 4
The stopping distances for unloaded and downward moving loaded escalators
(see Clause 8.4.4.1)shall be between the following values :
Rated speed Stamina distance between
0.50 mls min. 0.20 m and max. I .OO m

0.65 mls min. 0.30 m and max. 1.30 m
0.75 mls min. 0.35 m and max. 1.50 m
The stopping distance for an unloaded escalator shall be close to the minimum
value, while for a downward moving loaded escalator it shall be close t o the
maximum value.
For intermediate speeds the stopping distances are to be interpolated.
The stopping distances shall be measured from the time the electrical stopping
device is actuated.
8.4.4.3 Brake Load for Passenger Conveyors
Brakes shall be designed according to the brake load calculated below :
(a) Load per 0.4 m length of pallets or belt is determined from the following
table:
(b) In the case where the nominal pallet or belt width is greater than 1 .I m for
passenger conveyor with an angle of inclination not greater than 6', another
25 kg per 0.4 m length, shall be added to (a) for each additional 0.3 m width.
Intermediate values shall be determined by interpolation.
(c) The brake load is determined by multiplying the number of length of 0.4 m
pallets or belt by the load per 0.4 m length pallets or belt.
8.4.4.4 Stopping Distances for Passenger Conveyors
The stopping distances for unloaded and loaded passenger conveyors (see
Clause 8.4.4.3) shall be between the following values :
i
Rated meed Stoppina distance between
0.50 mls min 0.20 m and max. I .OO m

0.65 mls min 0.30 m and max. 1.30 m
- 226 -
Reproduced w ~ t hthe permission of CEN - O all rights reserved.
I
Section E Part 4
The stopping distance for an unloaded or loaded passenger conveyor shall be at

such a value in the range to achieve smooth retardation.
For intermediate speeds the stopping distances are t o be interpolated.
The stopping distances shall be measured from the time the electrical stopping
device is actuated.
8.5 Protection against Risks of Overspeed and Unintentional Reversal of the Direction of
Travel
8.5.1 Escalators shall be equipped with an overspeed governor or other devices in such a
way that it will stop the escalator automatically before the speed exceeds a value of
1.2 times the rated speed (see Clause 10.3.2.4(e)). Where speed control devices are
used for this purpose they shall have switched off the escalator before the speed
exceeds a value of 1.2 times the rated speed. This requirement can be disregarded if
A.C. motors with a slip not exceeding 10% is used with a non-friction connection
with the drive for the steps, pallets on the belt.
8.5.2 Escalators (excluding non-inclined passenger conveyors) shall be equipped in such a

way that they stop automatically by the time the steps and pallets or the belt
change from the preset direction of travel (see Clause 10.3.2.4(e)).
8.6 Auxiliary Brake for the Driving System for Steps and Pallets or the Belt in the Event of
Breakage of Drive Chains

Escalators (excluding non-inclined passenger conveyors) shall be equipped with
auxiliary brake(s) acting immediately, or via gears or shaft, on the main driving shaft
for steps, pallets or the belt in the conditions stipulated in Clause 8.6.2, if
(a) the coupling of the operational brake and the driving wheels of the steps,
pallets or the belt is not accomplished by shafts or gear wheels; or
(b) the operational brake is not an electro-mechanical brake according to Clause

8.4.1.3; or
(c) the rise exceeds 6m; or
(d) they are public service escalators.
The auxiliary brake shall be designed and dimensioned in such a way that escalators
steps, pallets or belts travelling with brake load downward are brought t o rest by
effective retardation and maintained stationary.
8.6.2 Operation
- 227 -
Section E Part 4
The auxiliary brakes shall be of the mechanical (friction) type. It shall become
effective in any one of the following conditions :
(a) before the speed exceeds a value of 1.4 times the rated speed by the
operation of the overspeed governor or other speed control devices;
(b) by the time the steps and pallets or the belt change from the preset direction
of motion; or
(c) in the event of the failure of the coupling of the operational brake and the
driving wheels of the steps, pallets or the belt, in case the coupling is not
accomplished by shafts or gear wheels.
Its operation shall positively open the control circuit. For this purpose, an electrical
safety device in conformity with Clause 10.2 shall monitor the operation of the
auxiliary brake (see Clause 10.3.2.4(f)). It is not necessary that this brake is operated
electrically such as is the operational brake mentioned in Clause 8.4.2.
8.6.3 Simultaneous Operation of Auxiliary Brake and Operational Brake

Auxiliary brakes shall not operate simultaneously with the operational brake unless
the stopping distance according t o Clause 8.4.4 are kept except :-
(a) during power failure; or
(b) in the condition mentioned in Clause 8.6.2 (a), (b) or (c).
8.6.4 Stopping Distances

Upon operation of the auxiliary brake in situations defined in Clause 8.6.2, it is not
necessary to keep the stopping distances defined for the operational brake (see
Clause 8.4.4). In all other operations of the auxiliary brake, the machine must stop
in accordance with the stopping distances defined in Clause 8.4.4.
8.7 Hand Winding Device

If a hand winding device is provided, it shall be easily accessible and safe to operate
(see Clause 1 1.I.3).
If the hand winding device is placed outside machinery spaces, driving or return
stations, it shall only be accessible to competent escalator workers.
Crank handles or perforate hand wheels are not permitted.
8.8 Protection in Driving Stations and/or Return Stations
Effective protection shall be provided for rotating parts if they are accessible and
dangerous, in particular for

Section E Part 4
(a) keys and screws in shafts;
(c) gears, gear wheels, sprockets;
(d) projecting motor shafts;
(e) speed governors not enclosed;
(f) step and pallet reversal in driving stations and/or return stations if these must
be entered for maintenance purposes.
Exceptional cases: handwheels, brake drums and similar smooth round parts. Such
parts shall be painted yellow at least in part.
8.9 Rated Load for Driving Machine and Power Transmission

For the purpose of driving machine and power transmission calculations, the rated
load shall be considered t o be not less than that of the brake load.
9. Electrical Installations and Appliances
9.1.1 Limits of Application

9.1 . I . I The requirements specified in this Clause 9 relating to the installation and t o the
constituent components of the electrical equipment apply:
(a) to the main switch of the power circuit of the escalator and dependent circuits;
(b) t o the switch for the lighting circuit of the escalator and dependent
. . circuits.
The escalator shall be considered as a whole, in the same way as a machine with its
incorporated apparatus.
9.1.1.2 The Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations issued under the
Electricity Ordinance relating to electricity supply circuits shall apply as far as the
input terminals of the switches referred to in Clause 9.1.1 . I unless otherwise stated.
They apply t o the whole lighting circuit of the machinery spaces, driving and return
stations, as well as to the protective conductors mentioned in Clause 9.1.6.

In separate machinery spaces and separate driving and return stations (according t o
Clause 2.2.1.3), protection against direct contact is necessary by means of
enclosures providing a degree of protection of at least IP IX in accordance with
855490 or IEC 529; and 855420 or IEC144.
- 229 -
-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN O all rights resewed.
Section E Part 4
9.1.3 lnsulation Resistance

The resistance of the insulation between conductors and between conductors and
earth shall be greater than 1,000 o h m N with a minimum of
(a) 500,000 ohm for power circuits and electrical safety device circuits;
(b) 250,000 ohm for other circuits (controls, lighting, signaling, etch

For control and safety circuits, the mean value in direct current or the r.m.s. value in
alternating current between conductors or between conductors and earth shall not
exceed 250 V.

The neutral conductor and the earth-continuity conductor (protective conductor)
shall always be separate.
9.1.6 Bonding of Metallic Ports to Main Earthing Terminals

All exposed metallic parts of the escalator, including machine frames, controller
frames, casing of electric safety devices, etc, shall be bonded to the main earthing
terminal of the main switch laid down in Clause 9.4 by supplementary bonding
through protective conductors.
9.2 Contactors, Relay Contactors, Components of Electrical Safety Circuits

9.2.1.1 To stop the machine (see Clause 10.2.4) the main contactors shall belong to the
following categories as defined in the BS5424 : Part 1, or IECI 58 :-
(a) AC-3 for contactors of a.c. motors;

I
(b) DC-2 for contactors of d.c. machines.
/
9.2.1.2 Relay contactors (see Clause 10.2.4) shall belong to the following categories as I~
defined in the BS4794:Part 1, or IEC337 :- 1~
I
(a) AC-1 1 for contactors in a.c. control circuits;
(b) DC-1 1 for contactors in d.c. control circuits.
9.2.1.3 For both the main contactors (see Clause 9.2.1.1) and the relay contactors (see
Clause 9.2.1.2), it may be assumed in the measures taken to comply with Clause
10.1.1.1 that :- I
- 230 - Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all r~ghtsresewed.

Ii
Section E Port 4
(a) if one of the break contacts (normally closed) is closed, all the make contacts
are open;
(b) if one of the make contacts (normally open) is closed, all the break contacts
are open.
9.2.2 Components of Electrical Safety Circuits

9.2.2.1 When devices according t o Clause 9.2.1.2 are used as relays in a safety circuit, the
assumptions of Clause 9.2.1.3 also apply.
9.2.2.2 If the relays are used, such that the break and make contacts are never closed
simultaneously for any position of the armature, the possibility of partial attraction
of the armature can be disregarded (see Clause 10.1.I .I (f)).
9.2.2.3 Devices connected after electrical safety devices shall meet the requirements of
Clause 10.2.2.2 with regard t o the creep distances and air gaps (not with regard t o
the separation distances).
9.2.1.2 and 9.2.1.3.

9.3.1 Motors directly connected to the mains shall be protected against short-circuiting.
9.3.2 Motors directly connected t o the mains shall be protected against overload by
means of automatic circuit breakers with manual reset (except as provided for in
Clause 9.3.3) which shall cut off the supply t o the motor in all live conductors.
9.3.3 When the detection of overload operates on the basis of temperature increase in
the windings of the motor, the circuit breaker may be closed automatically after
sufficient cooling down has taken place. However, it shall only be possible to restart
the escalator under the conditions of Clauses 10.3.1 or 10.3.1.1.
9.3.4 The provisions of Clauses 9.3.2 and 9.3.3 apply to each winding if the motor has
windings supplied by different circuits.
9.3.5 When the escalator driving motors are supplied by d.c. generators driven by motors,
the generator driving motors shall also be protected against overload.
9.4 Main Switches

9.4.1 In the vicinity of the machine or in the return stations or in the vicinity of the control
devices there shall be a main switch capable of breaking the supply to the motor,
the brake and the control circuit in the live conductors.
This switch shall not cut the supply to the socket outlets or to the lighting circuits
necessary for inspection and maintenance.

Section E Part 4
When separate supplies are provided for auxiliary equipment such as ventilation,
balustrade lighting and comb lighting it shall be possible to switch them off
independently.
The corresponding switches shall be located close t o the main switch and be
marked clearly their purpose.
9.4.2 The operating mechanism of the main switch shall be easily and rapidly accessible
after opening of the doors or trap doors. It shall have stable open and closed
positions and it shall be possible to lock it in the open position.
9.4.3 Main switches shall be capable of interrupting the highest current involved in
normal operating conditions of the escalator. They shall have a breaking capacity
corresponding to category AC-3 as defined by 855424 : Part 1 or IECI 58.
9.4.4 When main switches for several escalators are arranged in one machinery space it
shall be possible to identify easily to which escalator they refer. L.\
9.5.1 Cables
Cables shall be of a quality at least equivalent t o that defined by BS6004, 856007
and 856500; or IEC227 and IEC245.
9.5.1 . I Cables such as those listed in table 1 and table 2 of 856004 (or the equivalent in
IEC227) and table 19 of 856500 (or the equivalent in IEC245) shall be installed in
conduits or trunking made of either metal or plastics or shall be protected in a
similar manner. They shall not be used for machine power circuits.
1-
9.5.1.2 Rigid cables shall only be used in visible mountings fixed to the wall of the well or of
the machine room or installed in ducting, trunking or similar fittings.
9.5.1.3 Ordinary flexible cables, such as those listed in table 6 (H05RR-F) and table 16
(H05W-F) of 856500 (or the equivalent in IEC245) shall be routed through ducting,
trunking, or fittings which provide equivalent protection. Flexible cables with a
thick sheath shall be considered t o be rigid cables in the conditions specified in
Clause 9.5.1.2.
/
9.5.1.4 The requirements of Clauses 9.5.1.1, 9.5.1.2 and 9.5.1.3 need not apply t o the 1
wiring of control or distribution devices in control cabinets or on control panels :
~
(a) either between different pieces of electrical equipment; or
1 ~
(b) between these pieces of equipment and the connection terminals.
In these instances the requirements of 855486 or IEC439 apply.

Ii
- 232 -
Reproduced wlth the permlsslon of CEN - 0 all r~ghtsresewed
I
Section E Port 4
The nominal cross-sectional area of the conductors of electrical safety circuits shall
be not less than 0.75 mm2.
9.5.3.1 The electrical installation shall be provided with the indications necessary to make it
easy to understand.
9.5.3.2 Connections, connection terminals and connectors except those defined in Clause
9.1.2 shall be located in control cabinets, control boxes or on panels provided for
this purpose.
9.5.3.3 If, after the opening of the main switch or switches of the escalator, some
connection terminals remain live, they shall be clearly separated from terminals
which are not live; if the voltage exceeds 50 V, they shall be suitably marked.
9.5.3.4 Connection terminals, accidental interconnection of which could lead to a

dangerous malfunction of the escalator shall be clearly separated unless their
design obviates this risk.
9.5.3.5 In order to ensure continuity of mechanical protection, the protective

enclosures of cables shall enter the casings of switches and appliances, or shall
have proper glands at their ends.
9.5.3.6 If the same conduit or cable contains conductors the circuits of which have
different voltages, all cables shall have the insulation specified for the highest
voltage.
9.5.4 Connectors
Connectors and devices of the plug-in type which are placed in safety circuits
and which can be extracted without the use of a tool, shall be designed in such
a way that it is impossible t o re-insert them incorrectly.
9.6 Socket Outlets
9.6.1 The supply to the socket outlets shall be independent of the supply t o the
machine and it shall be possible to break the supply of all phases by means of a
separate switch.
9.6.2 Socket outlets shall be either
(a) of type 2P + PE, 250 V, in accordance with BS1363, directly supplied by

the mains; or
(c)of a type that is supplied at a safety extra low voltage in accordance with the
Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations issued under the
- 233 -
Section E Port 4
Electricity Ordinance.

Any one of the faults envisaged in Clause 10.1.1.1 in the electrical equipment
of the escalator, if it cannot be excluded under conditions described in Clause
10.1.1.2 andlor Annex A of EN 115, shall not on its own be the cause of a
dangerous malfunction of the escalator.
10.1. I .I Faults envisaged in the electrical equipment of the escalator are :
(b) voltage drop;
(d) fault to earth of a circuit;
(e) short circuit or open circuit, change of value or function in an electrical


contactor or relay;
(j) phase reversal.
10.1.I .2 The non-opening of a contact in case (h) need not be considered in the case of
safety contacts conforming to requirements of Clause 10.2.2.

The fault t o earth of circuit in which there is an electrical safety device shall
cause the immediate stopping of the driving machine. The return t o service
shall not be possible except by a competent escalator worker.

Section E Part 4

10.2.1.1 The operation of an electrical safety device for any of the events as described
under Clauses 10.3.2.4(b) to (r) shall prevent the driving machine from starting or
cause the immediate stopping of the driving machine according to Clause
10.2.4. The electrical safety devices shall consist of :
(a) either one or more safety contacts satisfying Clause 10.2.2 directly
disconnecting the supply t o the contactors or their relay contactors; or
(b) safety circuits satisfying Clause 10.2.3 consisting of :
(1) either one or more safety contacts satisfying Clause 10.2.2 not
directly disconnecting the supply to the contactors or their relay
contactors; or
(2) contacts not satisfying the requirements of Clause 10.2.2; or
(3) other components in accordance with the requirements of Annex A

of EN 115.
10.2.1.2 No electrical equipment shall be connected in parallel t o electrical safety devices.
10.2.1.3 The effects of internal or external inductance or capacitance shall not cause
failures of electrical safety circuits.
10.2.1.4 An output signal emanating from an electrical safety circuit shall not be altered
down the same circuit, which would cause a dangerous condition to result.
than that required for the functioning of the safety circuit shall be taken from
one channel only.
10.2.1.6 Circuits which record or delay calls shall not, even in event of fault, prevent or
intentionally delay the stopping of the driving machine through the functioning
of an electrical safety device.
such as to prevent the appearance of false signals at the outputs of electrical
safety devices due t o the effects of switching. In particular, voltage peaks
arising from the operation of the escalator or other equipment on the network
shall not create inadmissible disturbances in electronic components (noise
immunity).
- 235 -
Section E Part 4
i
I
10.2.2.1 The operation of a safety contact shall be by positive mechanical separation of
the circuit breaking devices. This positive mechanical separation shall occur even
\ 1
if the contacts are welded together.
Positive mechanical separation is achieved when all the contact breaking

elements are brought t o their open position in such a way that for a significant
part of the travel there are no resilient elements (e.g. springs) between the
moving contacts and the part of the actuator to which the actuating force is
applied.
The design shall be such as to minimize the risk of a short-circuit resulting from I
a faulty component. I
10.2.2.2 The safety contacts shall be provided for a rated insulation voltage of 250 V if
the enclosure provides a degree of protection of at least IP 4X in accordance
with EN 60529, or 500 V if the degree of protection of the enclosure is less
than IP 4X.
Safety contacts shall belong to the following categories as defined in the EN ,j(
60947-5-1 :
!I
(a) AC-15 for safety contacts in a.c. circuits;
1
(b) DC-13 for safety contacts in d.c. circuits.
10.2.2.3 If the protective enclosure is not at least of type IP 4X the air gaps shall be at
I
least 3 mm and the creep distances at least 4 mm. The distances for breaking
contacts shall be at least 4 mm after separation.
r- I
The live parts of safety contacts shall be accommodated in a protective
1~
enclosure.
Protective enclosure need not be provided in the case of external influences

considered as normal in the Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) i
Regulations issued under the Electricity Ordinance.
l~
10.2.2.4 In the case of multiple breaks, the individual distances for breaking contacts
shall be at least 2 m m after separation.
II
10.2.2.5 ~ e b ; i sfrom the conductive material shall not lead t o short-circuiting of contacts. 1
1~
i
10.2.3.1 Any one of the faults envisaged in Clause 10.1.1 .Ishall not on its own be the
cause of a dangerous situation.
I
10.2.3.2 Furthermore, the following conditions apply for the faults envisaged in Clause
10.1.1.1.
- 236 -
I
Section E Port 4
(a) If one fault combined with a second fault can lead to a dangerous
situation, the escalator shall be stopped by the time the next operating
sequence takes place in which the faulty element should participate.
The possibility of the second fault leading to a dangerous situation before

the escalator has been stopped by the sequence mentioned, is not
considered.
If the malfunction of the component which has caused the first fault
cannot be detected by a change of state, appropriate measures shall
ensure that the fault is detected and movement prevented at the latest
when the escalator is restarted according t o Clause 10.3.4.
The mean time between failures (MTBF) of the safety circuit shall be at
least 2.5 years. This time was determined under the assumption that
within a period of 3. months each escalator is restarted according t o
Clause 10.3.4 at least once and, thus, is subject to a change of state.
(b) If two faults combined with a third fault can lead t o a dangerous situation,
the escalator shall be stopped by the time the next operating sequence
takes place in which one of the faulty elements should participate.
The possibility of the third fault leading to a dangerous situation before

the escalator has been stopped by the sequence mentioned, is not
considered.
If the malfunction of the components which have caused the t w o faults

cannot be detected by a change of state, appropriate measures shall
ensure that the faults are detected and movement is prevented at the
latest when the escalator is restarted according to Clause 10.3.4.
The mean time between failures (MTBF) of the safety circuit shall be at
least 2.5 years. This time was determined under the assumption that
within a period of 3 months each escalator is restarted according t o
Clause 10.3.4 at least once and, thus, is subject to a change of state.
(c) A combination of more than three faults can be disregarded if:
(i) the safety circuit is built-up of at least two channels, and their equal
status is monitored by a control circuit. The control circuit shall be
checked prior to a restart of the escalator according t o Clause 10.3.4
(see also Fig. 9); or
(ii) the safety circuit is built-up of at least three channels, and their
equal status is monitored by a control circuit.
If the requirements of (i) and (ii) are not fulfilled, it is not permitted to
interrupt the failure analysis, which shall be continued analogous t o
Clause 10.2.3.2(b).
- 237 -
Section E Part 4

I
When operated, an electrical safety device shall prevent the setting in motion of
the driving machine or immediately initiate its stopping. The operational brake
I
shall be applied. !
Electrical safety devices shall act directly on the equipment controlling the I
supply t o the driving machine.
If, because of the power t o be transmitted, relay contactors are used t o control
I
the driving machine, these shall be considered as equipment directly controlling
the supply to the driving machine for starting and stopping. 1
i
The components controlling the electrical safety devices shall be selected and
assembled so that they are able t o function properly even under the mechanical
stresses resulting from continuous operation.
I
In the case of redundancy type safety circuits, it shall be ensured by mechanical
cannot cause unnoticed loss of redundancy.
For transmitter elements of safety circuits, the requirements of Clause 14.1.2.5

of EN1 15 shall apply.
10.3 Controls
10.3.1 Key Switch Starting and Making Available for Use

Starting of escalator (or making it available for use when starting is automatic
by a user passing a certain point) shall be effected by one or more key operated
switches available to authorized persons only. Such switches shall not function
concurrently as main switches described in Clause 9.4. The person who
operates the switch shall either be able t o see the entire escalator or shall have
means of ensuring that nobody is using the escalator before making this
operation. The direction of travel shall be distinctly recognizable from the
indication on the switch.
10.3.1. I Automatic Starting and Speed Increasing
Escalators which start automatically by the passing of a user shall start t o move
before the person walking reaches the comb intersection line.
Escalators which accelerate from crawling to their rated speeds automatically by

the passing of a user shall start to accelerate before the person walking reaches
the comb intersection line.
- 238 -
Section E Part 4
Escalators or passenger conveyors which start or accelerate automatically by the
entering of a user (stand-by operation) shall move with at least 0.2 times the
nominal speed when the person reaches the comb intersection line and then
accelerate less than 0.5 m/s2.
NOTE: An average speed for a walking person of 1 m/s should be taken into
account.
This is, for instance, accomplished by :
(a) lightrays if they are arranged at least 1.30 m before the comb intersection
line (see Lz in Fig. 1, detail X); or
(b) contact mats if the outer edge of the contact mat is arranged at least 1.80
m before the comb intersection line. The length of the contact mat in the
direction of travel shall be at least 0.85 m. Contact mats reacting to
weight shall respond before the load reaches 150 N, applied to a surface
of 25 cm2 at any point.
Constructional measures shall discourage circumvention of the control elements.
10.3.1.2 Pre-determined Direction of Travel for Escalators Start Automatically
On escalators which start automatically by the passing of a user, the direction

of travel shall be predetermined, clearly visible and marked distinctly (see Clause
1 1.2).
In such cases where escalators which start automatically by the passing of a

user can be entered in the direction opposite to its predetermined direction of
travel, they shall start in the predetermined direction and conform to the
requirements of Clause 10.3.1. I . The running time shall be not less than 10 s.
10.3.2 Stopping
All stopping devices shall act by interrupting current and not by the completion
of a circuit of a relay.
10.3.2.1 Normal Stopping, Manually Operated
Before stopping, the person who operates the switch shall have means of
ensuring that nobody is using the escalator before making this operation.
10.3.2.2 Normal Stopping or Slowing Down, Automatically Operated
It is permitted to design the control in such a way that the escalator is stopped
or slowed down to its crawling speed automatically after a sufficient time (at
least the anticipated passenger transfer time plus 10 s) after the passenger has
actuated a control element described in Clause 10.3.1.I.
10.3.2.3 Emergency Stopping, Manually Operated
- 239 -
1
Section E Part 4
Emergency stopping devices (see Clause 10.3.2.4(h)) shall be placed in

conspicuous and easily accessible positions at or near to the landings of the
escalator (see Clause 11. I .2.2).
For escalators with rise above 12 m, and for passenger conveyors with a length
of the treadway of more than 40 m, additional emergency stopping devices
shall be installed.
The distances to and between the additional emergency stopping devices shall
not exceed 15 m on escalators and 40 m on passenger conveyors.
The emergency stopping devices shall be safety contacts according to Clause

10.2.2.
10.3.2.4 Emergency Stopping, Automatically Operated
The escalator shall stop automatically and maintain stationary in case of:
(a) absence of control voltage or loss of one phase of the voltage :
(b) fault to earth of a circuit (according to Clause 10.1.2);
(c) overload (according t o Clause 9.3.2);
(d) overload (according t o Clause 9.3.3);
(e) operation of the overspeed governor or speed control devices at

overspeed or unintentional reversal of the direction of travel (according to
Clauses 8.5.1 and 8.5.2);
I-'
(f) operation of the auxiliary brake (according to Clause 8.6.2);
(g) breakage or undue elongation of drive chains (see Clause 8.3.3);
(h) operation of emergency stopping devices at or near to the landings of the

escalator (see Clause 10.3.2.3);
(i) foreign bodies being trapped at the point where the steps, pallets or the
belt enter the comb (according to Clause 4.4);
(j) stopping of a succeeding escalator where an intermediate exit does not

exist (see Clause 1.2.1.2);
(k) operation of the handrail entry guard (see Clause 3.5.3);

(I) any part of the step or pallet is sagging so that meshing of the combs is
no longer ensured at the point at which the steps or pallets enter the
landing (see Clause 4.5). Switching off shall be operated at a sufficient I
distance before the comb intersection line to ensure that the step or pallet
- 240 - >
Section E Part 4
which has sagged does not reach the comb intersection line (see stopping
distances defined in Clauses 8.4.4.2 and 8.4.4.4).
(m) closing of adjacent gates (or similar device) installed sufficiently close t o an
escalator (see Clause 1.2.6);
(n) foreign bodies being trapped between skirting and steps (see Clause
1.1.5.5(d));
(0) breakage or undue elongation of step chains or belt (see Clauses 5.1.4
and 5.2.3);
(p) breakage of handrail (see Clause 3.8).
(q) opening of inspection doors and trap doors (see Clause 1.I.3.4);
(r) operation of the stopping devices in the driving and return stations (see
Clause 2.2.4.3);
(s) missing step or pallet (see Clause 7.1.1);
(t) non-lifting of the brake mechanism after starting the escalator or

passenger conveyor (see Clause 8.4.1.1)
(u) hand rail speed deviation of more than -15 % of its normal speed
continuously for more than 15 s (see Clause 3.1)
(v) opened inspection cover or exterior panel in the area of the truss and/or
removed or opened floor plate (See clause 1.I.I .4 and 1.I.3.6)
(w) installation of a removable hand winding device (see Clause 8.7)
(x) exceeding the maximum permitted stopping distances by more than 20 %

(see Clause 8.4.4.2 and 8.4.4.4).
(y) fault t o earth of a circuit in which there is an electrical safety device. (see
Clause 10.1.2)
All switching-off operations in the cases (e) t o (r) above shall be performed by
electrical safety devices in conformity with Clause 10.2.
10.3.3 Reversal of Direction of Travel

An intended reversal of the direction of travel shall be possible only if the
escalator stands still and Clauses 10.3.1, 10.3.1 .I,10.3.1.2 and 10.3.2.2 are
complied with.
10.3.4 Restarting of the Escalator

10.3.4.1 Restarting by Switch
- 241 -
Section E Part 4
After each stop (as per Clauses 10.3.2.1, 10.3.2.3, 10.3.2.4) except the one
mentioned in Clause 10.3.2.2, restarting shall be possible only by means of the
switches mentioned in Clause 10.3.1 or by means of the inspection control
described in Clause 10.3.5. It shall be observed that where stopping is effected
in the cases (c), (e),(l),(o),(s),(t) (w), (x) and (y) in Clause 10.3.2.4, restarting shall
be possible only after the device causing the stop has been checked and reset
to working order by a competent escalator worker.
10.3.4.2 Reactivation for Automatic Restart
Where stopping is effected by an emergency stopping device according t o

Clause 10.3.2.3, reactivation of the escalator for automatic restart without the
switches mentioned in Clause 10.3.1 is permitted under the following
conditions.
(a) The steps, pallets or the belt shall be supervised between the comb
intersection lines and additional 0.3 m beyond each comb so that
reactivation for automatic restart is effected only when there is no person
or object within this zone.
For the test, an opaque upright standing cylinder with a diameter of 0.3
m and a height of 0.3 m is used, which at any place within this zone shall
be detected by the control device. As control devices, for instance,
transmitters can be applied, placed at a distance of not more than 0.3 m
in the inclined section and horizontal section and of not more than 0.2 m
in the curved section.
(b) The escalator shall be started by the passing of a user according t o Clause
10.3.1.1.
Starting shall be effected only if, for a period of at least 10 s, the control
device has not detected any persons or objects within the defined zone.
(d) The reactivation control for automatic restart shall be an electrical safety
device according to Clause 10.2. Self-controlling transmitter elements are
permitted in single-channel design.
10.3.5 Inspection Control
10.3.5.1 Escalators shall be equipped with inspection control to permit operation during
maintenance or repair or inspection by means of portable and manually
operated control devices.
10.3.5.2 For this purpose, one inspection outlet for the connection of the flexible cable
of the portable control device shall be provided at least at each landing, e.g. in
the driving station and the return station in the truss.
- 242 -
Section E Part 4
The length of the cable shall be at least 3.0 m. Inspection outlets shall be
located in such a way that any point of the escalator can be reached with the
cable.
10.3.5.3 The operating elements of this control device shall be protected against
accidental operation.
The escalator is permitted to run only as long as the operating elements are
switched on by continuous application of manual pressure on t w o buttons (or
other elements) simultaneously. Each control device shall have a stopping
device (according t o Clause 10.2.2) which once having been operated shall
maintain in the open position. The direction of travel shall be distinctly
recognizable from the indication on the switch.
10.3.5.4 When this control device is used, all other starting switches shall be rendered
inoperative.
All inspection outlets shall be arranged in such a way that when more than one
control device is connected, they either become inoperative or all need t o be
actuated at the same time to be operative. The safety switches and safety
circuits (according t o Clause 10.3.2.4) shall remain effective.

Types of electrical safety devices :
(a) Safety contacts (Clause 10.2.2);
(b) Safety circuits (Clause 10.2.3), whatever the type of installation;
(c) Safety circuits (Clause 10.2.3), authorized by the Director in the case of
installations requiring special protection against risks of humidity or
explosion; and
(d) programmable electronic systems in safety related applications in

accordance with the requirements of EN 62061 directly disconnecting the
supply to the contactors or their relay contactors.
- 243 -
Section E Port 4 1
The 'X' in the following table indicates the type of device permitted to be used. If there
are several 'X's, there is a choice of devices.
Type of Electrical i
Clause Devices Safety Device
a b c d
1.1.3.4 Check on closed position of inspection doors and X X X
traps doors
1.1.5.5(d) Check on objects being trapped between skirting X X X

and steps X
1.2.1.2 Check on stopping of succeeding escalators X X X X

without intermediate exit
1.1.1.3& Opened inspection cover in the area of the truss X X X

1.1.3.6 and/or removed or opened floor plate
1.2.6 Check on closing of adjacent gates X X X X
2.2.4.3 Stopping devices in the driving and return station x

3.1 Monitor hand rail speed deviation of more than - x x X
15 % of its normal speed continuously for more
than 15 s
3.5.3 Check on operation of the handrail entry guard X X X
3.8 Check on breakage of handrail X
4.4 Check on objects being trapped at the point x x X

where the steps, pallets or the belt enter the comb
4.5 Check on sagging of any part of the step or pallet x x X

or belt
5.1 Check on the tensioning device moves in excess of X

* 20 m m
5.1.4& 5.2.3 Check on breakage or undue elongation of step X
chains or belt
7.1.1 Check on missing step or pallet X X X
8.3.3 Check on breakage or undue elongation of drive

chains
8.4.1.1 Check on non-lifting of the braking system after X

starting the escalator or passenger conveyor
Section E Part 4
8.5.1 Check on operation of the overspeed governor or X X X X
speed control devices
8.5.2 Check on unintentional reversal of direction of X X X

travel of the steps, pallets or the belt
8.6.2 Check on operation of the auxiliary brake X X X
10.3.2.3 Emergency stopping devices at or near to the X

landings o f the escalator
- 245 -
Section E Part 4
1 1. Signs, Notices for Use and Signals
11.1 Inscriptions and Notices for Use
All signs, inscriptions and notices for use shall be of durable material, placed in
a conspicuous position and written in clearly legible characters in both Chinese
and English andlor pictographs shall be used (see Fig. 8).
1 1.1.2 Notices Near the Entrances of Escalators
11. I .2.1 The following notices for the user shall be fixed in the vicinity:
(a) 'Small children must be held firmly';

( Z4%R/J\S )
(b) 'Dogs must be carried';

( &\3R%&%S )
(c) 'Stand facing the direction of travel; keep feet away from sides';
( @RrnZP&fz EMTES%%B )
(d) 'Hold the handrail'; and

( %+ER+ )
(e) 'Transportation of bulky and heavy loads not permitted'.

( T7%BS%%rni+ )
Whenever possible, these notices shall be given in the form of pictographs. The
minimum size of the pictographs shall be 80 mm x 80 mm, or diameter 80 mm.
Pictographs shall be used as defined in this part of the Code (See Fig. 8).
11. I .2.2Emergency stopping devices referred t o Clause 10.3.2.3 shall be stop buttons,
coloured red and either on the device itself or in its immediate vicinity be
marked with the inscription 'STOP' ( {$& ).
11.I.2.3 During maintenance, repair, inspection or similar work, the access to the
escalator shall be barred t o the user by suitable devices which shall bear the
notice
'No Access' ( F)&@A

);
or the valid road traffic sign which shall be in red colour on a white background
'No Entry' ( T%BA )
- 246 -
Section E Port 4
The device shall be available in the vicinity.
1 1.1.3 instructions for Handwinding Device and Brake Release Device
Corresponding instructions for use of hand winding device (if it is provided) and
brake release device shall be available in the driving station, and the direction of
travel of the escalator shall be indicated clearly.
1 1.1.4 Identification of Escalators
At least at one landing, the name of the manufacturer and the escalator
identification number shall be indicated, visible from the outside.
1 1.2 Special Notices for Escalators Starting Automatically
In the case of escalators starting automatically, a clearly visible signal system,

e.g. road traffic signals, shall be provided indicating t o the user whether the
escalator is available for use, and its direction of travel.
- 247 -
Section E
Fig. l Illustrative Elevlltion of an Estalotor's Dimension Requirements Part 4
L-
L, d
dctoil X
rh
dstoil Y detail Z
~.
Dimensions in rnm
Subclause Svmbol
11.5.1f) G Newel 2.5mm - < 5mm (steps treads and pallets)
1.1.5.8 t 0.6m 4.5mm - < 7mm (belts)
1.2.1.3 LI Root of the comb teeth 5mm (belts)
1.2.2 ha > 2.30m 4.5mm - < 8mm (belts)
1.3 L t Distance between supports 40'
3.2 L > 0.30m Angle of Inclination of the escalator
3.5.1 h3 > 0.10m < 0.25m - 6mm (step treads and pallets)
3.5.2 L > 0.30m - < 0.60m 4mm (step treads and pallets)
3.6 hl > 0.9011-1-< 1.10m 4mm (belts)
4.2.3.2 b7 > 5mm - < 7mm (step treads and pallets) 4mm (belts)
4.2.3.3 h, > 10mm (steps treads and pallets) Comb intersection line
The construction does not have to correspond to the drawing; only the indicated dimensions have to be observed.
- 248 -
- ~. --
~ ~ ~ . - ~ ~ ~~ - ~ ~~ ~
\ ~. - -
. ---
The consmion of the escabr does not have to conespond to the drawing; only tbe indicated
dimensions hwe to be observed.

Section E
Part 4
Fig.3 Dimension Requirements of a Step
Subclause Svmbol
The construction does not hove to correspond to the drawing

only the indicated dimensions hove to be observed.

Section E
Part 4
Fig.4 Pallet Type Passenger Conveyor's Dimension Requirments
Lower landing Upper landing
detail S detoil T
Pallet type passenger conveyor without meshed front and rear edges of the pallets
Lower landing Upper landing
detail U detail V
Pollet type passenger conveyor with meshed front and rear edges of the pollets
The construstion does not have to correspond to the drawiyl
Only the indicated dmandons hew to ba oblawad
- 251 -
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights resewed,
Section E
Part 4
Fig.5 Transverse Distance between the Supporting Rollers
Subclause Svrnbol
4.2.4.6(0) 2, Tronsverse distance between the supporting rollers

The construction of the escolotor does not hove to correspond to the drawing; only the indicated dimensions hove to be observed.
- 252 -
-A
Section E
Part 4
: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm.
MIN. 6mm
THICKNESS
A=
7
SECTION W-W
- BUILDING OBSTACLE
$ = 60' (f10')
K > 20
M, 100
L > 2100 (MEASURED
FROM STEPS OF
ESCALATOR)
F
L
W L W
ELEVATION
FIG. 6(iii) SCALE 1:lO
- 255 -
Section E
Part 4
: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm.
BUILDING OBSTACLE
(RADIUS OF CURVATURE <300)
MIN. 6mm
THICKNESS
- - FIXED GUARD
SECTION X-X
ELEVATION
FIG. 6(iv)
- 256 -
Section E
Part 4
Fig.7 Skirt Panel Deflector Device (Skirt Guard)
A28
15mmIB I25mm
50 mm Ic I150 mm
.
0
ELEVATION Fireproof construction
50mm ID I75mm
DEFLECTOR
SKIRT PANEL
SECTION X -X

Section E
Part 4
Fig.8 Notices for Use
Colouring
- Blue colour on white background
- The indication sign ' X ' in the second pictograph in red colour
Section E
1' Fault
Part 4
BuiH-up accord~ngto
C b w 10.2.3.2(c)
Bad draft not u x ble

G m d draft usa bk
Fg. 9 Dimyam for drafting and assessing safety circuits
- 259 -
Section E Part 5 !
Section E
Part 5: Specification for Stairlifts
Contents
Page
1. Design 263
1.1 Pattern of Use 263 !
1.2 Protection against Hazards 263

1.3 Design Features 263
1.4
2.
2.1
2.2
Maintenance, Repair and Inspection
Stairway
General Provisions
Angle of Inclination
263
264
264
264
I,
!
i
I
3. General Safety Factor 264

!
4. Rails 264 i
iI
5. Rated Speed and Rated Load 265
i
6. Requirements for Drive 266
I
266 1
6.2 Drive Units
6.2.1 General Construction Details 266
6.2.2 Gearing 266
6.2.3 Braking 267
6.2.4 Emergency Operation 267
6.2.5 Alignment 268
6.3 Suspension Rope, Drum Drive and Pulleys 268
6.3.1 Suspension Rope 268
6.3.2 Winding Drum
6.3.3 Pulleys and Diverter Pulleys
6.3.4 Angle of Fleet
6.3.5 Protection and Guarding
6.4 Rack and Pinion Drive
6.4.1 Driving Pinion
6.4.2 Racks
6.4.3 Guarding
6.5 Chain and Chainwheel Drive
6.5.1 Chainwheels
6.5.2 Chains

Section E Part 5
6.5.3 Protection and Guarding 270
6.6 Screw and Nut Drive 271
6.6.1 Screw 271
6.6.2 Nut 271
6.6.3 ScrewINut Assembly 271
6.6.4 Guarding 271
7. Carriage 271
7.1 . I Construction 271
7.1.2 Load Plate 272
7.1.3 Nameplate 272
7.2 Safety 272
7.2.1 Safety Gear 272
7.2.2 Overspeed Governor 273
7.2.3 Rotation Monitor 273
7.2.4 Back-up Nut 273
7.3 Chair Carriage 274
7.4 Standing Platform 275
7.5 Wheelchair Platform 276
7.6 Special Adaptations 277
8 Lighting and Emergency Lighting 277
9. Electrical Equipment 278
1 9.2 Suppression of Radio and Television Interference 27 8
278
9.3 Control System Design Concept
9.4 Emergency Alarm Devices 279
9.5 Safety of Electrical Circuits 280
9.6 Final Limit Safety Switches 281
9.7 Construction 281
9.8 Residual Current Devices 282
9.9 Trailing Cables 283
10. Battery Powered Operation 283
1 1. Self-operation 284
12. Attendant-operated Stairlift 285
13 Notices and Operating Instructions 285
- 261 -
Section E Port 5 I
Figures
Fig. 1 Reference Points for measuring Rated Speed
Fig. 2 Angle of Fleet
Fig. 3 Typical Control and Supply Circuit Arrangement
Fig. 4 Typical Charging Supply Circuit for Battery Powered Operation
Section E Part 5
1. Design
1.1 Pattern of Use
The design of the stairlift shall take account of the use t o which it will be
subjected and the maximum number of journeys per hour and per day. Motor
and gearbox thermal time ratings shall be not less than 25%. In addition, the
gearbox wear rating shall ensure a minimum life of 100,000 starts and 2,500
hours at full load.
The design shall also involve the determination of any limitations of the
passenger's ability to manoeuvre with respect to the position relative to the
landing floors, and manoeuvring space on the landings.
1.2 Protection against Hazards
Protection shall be incorporated in the stairlift to minimize all of the following

hazards:
(a) shearing, crushing, trapping or abrading;

(b) falling;
(c) physical shock;
(d) electric shock;
(e) fire, attributable t o use of the stairlift.
1.3 Design Features
1.3.1 All components shall be designed to take account of all static and dynamic
loads and forces.
Components shall be of sound mechanical and electrical construction using

materials that are free from obvious defect. The dimensions specified in this
standard shall be maintained despite wear. The transmission of noise and
vibration to any surrounding walls and other supporting structures shall be
minimized.
1.3.2 Plastics components shall be of flame retardant, self-extinguishing grade

material.
The stairlift shall not be made of materials likely t o become dangerous through
flammability or through the nature and quantity of gas and fumes they may
generate if ignited.
1.4 Maintenance, Repair and Inspection
The stairlift shall be designed, constructed and installed in such a manner that
any maintenance, repair, major alteration, replacement, examination, testing
and inspection can be carried out safely and without difficulty.
- 263 - Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights reserved

Section E Part 5
Stairway
General Provisions
The following shall not be permitted along the stairway where a stairlift is
installed:
(a) Doors, shutters and windows (or their furniture) that present a hazard
when open;
(b) Pipes conveying steam, gas or liquid which, if discharged into the stairway,
would endanger life or health.
The positions of landings shall be at such locations that passengers can get on
and off the stairlift safely and easily.
The stairlift shall be accessible along the stairway at all times and in all
circumstances.
Angle of Inclination
No stairlift shall be installed to operate on an inclination greater than 45" as

measured on the mean.
General Safety Factor
Unless stated otherwise, the safety factor for all parts of the equipment shall be
not less than 3.
Rails
Rails shall be used t o retain and guide the carriage, which supports the chair,
platform or other purpose-made adaptation for the passenger throughout its
travel, whether the travel is horizontal or inclined, straight or curved. Any
deflection of the rails or their fixings shall be limited so that no discomfort or
danger to the passenger results. They shall have a safety factor of not less than
5 based on the rated load.
The rails, their attachments and joints shall withstand, without permanent
deformation, the maximum forces likely to be imposed during normal usage of
the stairlift and also the additional forces imposed by operation of the safety
gear.
The rails shall be fitted with end stops.
The supporting rails shall be securely fixed to the stairs or stairway wall and the
fixings shall withstand any of the forces specified in Clause 4.2.
- 264 -
Section E Port 5
Folding rail sections shall not obstruct the stairway or landing when folded
Manually operated folding rail sections shall be counter-balanced.
A safety switch shall be fitted to prevent operation of the stairlift except when
the folded rail section is in the operating position. The switch shall be actuated
as soon as the rail joint is opened and shall remain so when the folding rail
section is other than in the operating position.
A warning label, in English and Chinese in letters and characters of height not
less than 10 mm as shown below, shall be fitted adjacent to the hinged section
of rail.
WARNING
KEEP HANDS CLEAR OF HINGE
AT ALL TIMES
If the folding rail is operated by a motorized drive, the control circuits shall be
energized by a voltage of less than 55 V and the motor and control circuits shall
be electrically protected. The control system shall operate from constant
pressure push buttons, but motorized drives shall be capable of manual
operation. The drive t o the hinged mechanism shall be protected to prevent
damage to the mechanism should it encounter an obstruction (e.g. protection
by a slipping clutch, overload detector or motor torque limiter).
Rated Speed and Rated Load
The rated speed of the stairlift shall not exceed 0.1 5 mls when measured at the
reference points shown in Fig. 1, at any point of travel (including travel around
a curved section of rail).
For chair carriage (see Clause 7.3) or standing platform (see Clause 7.4) stairlift,
which is designed for a capacity of one person, the rated load shall be not less
than 1 15 kg.
For wheelchair platform (see Clause 7.5) stairlift, which is designed for a
capacity of one person in a wheelchair, the minimum rated load shall be as
follows:
- 265 -
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights rese~ed.
I
Section E Part 5
Public use Private use

(see Clause 7.5.1)
Power-driven Manual wheelchair
wheelchair
Net platform area Net platform area
225 kg 225 kg > 0.84 m2 s 0.84 m2
205 kg 150 kg
-
6. Requirements for Drive
6.1 General Provisions !

The selected drive shall be in accordance with Clauses 6.2 to 6.6 as appropriate,
or shall provide an equivalent level of safety.
6.2 Drive Units
6.2.1 General Construction Details

All types of drive shall be capable of being powered in both directions,
6.2.2 Gearing
The safety factor used in the design of geared drive units shall be based on the
static loads imposed by the fully laden carriage on the driving mechanism and
shall be not less than 6.
All shouldered shafts shall be provided with fillets.
Unless forming an integral part of its shaft or driving unit every sheave, rope
drum, spur gear, worm and worm-wheel, winding drum, pinion, driving
chainwheel or brake drum shall be fixed to its shaft or other driving unit by one
of the following methods:
(a) sunk keys;

(b) splines;
(c) any other means that provides an equivalent level of safety.
Worm gearing having cast iron teeth shall not be used in the driving unit.
Friction gearing mechanisms b e . drives depending on friction between the
surfaces of adjacent pulleys or friction clutches) shall not be used for connecting
the main driving unit t o the drum, pinion, chainwheel, nut or other final output
component. All gearing shall be fully guarded by imperforate material. Gearing
on curved rail stairlifts shall be guarded as far as practicable.
If chain or toothed belt drives are employed, a device incorporating a safety
- 266 -
Section E Part 5
switch shall be provided to break the power supply t o the motor and brake
control circuits if either the chain or the toothed belt breaks or slackens by a
predetermined amount.
6.2.3 Braking
The drive unit shall be provided with a brake capable of bringing the carriage
smoothly to rest within a distance of 20 mm and holding it firmly in position
under maximum load conditions. This brake shall be applied mechanically and
held off electrically. The brake shall operate through positive gearing to stop
the final output shaft.
Brake linings shall be of asbestos-free material that do not support combustion

and shall be so secured to the brake shoes that normal wear will not weaken
their fastenings.
When springs are used to apply the brake shoes, such springs shall be in
compression and supported.
The brake shall not be released in normal operation unless the power supply is
simultaneously applied to the stairlift motor and the brake.
No earth fault or residual magnetism shall prevent the brake from being applied
when the power supply t o the drive motor is interrupted.
6.2.4 Emergency Operation

One of the following means shall be provided for moving the carriage in an
emergency:
(a) a smooth spokeless wheel for manual operation, any cover of which is to
be removable without tools; or
(b) a standby power system for motorized operation. In this case, a safety
switch shall be provided to disable the normal controls when the standby
power system is engaged.
Where the resisting torque of the brake is too great to be overcome by

emergency hand winding, means shall be provided of releasing the brake to
ensure that the lowering is under control. Free fall conditions shall not be
possible under any circumstances. A toggle, or other device, which could be left
in a locked position, shall not be used t o hold off the brake.
Instructions shall be provided stating the following:
(a) that emergency operation is to be undertaken only in accordance with the

correct procedure;
(b) the correct procedure in step by step detail;
- 267 -
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights resewed,
t
Section E Port 5
(c) that the electrical supply is t o be switched off and the carriage is to be
under constant surveillance whilst in emergency operation. y-
!
A direction label, with words 'UP k'and 'DOWN :&' in English and
Chinese and the corresponding arrows, shall be f ~ t t e din a prominent position
on the drive unit. The height of letters and characters used on the label shall be
not less than 10 mm.
6.2.5 Alignment
The gearing, brake and motor shall be mounted and assembled so that proper
alignment is maintained under all normal working conditions.
d
l
i
6.3 Suspension Rope, Drum Drive and Pulleys
6.3.1 Suspension Rope

i
I
All suspension ropes shall conform t o BS 302 : Part 1 : 1987 and Part 2 : 1987
\
or Part 4 : 1987 as appropriate, or other relevant international standards. The
safety factor of the ropes shall be not less than 12. The safety factor shall be
the ratio between the minimum breaking load of any rope and the continuous
load imposed in raising the fully loaded carriage. Test certificates for the ropes
shall be provided.
The ends of the ropes shall be f~xedt o the carriage, counterweight or

suspension points by such methods as metal or resin-filled sockets, self-
tightening wedge-type sockets, heart thimbles with at least three rope grips or
hand-spliced ferrule-secured eyes. The strength of the rope anchorages shall be
not less than 80% of the strength of the ropes.
7
6.3.2 Winding Drum
W~ndingdrums shall be of aluminium alloy, cast iron or steel. The grooves shall
i I
be smoothly finished with rounded edges. Plain winding drums shall not be
used. The bottom of the rope groove shall be a circular arc over an angle of not
less than 120'. Radius of the grooving shall be not less than 5% in excess of,
nor more than 7.5% in excess of, the nominal radius of the suspension rope.
The grooves shall be pitched so that there is clearance between adjacent rope 1
turns on the drum and also between any part of the rope leading onto the
drum and on the adjacent turn. Drum grooves shall have a depth not less than
one third of the nominal diameter of the rope.
The diameter of the drum shall be not less than 21 times the nom~nalrope
diameter. There shall be not less than 1.5 dead turns of rope on the drum when
the carriage is at its lowest point. I
1
The drum flanges shall project by not less than 2 rope diameters beyond the
outer layer of rope when the drum is full.

\..
Section E Part 5
Winding drums shall be fixed to the driving unit shaft in accordance with
Clause 6.2.2.
6.3.3 Pulleys and Diverter Pulleys

Pulleys shall be of cast iron or steel. The grooves shall be smoothly finished with
rounded edges. The bottom of the groove shall have the same profile as for
drum grooving but the depth of the groove shall be not less than 1.5 times the
nominal diameter of the rope. The angle of flare of the sides-of. pulley grooves
shall be approximately 52'. .. . ..
.-
The diameter of pulleys, measured at the bottom of the groove, shall be not
less than 21 times the nominal rope diameter.
6.3.4 Angle of Fleet

The maximum angle of fleet between the rope and a plane perpendicular to the
axis of the pulley, as illustrated in Fig. 2, shall not exceed 2'.

A device incorporating a safety switch shall be provided t o break the power
supply to the motor and brake control circuits if the rope breaks or slackens by
a predetermined amount.
Drums, and if necessary pulleys, shall be guarded to ensure that the rope is
retained in the grooving under all circumstances and t o ensure that trapping
between rope and drum or pulley cannot occur. Ropes shall also be guarded if
their alignment is a potential hazard.

This type of positive drive is particularly applicable to stairlifts that are to
negotiate curves andlor changes in inclination.
For full advantage to be taken of the safety potential of this type of drive,
particular care should be taken in the design of the gearing from the motor to
the driving pinion and, in particular, to the strengthof the output shaft.
6.4.1 Driving Pinion

The driving pinion shall be machined from an alloy steel with a high impact
strength. It shall be designed t o resist wear and shall have a safety factor of not
less than 6. The number of gear teeth on the pinion shall be sufficient t o
prevent undercutting of the teeth.
The pinion shall be fixed to the output shaft in accordance with Clause 6.2.2
6.4.2 Racks
- 269 -
Section E Part 5 1
The racks shall be made from materials having properties matching those of the
pinion in wear and impact strength, and shall have a safety factor of not less
than 6.
The racks shall be securely attached t o the rails particularly at their ends, and
means shall be provided t o maintain the rack and pinion constantly in accurate
mesh under all conditions of load. Any joints in the rack shall be accurately
aligned to avoid faulty meshing or damage t o teeth.
6.4.3 Guarding
Guards shall be fitted t o prevent trapping hazards between the rack and pinion,
and any other part (see Clauses 1.2, 6.3.5 & 6.5.3).
On curved rail stairlifts, a warning label, in English and Chinese in letters and
characters of height not less than 10 mm as shown below, shall be fitted t o the
carriage adjacent t o the hazard.
WARNING
MOVING PARTS
6.5 Chain and Chainwheel Drive
6.5.1 Chainwheels ',
All driving chainwheels shall be made from steel and have a minimum of 16
machine-cut teeth. Driving chainwheels shall be fixed to the drive shaft in
accordance with Clause 6.2.2. A minimum of eight teeth shall be in
engagement with the chain.
6.5.2 Chains
All chains shall conform t o the requirements of BS228 : 1994, or I S 0 606, or
other relevant international standards. The safety factor of the chain(s) shall be
not less than 10. The safety factor shall be the ratio between the minimum
breaking load of any chain and the continuous load imposed in raising the fully
loaded carriage. The minimum breaking load of the chain shall be not less than
8 kN. Test certificates for the chain($ shall be provided.
Connecting links shall have a strength not less than that of the chain.

Means shall be provided t o prevent jamming due to misfeeding or slackening of
the chains and t o prevent the chains from leaving the chainwheels or riding
- 270 -
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights rest
Section E Part 5
over the teeth of the chainwheels.
A device incorporating a safety switch shall be provided to break the power

supply to the motor and brake control circuits if the chain breaks or slackens by
a predetermined amount.
Guards shall be fitted t o prevent trapping hazards between chainwheel and

chain or chain and any other part of the drive mechanism.
Reference can be made to examples of guards given in 855304, or other

relevant international standards.
Screw and Nut Drive
Screw
The screw shall be machined from steel. It shall be designed to resist wear and
shall have a safety factor of not less than 6.
Nut
The nut shall be made from a material compatible with the screw with respect
to wear and impact strength, and shall have a safety factor of not less than 6.
Screw/Nut Assembly
The drive to the rotating component shall be directly controlled by a brake. The
rotating component shall be restrained against axial or radial movement by
means of anti-friction bearings.
Guarding
Means shall be provided t o guard all moving parts and to prevent the fouling of
the screw threads with dirt or other foreign matter.
Carriage
Various forms of carriage can be used for conveying the intended passenger
depending upon the individual needs. The broad classifications are as follows:
(a) chair carriage (Clause 7.3);

(b) standing platform (Clause 7.4);
(c) wheelchair platform (Clause 7.5).
General Provisions
Construction
- 271 -
Section E Part 5
I
The carriage shall be of metal construction and consist of a mobile chassis,

which is retained, supported and guided by one or more rails, upon which a
chair, platform or other purpose-made adaptation to carry the passenger is
supported and securely attached.
The construction of the entire carriage shall be designed to form a robust and
safe conveyance at its safe working load. It shall have a safety factor of not less
than 5 based on the rated load.
Any part or edge of the carriage that is intended to be used as a supporting

hand hold shall have clearance from any part of the fixed installation to prevent
hands from being trapped during the travel of the carriage.
The strength of attachments for suspension ropes or chains t o the carriage shall
be greater than 80% of the strength of the rope or the chain.
7.1.2 Load Plate

A load plate shall be securely mounted in a prominent and visible position,
either on the carriage or at each landing adjacent to the stairlift. The plate shall
carry a legend in English and Chinese and sim~larin content and layout to that
shown below:
WARNING 1
THE SAFE WORKING LOAD IS ONE PERSON ONLY AT
A MAXIMUM TOTAL WEIGHT OF
i
The maximum weight displayed on the load plate shall be the rated load.
The height of letters and characters used on the load plate shall be not less
than 10 mm.
7.1.3 Nameplate
A nameplate or plates conforming to BS3456 : Part 101 : 1987, or IEC 335 :
Part 1, or other relevant international standards which includes the
manufacturer's name, the brandlmodel and serial number of the machine shall
be securely attached in a prominent position on the carriage.
7.2 Safety
7.2.1 Safety Gear

With the exception of screw and nut driven stairlifts the stairlift carriage shall be
fitted with a safety gear, operating in the downward direction only, capable of
- 272 -
Section E Part 5
preventing uncontrolled descent of the carriage in the event of failure of the
drive unit.
Release of the safety gear shall be possible only by raising the carriage up the
rail.
The safety gear shall be designed t o grip the rail securely and the gripping
method shall be progressive such as that provided by a cam profile or a wedge
mechanism.
The application of the safety gear shall not cause the carriage t o change
inclination by more than 10'.
The power supply t o the motor and brake control circuits shall be disconnected
by a safety switch on the safety gear before, or at the time, the safety gear is
actuated.
When the safety gear is applied, no decrease in the tension of any rope or chain
or other mechanism used for applying the safety gear, or motion of the carriage
in the downward direction, shall release the safety gear.
Any shaft, jaw, wedge or support that forms part of the safety gear and which
is stressed during its operation shall be made of steel or other ductile material.
7.2.2 Overspeed Governor

In the event of an overspeed condition, the safety gear shall be actuated by an
overspeed governor when the descending carriage attains a speed of at least
115% of rated speed, but not more than 0.3 mls.
If the overspeed governor derives its drive from a main suspension chain or rope,
the safety gear shall also be operated by a mechanism actuated by breaking, or
slackening of, the main suspension chain or rope.
7.2.3 Rotation Monitor

If the overspeed governor is friction driven as opposed to positively driven from
a rack or chain, the control system shall include circuitry t o monitor rotation of
the overspeed governor drive during travel. If rotation ceases, the power supply
to the driving motor and brake shall be interrupted within 10 s. Correct
functioning of the reset shall be checked at least once during normal travel.
Passenger instructions shall give prominent advice that intermittent operation
may indicate a malfunction of the overspeed governor and that specialist
attention is required before further use.
The rotation monitor may be reset by releasing the directional control button.
7.2.4 Back-up Nut

Section E Part 5
Screw and nut drives shall conform t o Clause 6.6 and shall be provided with a
back-up nut fitted with an electrical safety contact. The degree of safety
provided by a back-up nut in a screw and nut drive shall be not less than that
specified in Clause 6.6.2.
Chair Carriage
The chair on the carriage shall consist of a seat, backrest, armrest(s) or hand
grip(s) and a footrest (or foot-supporting platform), arranged to provide a safe
support for the passenger. The top of the backrest shall be not less than 300
m m above the surface of the seat.
If it is necessary t o conserve space, the seat, armrest(s) (or hand grip(s)) and
footrest or foot-supporting platform, as appropriate, shall be arranged t o fold
up when not in use.
If it is necessary to provide easier or safer access, the chair shall be capable of

movement, e.g. rotation.
Whichever of these arrangements is adopted, the design shall be such as to

prevent injury whilst these movements are carried out.
When the chair is stationary at its normal position at the lower and upper
landings (and any intermediate landing), the height of the surface of the
footrest (or foot-supporting platform) above the floor shall not exceed 200 mm.
A safety belt or other safety restraint shall be fitted to the chair t o restrain the
passenger during travel.
Stairlifts with sliding or rotating seats shall have a safety contact t o prevent
operation of the chair unless it is in its fully operational position.
A mechanical lock, capable of easy release, shall be provided t o secure sliding

or rotating seats at the extremes of their travel.
Sensitive edges or sensitive surfaces shall be fitted in areas where there are
potential shearing, crushing, trapping or abrading hazards. Their activation shall
disconnect the power supply to the motor in the direction of travel and, except
in the specific case of protection against trapping between t w o carriage
mounted components where the hazard arises and the operation of the
sensitive edge or surface is effective in both directions of travel, shall allow
operation of the carriage in the opposite direction to clear the obstacle (see
Clause 9.5.9). The carriage shall come to rest within 25 mm of the point of first
contact with the obstacle. The follow-through of the sensitive edge or surface
shall be sufficient t o prevent injury of the passenger.
The following are examples of potentially dangerous places that require such
protection:
(a) any open space about, or within, the rails where parts of the carriage may
- 274 -
Section E Part 5
pass;
(b) any fixed abutments, e.g. at the rail terminations;
(c) all edges and the underside of the footrest (or foot-supporting platform);
(d) any other part of the carriage that passes over the edges of stairs, rail
fixing brackets, etc.
Wherever practicable, any other part of the carriage that may come into
forcible contact with the passenger, or other persons, shall be padded or
protected.
7.3.4 The average force required to operate the sensitive edges shall not exceed 30 N
when measured at each end and the mid-point of the sensitive edges.
The average force required t o operate the sensitive surfaces shall not exceed
the following:
(a) 35 N for surfaces with an area equal t o or less than 0.1 5 m2;
(b) 50 N for surfaces with an area greater than 0.1 5 m2
The force shall be measured at t w o diagonally opposite corners and at the

centre point of a sensitive surface.
7.3.5 Clear Height above Seat

The clear height above the seat shall be not less than 1.1 m along its whole
journey.
7.4 Standing Platform

7.4.1 The standing platform shall be at least 325 m m in depth and 350 mm in length.
The platform shall be provided with hand grips and supports for the passenger
when travelling or when stepping on or off the platform.
The surface of the platform shall be covered with slip-resistant material.
If it is necessary t o conserve space, the platform, frame and hand grips, as

appropriate, shall be arranged to fold away when not in use.
When the platform is stationary at its normal position at any landing, the height
of the platform surface above the floor shall not exceed 200 mm.
7.4.2 Standing platforms shall have safety features which conform t o Clause 7.3.3.
7.4.3 Clear Height above Platform
- 275 -
Section E Part 5
The clear height above the platform shall be not less than 2 m along its whole
journey.
7.5 Wheelchair Platform

7.5.1 The surface of the wheelchair platform shall be covered with slip-resistant
material.
Means shall be provided t o ensure that the wheelchair is correctly positioned

and restrained within the area of the wheelchair platform during travel.
If the wheelchair platform is designed for public use (see Clause 5.2), the
platform dimensions shall be at least 760 mm in depth and 1,220 mm in length
The inside net platform area shall not exceed 1. I 1 m2.
The side of the wheelchair platform adjacent t o the wall shall be solid, and shall
extend t o a minimum height of 1,100 mm above the platform surface.
The solid-faced side may be fitted with controls and hand grips or hand rails for
stability of the passenger.
7.5.2 Where ramps are fitted to platform access edges a safety switch shall be
incorporated to ensure that the ramps are in the raised position before
movement of the platform can be initiated. The design of these devices shall
ensure that at the upper level of travel only the ramps, on the edge or edges
nearest t o the landing at which the platform is stationary, can be lowered.
When the wheelchair platform is stationary at its bottom landing, either a

shallow pit shall be provided to avoid any step, or ramps shall be used.
When the wheelchair platform is stationary at the upper landing, bridging flaps
shall be provided to bridge any gap between the platform and landing that
would prevent free movement of the wheelchair.
The ramps and/or flaps shall be radiused, and shall not exceed a thickness of 15
mm. The ramp shall have an inclination not greater than the following:
(a) 1:4 on a vertical rise of up to 50 mm;

(b) 1:6 on a vertical rise of up to 75 mm;
(c) 1:8 on a vertical rise of. up to 100 mm;
(d) 1:I2 on a vertical rise of over 100 mm.
7.5.3 Wheelchair platforms shall have safety features which conform to Clause 7.3.3.
7.5.4 Clear Height above Platform

The clear height above the platform shall be not less than 2 m along its whole
journey.

Section E Part 5
The clear height may be reduced to 1.6 m, if the following conditions are
satisfied:-
(a) A height limit indicator shall be provided at each landing t o check the
sitting height of the user on the wheelchair platform stairlift. Warning
notice in both Chinese and English shall be provided prohibiting the use
of the wheelchair platform if the user's sitting height exceeds the height
limit.
(b) A safety belt shall be permanently fixed t o the wheelchair platform such
that it shall be used t o prevent the user from standing up in the whole
journey of the wheelchair platform.
(c) Notice in both Chinese and English, with inscriptions of not less than 15
mm high, drawing attention of the users that the stairlift is only for user
sitting in a wheelchair and helshe needs t o fasten the safety belt at all
time during the whole journey of the wheelchair platform stairlift, shall be
provided at each landing.
(d) The stairlift can only be operated under the attendant mode (see Clause
12) and confirmation in writing from the lift owner that the stairlift shall
only be operated by an attendant shall be available.
The stairlift may be self-operated (see Clause 11) provided that

obstruction sensors are provided to suspend the operation of the stairlift
in case of detection of object height in excess of the available minimum
clear height within the stairlift passage measured from the top of the
platform of the stairlift when it is in the working status. If light sensors or
similar electronic devices are to be used, the instruments shall be of
suitable electromagnetic immunity, in particular, t o the interference of
mobile telephones that may exist in the vicinity. If multi-beam light ray
detectors are used, the distance between light rays shall be not more than
180 mm. The circuitry of the obstruction sensors and the stairlift
operation shall be of a fail-safe design.
7.6 Special Adaptations

Special adaptations or combinations of chair lifts, standing platforms, or
wheelchair platforms shall conform t o Clauses 7.3 to 7.5 as applicable.
8 Lighting and Emergency Lighting

8.1 The stairlift and control panel at each landing (upper, intermediate and lower)
shall be provided with electrical lighting that is permanently illuminated
ensuring a light intensity of at least 50 lux on all control switches and on the
surface of the platform (the footrest in case of chair carriage stairlift (see Clause
7.3)).
8.2 The stairlift and control panel at each landing (upper, intermediate and lower)
- 277 -
Section E Port 5 1I
shall also be provided with emergency lighting of at least a 1 W lamp fed by an
automatically rechargeable emergency supply which is capable of feeding it
alone for at least 2 hours in case of an interruption of the normal lighting
supply. This emergency lighting shall come on automatically upon failure of the
normal lighting supply. The charger shall be capable of fully re-charging the
batteries in not more than 12 hours.
I
9. Electrical Equipment
The electrical specification and construction of the stairlift shall conform to

BS3456: Part 101: 1987, or IEC 335: Part 1 and BS3456: Part 201 : 1990, or IEC
335: Part 1: 1983 as applicable, or other relevant international standards.
9.2 Suppression of Radio and Television Interference
The design of the electric motor, contact devices and control devices shall
conform to BS EN 55014: 1993, or other relevant international standards.
Suppression components shall not be used in any part of the circuit where their
failure might cause an unsafe condition.
9.3 Control System Design Concept
9.3.1 All control circuits shall be designed to fail safe
Although wired control circuits throughout would produce an installation

having a very high degree of safety it may be necessary to resort to the use of
remote control devices, specially adapted switches and sensors.
A lockable onloff switch shall be used to restrict the use of the stairlift to the
intended passenger and prevent the possibility of accidents caused by children
playing with the stairlift.
9.3.2 Switches fitted t o the carriage and elsewhere t o control the movement of the
stairlift shall be operated by constant pressure e.g. push buttons or spring-
biased toggle devices that positively return t o the off position when released.
All up and down control switches shall be electrically interlocked. Release of the
constant pressure switch shall cause immediate removal of the power supply to
the brake and driving motor.
A carriage holding switch shall be used t o prevent the carriage being called by
another person whilst the passenger is getting on or off.
A bi-stable isolating safety switch shall be fitted on the carriage which, when
operated, directly activates the safety circuit. This switch is also intended as a
carriage holding switch.

Section E Part 5
Carriage stopping devices (and landing stopping devices where fitted) shall be
clearly visible and accessible t o the passenger, easy t o operate and protected by
position or design against inadvertent operation.
The stopping device shall be of the "push-to-stop, pull-to-run" type. There shall
be the words 'STOP igc in English and Chinese on or near the stopping
device so placed that there can be no risk of error as t o the stop position.
The stairlift shall have a safety switch to prevent its operation unless it is in fully
folded or unfolded position.
9.3.3 Control limit switches operated by the movement of the carriage shall be
provided t o stop it automatically at the normal floorslstoreys served.
If springs are used t o actuate switches, contactors or relays to break the circuit
to stop the stairlift at the terminal landing, they shall be of the restrained
compression type.
9.4 Emergency Alarm Devices

9.4.1 Call belllemergency alarm push button together with a buzzer (or an alarm bell)
shall be provided at each landing (upper, intermediate and lower) and be
connected t o the building management office or the caretaker's office. The
push button shall be located at height not less than 900 mm and not more
than 1,200 mm above finished floor level and in such a way that the passenger
can operate it easily and safely.
For stairlift which is designed for self-operation (see Clause I I ) , a call

belllemergency alarm push button together with a buzzer (or an alarm bell)
shall also be provided on the carriage and connected to the building
management office or the caretaker's office. The push button shall be located
at height and in such a way as mentioned above.
The building management office or the caretaker's office shall be equipped

with buzzer (or alarm bell) and indication light($ (one for each stairlift)
connected to the landings and, if self-operated stairlift, the carriage($.
For stairlift which is designed for self-operation (see Clause 1 I), a closed circuit
television (CCTV) camera shall be provided to capture the status of the stairlift
during its whole journey and be connected to a CCTV monitor in the building
management office or the caretaker's office. If the CCTV monitor in the
building management office or the caretaker's office serves more than one lift
or other location, a selection switch (or similar device) shall be provided.
9.4.2 The buzzer (or alarm bell) shall ring and the indication light shall be lit if the call
belllemergency alarm push button is pressed. The indication light shall remain
on until it is manually reset by activation of a reset switch inside the building
management office or the caretaker's office.
9.4.3 All the devices, except CCTV, under this Clause 9.4 shall be backed up by the
- 279 -
Section E Port 5
emergency supply called for in Clause 8.2 or by an equivalent supply.
Appropriate notices or labels (in English and Chinese) shall be displayed next to
all the devices provided under this Clause 9.4, indicating the function and/or
operation of them.
The sound generated by the buzzer (or alarm bell) shall be distinguishable from
that of fire alarm.
For stairlift which is designed for self-operation (see Clause 1 I), if there is no
building management office or caretaker's office in the building, the buzzer (or
alarm bell), indication light(s), reset switch and CCTV monitor shall be placed at
a remote location with 24-hour attendance and, except CCTV, backed up by an
emergency supply for at least 2 hours.
A fault monitoring system shall be provided such that any stairlift failure will be
relayed to the building management office or the caretaker's office, and the
remote location with 24-hour attendance as mentioned in Clause 9.4.6 for
carrying out rescue operation.
Safety of Electrical Circuits
The motor circuit shall be protected by a cut-out that operates within 10 s of

the motor stalling.
The control circuit voltage shall not exceed 55 V. Control circuits directly
derived from a mains supply shall be fed from the secondary winding of an
isolating transformer conforming t o BS3535: Part I: 1990 and Part 2: 1990, or
EN 60742, or other relevant international standards.
One pole of the control circuit voltage supply shall be earthed and the other
pole shall be fused as illustrated in Fig. 3a for an a.c. supply, or Fig. 3b, 3c and
3d, for a d.c. supply.
Earthing and fusing requirements for battery powered stairlifts are in Fig. 4a
and 4b.
Contactors, relays or electronic devices for reversing direction of travel shall be

electrically interlocked.
All contacts on any contactor used for direct control of the supply t o the main
driving motor shall be linked so that all contacts on a contactor open or close
together such that in the event of one contact becoming welded, all contacts
are retained in the same position and no contact occurs in the opposite sense.
The main motor and brake control circuit shall have at least t w o independently
operated contacts or one contact and one electronic device in series. The circuit
shall be designed such that the failure of one contact or device prevents
operation of the stairlift not later than the next change of direction.
- 280 -
Section E Port 5
The control system shall not depend upon the closing or maintenance of an
electrical control circuit for the isolation of the power supply t o stop the drive
motor and apply the brake.
Provision shall be made for a delay of 3 s minimum between the stopping of

the stairlift and its being restarted in either direction. In addition there shall be a
minimum 0.5 s delay between activation of any directional control device and
the movement of the stairlift.
Control circuits shall be so arranged that an earth fault or open circuit, or the
discharge or failure of a capacitor, does not give rise to an unsafe condition.
Operation of a sensitive edge or surface by an obstruction shall cause the

supply to the motor t o be interrupted and prevent it from producing any
movement of the carriage towards the obstruction. It shall be possible, after the
delay specified in Clause 9.5.7, t o drive the carriage away from the obstruction
(see Clause 7.3.3).
Operation of slack rope or chain safety switches (see Clauses 6.2.2, 6.3.5,
6.5.3), safety gear safety switches (see Clause 7.2.1), or final limit safety
switches (see Clause 9.6) shall cause the power supply t o the motor and brake
t o be interrupted preventing any further movement of the carriage (in either
direction) and necessitating the resetting of the safety device and reinstating of
the supply to the controller. It shall not be possible to restart the machine until
the carriage has been correctly repositioned manually and the final limit safety
switch reset.
The creepage and clearance distance between all safety circuits/switches and
adjacent circuits shall conform to the table contained within Clause 210 of
853456: Part 201 : 1990, or IEC 335 : Part 1 : 1983, or other relevant
Final Limit Safety Switches

To isolate the motor, the brake and controller from the power supply in the
event of overtravel of the carriage beyond its normal stopping position, a final
limit safety switch shall be provided at each end of the travel except that the
lower final limit safety switch need not be fitted in the case of those drives
where a slack rope or chain switch comes into operation and stops the carriage
within 40 mm of the normal limit s t o ~ .
The design of these switches shall withstand possible abuse from adverse
domestic cleaning activities.
Construction
Controllers shall be enclosed so as t o prevent inadvertent contact with live
terminals. Covers shall be retained by captive devices requiring the use of tools
for their removal (see also Clause 9.7.2).
- 281 -
Section E Part 5
Enclosures containing live parts, including any access cover forming part of that
enclosure, shall withstand a force of 300 N, being evenly distributed over an
area of 2,500 mm2 in round or square section, applied at any point
perpendicular to the surface.
Materials used in the construction of the control circuit shall not support
combustion.
All terminals throughout the system shall be marked and conductors shall be
terminated by soldering, clamping or crimping in such a way that the
conductors and the insulation are not damaged.
The insulation of the controller wiring shall be of flame-retardant type.
All earth continuity conductors shall be copper except when slip rings or tracks
and carbon brushes are used. At least one slip ring or track and carbon brush
and trailing cable way shall be dedicated to the earth path (see Clause 9.8).
Wiring and components at a potential exceeding 24 V shall not be accessible to

touch without first obtaining access by use of a tool.
Any nut or screw used for clamping a conductor shall not be used for clamping
any other component.
Mains input terminals shall be conveniently accessible within the equipment

and shall be marked to indicate their polarity, i.e. L for live and N for neutral.
The main earth terminal shall be located conveniently near the main input and
identified by E.
Earthing terminals shall maintain electrical continuity, shall be of the stud type
and shall be not smaller than M5. They shall not be used for securing any
component nor shall it be possible to loosen the connection without the use of
a tool. All earth conductors shall be terminated with crimped or soldered
terminations.
All exposed metal work which could possibly become electrically charged shall
be earth bonded.
Residual Current Devices

A trailing cable carrying a voltage greater than 55 V above earth shall be
protected by the use of a residual current device (RCD) conforming t o either
854293: 1983 or BS7071: 1992 or BS7288: 1990, as appropriate, or other
relevant international standards. The maximum rated tripping current shall be
30 mA. The maximum trip time at rated trippingfcurrent shall be 200 ms. The
maximum trip time at 5 times the rated tripping current shall be 40 ms. Where
fitted, this RCD shall protect all parts of the installation that are at 240V. The
testing of this RCD shall not cause any spurious tripping of any other RCD fitted
to the mains supply circuit.

Section E Part 5
9.9 Trailing Cables

Trailing cables need not be used in the case of battery powered operation (see
Clause 10)
The trailing electrical power and control cables shall be securely clamped at
each end t o prevent them from pulling from their terminations. Provision shall
be made t o protect each cable from abrasion.
Flat cables shall conform to BS EN 50214: 1998, or other relevant international

standards. Round cables shall conform to table 16 of BS6500: 1994 for
3001500 requirements, or IEC 245, or other relevant international standards.
Cables with 6 and 7 cores shall have sheath and insulation thicknesses
conforming t o table 16 of 856500: 1994, or IEC 245, or other relevant
Round cables shall be formed around a central core which shall not be used as
a conductor, either current carrying or earth. All conductors shall be of equal
cross-sectional area.
The nominal cross-sectional area of all conductors in a trailing cable shall be not
less than 0.75 mm2.
Where a trailing cable, winding drum or linear bus bar device incorporating slip
rings or tracks and carbon brushes is used, the current carrying capacity of the
carbon brushes and slip rings or tracks shall be not less than that of the current
carrying conductor to the carriage.
10. Battery Powered Operation

10.1 Battery powered stairlift designed for public use shall be of the type that can be
automatically rechargeable.
10.2 Batteries shall not leak when tilted and battery enclosures shall be ventilated.
The battery charger shall not damage or overcharge the battery, even after long
periods on charge.
The design of the battery shall be such that it does not emit a dangerous level
of fumes during normal operation or during charging.
10.3 A fuse shall be fitted in line with the battery supply which shall only be
accessible by the use of an appropriate tool(s). This fuse shall isolate the battery
supply with 0.5 s of the supply being short circuited and within 5 s of twice
average peak current being drawn.
10.4 The charging arrangement for the batteries shall typically be as shown in Fig. 4a
for a.c. charging and Fig. 4b for d.c. charging. The maximum voltage potential
when measured with respect t o earth shall be 55 V for protected charge
contacts and 24 V for exposed charge contacts.
- 283 -
Section E Part 5
Charge contacts are deemed t o be exposed when they are accessible without
the use of tools, and protected where it is not possible to touch the contacts
without the use of tools.
Battery charging should be carried out at points where the stairlift is expected
t o be stationary between journeys. Usually this is at each end of the rail.
10.5 Battery terminals shall be physically protected against short circuiting.
10.6 Batteries shall be securely fitted in the carriage structure.
10.7 Any voltage potential within the carriage shall not exceed 55 V.
10.8 Batteries shall have a life of at least three years in normal use.
10.9 The battery supply shall be capable of being isolated by use of a switch or plug
fitted to the carriage which shall be accessible and operable without the use of
a tool.
10.10 The charging rate of the battery shall be such that the charging energy supplied
over a period of 24 hours on continuous charge is at least equal to the energy
drawn from the battery by 15 upward and 15 downward journeys of the
stairlift.
10.11 The battery capacity shall be such that, when it is fully charged, the stairlift shall
be capable of completing at least 10 upward and 10 downward journeys under
full load without charging.
10.12 If the stairlift is brought t o rest out of the reach of the charge contacts, this
shall be indicated to the passenger.
10.13 The carriage chassis shall be grounded as shown in Fig. 4.
11. Self-operation
11 .I The operation of the stairlift from each landing (upper, intermediate and lower)
and from the carriage shall be controlled by a common key.
A key-operated switch shall be provided at each landing and on the carriage

which will allow the control switches t o become effective only when the key is
in the "on" position. The key shall be removable onl) from the "off" position.
11.2 The stairlift shall be in folded state when it is being called or sent from one
landing to another.
The safety features which conform to Clause 7.3.3 shall remain valid when the
stairlift is being called or sent in folded state.
11.3 Folding and unfolding of the stairlift shall be power-operated and controlled by
- 284 -
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - 0 all rights I
Section E Part 5
switches (see Clause 11.4).
When the stairlift is unfolded, there shall be a clear width of at least 500 mm
on the stairway along the whole journey t o allow passage of other users. This
width is measured from the side edge of the stairlift to the finished surface of
the wall or the projection of the outer edge of handrail or any protruding
objects, whichever is the minimum.
11.4 Stopping device and control switches for calling, sending, folding and unfolding
the stairlift shall be provided at each landing (upper, intermediate and lower)
and conform to Clause 9.3.2. They shall be located at height and in such a way
as mentioned in Clause 9.4.1.
11.5 Stopping device and control switches for upward and downward movement of
the stairlift shall be provided on the carriage and conform to Clause 9.3.2. They
shall be located at height and in such a way as mentioned in Clause 9.4.1.
In the case of chair carriage stairlift, the above stopping device and control
switches shall be located on the armrest(s) for easy and safe operation.
11.6 Appropriate notices or labels (in English and Chinese) shall be displayed next to
all the devices mentioned under this Clause 11, indicating the function andlor
operation of them.
11.7 The whole journey of the stairlift shall be observable by the passenger at either
landing (upper, intermediate and lower) where control switches for calling and
sending the stairlift are installed.
12. Attendant-operated Stairlift
12.1 If the journey of the stairlift cannot be observable at the landing (upper,
intermediate or lower), no control switch for calling and sending the stairlift
shall be provided.
12.2 A detachable control box, for use upon the carriage only, with flexible cord not
more than 1,500 mm in length shall be provided for the attendant t o operate
the stairlift by means of a continuous-pressure switch. A stopping device which
conforms to Clause 9.3.2 shall also be provided in the control box.
12.3 No controls, other than a stopping device (Clause 9.3.2), shall be provided on
the carriage.
13 Notices and Operating Instructions

/. '
13.1 User guide in both English and Chinese shall be affixed t o the stairlift.
13.2 Operation manual laminated with plastic protective sheets shall be kept in the
management office or the caretaker's office. If there is no management office
or caretaker's office in the building, operation manual shall be affixed to the

Section E Part 5
I
stairlift.
13.3 24-hour emergency contact telephone number of the lift maintenance

contractor shall be shown at a conspicuous position at each landing and the
carriage of the stairlift.
- 286 -
Section E Part 5
2. 1 Reference Points for measuring Rated Speed
Section E
Fort 5
0) Wheel choir ond stqnding pwscnger b) Seated oorsengcr
NOTE 1. Point A is the reference point for speed calculation.

NOTE 2. For etoirlifts with combined scoted and stonding function, use 0).
Dimensions in millimetres
Fig. 1 Reference points for measuring rated speed

Section E Part 5
Fig. 2 Angle of Fleet
\
-
a / / I pulley
Drum
Fig. 2 Angle of fleet
- 288 -
Section E Part 5
Fig. 3 Typical Control and Supply Circuit Arrangement
Section E
Part 5
Primary supply Control circuit

5 5 V rnox
Primary supply Control circuit

55V max
Primary supply
Control circuit
55V rnox
71s
Primary supply
d)
Control circuit
55V max
Fig. 3 Typical control and supply c i r c u i t .arrangement

Section E Part 5
Section E
Part 5
Opt~onal
stepup
AC-DC
Primary supply
Charge
- 55V mox
Reference to contccts
earth
a) AC charge contocts
Optional
stepup
DC-DC
converter
Primary supply
Reference to
eorth
- CO"OCtS
b) DC chorge contacts
Fig 4 Typlcal charging supply circult for b a t t e r y powered operation
- 290 -
Section E Part 6
Section E
Part 6 Specification for Powered Vertical Lifting Platforms
Contents Page
1 Lift Well
1 .I General Provisions
1.2 Lift Operation Subject t o Closure of Inspection and Emergency Doors and
Inspection Traps
1.3 Construction of the Walls of Lift Wells and Landing Doors
1.5 Headroom and Pit
1.5.1. I Platform Overhead Runby
1.5.5 Mechanical Blocking Device in the Pit
I 2
2.1
Machine and Controller Spoce
General Provisions
3 Londing Doors
3.2.1 Material
3.3.1 Height
3.3.2 Width
3.4 Sills
3.5 Protection During DoorIGate Operation
3.6 Local Lighting and Landing Door Vision Panels
- 291 -
Section E Part 6
3.6.2 Vision Panels for Landing Doors with Manual Opening 303
3.7 Locking and Closed Landing Door and Ramp Check 303
3.7.1 Protection against the Risk of Falling 303
3.7.2 Protection against Shearing 304
3.7.3 Effective Locking and Electrical Devices for Proving the Landing Door
Locked 304
3.7.4 Emergency Unlocking 304
3.7.6 Requirements Common to Devices for Proving the Locked Condition and
the Closed Condition of the Door 304
4 Lifting Platform Carriage 304
4.1 Configuration of the Lifting Platform Carriage 304
4.2 Available Floor Area, Rated Load, Number of Passengers 305
4.3 Mechanical Strength 306
4.4 Toe Guards 306
4.5 Warning Strips 306
4.1 6 Lighting and Emergency Lighting at the Vertical Lifting Platform 306
4.18 Side Panels, Handrail and Floor 307
5 Suspension, Precautions Against Free Fall, Descent With Excessive Speed and Creeping of the
Lift~ngPlatform 307
5.8 Winding of Ropes on Drum Drive Lifting Platforms
5.9 Precautions against Free Fall of the Lifting Platform, Descent with Excessive
Speed and Creeping
5.10 Safety Gear
5.10.5 Release
5.10.6 Constructional Conditions
5.10.7 Inclination of the Lifting Platform on Operation of Safety Gear
5.1 1 .I General Provisions
- 292 -
Section E Part 6
5.1 1.5 Release 314
5.1 1.7 Inclination of the Lifting Platform Floor on Operation of Clamping
Device 314
5.1 1.8 Electrical Checking on Operation of Clamping Device 314
5.1 2 Tripping Means for Safety Gears and Clamping Devices 314
5.12.2 Tripping by Overspeed Governor 314
5.12.3 Tripping by Failure of Suspension Gear 316
5.12.4 Tripping by Safety Rope 316
5.12.5 Tripping by Downward Movement of the Lifting Platform 316
5.12.5.1 Tripping by Rope 316
5.12.5.2 Tripping by Lever 317
5.12.6 Overspeed Governor Rope and Safety Rope 318
5.14 Electrical Anti-creep System 318
6 Guides, Buffers, Final Limit Switches and Slack Rope Switch 318
6.1 Guides 318
6.2 Buffers 318
6.3 Final Limit Switches 318
6.3.2 Control 319
6.3.3 Method of Operation 319
6.4 Slack Rope (or Chain) Safety Device for Indirect Acting Lifting Platforms 320
7 Clearances between Lifting Platform and Lift Well Walls 320
8 Drive System and Accessories of the Vertical Lifting Platform 320
8.1.3 Protection of Machinery 320
8.1.5 Speed 321
8.1.6 Stopping the Machine and Checking its Stopped Condition 321
8.1.6.1 For Upward Motion 32 1
8.1.6.2 For Downward Motion 32 1
8.2 Manual Emergency Operation 322
8.2.1 Moving the Lifting Platform Downward 322
8.2.2 Moving the Lifting Platform Upward 322
8.6 Jack 322
8.6.2 Telescopic Jacks 323
8.6.9 Protection of the Pulley(s) on the Jack 323
8.6.10 Piping 323
- 293 -
Section E Port 6
8.6.1 1 Shut-off Valve

8.6.12 Non-return Valve
8.6.13 Pressure Relief Valve
8.6.14 Down Direction Valves
8.6.15 Rupture Valve
8.6.1 7 Filters
8.6.18 Pressure Gauge
8.6.1 9 Reservoir
8.7.2 Pinion
8.7.3 Rack
8.7.4 Rack and Pinion Engagement
8.7.5 Guarding
8.8 Leadscrew and Nut Drive
8.8.2 Driving Leadscrew
8.8.3 Driving Nut
8.8.4 Leadscrew and Nut Assembly
8.8.5 Guarding
8.8.6 Safety Nut
8.9 Chain Suspension Drive
8.9.1 Chainwheels
8.10 Scissor Mechanism Drive
9 Electrical lnstollotions
9.2 Contactors, Relay Contactors, Residual Current Devices, Components of Safety
Circuits 330
9.2.1 Contactors, Relay Contactors and Residual Current Devices
9.2.3 Stopping the Drive Machine
9.2.3.1 Motors Supplied Directly From A.C. Mains
9.2.3.2 Static Elements Drive System
9.2.4 Suppression of Radio and Television Interference
9.4 Main Switches
- 294 -
Section E Part 6
9.6.1 Lighting
9.7 Battery Powered Operation
10 Electrical Protection and Controls
10.1. I General Provisions
10.3.1 Control of the Lifting Platform
10.3.1.I Normal Operation
10.3.1.6 Lift Operation with SecurityIFire Gates Installed in front of Lift
Entrances
10.4 Electrical Safety Devices Used in the Lifting Platform
1 1 .I General Provisions
11.2 At the Lifting Platform
11.2.2 Manufacturer
11.2.3 Control Devices on Lifting Platform Operating Panels
11.2.5 Notice to Close Doors
1 1.3 On the Ceiling
1 1.4 Machine and Controller Space
1 1.4.1 Notices for Power Switches
1 1.4.2 Instructions for Emergency Operations
- 295 -
Section E Part 6
On the Landings 344
On the Overspeed Governor 345
In the Pit 345
Not Used 345
Landing ldentification 345
Electrical ldentification 345
Alarm Device 345
Locking Devices 345
Safety Gear 345
Emergency Lowering Valve 345
Hand Pump 345
Figures
- 296 -
Section E Port 6
1 Lift Well
1.1.1 The platform, ram, leadscrew, guides and suspension of a powered vertical
lifting platform shall be installed in a lift well.
When the lift well is required t o contribute to the protection of the building
against the spread of fire, it shall be totally enclosed and comply with the
relevant provisions of Building (Planning) Regulations (Chapter 123), Building
When the lift well is not required to contribute t o the protection of the building
against the spread of fire, it does not need to be totally enclosed. The walls of
the lift well may be formed from non-fire rated panels which have a mechanical
strength such that when a force of 300 N being evenly distributed over an area
of 500 mm2 in round or square section, is applied at right angles to the wall, at
any point, from the inside of the lift well towards the outside, the wall shall :
(a) resist without any permanent deformation; and
(b) resist without elastic deformation greater than 10 mm.
The enclosure of the vertical lifting platform shall be imperforate.
If the travel of the lifting platform exceeds 1.98 m, the lift well shall be made
up of four side walls and a floor. The height of enclosure shall be of minimum
2.5 m above the upper landing or with full height to the ceiling. In no cases
moveable parts other than the landing door of the lifting platform shall be
reachable by a person standing outside the enclosure with the landing door
fully closed.
1. I .2 If the travel of the lifting platform exceeds 1.I m but does not exceed 1.98 m,
the enclosure forming the lift well may terminate at a height of not less than
1.I m above the upper landing.
1 . I .3 If the travel of the lifting platform does not exceed 1.I m, enclosure other than
for the platform underside protection is not required.
Skirt guard may be provided instead of rigid enclosure for lifting platform the
travel of which does not exceed 0.6 m to prevent hazard due t o the descending
platform.
1 . I .4 Where hydraulic ram is used for the raising and lowering of the lifting platform,
insertion of the ram into the ground or other structural cavity should be
avoided.
- 297 -
Section E Part 6
1.1.5 The vertical travel of a powered lifting platform shall in no circumstances
exceed 4.0 m.
1 . I .6 The lift pit shall have a floor strength of not less than 250 kg/m2.
1.2 Lift Operation Subject to Closure of Inspection and Emergency Doors and
Inspection Traps
1.3 Construction of the Walls of Lift Wells and Landing Doors

1.4 Not Used
1.5 Headroom and Pit !

I
1.5.1.1 Platform Overhead Runby 1
I'
When the platform is in its fully ascended position, achieved by means of ram
stroke limitation according to Clause 8.6.6 for a hydraulic powered lifting
platform, or the final limit switchlstopper of a leadscrew and nut drive system
or other drive systems, the following conditions shall be satisfied at the same
time.
(a) The platform guide lengths shall be such as would accommodate a further
guided travel of at least 0.1 m;
I
(b) The free vertical distance above the platform floor shall be not less than 2
m; and
(d) The free vertical distance between the lowest part of the roof of the well
and the highest piece of equipment attached t o the lifting platform shall
be at least 0.3 m.
1.5.2 Not Used
1.5.3 Not Used

1.5.5 Mechanical Blocking Device in the Pit
- 298 -
Section E Part 6
1.5.5.1 The lifting platform shall be provided with a mechanical blocking device in the
lift pit such that when the mechanical blocking device is set t o operate the
running of the lifting platform drive unit will be stopped by means of an
1.5.5.2 The mechanical blocking device shall be capable of supporting the platform
with its rated load and obstructing the platform from descending to below 1 m
as measured from the floor, for lifting platforms having a travel exceeding 1.I
m, to allow works in the lift pit to be safely carried out.
1.5.5.3 Where the travel of the lifting platform exceeds 0.6 m but does not exceed 1 . I
m and the maintenance and checking of components can be performed within
the lift well while the lifting platform is fully descended, the requirements under
Clause 1.5.5.2 can be omitted. Otherwise, the vertical clearance below the
platform by application of the mechanical blocking device shall be not less than
500 mm.

Part 1 Clause 1.6 shall apply. In addition, it shall be such that the lifting
platform and pit equipment, as well as electrical cables, etc., are protected as
far as possible from adverse impacts including water, dust, harmful fumes and
humidity.

1.7.1 The lift well formed by the enclosure shall be ventilated. A ventilation louvre of
not less than 0.15 m2 net free area shall be provided at the lift well for lifting
platforms where,
(a) the travel greater than 1.98 m, and
(b) the lift well of which is not required t o contribute to the protection of the
building against the spread of fire.
1.7.2 The enclosure shall be provided with permanent electric lighting for illumination
of the lifting platform during its normal operation. The intensity of the lighting
shall be sufficient to facilitate repairs or servicing even when all the landing
doors are closed.
2 Machine and Controller Space

2.1.1 The controller and their associated equipment including the drive unit of a
hydraulic powered vertical lifting platform shall be installed close t o the lift well.
If they are installed in a room, it shall be dedicated for the vertical lifting
platform and be made accessible only to authorized persons for activities such
- 299 -
Section E Part 6
as maintenance, inspection, testing and rescue. Requirements under Part 1
Clause 2.2 shall apply by analogy.
2.1.2 Where the travel of the lifting platform does not exceed 1.98 m, the equipment
mentioned in Clause 2.1 .I may be installed inside the enclosure forming the lift
well provided that emergency lowering and raising of the lifting platform can
be accomplished from outside the enclosure.
2.1.3 If the equipment mentioned in Clause 2.1.1 is placed in a room where

machines for other lifts or escalators are installed, the stipulations under Part 1
Clause 2.1.2 also apply.
2.1.4 If the equipment mentioned in Clause 2.1.1 is placed away from the lift well,
the hydraulic piping, where applicable, and the electric wiring connecting the
drive unit with the instruments inside the lift well shall be installed in a duct or
trough or in a section of a duct or trough, specially reserved for this purpose
(see Clause 8.6.10.2).
3 Landing Doors

In addition t o the requirements mentioned in Part 1 Clause 3.1, the landing
doors shall also be designed in accordance with the needs of persons with
impaired mobility.
Where the travel of the lifting platform does not exceed 0.6 m, a ramp instead
of landing door may be provided at the access edge on the lower landing side
of the platform. A safety switch shall be incorporated to ensure that the ramp is
in the raised position before and during ascending of the lifting platform t o
prevent wheelchair from slipping through the platform. The ramp shall have
compatible strength as that stipulated in Clause 3.2.2 for landing door.
3.2.1 Material

Doors, with their locks, shall possess mechanical strength such that when they
are in the locked position, a force of 300 N being evenly distributed over an
area of 5 cm2 in round or square section, is applied at right angle t o the doors
at any point on either face, the doors shall:
- 300 -
Section E Port 6
(c) operate satisfactorily after such a test.
Door panels made of glass shall comply with Clause 9.1 .I .3.6 of IS0 9386-1.
If the height and/or width of the glass panel are greater than those referred t o
in Clause 9.1.1.3.6 of IS0 9386-1, the glass panel shall be type tested to
withstand the pendulum shock tests as described in Annex J of EN 81-1 or
similar international standard.
name of the supplierltrade mark, type of glass and thickness/configuration.
All glass door panels shall have visual markings at level between 1400 mm and
1600 mm above the floor.
Where automatic power operated horizontally sliding doors are made up of

glass panels having dimensions greater than those stated in Clause 3.6.2,
means for minimizing the risk of dragging children's hands into the gaps
between the glass panels and uprights shall be provided.
3.3.1 Height
Landing door openings shall have a minimum clear height of 2 m.
If the travel of the lifting platform does not exceed 1.98 m, the height of the
upper landing door can be reduced to not less than 1 . I m.
If the travel of the lifting platform does not exceed 1 . I m, gate instead of door
may be provided at the upper landing. The gate shall have an upper guard rail
at 0.9 - 1 .I m and an intermediate rail at 0.5 - 0.6 m above the upper landing.
i
3.3.2 Width
The clear width of the entrance of a lifting platform shall be not less than 900
mm if the lifting platform is installed in a location with public access.
If the lifting platform is provided only for domestic or private use, the clear
width of the entrance may be reduced t o not less than 800 mm. The clear
width may be further reduced to not less than 650 mm for lifting platforms
solely serving standing user(s).
3.4 Sills
Landing door sills shall be provided in accordance with the Code of Practice on
- 301 -
Section E Part 6
Building Works for Lifts and Escalators issued by the Building Authority.
3.5 Protection During Door/Gate Operation

The doorslgates and their surrounds shall be designed in such a way as to
minimize risk of damage or injury due t o jamming of a part of the person,
clothing or other objects.
Manual doorslgates with self-closing characteristic shall normally be provided.

The force required t o open a manual doorlgate shall not exceed 40 N.
Gates shall be of the swing type only.

measured at the closing edge and in opposite direction of the closing door.
The kinetic energy of the landing door and the mechanical elements t o which it
is rigidly connected, calculated or measured at the average closing speed, shall
not exceed 10 J.


If the closing of the door is carried out under the continuous control of the
users (e.g. by continuous pressure on a button) and the kinetic energy
calculated or measured as laid down in Clause 3.5.2.1 exceeds 10 1, the
average closing speed of the door panel($ shall be limited to not more than 0.3
mls.
3.5.4 Not Used

When using other types of doors (e.g. hinged) with power operation, where
there is a risk, when opening or closing, of striking persons, precautions similar
to those laid down for other power operated sliding doors shall be taken.
Neither vertically sliding doors nor collapsible door shall be allowed for powered
vertical lifting platforms.
- 302 -
Section E Part 6
3.6 Local Lighting and Landing Door Vision Panels

The lighting at landings shall comply with the minimum illumination level
requirements at common area or lift lobby as stipulated in the most current
version of the Design Manual - Barrier Free Access issued by the Building
Authority for the design of the lighting at landings.
3.6.2 Vision Panels for Landing Doors with Manual Opening

In case of landing doors with manual opening, the user must be able to know,
before opening the door, whether the lifting platform is there or not. To this
effect, for landing doors having a height greater than 1.1 m there shall be
installed one or more transparent vision panels conforming to the following
conditions:-
(1) mechanical strength as specified in Clause 3.2.2;
(2) the size and shape of the vision panel shall be such that it will not permit
the passage of a sphere having a diameter of 100 mm, have a minimum
glazed area per landing door of 0.01 5 m2 with a minimum of 0.01 m2 per
vision panel of a width of at least 60 mm;
(3) minimum thickness of 6 mm;
(4) the bottom edge of the vision panel shall be located between 300 mm
and 900 mm above the floor level of the landing;
(5) the vision panel shall be made of safety glass of a tempered or laminated
type, or similar compatible material; and
(6) if such door is a sliding door, the vision panel shall be flush with the
surface of the door closest to the landing.
3.7 Locking and Closed Landing Door and Ramp Check
3.7.1 Protection against the Risk of Falling
(a) It shall not be possible in normal operation to unlock a landing door (or
any of the panels in the case of a multi-panel door) unless the lifting
platform is in the unlocking zone of that door.
It shall not be possible in normal operation to open a landing door (or any
of the panels in case of a multi-panel door) unless the lifting platform is in
the unlocking zone of that door.
- 303 -
Section E Part 6
The unlocking zone shall not extend more than 50 mm above and below
the landing level.
(b) It shall not be possible in normal operation to lower a raised ramp of the
platform (with travel less than 0.6 m as stipulated in Clause 3.1) unless
the lifting platform has stopped, or is on the point of stopping, in the
unlocking zone at the lower landing.
3.7.2 Protection against Shearing

It shall not be possible in normal operation to start the lifting platform nor to
keep it in motion if a landing door (or any of the panels in the case of a multi-
panel door) is open.
It shall not be possible in normal operation to start the lifting platform nor to
keep it in motion outside the unlocking zone if a landing door (or any of the
panels in the case of a multi-panel door) is unlocked.
3.7.3 Effective Locking and Electrical Devices for Proving the Landing Door Locked I
See Part 1 Clause 3.7.3 1
3.7.5 Electrical Device for Proving the Landing Door Closed

See Part 1 Clause 3.7.5 I
3.7.6 Requirements Common to Devices for Proving the Locked Condition and the Closed
Condition of the Door
4 Lifting Platform Carriage
4.1 Configuration of the Lifting Platform Carriage

4.1 . I The lifting platform carriage shall comprise a solid floor panel, side panels and
toe guards. Within the carriage there shall be an easy grip hand rail in
compliance with Clause 4.18.2, control station as mentioned in Clause 4.1.3
and necessary lighting.
4.1.2 Where the travel of the lifting platforms exceeds 0.6 m but does not exceed 1 . I
m, lifting platform carriages in the configuration as stated in Clause 4.1.1 but
furnished with guard rails instead of solid side panels shall also be acceptable.
- 304 -
Section E Part 6
Clearance between the guard rails and the lift well or enclosure shall be not less
than 80 mm.
4.1.3 If the travel of the lifting platforms is less than 0.6 m, the lifting platform
carriage comprising a solid floor panel, kicker plates, toe guards, a ramp on the
lower landing entrance side of the platform and a control station shall also be
acceptable. The height of the toe guards and ramp shall be not less than 75
mm and 100 mm respectively. Operating devices including control buttons,
emergency alarm and call button (where provided) shall be grouped to form the
control station the top of which shall be at 900 1 2 5 m m above the platform
floor and fixed on a rigid stand. A handhold shall be available at the control
station to enable standing users t o gain stability during operation of the lifting
platform.
4.1.4 Apart from facilities as mentioned in Clause 4.1 .I, consideration may be made
t o provide the lifting platform with a ceiling panel having a mechanical strength
similar to that of side panels as stipulated in Clause 4.18.3. The ceiling panel
shall be erected in such a way that it will not be used as a load bearing
structure. In addition, the ceiling panel shall be removable to facilitate
inspection and maintenance of equipment situated in the upper part of the lift
way.
4.2 Available Floor Area, Rated Load, Number of Passengers
4.2.1 Vertical lifting platforms are provided for users with impaired mobility, in
particular wheelchair users, to make short distance vertical travel within the
premises. To provide sufficient space for a lone standing user or wheelchair user
with an accompanying person, taking into account the need to cope with the
orientations of the entrancelexit and configuration of landing doorslgates of
the vertical lifting platform, the requirements in relation t o the minimum
dimensions and capacities of platforms in Table 1 shall be observed.
Table 1 - Minimum dimensions and capacities of lifting platforms in relation t o

entrancelexit arrangements
Principal User EntranceIExit Utilization Min. Platform Min.
Arrangement Dimensions Rated
Load
Width I Depth (kg)
1 (mm) I (mm) I
Lone standing I - - 1 650 1 650 1 250
user
User in a Straight through Private use 800 1250 250
wheelchair or on same side Public access 900 1400 265
Quarter turn Private use I 11 00 1400 325
public access
4.2.2 Where the entry and exit are on the same side of the lifting platform, there
shall be a mirror attached to the lifting platform to enable the wheelchair user
- 305 -
Section E Part 6
to observe the path for reversing away from the lifting platform. If glass mirror
is used, it shall be made of safety glass.
4.2.3 Notwithstanding the dimensions of the lifting platform mentioned in Table 1,

the rated loads of vertical lift platforms shall be between 250 to 500 kg and the
maximum floor area not exceeding 2 m2.
4.3 Mechanical Strength
4.3.1 The lifting platform assembly comprising the support frame, guide shoes,
panels and floor shall have sufficient mechanical strength to resist forces arisen
from normal operation, or in the operation of the safety gear, the rupture valve
or the clamping device, or by the impact of a fully-laden wheelchair. The design
strength of the platform shall be based on a load of not less than 210 kg/m2 of
the clear floor area. Unless otherwise specified, the general safety factor for all
parts of the vertical lifting platform shall not be less than 1.6.
4.3.2 The panels, floor, roof and decorative panels etc. shall not be made of materials
likely to become dangerous through too great flammability or through the
nature and quantity of gas and fumes they may generate. The use of safety
glass for panels and decorative panels is permitted.
4.4 Toe Guards
The platform shall be fitted under its sill with a toe guard extended t o the full
I
width of the clear landing entrance which it faces. This vertical section shall be
extended downward by a chamfer whose angle with the horizontal plane shall
be greater than 60'. The projection of this chamfer on the horizontal plane
shall be not less than 20 mm. The height of the vertical portion of the toe
guard shall be at least 75 mm.
4.5 Warning Strips
Blacklyellow warning strips shall be affixed to the edges, where safety edges
are not provided, of the lifting platform to alert users from keeping clear of the
closing gap between moving surfaces when the lifting platform is in motion.
4.6 - 4.1 5 Not Used
4.16 Lighting and Emergency Lighting at the Vertical Lifting Platform
4.16.1 Electrical lighting shall be provided to ensure that the light intensity at the
platform is compatible with that for the lift lobby as mentioned in Clause 3.6.1
and on the control devices.
4.16.2 See Part 1 Clause 4.16.2
4.16.3 Where the travel of the lifting platform exceeds 1.1 m, there shall be an
emergency light of at least a 1 W lamp fed by an automatically, rechargeable
- 306 -
Section E Part 6
emergency supply which is capable of feeding the emergency lighting for at
least 1 h in case of interruption t o the power supply of the normal lighting. This
emergency lighting shall come on automatically upon failure of the power
supply to the normal lighting. The charger shall be capable of fully re-charging
the batteries in not more than 12 hours.
4.17 Not Used
4.1 8 Side Panels, Handrail and Floor
4.18.1 The side panels of the lifting platform shall not be less than 1.1 m high. For
lifting platforms having a travel not exceeding 1 .I m, side panels can be
replaced by guard rails and kicker plates as mentioned in Clauses 4.1.2 and
4.1.3. The guard rails shall comprise intermediate and top rails with the top rail
at about 1.1 m above the platform floor.
When the lifting platform is stopped at its topmost landing, the side panels
shall not protrude from its enclosure as viewed from outside. The clearance
between side panels and adjacent smooth surfaces (where no enclosure is
provided) shall be not less than 120 mm.
4.18.2 Handrail where required shall be provided on one side in the form of an easy
grip handrail of cross-sectional dimensions between 30 and 45 m m extending
up to 150 mm away from corners. The handrail shall be installed with its top at
*
900 25 mm as measured from the floor and with the clearance between the
gripping part and the side panel maintained at not less than 35 mm.
4.18.3 Each side panel of the lifting platform shall have a mechanical strength such
that a force of 300 N, being evenly distributed over an area of 500 mm2 in
round or square section, is applied at right angle to the panel, at any point,
from the inside of the lifting platform towards the outside, the panel shall:
(a) resist without any permanent deformation; and
(b) resist without elastic deformation greater than 10 mm.
4.18.4 The platform shall be complete with anti-slip flooring.
5 Suspension, Precautions Against Free Fall, Descent With Excessive Speed and
Creeping of the Lifting Platform
Suspension means for indirect acting vertical lifting platforms shall comply with
the requirements of Clauses 5.1 to 5.4.
5.1.1 The lifting platform shall be suspended from steel wire ropes, steel chains with
parallel links (Galle type), roller chains, driving pinion or nut, or similar approved
means.
- 307 -
Section E Part 6
5.1.2 Where the suspension of a lifting platform is achieved by wire ropes, the ropes
shall have a nominal diameter of at least 5 mm: The other characteristics of the
ropes (construction, extension, ovality, flexibility, tests, etc.) shall at least
correspond to those specified in BS 302 : Part 1 and Part 4, or IS0 4344, or
5.1.3 The chains shall be steel plate link chains such as leaf chains complying with BS
5594 or IS0 4347; or steel roller chains complying with BS 228 or IS0 606, or
5.2.1 The minimum number of ropes (or chains) shall be t w o in the case of indirect
acting vertical lifting platforms.
Ropes (or chains) shall be independent.

I
The ratio between the diameter of pulleys as measured at the bottom of the
rope groove and the nominal diameter of the suspension ropes shall be at least
21.
5.4.1 The safety factor of the suspension ropes shall be at least 12.
I
rope and the maximum force (N) in this rope, when the loaded platform is
stationary at the lowest level. For calculation of this maximum force the
following shall be taken into consideration:
(a) the number of ropes;
(b) the mass of the lifting platform;
(c) the mass of the ropes; and
(d) the rated load for the platform.
5.4.2 The safety factor of the suspension chains shall be at least 10.
The safety factor is defined in a manner analogous t o that indicated in Clause

5.4.1 for ropes.
- 308 -
Section E Part 6
5.5.1 The junction between the rope and the rope terminations, according to Clause
rope.
5.5.2 The ends of the ropes shall be fixed t o the lifting platform or suspension points
by means of metal or resin filled sockets, self tightening wedge type sockets,
heart shaped thimbles with at least three suitable rope grips, hand spliced eyes,
ferrule secured eyes, or any other system with equivalent safety.
5.5.3 The ends of each chain shall be fixed t o the lifting platform or suspension
termination shall be able to resist at least 80% of the minimum breaking load
of the chain.
5.6.1 An automatic device shall be provided for equalizing the tension of suspension
ropes or chains, at least at one of their ends.
5.6.2 If springs are used to equalize the tension they shall work in compression
5.6.3 Not Used
5.6.4 The devices for adjusting the length of ropes or chains shall be made in such a
way that these devices cannot work loose after adjustment.
5.7.1 Devices shall be provided t o avoid:
(a) bodily injury;
(b) the ropes (or chains) leaving their grooves, if slack; and
(c) the introduction of objects between ropes (or chains) and grooves (or
pulleys).
5.7.2 The devices used shall be so constructed that they do not hinder examinations,
tests and maintenance operations. The dismantling of these devices shall be
necessary only in the following cases:
(a) replacement of a rope or chain;
(b) replacement of a pulley; or
5.8 Winding of Ropes on Drum Drive Lifting Platforms
- 309 -
Section E Port 6
5.8.1 The winding drum shall be helically grooved and the grooves shall be suited to
the ropes used. The grooves shall be pitched so that there is adequate clearance
between adjacent turns of rope on the drum and also between any part of rope
leading onto the drum and the adjacent turn. Plain winding drums are not
permitted.
5.8.2 When the lifting platform rests on its resilient stop on the lower landing, at
least one and a half turns of rope shall remain in the grooves of the drum.
5.8.3 The diameter of the drum, measured at the bottom of the rope groove, shall
not be less than 21 times the nominal diameter of the rope.
5.8.4 There shall only be one layer of rope wound on the drum.
5.8.5 The angle of deflection (fleet angle) of the ropes in relation t o the grooves shall
not exceed 4'.
5.9 Precautions against Free Fall of the Lifting Platform, Descent with Excessive Speed
and Creeping
5.9.1 Devices or combinations of devices and their actuation, according t o Table 2,

shall be provided to prevent the lifting platform from:
(a) free fall,
(b) descent with excessive speed, or
(c) creeping from a landing level by more than 50 mm for a lifting platform
having a travel of more than 500 mm.
5.9.2 Other devices, or combinations of devices and their actuation, shall be

permitted provided that they give at least the same safety level as can be
achieved by those devices mentioned in Table 2 .
5.9.3 For direct acting hydraulic type lifting platforms, safety gear can be omitted
provided that a pressure relief valve according to Clause 8.6.13 has been
provided.
5.9.4 Safety gear may also be omitted if the lifting platform is driven by leadscrew
and nut according to Clause 8.8.
-310-
Table 2 - Combinations of precautions against free fall, descent with excessive speed and creeping of the lifting platform (Clause 5.9)
Precaution against creeping

Additional tripping of Clamping device (5.1 I), Electrical
safety gear (5.10) by tripped by downward anti-creep
downward movement of movement of the lifting system
the lifting platform platform (5.12.5) (10.3.1.4)
X: Alternative combinations to be selected (5.12.5)
Safety gear (5.10),tripped by X X
overspeed governor (5.12.2)
Direct acting
lifting Rupture valve (8.6.15) X X
platforms
Restrictor (8.6.16) X
Safety gear (5.10), tripped by X X

Precautions overspeed governor (5.12.2)
against free fall or
descent with Rupture valve (8.6.15) plus
excessive speed safety gear (5.10) tripped by
Indirect acting failure of suspension gear X X
lifting (5.12.3) or by safety rope
platforms (5.12.4)
Restrictor (8.6.16) plus safety

gear (5.10)tripped by failure X
of suspension gear (5.12.3)
or by safety rope (5.12.4)
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights rese~ed.

Section E Part 6
5.1 0 Safety Gear
When required by Clause 5.9, safety gear provided shall satisfy the following
conditions laid down in Clauses 5.10.1 - 5.10.8.
5.10.1.2 The safety gear of the vertical lifting platform shall be capable of operating only
during downward movement of the lifting platform and of stopping the lifting
platform with the rated load even if the suspension devices break. The safety
gear shall be capable of maintaining the lifting platform stationary: (1
(a) when tripped by an overspeed governor which operates at its tripping
speed; or
i
(b) when tripped either by the failure of the suspension gear, or by a safety
rope, at the speed defined in 5.10.1.4
5.10.1.3 Not Used
5.10.1.4 When a safety gear is tripped either by the failure of the suspension gear or by
a safety rope, it shall be assumed that safety gear is tripped at a speed
corresponding t o the tripping speed of an appropriate overspeed governor.
5.10.1.5 The safety gear shall be type tested t o the requirements of Appendix F.3 of
855655 : Part 1, or EN81 : Part 1, or other relevant international standards.
5.10.2
5.1 0.3
Not Used
Tripping Method
II
The tripping of safety gears shall be by the means according to Clause 5.12.
I
The tripping of safety gears by devices which operate electrically, hydraulically
or pneumatically is forbidden.
5.10.4 The safety gear shall be capable of stopping the lifting platform and holding it
with its rated load in position within 150 mm from where the safety gear is
actuated.
5.1 0.5 Release

When the safety gear on the lifting platform has been tripped either:
(a) by the overspeed governor; or
- 312 -
Section E Port 6
(b) by failure of the suspension; or
(c) by the safety rope,
its release shall require the intervention of a competent lift worker, and shall
only be possible by raising the lifting platform.
After its release, the safety gear shall be in a condition to operate normally.

It is forbidden to use the jaws or safety blocks of the safety gear as guide shoes.
Adjustable components of the safety gear shall be capable of being sealed.
5.10.7 Inclination of the Lifting Platform on Operation of Safety Gear

Application of the safety gear shall not cause the lifting platform to tilt more
than 5' to the horizontal.

When the safety gear is engaged, an electric device actuated by it shall
immediately initiate stopping of the machine. The electric device shall comply
with the reauirements of Clause 10.2.2 or 10.2.3.

When required by Clause 5.9, a clamping device which satisfies the conditions
laid down in Clauses 5.1 1.1 - 5.1 1.8 shall be provided.

The clamping device shall be capable of operating only during downward
movement of the lifting platform at a tripping speed of not exceeding 0.3 mls,
and of stopping the lifting platform and maintaining it stationary with the rated
load:
(a) if the lifting platform has a restrictor (or one-way restrictor); or
(b) if the lifting platform has a rupture valve.

The tripping of clamping devices shall be by means according to Clause 5.12.
- 313 -
Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights l e ~ e ~ e d .
Section E Part 6
The tripping of clamping devices which operate electrically, hydraulically or
5.1 1.4 The requirements of Clause 5.10.4 apply by analogy,
5.1 1.5 Release

The release of the clamping device shall require the intervention of a competent
lift worker and only be possible by raising the lifting platform.
After its release, the clamping device shall be in a condition to operate normally.

The requirements of Clause 5.10.6 apply by analogy,
5.1 1.7 inclination of the Lifting Platform Floor on Operation of Clamping Device
The requirement of Clause 5.10.7 applies by analogy.
5.1 1.8 Electrical Checking on Operation of Clamping Device

The requirements of Clause 5.10.8 apply by analogy,
5.12 Tripping Means for Safety Gears and Clamping Devices

Tripping means for safety gears and clamping devices shall be provided
according t o the requirement of Clause 5.9.

The force exerted by the tripping means for the tripping of safety gear or
clamping device shall be at least the greater of the t w o following values :
(a) either 300 N, or
(b) twice that necessary to engage the safety gear or clamping device.
5.1 2.2 Tripping by Overspeed Governor

5.12.2.1 Tripping of the overspeed governor for the lifting platform safety gear shall
occur at a speed at least equal to 1 15% of the rated speed downwards Vd and
not exceeding 0.3 mls.
5.12.2.2 Not Used
5.1 2.2.3 Direction of Rotation
- 314 -
Section E Part 6
The direction of rotation, corresponding to the operation of the safety gear,
5.12.2.4 Driving of the Overspeed Governor
(a) The overspeed governor shall be driven by a rope in conformity with

Clause 5.12.6. The overspeed governor rope shall be tensioned by a
(b) During the engagement of the safety gear, the governor rope and its
greater than normal. The overspeed governor rope shall be easily
detachable from the safety gear.
(c) The breakage or slackening of the governor rope shall cause the drive
Clause 10.2. The device shall be of a bi-stable type.
5.12.2.5 Response Time

sufficiently short so as not to permit a dangerous speed to be reached before
the moment of safety gear operation.
5.12.2.6 Accessibility
The overspeed governor shall be completely accessible in all circumstances.
5.12.2.7 Test Tripping of the Overspeed Governor
During checks or tests it shall be possible to operate the safety gear by tripping
the overspeed governor in some way.
5.12.2.8 Sealing
tripping speed.
5.12.2.9 Electrical Checking on Operation of Overspeed Governor
(a) The overspeed governor or another device shall, by means of an electrical

safety device in conformity with Clause 10.2, initiate the stopping of the
drive machine at latest at the moment when the speed of the lifting
platform reaches the tripping speed of the governor.
(b) An electrical safety device in conformity with Clause 10.2 shall prevent
starting of the lifting platform while the overspeed governor is in the
tripped condition. This device may be in common with the device in
-315 -
Section E Port 6
Clause 5.12.2.9(a). Return to service of the lifting platform shall be by a
5.1 2.3 Tripping by Failure of Suspension Gear

When springs are used for the tripping of the safety gear they shall be of the
guided compression type.
It shall be possible to make a test, triggered from outside the well, to show that
the failure of the suspension gear will trip the safety gear.
5.12.4 Tripping by Safety Rope
(a) The safety rope shall be in conformity with Clause 5.12.6. The rope shall
be tensioned by gravity or by at least one guided compression spring.
(b) During the engagement of the safety gear, the safety rope and its
greater than normal.
(c) The breakage or slackening of the safety rope shall cause the machine to
10.2.
(d) Pulleys used for carrying the safety rope shall be mounted independently
of any shaft or pulley assembly that carries the suspension ropes or chains.
Protection devices shall be provided in accordance with Clause 5.7.1.
5.12.5 Tripping by Downward Movement of the Lifting Platform
5.1 2.5.1 Tripping by Rope

Tripping by rope of the safety gear or clamping device shall be actuated under
the following conditions:
(a) After a normal stop, a rope which satisfies Clause 5.12.6 attached to the
safety gear or clamping device shall be blocked with a force defined in
Clause 5.12.1.
(b) The rope blocking mechanism shall be released during normal movement
of the lifting platform.
(c) The rope blocking mechanism shall be actuated by guided compression

spring(s) andlor by gravity.
- 316-
Section E Part 6
(e) An electric device associated with the rope blocking mechanism shall
cause stopping of the machine at latest at the moment of blocking of the
rope, and shall prevent any further normal downward movement of the
lifting platform.
(f) Precautions shall be taken t o avoid involuntary tripping of the safety gear,
or clamping device, by the rope in case of the disconnection of the
electric power supply during a downward movement of the lifting
platform.
(g) The design of the system of rope and rope blocking mechanism shall be
such that no damage is possible during the engagement of the safety
gear, or clamping device, even in the case of a braking distance longer
than normal.
(h) The design of the system of rope and rope blocking mechanism shall be
such that no damage is possible by an upward movement of the lifting
platform.
5.12.5.2 Tripping by Lever

Tripping by lever of the safety gear or clamping device shall be actuated under
the following conditions :
(a) After the normal stopping of the lifting platform, a lever attached to the
safety gear, or clamping device, shall be extended into a position to
engage with fixed stops, which are located at each landing.
(b) The lever shall be retracted during the normal movement of the lifting
platform.
(c) The movement of the lever to the extended position shall be effected by
guided compression spring(s) and/or by gravity.
(e) An electric device associated with the lever shall cause stopping of the
machine at latest at the moment of lever extension, and shall prevent any
further normal downward movement of the lifting platform.
(f) Precautions shall be taken t o avoid involuntary tripping of the safety gear,
or clamping device, by the lever, in case of the disconnection of the
electric power supply during a downward movement of the lifting
platform.
(g) The design of the lever and stops system shall be such that no damage is
possible during the engagement of the safety gear, or clamping device,
even in the case of a braking distance longer than normal.
-317-
Section E Part 6
(h) The design of the lever and stops system shall be such that no damage is
possible by an upward movement of the lifting platform.
5.12.6 Overspeed Governor Rope and Safety Rope

5.12.6.1 The rope shall be a very flexible wire rope.
5.12.6.2 The breaking load of the rope shall be related by a safety factor of at least 8 for
safety ropes, to the force required t o operate the safety gear or clamping
device. d
5.1 2.6.3 The nominal rope diameter shall be at least 5 mm.
5.12.6.5 The ratio of the pitch diameter of the overspeed governor pulley andlor other
!
pulleys t o the nominal rope diameter shall be at least 21.
5.13 Not Used II

5.14 Electrical Anti-creep System
For electrical anti-creep system, see Clause 10.3.1.4. )I
II
6 Guides, Buffers, Final Limit Switches and Slack Rope Switch
6.1 Guides

The guides and guide fixings shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to stop
the lifting platform and its maximum safe working load on application of a
safety gear or clamping device.
The lifting platform shall each be guided by at least t w o rigid steel guides
throughout the travel which can ensure that the clearances between the edges
of the lifting platform and the lift well wallslenclosure conform to Clauses 7.1.
6.2 Buffers
Overtravel of the lifting platform at the top and bottom landings shall be
limited t o a maximum of 30 mm using a mechanical stop faced with a resilient
material having sufficient strength to resist the driving force without permanent
deformation.
6.3 Final Limit Switches
- 318 -
Section E Part 6
6.3.1.1 A final limit switch shall be set to function as close as possible t o the topmost
landing, without risk of accidental operation. The final limit switch shall be
provided at a position t o prevent further movement of the lifting platform in
both directions of travel.
If there are several limit switches at the top of the well, at least one of them
shall prevent movement in both directions, and this one, after operation, shall
require the intervention of a competent lift worker t o return the lifting platform
t o service.
6.3.1.2 Where a jack (Clause 8.6) is employed for the upwardldownward movement of
the lifting platform, the final limit switch shall operate before the ram comes
into contact with its cushioned stop. The action of the final limit switch shall be
maintained while the ram is in the zone of the cushioned stop.
6.3.1.3 Where a leadscrew and nut drive system (Clause 8.8) is employed for the
upward/downward movement of the lifting platform, the final limit switch shall
operate before the drive nut comes into contact with the mechanical stop on
the leadscrew. Once actuated, the final limit switch shall not reset so long as
the drive nut is in the actuation zone at the end of the leadscrew.
6.3.2 Control
6.3.2.1 Separate control devices shall be used for the upper terminal stopping device
and the final limit switch. The terminal switches shall be arranged to stop the
lifting platform automatically within +I 5 mm of the level being served.
6.3.2.2 In the case of direct acting lifting platforms, control of the final limit switch
shall be effected:
(a) either directly by the lifting platform, the ram or the drive nut; or
(b) by a device linked indirectly to the lifting platform, e.g. by a rope, belt or
chain. In this case, breakage of, or slack in this linkage shall cause the
Clause 10.2.
6.3.2.3 In the case of indirect acting lifting platforms, control of the final limit switch
shall be effected:
(a) either directly by the ramlleadscrew; or
(b) by a device linked indirectly to the ramlleadscrew, e.g. by a rope, belt or

chain. In this case, breakage of, or slack in this linkage shall cause the
Clause 10.2.
- 319 -
Section E Part 6
6.3.3.1 The final limit switch shall be an electrical safety device in conformity with
Clause 10.2 and shall, when actuated, stop the machine and keep it stopped.
The final limit switch shall close automatically when the lifting platform leaves
the actuation zone.
6.3.3.2 After the operation of the final limit switch lifting platform movement in
response to calls shall no longer be possible, even in the case of the lifting
platform leaving the actuation zone by creeping. The return t o normal service
of the vertical lifting platform shall only be effected by the intervention of a
6.4 Slack Rope (or Chain) Safety Device for Indirect Acting Lifting Platforms
If the risk of slack rope (or chain) exists, an electric safety device in conformity
with Clause 10.2 shall be provided. This device shall cause the machine t o stop
and keep it stopped when slack occurs.
7 Clearances between Lifting Platform and Lift Well Walls

The horizontal distance between the edges of the lifting platform and the
enclosure or between platform and landing door sill shall not exceed 20 mm.
8 Drive System and Accessories of the Vertical Lifting Platform
8.1. I Each lifting platform shall have at least one machine of its own. Every machine,
jack, pulley and other similar equipment connected with the lifting platform
shall be so supported and fixed as t o prevent it from becoming loose or being
displaced.
The lifting platform shall be type tested to the requirements of IS0 9386-1 or
other similar international standards.
8.1.2 Two methods of drive are permissible:
(a) direct acting;
(b) indirect acting
8.1.3 Protection of Machinery

(a) keys and screws in the lift well;

- 320 -
Section E Part 6
8.1.4 Motor Run Time Limiter
8.1.4.1 A motor run time limiter shall be provided. This device shall stop the motor of
the drive machine and keep it stopped when it remains energized longer than
the time required for the full upward travel with rated load, plus 10 s, with a
minimum of 20 s if the full travel time is less than 10 s.
8.1.4.2 The return t o normal service shall only be possible by manual resetting. On
restoration of the power after a supply disconnection, maintenance of the
machine in the stopped position is not necessary.
8.1.5 Speed
8.1.5.1 The speed V, shall not be greater than 0.1 5 mls,
8.1.6 Stopping the Machine and Checking its Stopped Condition

A stop of the machine due t o the termination of a direction control signal or
failure of electrical supply or upon operation of an electrical safety device, in
The stopping distances shall be no greater than:
(a) 20 mm in response to operation of a safety contact or safety circuit;
(b) 50 mm in response to termination of a directional signal or following the

failure of the electrical supply.
8.1.6.1 For Upward Motion

The supply to the electric motor of the drive machine shall be interrupted by at
least two independent contactors, the main contacts of which shall be in series
in the motor supply circuit.
8.1.6.2 For Downward Motion

The supply to the down direction valve(s) (Clause 8.6.14) for indirect acting
hydraulic powered lifting platform shall be interrupted either:
(a) by at least t w o independent electrical devices connected in series; or
- 321 -
Section E Part 6
(b) directly by the electrical safety device, provided it is suitably rated
electrically.
8.1.6.3 If whilst the lifting platform is stationary, one of the contactors has not opened
the main contacts or one of the electrical devices has not opened, a further
start shall be prevented, at latest at the next change in the direction of motion.

r
8.2.1 Moving the Lifting Platform Downward
I
8.2.1.1 The lifting platform shall be provided with a manually operated device located
in the lift well or a room as mentioned in Clause 2.1 . I allowing the lifting
platform, even in the case of a power failure, t o be lowered to a level where
the passenger($ can leave the lifting platform. Where the manually operated
device is provided in the lift well, it shall be accessible from outside the well.
I
8.2.1.2 The lowering of the lifting platform shall not exceed its rated speed.
8.2.1.3 The operation of this device shall require a continual manual force.
1
1
I
8.2.1.4 This device shall be protected against involuntary action.
I
8.2.1.5 In the case of indirect acting lifting platform employing hydraulic jack for
actuation, where slack rope or slack chain can occur, manual operation shall
not require opening of the down direction valve when the pressure is below the
minimum operating pressure.
8.2.2 Moving the Lifting Platform Upward

8.2.2.1 A hand-pump which causes the lifting platform to move in the upward
I
direction shall be permanently installed for every indirect acting hydraulic
powered lifting platform or platform which is fitted with a safety gear or a
clamping device. Instead of a hand-pump, the provision of backup battery for
raising the lifting platform is also acceptable.
8.2.2.2 The hand-pump shall be connected t o the circuit between the non-return valve
or down direction valve(s) and the shut-off valve.
8.2.2.3 The hand-pump shall be equipped with a pressure relief valve limiting the
pressure t o 2.3 times the full load pressure.
8.3 - 8.5 Not Used
8.6 Jack
- 322 -
Section E Part 6
8.6.1 The cylinder and the ram shall be designed such that under the forces resulting
from a pressure equal to 2.3 times the full load pressure a safety factor of a t
least 1.7 referred to the proof stress R p . 2 is assured.

See Part 2 Clause 8.2.5.
8.6.3 Jacks under compressive loads shall be designed such that, in their fully
extended position, and under the forces resulting from a pressure equal to 1.4
times the full load pressure a safety factor of at least 2.3 against buckling is
assured.
8.6.4 For direct acting lifting platforms, the connection between the lifting platform
and the ram (cylinder) shall be flexible, and so constructed to support the
weight of the ram (cylinder) and the additional dynamic forces. The connection
means shall be secured.
8.6.5 For indirect acting lifting platforms, the head of the ram (cylinder) shall be
guided. However, this requirement does not apply for pulling jacks provided the
pulling arrangement prevents bending forces on the ram. No parts of the ram
head guiding system shall be incorporated within the vertical projection of the
lifting platform.
8.6.6 Means shall be provided to stop the ram with buffered effect in such a position
that the requirements of Clause 1.5.1.I are satisfied. This limitation of stroke
shall be by means of a cushioned stop forming an integral part of the jack. The
design of the cushioned stop shall be such that in the case of an indirect acting
lifting platform the deceleration does not result in slack rope or chain.
8.6.7 Leak and scrape fluid from the cylinder head shall be collected.
8.6.8 The jack shall be provided with an air venting device,
8.6.9 Protection of the Pulley(s) on the Jack

Devices shall be provided in accordance with Clauses 5.7.1 and 5.7.2. In
addition, the configuration of the groove(s) and the pitch diameter of the pulley
shall comply with Clause 7.4.3 of I S 0 9386-1.
8.6.1 0 Piping
8.6.10.1 Piping and fittings which are subject to pressure (connections, valves etc.) shall
(a) be appropriate to the hydraulic fluid used;
(b) be designed and installed in such a way to avoid any abnormal stress due
to fixing, torsion or vibration; and
- 323 -
Reproducedwith the permission of CEN - 0 all rights reserved.
Section E Part 6
(c) be protected against damage, in particular of mechanical origin.
8.6.1 0.2 Pipes and fittings shall be appropriately fixed and accessible for inspection,
If pipes (either rigid or flexible) pass through walls or floor they shall be
protected by means of ferrules. The dimensions of the ferrules shall be
sufficient to allow the dismantling, if necessary, of the pipes for inspection.
No coupling shall be sited inside a ferrule.
8.6.10.3 Rigid pipes and fittings between the cylinder and the non-return valve or down
direction valve(s) shall be designed such that under the forces resulting from a
pressure equal to 2.3 times the full load pressure a safety factor of at least 1.7
referred to the proof stress R,o.z is assured.
8.6.10.4 Rigid pipes and fittings, if any, between the cylinder and the rupture valve shall
be designed on the same pressure basis as of the cylinder.
8.6.10.5 The flexible hose between the cylinder and the non-return valve or down
direction valve shall be selected with a safety factor of at least 8 relating to the
full load pressure and bursting pressure.
8.6.10.6 Flexible hose and its couplings between the cylinder and the non-return valve or
down direction valve shall withstand without damage a pressure of 5 times the
full load pressure. This test to be carried out by the manufacturer of the hose
assembly.
8.6.10.7 All flexible hoses shall be marked in an indelible manner with :-
(a) the name of the manufacturer or the trade mark;
(b) the test pressure; and
(c) the date of the test.
8.6.10.8 Flexible hoses shall be fixed with a bending radius not less than that indicated
by the hose manufacturer.
8.6.1 1 Shut-off Valve

8.6.1 1.IA shut-off valve shall be provided. It shall be installed in the circuit which
connects the cylinder(s) to the non-return valve and the down direction
valve(s).8.6.12 Non-return Valve.
8.6.1 2 Non-return Valve

8.6.12.1 A non-return valve shall be provided. It shall be installed in the circuit between
the pump(s) and the shut-off valve.
- 324 -
Section E Port 6
8.6.12.2 The non-return valve shall be capable of holding the lifting platform with the
rated load at any point when the supply pressure drops below the minimum
operating pressure.
8.6.12.3 The closing of the non-return valve shall be effected by the hydraulic pressure
from the jack and by at least one guided compression spring and/or by gravity.
8.6.1 3 Pressure Relief Valve

8.6.13.1 A pressure relief valve shall be provided. It shall be connected to the circuit
between the pump($ and the non-return valve. The hydraulic fluid shall be
returned to the tank.
8.6.13.2 The pressure relief valve shall be adjusted t o limit the pressure to 140% of the
full load pressure.
8.6.1 4 Down Direction Valves

8.6.14.1 Down direction valves shall be held open electrically. Their closing shall be
effected by the hydraulic pressure from the jack and by at least one guided
compression spring per valve.
8.6.1 5 Rupture Valve

8.6.15.1 When required by Clause 5.9, a rupture valve shall be provided which satisfies
the following conditions:
(a) The rupture valve shall be capable of stopping the lifting platform in the
downward movement, and maintaining it stationary, in the event of
failure of any part of the hydraulic circuit (excluding the jack);
(b) The rupture valve shall be accessible for adjustment and inspection;
(c) The rupture valve shall be either:
(2) directly and rigidly flange-mounted;
(3) placed close to the cylinder and connected to it by means of short

(4) connected directly to the cylinder by threading. The rupture valve

shall be provided with a thread ending with a shoulder. The
shoulder shall butt up against the cylinder.

are not permitted between the cylinder and the rupture valve.
- 325 -
Section E Part 6

When required by Clause 5.9, a restrictor (or one-way restrictor) shall be
provided which satisfies the following conditions:
(a) In the case of a major leakage in the hydraulic system the restrictor shall
prevent the speed of the lifting platform with rated load in downward
movement exceeding the rated speed downward (Vd) by more than 0.1 5
mls:
(b) The restrictor shall be accessible for inspection; and 4

(c) The restrictor shall be either: 1
II
(2) directly and rigidly flanged-mounted;
(3) placed close t o the cylinder and connected t o it by means of short

I!
I
(4) connected directly to the cylinder by threading. The restrictor shall

be provided with a thread ending with a shoulder. This shall butt up
against the cylinder.

are not permitted between the cylinder and the restrictor.
The restrictor shall be calculated to handle the capacity of the cylinder. A

drain valve shall be installed to enable manual trip testing of the system
instead of overloading the lifting platform. The drain valve shall be locked
off or have its operating key detached t o prevent inadvertent operation.
8.6.1 7 Filters
In the circuit between the tank and the pump(s), and in the circuit between the
shut-off valve and the down direction valve(s), filters or similar devices shall be
installed. The filter or similar device between the shut-off valve and the down
direction valve shall be accessible for inspection and maintenance.
-
/-
8.6.1 8 Pressure Gauge

8.6.18.1 A pressure gauge shall be provided. It shall be connected to the circuit between
the non-return valve or the down direction valve(s) and the shut-off valve.
8.6.18.2 A gauge shut-off valve shall be provided between the main circuit and the
connection for the pressure gauge. The connection shall be provided with an
internal thread of M2O x 1.5.
-326-
Section E Part 6
8.6.19 Reservoir
The hydraulic oil reservoir shall be of a closed construction incorporating a
covered filler, a breather, a filter and a level gauge for checking the level of the
hydraulic fluid in the reservoir.

8.7.1.1 The rack and pinion drive shall consist of one or more power driven rotating
pinions mounted on the lifting platform t o travel on a stationary rack. The drive
shall have at least one pinion, one rack and two counter rollers acting on the
same section of rack where the counter rollers are used t o counter-react the
separating force created by the meshing rack and pinion.
8.7.1.2 All rack and pinion shall be manufactured in accordance with the dimensional
requirements of BS 436:Part 2 or other equivalent standards.
8.7.1.3 The rack and pinion tooth module shall be not less than,
(a) 4 where the forces between the counter rollers (or other means) and the
rack are inter-reacted directly without any other elements of the lifting
platform enclosure in between;
(b) 6 where the forces between the counter rollers (or other means) and the
rack are inter-reacted indirectly via other elements of the lifting platform
enclosure in between.
8.7.1.4 When there is more than one drive pinion in mesh with the rack, then either a
self-adjusting means shall be provided effectively to share the loading on each
drive pinion, or the drive system shall be designed to accommodate all
conditions of load distribution between the pinions.
8.7.1.5 The overspeed governor pinion shall be at a position lower than the drive
pinion($.
8.7.1.6 Visual examination of the pinions shall be possible without the removal of the
pinions or major disassembly.
8.7.2 Pinion
8.7.2.1 The drive pinion, overspeed governor pinion and other pinions engaged with
the rack shall be machined from wear resistant material and have a safety
factor of not less than 6. The safety factor is equal to the ultimate tensile stress
of the pinion material divided by the maximum stress exerted on the pinion.
The stresses exerted in the pinion teeth shall be capable of sustaining the total
-327-
Section E Part 6
suspended load which includes the weight of the lifting platform and the rated
load.
8.7.2.2 Undercutting of the teeth shall be avoided.
8.7.2.3 The pinion shall be affixed to the output shaft by positive means. Methods
involving friction and clamping shall not be used.
8.7.3 Rack
8.7.3.1 The rack shall be made of material having properties matching those of the
pinions in terms of wear and impact strength and shall possess an equivalent
safety factor. A
8.7.3.2
8.7.3.3
The rack shall be securely attached to the lifting platform enclosure particularly
at their ends. Joints in the rack shall be accurately aligned t o avoid faulty
meshing or damage t o teeth.
The load imposed upon the rack by the pinion shall not cause permanent
deformation of the rack.
li
8.7.4
8.7.4.1
Rack and Pinion Engagement
Means shall be provided to maintain the rack and all the drive pinion($ and any
I ~
safety gear constantly in mesh under all load conditions. Such means shall not
rely solely upon the guide rollers or shoes of the lifting platform.
8.7.4.2 Means shall be provided to restrict the disengagement of the drive pinion(s)
from the rack in such a way that at least 90% of the width of a rack tooth is
always engaged with the drive pinion($ in the event of failure of a roller or
shoe.
8.7.4.3 The pinion teeth and the rack teeth shall be square t o each other in all planes, !
+
within a tolerance of 0.5'.
8.7.5 Guarding
Mechanical guard(s) shall be provided to prevent trapping of foreign objects
between the rack and pinion.
8.8 Leadscrew and Nut Drive
8.8.2 Driving Leadscrew
- 328 -
Section E Part 6
8.8.2.1 The driving leadscrew shall be made of steel having a dimension suitable for the
dynamic load anticipated for the lifting platform. The driving leadscrew shall be
designed to resist wear and shall have a safety factor, based on ultimate tensile
strength and dynamic load, of not less than 5, and a safety factor of not less
than 3 against buckling.
8.8.3 Driving Nut

8.8.3.1 The driving nut shall be made from metal compatible with that of the
leadscrew with respect t o the impact strength. The selection of material shall
render wear arising from the interaction between the leadscrew and the driving
nut t o take place on the nut side.
8.8.3.2 The driving nut shall have a safety factor similar t o that of the leadscrew.
8.8.4 Leadscrew and Nut Assembly

8.8.4.1 The drive to the rotating component shall be directly controlled by a brake.
Chain or belt type intermediate drives are permitted if the output drive gearing
shall be on the load side of the chain or belt intermediate drive. and
(a) the output drive gearing shall be self-sustaining; or
(b) the brake shall be on the load side of the chain or belt intermediate drive
and a minimum of two belts shall be used. The chain or belt intermediate
drive shall be monitored by a safety contact that shall disconnect the
supply to the motor and brake in the event of breakage of any chain or
belt. If V belts are used, monitoring shall also detect the slackening of any
one belt.
8.8.4.2 The rotating component shall be restrained against axial or radial movement by
means of adequately supported bearings. The leadscrew shall be fitted with
devices at both ends t o prevent the load bearing nut and safety nut from
leaving the leadscrew.
8.8.5 Guarding
8.8.5.1 Mechanical guard($ shall be provided to prevent trapping of foreign objects
between the leadscrew and nut assembly.
8.8.6 Safety Nut

8.8.6.1 Safety nut may be used in place of a safety gear. The safety factor of the safety
nut shall be analogy to that of the driving nut. The safety nut shall only be
loaded if the load-bearing nut fails.
8.8.6.2 The operation of the safety nut shall trigger a safety contact in compliance with
Clause 10.2 which stops and holds the fully loaded platform in position.
- 329 -
Section E Part 6
8.9 Chain Suspension Drive
8.9.1 Chainwheels
8.9.1 . I All driving chainwheels shall be made of steel and have a minimum of 16
machine-cut teeth. A minimum of 8 teeth shall be engaged. The minimum
angle of engagement shall be 140'. The driving chainwheels shall be fixed to
the drive shaft by positive means.
8.9.1.2 Chains used as suspension elements shall be leaf or roller type only. They shall I
be dimensioned in accordance with IS0 606. 1
8.9.1.3 The safety factor, calculated as the guaranteed total breaking load of all the
chains divided by the maximum static support load, shall not be less than 10. I
8.10 Scissor Mechanism Drive
8.10.1 Where the travel of the lifting platform does not exceed 1.1 m, scissor
mechanism drive employing hydraulic ram or leadscrew and nut driving device
is acceptable.
8.10.2 The connection between the platform and the drive mechanism shall be by
positive means.
9 Electrical Installations
9.2
Contactors, Relay Contactors, Residual Current Devices, Components of Safety

I
I
Circuits
9.2.1 Contactors, Relay Contactors and Residual Current Devices

9.2.1.1 The main contactors (i.e. those necessary to stop the machine as per Part 1
Clause 8.7) shall belong t o the following categories as defined in IEC 60947-4-
1:
(a) AC-3 for contactors for a.c. motors.
(b) DC-3 for contactors for d.c. motors.
9.2.1.2 If, because of the power they carry, relays must be used t o operate the main
contactors, those relays shall belong t o the following categories as defined in
- 330 -
Section E Part 6
IEC 60947-5-1 or other relevant international standards:
(a) AC-15 for relays controlling a.c. contactors;
(b) DC-13 for relays controlling d.c. contactors,
9.2.1.3 Each contactor specified in Clause 9.2.1.1 and Clause 9.2.1.2 shall operate
such that:
(a) if one of the break contacts (normally closed) is closed, then all the make
contacts are open;
(b) if one of the make contacts (normally open) is closed, all the break
contacts are open.
9.2.1.4 Contactors for reversing the direction of the travel of the lifting platform shall
be electrically interlocked.
9.2.1.5 All electrical circuits, other than supplies to charging units on battery-operated
lifting platforms, carrying a voltage greater than 55 V above earth shall be
protected by the use of a residual current device (RCD) conforming to either
054293: 1983 or 057071: 1992 or 057288: 1990, as appropriate, or other
relevant international standards. The maximum rated tripping current shall be
30 mA. The maximum trip time at rated tripping current shall be 200 ms. The
maximum trip time at 5 times the rated tripping current shall be 40 ms. The
testing of this RCD shall not cause any spurious tripping of any other RCD fitted
t o the mains supply circuit.

9.2.2.1 When devices as per Clause 9.2.1.2 are used as relays in a safety circuit, the
assumption of Clause 9.2.1.3 shall also apply.
9.2.2.2 If relays are used which are such that the break and make contacts are never
attraction of the armature (see Clause 10.1.2(f)) can be disregarded.
9.2.2.3 Devices (if any) connected after electrical safety devices shall meet the
requirements of Clause 10.2.2.2 as regards the creep distances and the air gaps
(not the separation distances).
9.2.1.2 and 9.2.2.1 and which themselves fulfil the requirements of 05 5424:
Part 1 or IEC 158; and EN 60947-5-1 ; or other relevant international standards.
9.2.3 Stopping the Drive Machine
The stopping of the machine by means of an electrical safety device, in

331 - -
Section E Part 6
9.2.3.1 Motors Supplied Directly From A.C. Mains

The supply shall be interrupted by two independent contactors, the contacts of
which shall be in series in the supply circuit.
9.2.3.2 Static Elements Drive System

One of the following methods shall be used :
(a) Two independent contactors interrupting the current to the motor.

I
If, while the lifting platform is stationary, one of the contactors has not
opened the main contacts, any further movement shall be prevented, at
the latest at the next change in direction of motion; or
(b) A system consisting of :
(1) A contactor interrupting the current at all poles.

I
rl

change in direction. If the contactor does not release, any further
movement of the lifting platform shall be prevented;
(2) An independent control device blocking the flow of energy in the

static elements; and
(3) A monitoring device t o verify the blocking of the flow of energy

each time the lifting platform is stationary.
If, during a normal stopping period, the blocking by the static elements is not
further movement of the lifting platform shall be prevented.
9.2.4 Suppression of Radio and Television Interference

The design of the electric motor, contact devices and control devices shall
conform to BS EN 55014: 1993, or other relevant international standards.
Suppression components shall not be used in any part of the circuit where their
failure might cause an unsafe condition.

9.3.2 Not Used

- 332 -
Section E Port 6
9.4 Main Switches
9.6.1 Lighting
The supplies t o the electric lighting of the lifting platform, the liftwell and the
machine space shall be independent of the supply t o the machine, either
through another circuit or through connection to the machine supply circuit on
the supply side of the main switch or the main switches laid down in
Clause 9.4.
The supply to socket outlets required on the machine space and in the pit, shall
be independent of the supply t o the machine and can be taken from the
circuits referred t o in Clause 9.6.1.
These socket outlets shall be either of type 2P + PE, 250 V in accordance with
BS 1363 (or other relevant international standards), or supplied at a safety
extra-low voltage, in accordance with the Code of Practice for the Electricity
(Wiring) Regulations issued under the Electricity Ordinance.
The use of the above socket outlets to BS 1363 (or other relevant international
standards) does not imply that the supply cable has a cross-sectional area
corresponding to the rated current of the socket outlet. The cross-sectional area
of the conductors may be smaller, provided that the conductors are correctly
protected against excess currents.
9.6.3.1 A switch shall control the supply to the circuit of each lifting platform. If the
machine spacelroom contains several lift machines it is necessary to have one
switch per each lift car and lifting platform. It shall be clearly marked with the
equipment identification and its purpose.
9.6.3.2 A switch shall control the supply to the lighting and socket outlet circuit of each
machine space. This switch shall be located inside and close t o the access t o the
machine space. It shall be clearly marked with its purpose.
9.6.3.3 A switch shall control the supply to the circuit of each well and pit. This switch
- 333 -
Section E Part 6
shall be located inside and close to the access to the machine space. It shall be
clearly marked with the equipment identification and its purpose.
Each circuit controlled by the switches laid down in Clauses 9.6.3.1, 9.6.3.2
and 9.6.3.3 shall have its own ~rotection.
Battery Powered Operation
Battery powered lifting platform may be of the type that can be automatically
rechargeable.
Batteries shall not leak when tilted and battery enclosures shall be ventilated.
The battery charger shall not damage or overcharge the batteries, even after
long periods on charge.
The batteries shall not emit fumes during normal operation including charging.
A fuse shall be fitted in line with the battery supply which shall only be
accessible by the use of an appropriate tool(s). This fuse shall isolate the battery
supply within 0.5 s of the supply being short circuited and within 5 s of twice
average peak current being drawn.
The charging arrangement for the batteries shall typically be as shown in Fig. l a
for a.c. charging and Fig. Ib for d.c. charging. The maximum voltage potential
when measured with respect to earth shall be 220 V a x . or 55 V d.c. for
protected charge contacts and 24 V a.c. or 55 V d.c. for exposed charge
contacts.
Charge contacts are deemed to be exposed when they are accessible without
the use of tools, and protected where it is not possible to touch the contacts
without the use of tools.
Battery charging should be carried out at points where the lifting platform is
expected to be stationary between journeys. Usually this is at each end of the
rail.
Battery terminals shall be physically protected against short circuiting.
Batteries shall be securely fixed.
The control circuit voltage of the lifting platform shall not exceed 55 V.
Batteries shall have a life of at least three years in normal use.
The battery shall be capable of being isolated from the circuit by use of a switch
fitted to the lifting platform which shall be accessible and operable without the
use of a tool.
The battery capacity and charging rate shall be appropriate to the conditions of
- 334 -
Section E Part 6
service of the lifting platform.
9.7.1 1 If the lifting platform is brought to rest out of the reach of the charge contacts,
this shall be indicated to the passenger.
9.7.1 2 The carriage chassis shall be grounded as shown in Fig. 1.
10 Electrical Protection and Controls

the vertical lifting platform shall not, on its own, be the cause of a dangerous
malfunction of the installation.

The following faults are envisaged in the electrical equipment of the vertical
lifting platform:
(b) voltage drop;
(c) loss of continuity of a conductor,
(d) insulation fault in relation to the metalwork or the earth;
(e) short circuit or open circuit, change of value or function in an electrical


contactor or relay;
(j) phase reversal.
safety contacts conforming to the requirements of Clause 10.2.2.

- 335 -
Section E Part 6

Clause 10.2 is short-circuited to earth as in case (d) in Clause 10.1.2, it shall
cause the immediate stopping and prevent restarting of the lifting platform.
The return t o service of the lifting platform shall not be possible except by a
movement of the drive machine shall be prevented or it shall be caused to stop
consist of:
the supply to the contactors referred to in Clause 8.1.6 or their relay
contactors; or
(b) either one or more safety contacts satisfying Clause 10.2.2 not directly
cutting the supply to the contactors referred to in Clause 8.1.6 or their
relay contactors in conjunction with a safety circuit satisfying Clause
10.2.3.
10.2.1.2 Apart from exceptions permitted in this Code, no electrical equipment shall be
connected in parallel with an electrical safety device.
down the same circuit or from telecommunication cabling and signal
transmission devices installed in the vicinity, which would cause a dangerous
condition t o result.
or appreciably delay the stopping of the drive machine through the functioning
of an electrical safety device.
such as t o prevent the appearance of false signals at outputs of electrical safety
devices due t o the effects of switching.
- 336 -
Section E Port 6
In particular, voltage peaks arising from normal operation of the lifting platform
or other equipment on the network shall not create inadmissible disturbances
in electronic components (noise immunity).


together.

brought t o their open position and when for a significant part of the travel
there are no resilient members (e.g. springs) between the moving contacts and
component failure.
The safety contacts shall be provided for a rated insulation voltage of 250 V if
degree of protection of the enclosure is less than IP 4X, in accordance with BS
5490; or IEC 529 or other relevant international standards.
The safety contacts shall belong to the following categories as defined in EN

60947-5-1 or other relevant international standards :
(b) DC-13, for safety contacts in dc circuits.
If the degree of protection is equal t o or less than IP 4X, the clearance shall be
at least 3 mm, the creep distances at least 4 mm and the distances for breading
contacts at least 4 m m after separation. If the protection is better than IP 4X
the creep distance can be reduced to 3 mm.
Under extreme conditions of external influence, thelive parts of safety contacts

protective enclosure need not be provided in the case of external influences
Regulations issued under the Electricity Ordinance or the Regulations for
Electrical Installation by the Institution of Electrical Engineers.
In the case of multiple breaks, the distance after separation between the
- 337 -
Section E Port 6
Abrasion of conductive material shall not lead to short circuiting of contacts,

Safety circuits shall comply with the requirements of Clause 10.1 . I relating to
the appearance of a fault. In addition, it shall be designed such that :
(a) If a dangerous situation can only occur through the combination of

lifting platform shall be brought about at the latest at the next change of
direction if the possible appearance of a further fault which, in
conjunction with the already existing faults, would lead to the dangerous
situation.
However, a combination of more than three faults can be disregarded if

the safety circuit is built out of at least t w o channels. In the case of
different status, the lifting platform shall be stopped at latest at the next
change of direction.
(b) On restoration of the power supply after it has been disconnected,

maintenance of the lifting platform in the stopped position is not
necessary, provided that during the next sequence stopping is re-imposed
in the cases covered by Clause 10.2.3(a).

When operating t o ensure safety, an electrical safety device shall prevent the
setting in motion of the drive machine or initiate immediately its stopping. The
electrical supply to the drive machine, brake and direction valves (where
appropriate) shall likewise be broken.
supply to the machine in accordance with the requirements of Clause 8.1.6.
If, because of the power t o be transmitted, relay contactors are used to control
the drive machine, these shall be considered as equipment directly controlling
the supply to the drive machine for starting and stopping.
they are able to function properly under the worst case limits and within
manufacturer's recommendations for voltage, current and duty.
their installation accessible t o persons, they must be so built that these electrical
- 338 -
Section E Part 6
10.3.1 Control of the Lifting Platform

Control shall be effected electrically as stated in Clauses 10.3.1.I - 10.3.1.6.
10.3.1.1 Normal Operation

Control shall be by the aid of buttons. These shall be placed in boxes, such that
no live parts are accessible.
The movement of the lifting platform shall be dependent on a constant

pressure on the push-button or spring-biased toggle devices that positively
return t o the off position when released protected against accidental operation
and with the direction of movement clearly indicated on the button. All up and
down control switches shall be electrically interlocked. Release of the constant
pressure switch shall cause immediate removal of the power supply t o the
brake and driving motor.
A bi-stable isolating safety switch shall be fitted on the lifting platform which,
when operated, directly activates the safety circuit. This switch is also intended
as a holding switch to control the movement of the lifting platform.
Control limit switches operated by the movement of the lifting platform shall
be provided to stop it automatically at the normal floors/storeys served.
lf springs are used to actuate switches, contactors or relays to break the circuit
t o stop the lifting platform at the terminal landing, they shall be of the
restrained compression type.
10.3.1.2Not Used
10.3.1.3Not Used

When required by Clause 5.9, an electrical anti-creep system shall be provided,
which satisfies the following conditions :
(a) The machine shall be energized in the up direction independent of the

position of the doors, when the lifting platform is in a zone which extends
from maximum 40 mm below the landing level to the lower end of the
unlocking zone;
(b) When the lifting platform has been unused for a period not exceeding 15
min after the last journey, the lifting platform shall be dispatched
automatically to the lowest landing;
- 339 -
Section E Part 6
(c) Indications according t o Clauses 11.2.5 and 11.4.5 shall be provided.
10.3.1.5 Not Used
10.3.1.6 Lift Operation with Security/Fire Gates Installed in front of Lift Entrances
10.3.2 Not Used

Requirements under Part 1 Clause 10.3.3 shall apply except that where the
travel of the lifting platform does not exceed 1.98 m, intercom and CCTV may
be omitted.

For lifting platforms with manual doors, a device shall prevent the lifting
platform from leaving a landing for a period of at least 2 seconds after
stopping.
.
A user who enters the lifting platform shall have at least 2 seconds after the
doors have closed, t o enable himlher t o press the button of hislher choice
before any external call buttons can become effective in determining the
direction of travel. Control at the lifting platform shall override control at the
landing control station.
- 340 -
Section E Port 6
10.4 Electrical Safety Devices Used in the Lifting Platform
Table 3 shows the electrical safety devices to be used in a lifting platform.
Table 3
Electrical Safety Devices of Lifting Platforms
Function
Check on position of blocking device

Check on position of lower entrance ramp
Check on locking of landing doors
Check on closed position of landing doors
Check on the operation of safety gear
Check on the operation of clamping device
Check for breakage or slackening of governor rope
Operation of overspeed governor
Check for breakage or slackening of safety rope

Check for status of rope slacking mechanism
Operation of safety gear or clamping device
Check for breakage or slackening of platform over-travel
monitoring linkage for direct acting lifting platform
Check for breakage or slackening of platform over-travel
monitoring linkage for indirect acting lifting platform
Final limit switch
Check for slack rope or slack chain
Check for chain or belt intermediate drive status
Operation of safety nut
- 341 -
Section E Part 6

See Part 1 Clause 11 . I
11.2 At the Lifting Platform

A notice, similar to the sample attached below, showing the rated load of the
lifting platform in kilograms as well as the category of users, where applicable,
should be permanently fixed to the lifting platform. The height of the
inscriptions of the notice shall be not less than 10 mm.
340 fiF
@ZB@:
RATED LOAD: 340 kg
250 &F
%3ZB@:
RATED LOAD: 250 kg
1 1.2.2 Manufacturer
- 342 -
Section E Part 6
11.2.3 Control Devices on Lifting Platform Operating Panels

Stopping device and control switches for upward and downward movement of
the lifting platform shall be provided and conform t o Clause 10.3.1.1. They
shall be located at height and in such a way as mentioned in Clause 10.3.3.
The alarm button shall be yellow in colour and identified by the symbol:
The above stopping device, control switches and alarm button shall be located
on the armrest($ for easy and safe operation if the lifting platform serves also
wheelchair users.
Appropriate notices or labels (in Chinese and English) shall be displayed next to
all the devices t o indicate the function andlor operation of them.
1 1.2.5 Notice to Close Doors

In the case of a lifting platform provided with an electrical anti-creep system
and with manually operated doors, or with power operated doors where
closing is carried out under the continuous control of the users, there shall be a
notice in the lifting platform as follows:
'CLOSE DOORS AFTER USE'

(H@HB'J)
The minimum height of the characters shall be 50 mm.
11.3 On the Ceiling

Where a ceiling is fitted, a label giving warning that the ceiling is not load
bearing and warning against treading on the ceiling shall be provided.
1 1.4 Machine and Controller Space

- 343 -
Section E Part 6
1 1.4.2 Instructions for Emergency Operations
In the machine and controller space or the interior of the controller, there shall
be detailed instructions to be followed in the event of breakdown of the lifting
platform, particularly concerning the use of the device($ for manual emergency
movement, and the unlocking key for landing doors.
On or near any stopping devices in the machine and controller space there shall
be the word 'STOP' ( { + ) so placed that there can be no risk of error as to
the stop position (see Part 1 Clause 2.2.4).
1 1.4.4 Lifting Beam or Hook
See Part 1 Clause 1 1.4.4'
In the case of a lifting platform provided with an electrical anti-creep system

there shall be an inscription on or near the main switch:
'Switch off only when the lifting platform is at the lowest landing'.
( q%ff-P@V9ErJE@i&@E2qBBf$
)
1 1.5 On the Landings
Manually operated landing doors, if they can be confused with other adjacent
doors, shall bear the inscription 'LIFTING PLATFORM' ( flp@qe
).
Each of the landing doors, or walls adjacent t o the landing doors, shall display
the instructions as required in Part 1 Clause 11.2.4(f). In addition, each of the
landing doors, or walls adjacent to the landing doors shall be affixed with a
label of tear-resistant durable material showing the international symbol for
access for persons with a disability as illustrated in the most current version of
the Design Manual - Barrier Free Access issued by the Building Authority.
Control switches for calling the lifting platform shall be provided at each
landing (upper, intermediate and lower) and conform to Clause 10.3.1.1. They
shall be located at a height and in such a way as mentioned in Clause 10.3.3.
Provisions shall be made at all landings for warning indication to be displayed

to inform others that the lift is out of service for maintenance. The display of
such indication or the illumination of such indicator shall be controlled by a
manually operated switch and additionally may be switched on automatically.
The indication shall bear the inscription "OUT OF SERVICE" (minimum height 8
mm) and ''B!$'' (minimum height 12 mm).
- 344 -
Section E Part 6
On the Overspeed Governor
In the Pit
Not Used
Landing ldentification
Electrical ldentification
Alarm Device
Locking Devices
Safety Gear
Emergency Lowering Valve
Near the manually operated valve for emergency downward movement there
shall be a plate stating:
'Caution - Emergency Lowering'

( /l\lL\ - %%-FP% )
Hand Pump
Near the hand pump for emergency upward movement there shall be a plate
stating:
'Caution - Emergency Lifting'

( 1 - %%k* )
- 345 -
Section E Part 6
Optional
step-up
AC-DC
converter
L
Primory supply
N Charge
Reference t o
eorth
- contacts
a) AC charge contacts
Optional
step-up
DC-DC
converter
Primary supply
- 55V
--.
-T
mox
earth
b) DC charge contacts
Fig. 1 T y p i c a l c h a r g i n g s u p p l y c i r c u i t f o r b a t t e r y p o w e r e d o p e r a t i o n
- 346 -
Section F
Section F. Special Requirements for Fireman's Lifts
Contents
Page
Planning Requirements 348
Specification 348
Lift Car 348
Lift Doors and Landing Controls 348
Fireman's Switch 348
Power Supply 349
Operation 349
Position Indicator on Landing 350
Annex I Fireman's Switch for Fireman's Lift

Annex II Flow Chart
- 347 -
I
Section F
Planning Requirements
Reference shall be made, in ensuring compliance, t o the Building (Planning)

Regulations (Chapter 123) and the Code of Practice for Means of Access for
Firefighting and Rescue issued by the Building Authority.
Specification
Lift Car
(i) The speed of the lift car shall be such that it will reach the topmost
discharge point of the building in not more than 1 minute, calculating
from the time when the lift doors at the level of designated point of entry
where the fireman's switch is located are completely closed to the time
when the lift doors at the topmost discharge point start t o open.
(ii) Effective means shall be provided within the lift car to indicate the
confirmation of all calls registered on the car control panel when the lift is
in the fireman's lift operating mode.
Lift Doors and Landing Controls
(i) The lift shall be provided with automatic power operated horizontally
sliding doors.
(ii) Failure of the landing call controls, such as short circuiting, whilst the lift is
in the fireman's lift operating mode shall not affect operation of the
fireman's lift.
(iii) The lift shall be provided with a sensitive door re-opening device which is
not of light, flame, heat or smoke sensitive type and remains effective
when the lift is under fireman's lift operating mode. Additional door re-
opening devices of light, flame, heat or smoke sensitive type may be
installed but shall be rendered inoperative once the Fireman's Switch is
operated.
Fireman's Switch
(i) The fireman's lift shall be provided with a suitable control switch, clearly
indicated as Fireman's Switch (;$$P$g) , at the designated point of
entry to be agreed with the Fire Services Department. To enable Fire
Services personnel to gain control over the lift, operation of the Fireman's
Switch shall override the instructions registered inside the lift and return
the lift to the designated point of entry as quickly as mechanically possible.
(ii) When all the lifts in a common lift shaft are designated as fireman's lifts,
they shall be operable from one Fireman's Switch.
- 348 -
Section F
(iii) For easy identification of Fireman's Switch, a red and white diagonal
striped backing shall be provided behind the glass of the Fireman's Switch
as shown in the diagram in Annex I.
2.4 Power Supply
(i) The power supply to the fireman's lift($ shall be connected to a sub-main
which shall be exclusive and independent of any other sub-main circuit.
When a fireman's lift is one of a group of lifts, the other lifts may be fed
from the same supply, provided it is adequate for this purpose, and that
arrangements are such that a fault occurring in any other lift or the group
will not affect in any way the operation of the fireman's lift.
(ii) The fireman's lift shall be connected to, and capable of being operated on,
a secondary power supply which is independent of the primary power
supply t o the fireman's lift.
(iii) The secondary power supply shall be the emergency generator providing
supply t o the essential services as required in the Code of Practice for
Minimum Fire Service Installations and Equipment. In a building where
emergency generator is not required, the secondary power supply may be
a supply from another sub-station which does not normally provide the
incoming supply t o the building, or a supply available from the live side of
the main isolator of the building.
(iv) At the fireman's lift power supply isolator, labels shall be provided with
the warning that the equipment may remain alive even after the primary
power supply has been isolated.
2.5 Operation
(i) The operation of the fireman's lift shall protect the passengers from the
effects of fire and smoke by keeping the lift doors automatically closed
until operated to open from the inside. Therefore its operation shall be
programmed in such a way that upon switching on the Fireman's Switch
to gain control of the lift car, i.e. the lift being under fireman's lift
operating mode, the Fire Services personnel need only take three simple
steps to operate the lift.
/
(a) Press the desired floor button continuously until lift doors are fully
closed, or press the "door close" button continuously to close lift
door and register call by pressing the desired floor button.
(b) If another floor is desired, press floor button of that floor,
(c) On arrival at the desired floor, press "door open" button

continuously until lift doors are fully open.
- 349 -
Section F
(ii) The operation of the fireman's lift shall comply with the flow chart F1 in
Annex II.
(iii) On resetting the Fireman's Switch when the lift is at a floor other than the
designated point of entry, the lift shall not resume normal operation and
shall remain under fireman's lift operating mode and the lift doors shall be
kept closed unless "door open" button is pressed continuously until the
doors are fully open when the lift returns to the designated point of entry.
(iv) Once the Fireman's Switch is switched on and the Fire Services personnel
have gained control of the fireman's lift, the lift shall remain under the
exclusive control of fireman despite any power supply interruption or
changeover from normal power supply t o the secondary one, or vice versa,
for the fireman's lift. All calls prior to the power supply interruption or
changeover shall be automatically cancelled. The operation of the
fireman's lift shall then be as follows.
(a) In case the lift doors are not fully closed, on the re-establishment of
power supply the doors shall automatically open if the lift stopped at
a landing. The opening and closing of the doors shall be by pressing
continuously the respective control buttons as under fireman's lift
operating mode and the lift shall operate according t o item (b) when
the lift doors are fully closed.
(b) In case the lift doors are fully closed, once the power supply has
been re-established the lift shall immediately resume the fireman's
lift operational control as in flow chart F1; or as an alternative,
return t o the designated point of entry or the nearest landing below
and resume the operational control as in flow chart F1. The lift doors
shall be kept closed unless "door open" button is pressed
continuously until the doors are fully open when the lift returns to
the designated point of entry.
2.6 Position Indicator on Landing .

Position indicator displaying the position of the lift car shall be provided t o the
fireman's lift on the landing at the designated point of entry and shall remain
operative under the fireman's lift operating mode.
- 350 -
-
ANNEX I 1 FLOW CHART F l Section F
I
LIFT UNDER NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
i
FIREMAN'S SWITCH ON
C
LIFT IN FIREMAN'S LlFT OPERATING MODE
NO
r
l(1) DOORS KEPTOPEN I
i ~'DOOR
j OPEN' BUTTON OPERATIVE
ALL CAR CALLS ARE OPERATIVE
PRESS CAR CALL OR 'DOOR CLOSE' BUTTON
DOORS START CLOSING
NO
CLOSE' BUTTON CONTINUOUSLY
1
(1) DOORS RE-OPEN
(2) ALL CAR CALLS CANCELLED
DOORS TOTALLY CLOSED
t
(1) LIFTTRAVELS
(2) OTHER CAR CALLS CAN BE REGISTERED
(3) LlFT STOPS ATTHE NEAREST CAR CALLALONG ITS DIRECTION ATTRAVEL
(4) ALL CAR CALLS CANCELLED
(5) DOORS REMAIN CLOSED
NO
PRESS CAR CALL DESIRED FLOOR DOORS CLOSE
t
f
PRESS 'DOOR OPEN' BUTTON
I
OF ENTRY UNDER FIREMAN'S LlFT OPERATING MODE
( I ) DCORS I<EPT OPEX

( 2 ) CAR CA.L CA\ BE REG STERED AGAlh
I
LlFT RESUMES NORMAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS AFTER OPENING THE ANY OTHER DESTINATIONS
NO
LlFT STOPS ATTHAT FLOOR
FIREMAN'S LlFT OPERATION FLOW CHART

- 352 -
Reproduced with the p e r m l s s l o n of CEN - O all rights r e s e w e d
Section F
YES YES
(1) CLOSE DOORS AUTOMATICALLY

(2) 'DOOR OPEN' BUTTON STILL OPERATIVE
-
DOWN
I
DOORS FULLY CLOSED
(1) STOPS AT NEAREST POSSIBLE FLOOR WITHOUT OPENING DOORS

(2) REVERSE DIRECTION
(1) 'DOOR OPEN' BUTTON I

(2) RETURN TO DESIGNATED POINT OF ENTRY
1 1
* FIREMAN'S LlFT OPERATING MODE SHALL -

OVERRIDE 'ATENDANT' SWITCH
. CUT OUT LIGHT, FLAME, HEAT OR SMOKE SENSITIVE DOOR RE-OPENING DEVICE
OVERRIDE SERVICE SWITCH INSIDE CAR
.. CUT OUT OPERATION ONIOFF SWITCH INSIDE CAR

CUT OUT ALL LANDING CALLS
CUT OUT 'INDEPENDENT' SWITCH
CANCEL ALL REGISTERED CAR CALLS
ISOLATE FIREMAN'S LlFT FROM COLLECTIVE CONTROL
A STILL OPERATIVE -
OVERLOAD DEVICE
ALL SAFETY CIRCUITS EXCEPT LIGHT. FLAME, HEAT OR SMOKE SENSITIVE DOOR
. RE-OPENING DEVICE
CAR TOP STATION
FANILIGHT SWITCH
ALARM
INTERCOM
FIREMAN'S LlFT OPERATION FLOW CHART

- 353 -
Appendix I
Code of Practice on the Design and Construction of

Lifts and Escalators
AMENDMENT HISTORY
(With Reference to the previous editions issued

under Lifts and Escalators (Safety) Ordinance (Cap. 327))

Appendix I
Code of Practice on the Design and Construction of

Lifts and Escalators
AMENDMENT HISTORY
(With Reference to the previous editions issued
under Lifts and Escalators (Safety) Ordinance (Cap. 327))
and Minor Changes

Appendix I
Specified in EN 81-1 :I998+A3:2009
The amendments (no. 33 t o 40) are the new revisions made under this 201 2
edition, as compared with the 201 0 edition.

Index
d
Access stroke, 70, 138, 139
machine room, 34, 1 18, 170 type approval tests, 69
pit, 31, 1 16, 169, 298 Buffer counterweight, 180
pulley room, 35, 1 18 Cables
Alarm conductor area, 233
emergency, 96, 157, 340, 355 electrical, 232
identification, 101, 162, 345 installation method, 233
Angle of deflection. See Fleet angle, See Capacity
Fleet angle theoretical
Angle of inclination, 220 calculation of, 14
Anti-creep system, 125, 156, 310, 339 definition of, 14
Anti-rebound device, 60 Car, 7, 45, 120, 173, 304
Area. See Available area buffer, I38
Attendant-operated Stairlift, 7, 285 construction, 45, 1 16, 173, 298
Authorized and instructed user, 15 door, 48, 12I, 175
Auxiliary brake, 227
Available area, 7, 120, 305
clearances, 49, 121
closed, proving device, 52, 121, 175 , ~
Back-up Nut, 7, 273 emergency opening, 53, 122
Balustrade, 205 guides, 50, 119, 180
decking, 205 mechanical strength, 50, 121, 174,
Belt I
306 I
construction, 21 6 multiple panels, 52, 121, 175 !
dimensions, 21 6, 21 7 protection during operation, 50, 121 !
drive, 220 sill, 50, 1 19, 301
guiding, 221 suspension, 50, 1 19
I
I
test, 2 1 7 vision panel, 49

Brake emergency
auxiliary, 227 door, 53, 122, 306
electro-mechanical, 74, 183, 225 lighting, 56, 122, 306, 307
load entrance, 120, 304
conveyor, 226 entrance doors, 51, 175
escalator, 225 header, 55, 122, 174
stopping distance height, 45, 120, 304
conveyor, 226 internal area, 45, 120, 174, 305
escalator, 225 lift, 7
Braking lighting, 56, 122, 306
general provisions, 74, 182 loading, 120, 305
system, 224 operating instructions, 100, 196
Breaking load, minimum, lifting rope, 11 sill, 48, 121, 306
Buckling toe guard, 48, 12 1, 306
guides, 68 to P
jacks, 142, 323 controls, 92, 155, 339
Buffer, 7, 137, 180, 31 8 electrical socket outlet, 55, 85, 122,
car, 138 151, 333
counterweight, 29, 116, 168, 298 equipment, 55, 122
data plate, 104, 162, 345 provisions for personnel, 122
general provisions, 69, 138 pulleys, 55, 122
pawl device, 135, 31 8 space for personnel, 54

trap door, 53, 122, 306 starting, 238
ventilation, 55, 122 stopping, 96, 157, 195, 239, 340
Carriage, 7, 271 Conveyor, passenger, 11
Chain Counterweight, 120, 304
equalizing tensions, 59, 124, 177, 309 buffer, 29, 1 16, 168, 298
number of, 57, 123, 175, 308 construction, 56, 122, 175
safety factor, 58, 124, 176, 308 pulleys, 56, 122, 175
terminations, 58, 124, 176, 309 safety gear, 29, 1 16, 125, 168, 298,
types, 123, 307 310
Clamping device, 8, 130, 313 Creep. See Anti-creep system, See Anti-
conditions of use, 130 creep system
construction, 131, 314 Curvature radii
control of, 131, 313 conveyors, 220,221
electrical checking, 131, 314 escalators, 221
general provisions, 130, 31 3 Cylinder, jack, calculation, 141
release, 1 3 1, 314 Data plate. Seeoperating instructions,
retardation, 131, 314 labels and notices
tripping, 131, 314 Decking balustrade, 205
Clearance Deflection
landing door, 37 guide. See Buckling, See Buckling
Clearances jacks. See Buckling, See Buckling
beltlcomb, 223 Direct acting lift, 8
beltlskirt, 222 Direction valves, 147, 325
car and counterweight, 141 Directives. SeeType approval tests
car and well, 73, 141, 320 Door
car door, 49, 121 car. See Car door
landing door, 1 19, 300 data plate. See Operating instructions,
palletlpallet, 222 labels and notices, doors
palletlskirt, 222 emergency, 28, 1 15, 122, 168, 298
steplcomb, 222 inspection, 1 15, 298
steplskirt, 222 inspections, 28, 168
steplstep, 222 landing. See Landing door
top, 29, 30, 1 16, 1 17, 298 machine room access, 33, 1 19, 170
Compensating ropes, 59 pit access, 3 1
Connectors, electrical. See Electrical pulley room access, 35, 1 19
connectors. trap, 28, 53, 1 15, 122, 168, 298, 306
Contactors, electrical. See Electrical Down direction valve, 8
contactors. Drive, 223
Control circuit mechanisms, 223
components, 230 station
voltages, 230 construction, 21 2
Controls, 91, I 55, I 95,339 lighting, 213
anti-creep, 156, 339 stop switch, 2 14
car roof top, 92, 156, 339 Drum drive requirements, 11, 56, 58
emergency, 93 Electrical
inspection, 242 cables. 232
levelling, 91
priorities and signals, 97, 157, 340
restarting, 241 contactors, 80, 87, 151, 185, 192, 230,
reversing, 241 330,336

controls, 155, 339 Examination, 32
enclosure protection, 229 periodic, 53
fault protection, 234 Exclusive use
faults protection, 86, 151, 190, 335 machine room, 33, 118
general provisions, 184, 229 pulley room, 33, 118
installation, 229 well, 31, 1 18, 299
component identification, 82, 86, Filters, hydraulic, 148, 326
103, 162, 188, 197, 198, 214, 231, Final limit switch, 71, 140
232,233,333,334,345 Fire
general provisions, 79, 151, 330, protection, 2
333 resistance of landing doors, 2
insulation resistance, 80, 151, 330 Fleet angle, drum rope grooves, 59, 177,
voltage limitations, 80, 151, 330 310
insulation resistance, 185, 230 Footrest, 8, 274 I
main switch, 82, 103, 151, 161, 187, Free fall precautions, 125, 310
333,343 Full load pressure, 9
main switches, 231 Glass, balustrade, 206
motor protection, 231 Governer, overspeed. See Overspeed
power supply, 88, 152, 192, 336 governor
proving devices for doors and traps, 42, Guard, toe, 14,48, 121, 306
44, 45, 52, 53, 54, 173, 205, 304 Guarding. Seealso Protection
safety circuits, 61, 90, 153, 193, 338 drive mechanisms, 228 i
i
components, 151, 186, 330 machinery, 79, 141, 320 II
safety components, 81, 331 pulleys and sprockets, 125, 309 I
I
safety devices. See Safety device, See pulleys or sprockets, 74 !I
Safety device
socket outlet, 85, 151, 189, 233, 333
Guides, 9, 68, 137, 318
car door, 50, 119
~
I
I
car roof, 54, 122 general provisions, 68, 137, 3 18
machine room, 34, 1 19, 151, 170, landing door, 39, 119
333 Guiding, 68, 137, 180, 318
pit, 31, 118, 298 Hand winding, 76, 228
pulley room, 34, 119, 151, 333 Handrail, 9, 214
supplies, 85, 151, 189, 333 breakage stop switch, 216
voltage limitations, 185 dimensions, 21 5
wiring, 83, 1 51, 187, 232, 333 speed, 214 i
conductors, 84, 1 51, 188, 333 Headroom, 29, 116, 169,298 i
installation, 84, 151, 188, 333 Hoses, flexbile hydraulic, 145
Emergency Hydraulic
alarm, 96, 157, 340, - 355 - control, 146
door, 53, 115, 122, 168,298,306 equipment, 141, 320
lighting, 56, 122, 306, 307 filters, 148, 326
operation, 75, 93, 149, 183, 197, 322 fluid, overheating, 150
unlocking key, 43, 54, 120, 122, 173, jack, 141, 322
303,304 piping and fittings, 144, 323
Emergency stopping devices, 240 pressure gauge, 148, 326
colour, 246 safety device, 146
notice, 246 tank (reservoir), 149, 327
Enclosure, 204 valves. See Valves, See Valves, See
well, 28, 115, 298 Valves
Escalator, 204 Inclination angle, 220
-
Reproduced with the permission of CEN 0 all rights resewed
lnspection and emergency door, 28 vision panel, 41, 1 19, 303
lnspection and emergency doors, 1 15, width, 38, 119, 301
168,298 identification, 104, 162, 345
lnspection controls, 242 lighting, 41, 119, 303
lnspection doors, 204 Levelling, 10, 42
lnspection traps, 28, 115, 168, 298 controls, 91, 120, 303
Instantaneous safety gear, 9, See also Lever tripping device, 134, 3 17
Operating instructions Lift
Instructions. Seeoperating instructions, car, 7
labels and notices direct acting, 8
for use, 246 hydraulic, 9
hand winding, 247 indirect acting, 9
Insulation resistance, 230 machine, 10, 182
Jack, 141, 322, See also cylinder or ram, passenger, 11
Seealso cylinder or ram positive drive, 11
buckling calculations, 142, 323 service
cushion stop, 143 positive drive, 1, 11, 30, 59, 69, 71,
protection of, 143 169
telescopic, 142, 323 traction drive, 15, 29
Journey, 9,285 traction drive, 1
Key, emergency unlocking, 43, 100, 120, traction drive, 169
122,173,303,304 traction drive, 1, 15, 29, 58
Key, release, 205 well, 115, 297
Labels. See Operating instructions, labels Lifting rope, minimum braking load, 11
and notices Lighting
Landing car, 56, 122, 151, 306, 333
clearances, 37 emergency, 56, 122, 306, 307
closed, proving device, 44, 304 landings, 41, 1 19, 303
closing, 44 machine room, 34, 119, 170
door, 29, 115, 168, 298 machinery spaces, 213
clearances, 1 19, 171, 300 public area, 21 2
closed, proving device, 120, 173, pulley room, 35, 119
303 supply, 50, 85, 151, 189, 333
emergency unlocking, 43, 120, 173, well, 32
303,304 Limit switch, final, 71, 140
guides, 39, 119, 172 Load, rated, 12, 45, 101, 120, 161, 174,
height, 38, 1 19, 172, 301 197,305,342
lighting, 1 19, 303 Machine, 10, 73, 141, 182
locking, 42, 120, 172, 173, 303, 304 braking system, 182
mechanical strength, 38, 119, 171, braking systems, 74
300 emergency operation, 75, 93, 149,
multiple panel, locking, 44, 120, 303 183, 197,322
openings for, 37, 119, 171, 300 general provisions, 73, 141, 169, 322
protection when closing, 39, 119, lift, 10
302 room, 10, 32, 118,299
sill, 38, 119, 172 access, 33, 1 19, 170
strength of materials, 37, 1 19, 171, ambient temperature, 34
300 ambient temperature, 119
vertical sliding, suspension, 39, 119, ambient temperature, 171
172 construction, 33, 1 19

dimensions of working spaces, 33, electrical components, 104, 162, 345
119 emergency lowering valve, 161, 343
electrical socket outlet, 34, 119, 151, enclosures, 197
170,189,333 general provisions, 100, 161, 196, 342
equipment, 33, 119 hand pump, 163, 345
exclusive use, 33, 118 identification, 198
general provisions, 32, 118, 299 landings, 104, 162, 197, 345
lighting, 34, 119, 170 locking devices, 105, 163, 345
main switch, 82, 103, 151, 161, 333, machine room, 103, 161, 197,343
343 main switch, 161, 343
operating instructions, 103, 161, 343 overspeed governor, 104, 162, 345
socket outlet, 85, 119, 333 pit, 104, 162, 198, 345
stopping devices, 171 pulley room, 161, 343
temperature, 171 safety gear, 105, 163, 345
ventilation, 34, 119 unlocking key, 105
rooms Overspeed governor, 11, 33, 61, 62, 65,
floor openings, 34 118,128,132,179,312,314
stopping, 76, 145, 184, 321, 331 accessibility, 64, 133, 180, 31 5
Machinery spaces, 2 12 data plate, 162, 345
access, 2 12 electrical checking, 65, 133, 31 5
construction, 212 pulley, 64, 133, 316
lighting, 213 response time, 64, 132, 179, 31 5
stop switch, 214 ropes, 64, 135, 179, 318
Main switch, 103, 151, 161, 187, 197, sealing, 65, 180
231,333,343 tripping, 65, 134, 180, 3 16
Manual emergency operation. See speed, 62, 63, 132, 179
Emergency operation, See Emergency type approval test, 62
operation Overspeed precautions, 125,310
Marking, makers identity, 247 Overspeed protection, 227
Motor protection, 82, 141, 151, 186, 231, Pallets
322,332 construction, 2 16
Newel, 205,209 dimensions, 217
Non-return valve, 11 drive, 219, 220
Notices. See Operating instructions, labels guiding, 221
and notices tests, 2 17
automatic starting, 247 Pallets dimensions, 216
general, 246 Partition, well, 56
instruction for use, 246 Passenger, 11
Obstruction safety device, 181 number, 45, 101, 120, 161, 342
Operating instructions, labels and notices, Passenger conveyor, 11
100,161, 196,342 Pawl device, 1 1, 125, 135, 310, 318
alarm, 105, 162, 345 Piping, hydraulic
buffer, 162, 345 flexible hoses, 145
buffers, 104 rigid, 145
car, 101, 161, 196, 342 Piping, hydrulic, 144, 323
controls, 161, 343 Pit, 11, 31, 116,298
roof top, 161, 343 access door, 31, 116, 298
controls, 101 electrical socket outlet, 31, 85, 1 18,
roof top, 102 151, 189,298,333
doors, 103, 162,344 general provisions, 31, 116, 298

mechanical stopper, 169 Pulley Room, 32, 1 18,299
protection, 32, 1 16, 298 Pulleys
stop switch, 3 1, 1 18, 162, 169, 298, car roof, 55
345 counterweight, 56
Positive drive guarding of, 60, 74
lift, 182 jack, 150, 323
Positive drive lift, 1 1, 73 overspeed governor, 62, 65
Power supply, 88, 152, 192, 336, See also ratio D:d 57
Electrical, See also Electrical, See also Radii of curvature
Electrical conveyors, 22 1
Pressure escalators, 221
full load, 9 Rail, 12
gauge, 148, 326 Rails, 264
relief valve, 11, 146, 325 Ram, jack
Priorities, control, 97, 157, 340 connection t o car, 142
Progressive safety gear, 12, See Safety pressure calculations, 141
gear stroke limitations, 142
Protection. See also Guarding, Seealso Ramp, 12
Guarding, Seealso Guarding Ramps, 276
drive mechanisms, 228 Rated
electric motor, 231 load, 12, 45, 101, 120, 161, 174, 197,
electrical enclosures, 229 305,342
electrical faults, 86, 151, 190, 234, speed, 12,223
335 vehicle lift, 120
fire, 2 Relay contactors, 230, See Electrical
motor, 82, 141, 151, 184, I 86, 332 contactors, See Electrical contactors
overheating of fluid, 150 Release key, 205
overspeed, 227 Re-levelling, 12, See also Levelling
reversal, 227 Reservoir, hydraulic, 150
Pulley Restarting controls, 241
car roof, 122 Restrictor valves, 148, 326
counterweight, 122 Return station
guarding of, 125, 309 construction, 21 2
overspeed governor, 133, 3 16 lighting, 21 3
Pulley room, 12 stop switch, 214
access, 32, 1 19 Reversal controls, 236
ambient temperature, 1 19 Reversal protection, 227
construction, 35, 1 19 Rope
dimensions of working spaces, 35, 119 breaking load, minimum, lifting, 11
electrical socket outlet, 35, 11 9, 151, characteristics, 57, 122, 175, 307
333 compensating, 59
equipment, 35, 119 drum drive requirements, 59
exclusive room, 33 equalizing governor, 59
exclusive use, 1 18 equalizing tensions, 124, 177, 309
floor opening, 31 number of, 57, 123, 175, 308
general provisions, 32, 1 18, 299 overspeed governor, 135, 179, 3 18
lighting, 35, 119 safety, 13, 135, 31 8
operating instructions, 103, 161, 343 safety factors, 57, 123, 176, 308
stop switch, 1 19, 162, 344 terminations, 58, 124, 176, 309
stopping switch, 103 Rupture valve, 12, 147, 325

Safety Sensitive edges, 274
components, 230,231 Sensitive Surface, 13
contacts, 205, 234 Sensitive surfaces, 274
design, 234 Service lift
devices, 234 positive drive, 1, 11, 30, 59, 69, 71,
voltaaes. 230 169
Safety &bits, electrical, 87, I 53, I 93, traction drive, 1 , 15, 29, 57, 169
338 Servicing, 34, 74
components, 81, 151, 186, 330, 331 Sheave. See also Pulleys
Safety device traction, 32
checks, 133, 315 S hut-off valve, 13
Safety devices, 151, 336 Signal, 'car present', 41, 119, 303
contacts, 152, 337 Signals, 246
electrical, 76, 87, 149, 151, 327, 331, Signs, 246
336 Sill
obstruction, 72 car, 48, 121,306
Safety factor car door, 50, 121
chains, 58, 124, 308 landing door, 39, 119, 172, 301 i
ropes, 57, 123, 135, 308 Skirting, 205, 207 i
Safety gear, 13, 60, 128, 178, 31 2 Slack rope switch, 141, 320 1
car, 178 Sling, 13
chains, 176 Slowdown check, 78 I
construction, 62, 129, 179, 31 3 Socket outlet, 233, See Electrical socket iI
counterweight, 29, 1 16, 168, 178, 298
electrical checking, 62, 130, 313
evaluation of forces, 61
outlet, See Electrical socket outlet
Speed, 76,148, 149,326
rated, 12
~
i
general provisions, 60, 128, 31 2 Sprockets, guarding of, 60 I
instantaneous, 9, 61, 128 Stairlift, 13
with buffered effect, 61 Stairway, 13, 264
with buffered effect, 9 Starting controls, 238
with buffered effect, 129 Steps
methods of control, 61, 129, 31 2 attitude, 220 !
operation, 178 construction, 2 16
progressive, 12, 61, 128, 129 dimensions, 21 6, 217
release, 129, 179, 31 2 drive, 2 19, 220
ropes, 176 guiding, 220
tripping, 131, 314 riser, 21 8
type approval test tests, 2 1 7
mark, 105, 163, 345 Stop switch I
Safety instructions handrail breakage, 21 6

car, 101, 161, 196, 342, 343 machinery spaces, 2 14
doors, 103, 161, 162. 343. 344 Stopping,'74, 184
emergent; unlokkini key, 43, 53, 120, control, 96, 157, 195, 340
303,304 controls, 239
machine room, 103, 161,343 distance, 225
pulley room, 103, 161, 343 machine, 76, 145, 321, 331
Safety rope, 13, 125, 133, 135, 310, 316, Supporting structure, 27 ?
318 Surrounds, 209
Self-operation, 13, 284 Suspension, 122, 175,307
Sensitive Edge, 13 chains. See chain

failure, 125, 133, 310, 316 304
numbers of ropes and chains, 57, 123, zone, 15,42, 53, 120,303
175, 308 User, 15
ropes. See rope authorized and instructed, 15
types of, 57, 122, 175, 307 Valves
Switch direction, 147, 163, 325, 345
final limit, 71, 140 down control, 8
main,82,151,161,187,197,231, non-return, 1 1, 146
333,343 pressure relief, 1 1
slack rope or chain, 141, 320 restrictor, 12, 148, 326
starting, 238 rupture, 147, 325
stop. Seealso Stopping, control shut off, 146, 324
pit, 31, 104, 118, 162, 169, 198, Vehicle lift
298,345 rated load, 45, 120
pulley room, 35, 103, 119, 162, 344 Ventilation
terminal stopping, 181 car, 55, 122
Symbols machine room, 34, 1 19
information, 246, See also figure 8 openings, 32, 1 18, 299
Tank, hydraulic, 149, 327 well, 32, 1 18, 299
Telescopic jack, 142, 323 Vision panel
Terminations car door, 49, 1 2 I
chains, 58, 124, 176, 309 landing door, 41, 121,303
ropes, 58, 124, 309 Well, 15, 28, 1 15, 168, 297
Toe guard, 14,48, 121,306 construction of walls, 29, 1 15, 168,
Top clearance, 169 298
Top clearances, 29, 1 16, 169, 298 emergency door, 168
Traction drive, 182 emergency doors, 1 15, 298
requirements, 177 enclosure, 28, 1 15, 168, 298
Traction drive lift, 15, 73 exclusive use, 31, 1 18, 299
service lift, 2, 73 general provisions, 28, 1 15, 168, 297
Trap door, 28, 53, 1 15, 122, 168, 204, inspection doors and traps, 28, 1 15,
298,306 168,298
Travelling cable, 83, 151, 333 lighting, 32, 118, 299
Tripping means, for safety gear partitions, 56
clamping device, 130, 31 3 protection, 29, 168
Type approval tests protection below, 1 16, 298
buffer, 69 structure, 29, 1 15, 298
landing door ventilation, 32, 118, 299
locking devices, 43 Wiring. See Electrical wiring
overspeed governor, 62 Wiring, electrical, 232, Seealso cables,
safety gear, 60 electrical
Unlocking Zone, unlocking, 15, 42, 53, 120, 122,
key, emergency, 43, 53, 120. 173, 303, 303

General Legislation c EMSD
Electrical and Mechanical Services Department
3 Kai Shing Street, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: (852) 1823 Fax: (852) 2504 5970
Website: www.emsd.gov.hk
Email: info@emsd.gov.hk
Printed by the Government Logistics Denarhnent

Code of Practice On The Design and Construction of Lifts and Escalators

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Code of Practice On The Design and Construction of Lifts and Escalators

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Code of Practice on the Design and Construction

DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

LIFTS AND ESCALATORS

Electrical and Mechanical Services Department

Section A. General Introduction to the Code of Practice

1. Scope and Field of Application

Section E on Specifications is further divided into five parts where:

Part 5 deals with stairlifts

General Technical Rules

(a) be promptly dimensioned and correctly designed, be of sound mechanical

Guidance on Fire Protection, Environment and Building Requirements

Requirements of Good Construction

Requirements on Life of Equipment

New Developments of Lifts and Escalators

7. Safeguarding of Persons and Objects from Various Possible Accidents

8. Special Applications of Lifts and Escalators

e) BS302 Stranded steel wire ropes

h) BS4794 Specification for control switches (IEC 337)

i) BS5420 Specification for degrees of protection of enclosures of switchgear and

k) BS5486 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies (IEC 439)

I) BS5490 Specification for classification of degrees of protection provided by

oA) BS5776 Specification for powered stairlifts

p) BS5900 Specification for powered homelifts

q) BS6004 Specification for PVC-insulated Cables (non-armoured) for electric power

-5- Reproduced with the permission of CEN - O all rights resewed.

V) BS7255 Safe working on lifts

W) Design Manual - Barrier Free Access 1997

and other relevant British Standard Specifications or international standards in relation to

Available Car Area

Average Closing Speed

25 mm at each side of the travel in case of centrally closing doors;

50 mm at each side of the travel in case of side closing doors.

Direct Acting Lift

Down Direction Valve

Electrical Anti-creep System

Full Load Pressure

Moving part of an escalator intended to serve as a handhold for the passengers

Indirect Acting Lift

Instantaneous Safety Gear

Instantaneous Safety Gear with Buffered Effect

(a) car lighting or ventilation (if any);

(b) socket outlet on the car roof;

(c) lighting in the machine room and any pulley room;

(e) lighting in the well;

(f) socket outlet in pit;

Minimum Breaking Load of a Lifting Rope

A number of lifts installed in separate or common wells andlor sharing a common

A valve which allows flow in one direction only.

Any person transported by a lift or an escalator.

Positive Drive Lift (Includes Drum Drive)

Pressure Relief Valve

A valve which limits the pressure t o a pre-determined value by exhausting fluid.

Progressive Safety Gear

Single Acting Jack

The theoretical capacity calculation is then :

Ct = theoretical capacity (perslh)

V = rated speed (mls)

With this formula the theoretical capacity will be :-

Nominal Width Rated Speed

Traction Drive Lift

Ratio between the greater and the smaller

Coefficient taking account of the

Standard acceleration of free fall